Nokia 002F4W8 User Manual
Nokia N79 User Guide Issue 1
é 2008 Nokia. All rights reserved. DECLARATION O F CONFORM ITY Hereby, NOKIA COR PORATION decla res that this RM-350 product is in compliance with the essen tial requirements and other relev ant provisions of Directive 1999/5 /EC. A copy o f the Decla ration of Conformity can be foun d at h ttp:// www.nokia.com/phon es/declaration_of_co nformity/. Nokia, Nokia Con necting People, Ns eries, N79, N- Gage, Navi and Vi sual R adio are trademarks or re gistered trademarks of Nokia Co rporation. Noki a tune is a sound mark of Nokia Corporatio n. Other product and comp any names mentioned herein may be trademarks or tradenames of their respective owners. Reproducti on, transfer, d istributi on, or storage of p art or all of t he contents in this document in any form without the prior written permission of Nok ia is prohibited. This software is based in part of the work of the FreeType Team . This product is covered by one or more of the followi ng patent s : Un i t e d S t a t es P a t en t 5,155,805, United States Paten t 5,325,479, United States Pate n t 5,159,668, U nited States Paten t 2232861 and Fra nce Patent 90057 12 . US Patent No 5818437 and other pending patents. T9 text input soft ware Copyright é 19 9 8-2008. Tegi c Communication s, Inc. All rig hts reserved. This product includes s oftware licensed from Symb ian Software L td é1998-2008. Symbian and Symbian OS a re trademarks o f Symbian Ltd. Java and all Java-based marks are trademarks or registered trademarks of Sun Microsystems, Inc. Portions of the Nokia Maps softw are are é 2002-2008 T he FreeType Project. All righ ts reserved. This product is li censed under the MPEG-4 Visual Paten t Portfo lio License (i) for personal and noncommercial use in connection with informatio n which has been encoded in compliance with the MPEG-4 Visual S tandard by a consumer en gaged in a person al and noncommercial activity a nd (ii) for use in connect ion with MPEG- 4 video prov ided by a licensed video prov ider. No licens e is granted or shall be implied for any ot her use. A dditional inf ormation, including that related to promotional, internal, and commercial uses , may be obtained fro m MPEG LA, LLC. See http://w ww.mpegla. com Nokia operates a policy of ongoing develop ment. Nokia reserves th e right to make changes and improvemen ts to any of the product s describe d in this document without prior notice. TO THE MAX IMUM EX TENT PERM ITTED BY APPLICA BLE LA W, UNDER N O CI RCUMST ANCES SHALL N OKIA OR AN Y OF ITS LICENSO RS BE RESPONSIBLE FO R ANY LOSS OF DATA OR INCOM E OR ANY SPECIA L, INC IDENTA L, CONSEQUENTIAL OR INDIRECT DAMA GES HOWSOEVE R CAUSED. THE CO NTENTS OF THI S DOCU MENT A RE PR OVIDED "A S IS" . EXCEP T AS RE QUIRE D BY AP PLICA BLE LA W, NO WA RRANT IES OF ANY KIND , EITH ER EXP RESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, T HE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITN ESS FOR A PARTICUL AR PURPOS E, ARE MAD E IN RELA TION
TO THE ACC URACY, R ELIABILIT Y OR CONTEN TS OF TH IS DOCUME NT. NOKIA RE SERVES THE RIGHT TO REVISE THIS DOCUMENT OR WITH DRAW IT AT ANY TIM E WITHOUT PRI OR NOTICE. Reverse engineerin g of any software in th e Nokia de vice is prohibited to the extent permitted by a pplicable la w. Insofar as thi s user guide contains any limitatio ns on N okia's representa tions, wa rranties, damages and liab ilities, such limitations shall l ikewise limit any repr ese ntations, warra nties, damages a nd lia bilities of Nokia's l icensors. The availability of particular products an d applications and services f or these products may vary by region. Please check with your Nokia dealer for details, and a vailab ility of la nguage opt ions. Export controls This device may contain commo dities, technolo gy or software subject to export laws and regulations from the US and oth er countr ies. Dive rsion contrary to law is prohibited. FCC/INDUSTR Y CANADA NOTICE Your device may cause TV or radio in terferen ce (for example, when using a telephon e in close proximity to receiving equipment) . The FCC or Industr y Canada can require you to stop usi ng your telephone if such inte rferen ce cannot be eliminated. If you req uire assistance, conta ct your local service facility. This device complies with part 15 of the FCC r ules. Operation is subject to the follow ing two conditi ons: (1) This de vice may not cause ha rmful interference, a nd (2) this device must accept any interference received, includin g interference that may cause u ndesired operat ion. Any changes or modifications not expressly approved by Nokia coul d vo id the user's authority to operate this equipment. Issue 1
Contents Safety................. ........... ............ ........... ......11 About your device............................................ .............11 Network services................................ ...........................12 Get st ar ted ..... ......... ...... ........ ........ ..... ........ 14 Keys and parts (front )...................................................14 Key s an d pa rt s (b ack an d si de s).. ....... ............ ....... ......15 Insert SIM card and battery..........................................15 Switch the device on....... ................ .................... ..........16 Charge the battery..................................... ...................1 7 Attach wris t strap....... .............. .............. .............. .........17 Antenna locations........................................................ .17 Get c onne ct ed.. ........ ..... ......... ....... ...... .......1 8 Find help......... .......... ....... ........ ....... ....... ....19 Instructions inside - In -device help...................... .......19 Get started.................................................................... .19 Accessibility solutions ................. ..................... ............ .19 Additional applica tions.......... .......... ........ ......... ........ ...19 Software updates...... ....................................................20 Application Update...................... ........... ........... .......... .20 Settings......................................................................... .21 Access codes....................... .................... ................... ....21 Prolong battery life............................ ...........................22 Free memory................ ............. ............. .............. .........23 Your device........... ............. .......... ............. ..24 Welcome.................................. ............................ ..........24 Nokia Switch..... .................................... .........................24 Transfer content. ........................................................24 Syn ch roni se , r etr iev e, or s end co nte nt.... ................25 Display indicators....... ........................ ...........................26 Shortcuts........................ ................................................ 27 Lock the keypad................. ............ ................ ............ ...28 Navi⢠wheel..................................................................28 Multimedia menu...... ....................................................29 Mobile Search.......................... ............... ............... ........29 Headset.......................................... ................................30 Volu me and lou dsp ea ker co ntro l. ......... ....... ........ ....... 31 Offline profile............... ............... .................... ...............31 Fast downloading........................ ............. ............. .......32 Web browser........ .......... .......... .......... ........33 Browse the web.......................... ................ ..................3 3 Browser toolbar.................. ............. ............. ............. ...34 Navigate pages. ................. .................. .................. ........35 Web feeds and blogs............ ......... .......... ......... .......... ..35 Widgets..........................................................................35 Content search....... ................ .................... .................... 36 Download and purchase items..................... ...............36 Bookmarks..................................................................... 36 Empty the cache ............................................................37 End the connection...................................................... .37 Connection security................ ......... ........... ......... .........3 8 Web settings................. ................... ........................ ......38 Connections... ........... ........... ............. ..........40 Wireless LAN..................................................................4 0 About WLAN................................................................40 Contents
WLAN connections. ................... .............. ....................40 WLAN wizard.. .................. ............. .................. ............41 WLAN internet a ccess points.....................................41 Operating modes ................. ......................... ..............42 Connection manager................. ........ ....... ........ ........ ....42 Active data connecti ons......... ................ ........... .........42 Available WLAN n etworks........... .................. .............42 Bluetooth connectivit y............. ........... ............ ........... ..43 About Bluetooth connectivity.............. ....... ........ ......43 Settings................................... ............... .....................43 Security tips............................. ................ ................... 44 Sen d d ata us ing Blu et oot h co nn ect ivi ty. ...... ....... ....4 4 Pair devices.................................................................45 Re ce i v e d a t a u s in g Bl u et o ot h co n n ec t iv i ty ............. 4 5 Block devices............... .............. ................... ...............46 Remote SIM mode......................... .............. ............... 46 USB.......... ................. ................ ................. ................. .....46 PC connections.......................... ............... ........... ..........47 Personalise your device........ ...... ... ....... .....48 Change the look of your device............. ....... ...... ...... ...48 Changeable ba ck cover................................................ .48 Audio themes............................ ............... ............... ......49 Set tones in Profiles...................................................... 49 3-D tones............. ..................... ...................... ................50 Modify the standby mode............... ....... ....... ....... ...... ..51 Modify the main menu..................... .......... ........... .......51 Positioning ( GPS)........... .............. .......... .....52 About GPS..... ............... .............. ............... ............. .........52 Assisted GPS (A-GPS)................ ........ ........... ........ ........ ..52 Hold your device correctly........................ ....................53 Tip s on cre at ing a G PS con ne cti on... ..... ......... ....... ......5 3 Position requests .............. ............. ............. ............. .....54 Landmarks.................................................... .................54 GPS data.........................................................................55 Route guidance............... ......... .......... ......... .......... .....55 Ret rie ve posi ti on i nfo rma ti on. ......... ....... ............ .....5 6 Trip meter............................................. ...................... 56 Maps...........................................................57 About Maps....................................................................57 Browse maps.................................................................58 Download maps ................ ................ .................. ..........59 Find a place....... ............................. ............................... .60 Extra services for Maps.................... ........... ............ ......61 Navigation.. .............. ........... ............. ............. ..............61 Traffic info rmation.....................................................63 Guides........................ ...................................... ............63 Music folder.......... ............................ ..........64 Music player..................................................... ..............64 Pla y a s ong or a p odca st ep isod e. ........ ........... ......... 64 Music menu.............................................. ...................65 Playlists............................... ................. .................... ...65 Podcasts................................... .......................... .........66 Hom e ne tw ork with mu sic pl ay er. ........ ........ .......... .66 Transfer music to your device...................................67 Transfer music from PC.......................... ................. 67 Transfer with Window s Media Player. ...................67 Nokia Music Store.... ...................................... ................68 FM transmitter.......................................... .....................69 About the FM transmitter...................... ............. .......69 Pla y a son g us ing FM tra ns mit ter ...... ....... ........ ........ 69 FM transmitter set tings........... ........ ....... ........ ........ ...70 Nokia Podcasting........................ ............ ............. .........70 Podcasting settings ................... .................... .............70 Search podcasts.................... ......................................71 Contents
Directories...................... ............................................. 72 Downloads............................................................ ......72 Play and manage podcasts............ ......................... ...73 Radio applications................... .......... .......... .......... .......73 FM radio ................... ................... ........................ ........73 Listen to the radio...................................................74 View visual con tent.................................................75 Saved stations.......... ..................... .......................... .75 FM radio settings................................... ..................7 5 Nokia Internet Radio. ....................... .................. ........75 Listen to internet radio stations................. ......... ..75 Favourite stations..... ............ .................... .............. .76 Search for sta tions............ ............. ............. ........... ..76 Station directory................ ......................................77 Internet radio settings.......... ................................. .77 Camera.................. ................. ............. .......78 About the camera................... .......... ......... ......... ..........7 8 Activate the camera......................................................78 Image capture.............................................................. .78 Sti ll ima ge c am er a in di cato rs ....... ....... ....... ....... ...... .78 Active toolbar.................. ............ ........... ............ ........79 Capture images. ..................... ................. ....................80 Location informat ion.................................................8 1 After taking a pict ure.................................................81 Flash........ .............. .............. ............. .............. ............ ..82 Scenes.......... ........................ .......................... ..............82 Capture images in a sequence............. .......... ...........8 2 You in the pictureâÂÂself-t imer...... ....... ...... ........ .......83 Tips on takin g good photograp hs............ ......... .......83 Video recording....................................................... ......84 Video capture indicators............ ...... ........ ...... ....... ....84 Record videos............. ............ ............. ............ ...........85 After recording a video..............................................85 Camera settings....... .............. .................. .............. ........86 Still image camera settin gs.......................................86 Colour and lighting settings........... ...........................87 Video settings.................................... .........................87 Photos................................... .....................89 About Photos.................................................................89 View images and videos...... .................... .....................89 View and edit file details... ..................... ................. .....90 Organise images a nd videos........................................90 Active toolbar.............................. ......................... .........91 Albums.................................. ...................... ...................91 Tags................................................................................91 Slide show............ .................... ............... .................... ...92 TV-out mode..................................................................92 Edit images....................................................................94 Image editor...............................................................94 Crop image...................... ........................................... .94 Reduce red-eye...........................................................94 Useful shortcuts......... ............................ .....................94 Edit videos...................... ............... .............. ............... ...95 Print images.......................... ................ ..................... ...95 Image print.................................................................95 Printer selection.................. ........... ........... ............ ..95 Print preview..................... ............. ............ ............ .96 Print settings.... .......... ............. ............ ............ .........96 Print online.......................................... .......................9 6 Share images and v ideos online .......... ................ .......96 Gallery.......................................... ..............98 Main view.......... ...................... ....................... ................98 Sounds............. ................. .................. ................. ...........98 Streaming links........................... ................. ............ .....99 Presentations...................... ............ ............ ............ ......99 Contents
Home network............... ............. ........... ..100 About home network................... .......... .......... ..........100 Imp ort ant se cu rit y i nf orm ati on. ...... ....... ....... ....... .... 101 Settings for h ome network........................................ 101 Set sharing on and defin e content...................... ......102 View and share media files.......... ..............................102 Copy media files..........................................................103 Home synchronisation.... ........... ................ ............. ....103 Synchronise media files. ................................... .......103 Synchronisation settin gs.........................................104 Define incoming files...............................................104 Define outgoing files.................. .......... ......... ......... .105 Nok ia Vid eo Cen tr e.................................. 10 6 View and download video clips...... ........................... 106 Video feeds..................................................................107 My videos.................................................................... .107 Transfer videos from your PC............................. ........108 Video centre settings.... ................................ ..............108 N-Gage........... ............. .................. ............110 About N-Gage............................. .................... .............110 N-Gage views....... ..................... ............................ .......110 Get started...................................................................111 Create a player name...............................................111 Start a game.......................................... ...................111 Track your progress................. .......... .......... .......... ..112 Play with friends.......................... ............. ............ ...112 Play and manage ga mes......................... ...................112 Edit profile details........ ....................... .................. ......113 Connect with other pla yers........................................ 113 Find and add friends................................................113 View friend information..........................................113 Sort the friends list............ ....... ........ ....... ......... .......114 Rate a pl ayer................................. ............................114 Send messages.........................................................114 N-Gage setting s..................................................... ......114 Messaging................ .......... ......... .......... ...116 Messaging main view ..................................... ............116 Write text. .............................. ........................... ...........117 Traditional text inp ut........... ........ ........ ........ ........ ...117 Predictive text input......................... .............. .........117 Tips on text inpu t....................................... ..............118 Change the writing language........... ...... ....... ...... ...118 Edit text and lists. ............... ............ ............... .......... .118 Write and send messages............................ ............. .118 Messaging inbox.......................... ............... ............... .120 Receive messages.............. ......... ......... ........ ......... ...120 Multimedia mes sages..............................................120 Dat a, s et tin gs, an d w eb s erv ic e me ss age s............121 Message reader.......................................... .................121 Mailbox.............. ............... ................... ................ .........121 Define the e-mail settings.......................................121 Open the mailbox.............. ...................... .................122 Retrieve e-mail messages........... ...... ...... ....... ...... ...122 Delete e-mail messages..... ................. .................... .123 Disconnect from th e mailbox............. .....................123 View messages on a SIM card............................... .....123 Messaging settin gs..................... ..................... ...........123 Text message set tings............................................ .124 Multimedia mes sage settings.................................124 E-mail settings........... ....................... ........................125 Manage mailboxes ............ .......... ......... .......... .......125 Connection settings.............. ....... ........ ....... ......... .125 User settings......................................................... .126 Retrieval settings.............. ....... ........... ........ ....... ...126 Au toma ti c re tri ev al set tin gs ......... ................ .......1 27 Contents
Web service message se ttings................................127 Cell broadcast settings ................. .............. ..............127 Other settings............................................... ............128 Make calls....................... ..........................129 Voice calls ................. ............ .............. ................... .....129 Options during a call. ................ .......... ................ ........129 Voice and video mailboxes.......... ........ ........ ........ ......130 Answer or decline a call.............. ...... ....... ...... ....... .....130 Make a conference call........... ........ ......... .......... .........130 1-touch dial a phone number....................................131 Call waiting................... ................................. ..............131 Voice dialling.................................... ...........................131 Make a video call................ .........................................132 Options during a video ca ll.............. .............. ............133 Answer or decline a video call............................. ......134 Video sharing...................... .............. .............. ............134 Video sharing requirements.............. ...... ...... ...... ...134 Settings.......................................................... ...........134 Sha re liv e vi de o or vid eo cli ps. ......... ....... .......... ..... 135 Accept an invitation.................................................136 Log....................... ...................... ...................... .............136 Recent calls............................................ ...................136 Call duration......................... ............. .............. .........137 Packet data.................................................. .............137 Mon ito r al l c omm uni ca tio n e ven ts.... ....................137 Internet calls............................................139 About internet calls.................... .......... ........... ...........139 Activate inte rnet calls.................................................139 Make internet calls ........ ................................. ............139 Blocked contacts.................................. ...................... .140 Mana ge int er net c al l s erv ice s... ...... ....... ....... ........ ..... 140 Internet call setting s........ ........... ....... ........ ........ ........140 Contacts (phonebook )........................... ...141 Save and edit names and numbers............. ..............141 Mana ge nam es and num be rs... ....... ......... ....... ......... .14 1 Default numbers and addres ses................................141 Add ringing tones for contacts.................. ............... .142 Copy contacts.................. ........... ........... ........... ...........142 SIM services........... ............ ............... ................ ............ 142 SIM contacts......................................... .....................142 Fixed dialling............................................... .............143 Manage contact groups..............................................143 Media folder.................................. ...........144 RealPlayer ...................................................................144 Play video clips.........................................................144 Stream content over th e air....................................144 RealPlayer settin gs............... .................. .............. ....145 Adobe Flash Player.................... ........................ ..........145 Licences.................... .................... .......................... ......145 Recorder.................... ....................... ................. ...........146 Time management..... ........... ............ .......147 Clock ............................................ ................................147 Alarm clock.......... ............ ............... ............ ............... 147 World clock......................... .................... ................. .147 Calendar.......................................................................147 Create a calendar entry.. ................ ................. .........147 Calendar views................ .......... .......... .......... .......... .148 Manage calenda r entries....................... ..................149 Office folder. .......... ......... ........ ......... ......... 150 Quickoffice...................................................................150 Quickword............... ............................. ..................... 150 Quicksheet........................ ............... .............. ...........150 Quickpoint..... ................... ............... ................... .......150 Contents
Quickmanager............................. .............. ...............151 Notes............................................................................151 Adobe reader............................ ........................... ........151 Converter.................... ................ ................ .................151 Zip manager........................ ............. ............. ............. .152 Applications f older.................. ............. ....153 Calculator.....................................................................153 Application mana ger........................... ...................... .153 Install applicat ions and software ......................... .154 Remove applications and software........................155 Settings................................................ .....................155 Tools folder.......................... .................. ..157 File manager....... ................... .............. ................... .....157 About File manager....... .......... ............... ........... .......157 Find and organise files............... ......... ........... .........157 Edit memory card.....................................................157 Back up files on a memory ca rd.............. ............ ....157 Voice commands.........................................................157 Sync...................................................... ........................158 Device manager.................... .......... .......... .............. ....159 Speech .................................. ...................................... .159 Settings..................... ..................... ..........161 General settings................................................. .........161 Personalisation setti ngs..........................................161 Enhancement setting s......................... ....................162 Navi wheel settings............... ........ ........ ............ ......163 Sensor settings.........................................................163 Security settings..... ......................................... .........163 Phone and SIM............................................. ..........163 Certificate mana gement.......................................164 Security module....... ............ ..................... ............. 166 Restore original settin gs................... .............. ........166 Positioning settin gs.................................................166 Phone settings....................... ............ ............ ............ .166 Call settings ................ ............. ................. ................. 166 Call divert.......................................... ........................168 Call barring........... .............. .................. .............. .......168 Network settings...... .................. ........................ ......168 Connection settings....................................................169 Dat a c onne ct ion s a nd a cc ess po int s......................169 Access points.................... ............. .................. .........170 Create a new acces s point............. .......... ......... ....170 Create access p oint groups........ ...................... .....170 Packet data acce ss points..... ................................ 171 WLAN internet access point s................................172 Packet data settings................ ....... ............ ....... ......173 Wireless LAN settings.............. ....... ...... ........ ...... .....173 SIP settings............................................ ...................174 Configurations..........................................................174 Access point name control....................... ........... ....174 Application settings .................................................... 174 Tro ub les hoo ti ng ...... ...... ...... ..... ....... ........ 17 5 Enhancements.... .............. .................... ....179 Battery and charger information.............180 Bat te ry a nd cha rge r i nf orm ati on. ....... ........ ...... ........ 18 0 Nok ia ba tter y a ut hent ic ati on guid el in es............. ....181 Authenticate hologram............... ......... ........ ........ ...181 What if your battery is not authentic?...................182 Car e a nd m ain tena nce ........... ............ ......1 83 Disposal...... .................. ................... .................. ...........184 Contents
Add iti ona l s afe ty inf orma ti on ........... ......185 Small children........ ....................... .................. .............185 Operating environment. ................ ..................... ........185 Medical devices................. ............ ............. ................ .185 Implanted medical devices............ ....... ........ ....... ...185 Hearing aids........ ....................... .................. .............186 Hearing aids.................... ............ ............ ................ ....186 Vehicles........................................................................186 Pote nt ial ly ex plo siv e e nvi ron me nts .........................18 7 Emergency calls............... ................................. ...........187 CERT IFIC AT ION I NF ORMA TIO N (S AR )......... ............ ......1 88 Index.................................................... ....190 Contents
Safety Read these simple guidelines. Not following the m may be dangerous or illega l. Read the complete user guide for further information. SWITCH ON S AFELY Do not switch the device on when wireless phone use is prohibited or when it may cause interference or danger. ROAD SAFETY COMES FI RST Obey all local laws. Al ways keep your hands free to operate the vehicle while driving. Your first consideration while driving should be road safety. INTERFERENCE All wireless devices may be su sceptible to interference, which could affect performan ce. SWITCH OFF IN RESTR ICTED ARE AS Follow any restrictions. Switch the device off in aircraft, near medi cal equipment, fuel, chemicals, or blasting areas. QUALIFIED SER VICE Only qualified pers onnel may install or repair this product. ENHANCEMEN TS AND BATTERIES Use only approved enhancements and batteries. Do not connect incompatible product s. ENHANC EMENTS Use only approved enhancements. Do not connect incompatible products. WATER-R ESISTANCE Your device is not water-resistant. Keep it dry. About your device The wireless device described in this guide is approved for use on the (E)GSM 850, 900, 1800, 1900 , and UMTS 850, 1900 MHz networks. Contact your service provider for more information about networks. When using the featu res in this device, obey all laws and respect loca l customs, privacy a nd legitimate rights of others, including copyrights. Copyright protection may pr event some images, music, and other content from being copied, modified, or transferr ed. 11 Safety
Your device supports several methods of connectivity. Like computers, your device may be exposed to viruses and other harmful content. Exercise caution w ith messages, connect ivity re quests, brows ing, and downloads. Only install an d use s ervices and other software from trustworthy sources th at offer adequate security and protecti on agains t harmful software, such as applications that are S ymb ian Signed or ha ve passed the Java Verified⢠testing. C onsider installing antiviru s and other security software on your device and any connec ted comp uter. Your device may have preinstalled bookmarks and links for third-party inte rnet sites. You ma y also acce ss other third-party sites through you r device. Th ird-party sites are not affiliated w ith Nokia, and N okia does not endorse or assume liabilit y for them. If you choose to access such sites, you should ta ke precautions for security or content. Warning: To use any features in this device, other than the al arm clock, the device must be switched on. Do not swit ch the device on when wireless device use may cause interference or danger. The office applications support common features of Microsoft Word, PowerPoint, and Excel (Microsoft Office 2000, XP, and 2003). Not all file formats can be viewed or mod ifi ed . Remember to make back-up copie s or keep a written record of all important information stored in your devi ce. When connecting to any ot her device, read its user guide for detailed safety in structions. Do not conn ect incompatible products. The images in t his guide may differ from your device display. Network services To use the device you must have service from a wireles s service provider. Many of the features require special network features. These features are not available on all networks; other networks may require that you make specific arrangements with your service provider before you can us e the network services . Using network services involves tr ansmission of data. C heck with your service provider for details about fees i n your home network and when ro aming on other networks. Your service provider can give you instructions and explain what charge s will apply. Some net works may have limitations that affect how you can use network services. For instance, some n etworks may not sup port all language-dependent ch aracters and se rvices. Your service provider may have requested that certain features be disabled or not activated in your device. If so, these features will not appear on your device menu. Your device may also have a special config uration such 12 Safety
as changes in menu names , menu order, and icons. Contact your service provid er for more information. This device supports WAP 2.0 p rotocols (HTTP and SSL) that run on TCP/IP protocol s. Some features of this device, such as MMS, web br owsing, and e-mail, require network support for these technologies. 13 Safety
Get started Keys and parts (front) 1 â Earpiece 2 â Selection keys 3 â Multimedia key 4 â Menu key 5 â Call key 6 â Numeric keypad 7 â Microphone 8 â Navi⢠wheel; hereafter referred to as the scroll key. 9 â End key 10 â Clear key C 11 â Secondary c amera 12 â Light sensor 1 â Power key 2 â Nokia AV Connector for compatible headsets and he adph ones 14 Get started
3 â Key lock switch for locking and unlocking the keys Keys and parts (back and sides) 1 and 9 â Stereo speaker with 3-D sound e ffect 2 â Zoom/Volume key 3 â 2-stage capture key fo r auto-focus, still image capture, an d video record ing 4 â Flash and video light 5 â Main camera for high resolution (up to 5 megapixels) image ca pture and video recording 6 â Memory card slot for a compatible microSD card and Micro USB co nnector to connect to a compatible PC 7 â Charger connector 8 â Hole for a wrist strap Insert SIM card and battery Always switc h the de vice off and disconnect the charger before removing the battery. 1. With the back of the device facing you, press and hold the release button and lift up the cove r. 15 Get started
2. Insert the SIM card into the card holder. Ensure that the contact area on the card is facing down. 3. Insert the battery. 4. To replace the cover, direct the top locking catch toward its slot, and press down until th e cover locks i nto pla ce. Remove SIM card To remove the SIM card, slide the latch to the direction of the arrow. Switch the device on 1. Press and hold the power key. 2. If the device asks for a PIN code or lock code, enter it, and press the left selectio n key. The fa ctory setting for the lock code is 12345 . If you forget the code a nd yo ur devic e is locke d, your de vice wi ll require service and additional charges may apply. For more information, contact a Nokia Care point or your device dealer. 16 Get started
Charge the battery 1. Connect a compatible charger to a wall outlet. 2. Connect t he power cord to the device. If the battery is complet ely discha rged, i t may take a while bef ore the charging indicator starts scrolling. 3. When the batter y is fully charged, the charging indicator stops scrolling. Disconnect the charger from the device, then from the wall ou tlet. Tip: Discon nect the c harger from th e wall outlet when th e charger is not in use. A charger that is conn ected to th e outlet consumes power ev en when it is n ot connecte d to the dev ice. Attach wrist strap 1. Remove the back cov er. 2. Thread a wrist strap, and tighten it. 3. Replace the c over. Antenna locations Your devi ce may h ave intern al and ex ternal antennas. As with any radio transmitting device, avoid touching the ante nna area unn ecessarily while the antenna is transmitting or receiving. Contact with su ch an antenna affects the communi cation quali ty and may cau se the de vice to operate at a higher powe r level than otherwise needed and may reduce the battery lif e. 1 â Cellular ante nna 2 â FM transmitter antenna 3 â Bluetooth and wireless LAN antenna, and GPS receiver 17 Get started
Get connected Your device supp orts the following con nectivity methods: â 2G and 3 G netw orks â Bluetooth connec tivity â to transfer files an d connect t o compatible enhan cements. See "Bluetooth connectivity" , p. 43 . â Nokia AV connector (3.5 mm) â t o connect to compatible headsets, headphones, or home stereo sets â USB data cable â to connect to compatible devices, such as printers and PCs. See "USB" , p. 46 . â Wireless LAN (WLAN) â to co nnect to the in ternet and WLAN enabled devices. See "Wireless LAN" , p. 40 . â GPS â to receive transmissions from GPS satellite s to measure yo ur locati on. See "Positioning (GPS)" , p. 52 . â FM transmitter â to listen to songs in your device through compa tible FM receiv ers, such as car radios or home stereo sets. See "Play a son g using FM transmitter" , p. 69 . 18 Get connected
Find help For local services and warranty information, plea se refer to the separate booklet. Instructions inside - In- device help Your device conta ins instructions t o help you use it. When an application is op en, to acc ess the help text for the current view, select Options > Help . To open help from the main menu, select Tools > Util ities > Help , and the relevant application. You can find links t o related topics at t he end of the help text. To make th e inst ructions easier to read, you can change the size of the text. If you click on an underlined word, a short explanation is displayed. Help uses the following indicators: shows a link to a related help topic. shows a link to the application being discussed. When you are reading the instructions, to switch between help and the application that is open in the bac kground, press and hold , or select the appl ication link ( ). Tip: To place Help in the main menu, select Tools > Util ities , high light Help , and select Options > Move to folder and the main menu. Get started See the get started guide for key s and parts information, instructions for setting up the device and for other essential information. Accessibility solutions Nokia is committed to making mobile phones easy to use for all individuals, including those with disabilities . For more inf ormatio n, visit the No kia website at www.nok iaaccessibility.com. Additional applications There are various applica tions provided by Nokia and different third-party software developers that help you do more with your device. These applications are explained in the guides that are 19 Find help
available on the produc t su pport pages of t he Nokia websit e. Software updates Nokia may produc e software updates that offer new features, enhanced functions, and improved performance. You may be able to request these updates through th e Nokia Software Up dater PC applica tion. Software up da tes may not be available for all products or their variants. Not all operators may endorse the latest software versions available. To update the device softw are, you need the Nokia Software Updater applicat ion and a compati ble PC with Microsoft Windows 2000 , XP, or Vista operating system, broadband internet access, and a compat ible dat a cable to connect yo ur device to the PC. Warning: If you install a software update, you cannot use t he device, even to make emergency calls, until the installation is completed and the device is restarted. Be su re to back up data before accepting install ation of a n update. The size of a software update is approximately 5-10 MB using your device an d 100 MB using a PC. The download and installa tion may take up to 20 minutes with De vice manager and up to 30 minutes with Nokia Soft ware Updater. To get more information an d to download the Nokia Software Updater application, visit www.nokiausa .com/software update in the United States or www.nokia-lat inoamerica.com/nsu in Latin America. If software updates over the air are supported by your network, you may also be able to request updates through the devi ce. Your device may be able t o period ically c heck for new software update s with Nokia Soft ware Checker. Press , and select Tools > SW checker . Tip: To check the softwa re version in your device, enter *#0000# in the standby mode. Application Update Press , and select Appl ications > App. update . With Applica tion Update, you can che ck the available updates for applications and downl oad them to your dev ice. After updating your device software using Application Update, the instructions in the user guide or the helps ma y not be up to date. To download the avai lable updates, select Options > Sta rt update . 20 Find help
To unmark updates, scroll to them, and press the scroll key. To view information on an update, select Options > View deta ils . To change the settings , select Opti ons > Settings . Settings Your device no rmally has MMS, GPRS, streaming, and mobile inte rnet setting s auto matically configure d, based on your network service prov ider information. You may have settings from your service providers already in stalled in your device, or you may receive or reques t the se ttings from t he network service providers as a special message. You can cha nge the general set tings in your device, such as language, standby mode, display, and keypad lock settings. See "Sett ings" , p. 161 . Access codes If you forget an y of the access codes, contact your service provider. â Pers onal iden tificat ion number (PIN) c ode â This code protects your SIM card against unauthorised use. Th e PIN code (4 to 8 d igits) is usually supplied with th e SIM card. After three consecutive in correct PIN code entr ies, the code is blocked, and you need the PUK code to unblo ck it. â U P I N c o d e â T h i s c o d e m a y b e s u p p l i e d w i t h t h e USIM ca rd. T he USIM ca rd is a n enhanc ed ver sion of the SIM card and is supported by U MTS mobile phones. â PI N 2 c o d e â T h i s c o d e ( 4 t o 8 d i g i t s ) i s s u p p l i e d with some SIM cards, and is required to access some functions in your devi ce. â Lock cod e (also known as security cod e) â The lock code he lps you t o protect your dev ice against unaut horised use. You can create and change the code, and set the d evice to request the code. Keep the new code sec ret and in a safe place separate from your d evice. If you forget th e code and your device is locked, your de vice will require service and additional charges may apply. For more informat ion, contact a Nokia Care point or your device d ealer. â Personal unblocking key (PUK ) code and PUK2 code â These codes (8 digits) are required to change a blocked PIN code or PIN2 code, respectively. If th e code s are not supplied with the SIM card, contact the operator whose SIM card is in your device. â UPUK code â This code (8 digits) is required to change a blocked UPIN code. If the code is not supplied with the USIM card, conta ct the operato r whose USIM card is in your device. 21 Find help
Prolong battery life Many features in your device i ncrease the demand on ba ttery po wer an d redu ce the ba ttery lif e time . To save battery p ower, note th e following: â Features that use Bluetooth tec hnology, or allowing such fe atures to run in the backgrou nd while using other featur es, increase the demand on battery power. Turn Bluetooth technology off when you d o not need it . â Features that use wireless LAN (WLAN), or allowing such fe atures to run in the backgrou nd while using other featur es, increase the demand on battery power. WLAN on your Nokia device switches off when you are not t rying to connect, not connec ted to an access point, or not sc anning for available networks. To further reduce battery consumption, you can specify that your device does not scan, or scans less often, for available networks in the background. See "Wireless LAN" , p. 40 . When Scan for networks is set to Never , the WLAN availability icon is not shown in the standby mode. Ho wever, you can still manually scan for available WLAN networks and connect to WLAN netw orks as usual. â If you have set Packet data connection to When available in connection settings, and there is no packet data c overage (GPRS), the device periodically trie s to establish a packet data connection. To pr olong the operating time of your device, sele ct Packet data connection > When needed . â The Maps application downloads new map information when you scrol l to new areas on the map, which inc reases the demand on battery power. You c an prevent th e automatic dow nload of new maps. See "Maps" , p. 57 . â If the signal stre ngth of the cell ular network varies much in your area, your device must scan for the available netw ork repeatedly. This increases the demand on battery power. If the network mode is se t to dual mode in the network settings, the de vi ce sea rches f or the UMTS network. To only use the GSM network, press , and select Tools > Settings > Phone > Network > Network mode > GSM . â The backlight of the display increases the demand on battery power. In the display settings, you can change the time-out after which the backlight is switched off, and adjust the light se nsor that observe s lighting conditions and adjusts the display brightness. Press , and select Tools > Settings > General > Personalisation > Display and Light time- out or Brightness . â Leaving applicati ons running in the background increases the demand on battery p ower. To close 22 Find help
the applications you do not use, press and hold , scroll to an applicatio n in the list, and press C . Pressing C does not close Music player. To c lose Music player, select it from the list and Op tions > Exit . â To turn on the po wer save mode, press the power key, and selec t Activate power saving . To turn off the power save mode, press the power key, and se lect Deactiv ate power s aving . You may not be able to c hange the se ttings o f ce rtain application s when the power save mode is turned on. Free memory To view how much memory different data types consume, press , and select Tools > File mgr. , the desired memory, and Options > De tails > Memory . To remove data you no lo nger need, use File manager or go to the respec tive appl ication. Yo u can remove the following: â Messages in the folders in Messaging and retrieved e-mail messa ges from the mailbox â Saved web pages â Contact information â Calendar notes â Applications shown in Application manager tha t you do not need â Installation files (.sis or .sisx) of applications you have installed. Transfer the installation files to a compatible PC. â Images and video clips in Photos. Back up the files to a compatible PC using Nokia Nseries PC Suite. 23 Find help
Your device Welcome When you switc h on your devic e for the first time , the Welcome applicat ion is displayed. Select from the following: â Sett. wizard â to configure various settings, such as e-mail. For mo re information on the Settings wizard application, see the guides available at the Nokia product support pages or your local N okia webs ite. â Switch â to transfer conten t, such as contacts and calendar entries, from a compatible Nokia device. See "Transfer content" , p. 24 . There ma y als o be a dem onstr ation about your device available in th e Welcome application. To access the W elcome ap plication later, press , and s elec t Tools > Utilit ies > Welcom e . You can also access the individual applications from their menu locations. Nokia Switch Transfer content You can use the Switch application to copy co ntent such as phone n umbers, addresses, calendar items, and images from your previous Noki a device to your Nokia N79 using Bl uetooth connectivity. The type of content th at can be transferr ed depends on the model of the devi ce from which you want to transfer content. I f that devic e supports synchronisation, you can also synchronise data between th e devices. Your Nokia N79 n otifies y ou if the other dev ice is not compatibl e. If the other device cannot be switched on wit hout a SIM card, you can insert your SIM card in it. When your Nokia N79 is switched on without a SIM card, the offline profile is automatically activated, and transfer can be done. Transfer content for the first time 1. To retrieve data fro m the other dev ice for the first time, on your Nokia N79, select Switch in the Welcome application, or press , and select Tools > Utilities > Switch . 24 Your device
2. Select th e connection type you want to use to transfer the data. Both devices must support the selected c onnection type. 3. If you select Blue tooth, conn ect the two de vices. To have your dev ice sea rch for de vices with Bluetooth connectivity, se lect Continue . Select the device from which you wa nt to transfe r content. You are asked to enter a cod e on your Nokia N79. Enter a code (1-16 digits), and select OK . Enter the same code o n the other device , and select OK . The devic es are now paired. See "Pair device s" , p. 45 . Some earlier Nokia devices may not have the Switch application. In this case, the Switch application is sent to the other devic e as a message. To install the Sw itch application on the other device, op en the m essage, and follow t he instructions on the display. 4. From your Nokia N79, select the content you want to transfer from the other device. When the transfe r has started, you ca n cancel it and continue later. Content is transferred from the memo ry of the other device to the co rresponding location in yo ur Nokia N79. The transfer time depends on the amount of data to be transferred. Synchronise, re trieve, or s end content After the first t ransfer, sele ct from the following to start a new transfer, depend ing on the mo del of the other dev ice: to synchron ise conten t between your Nokia N79 and the other device , if the other device supports synchronisation. The syn chronisation is two-way. If an item is de leted in one device, it is delet ed in b oth. Yo u cannot resto re delet ed items with synchronisation. to retrieve conte nt from the ot her device to your Nokia N79. With retrieval, cont ent is transferred from the other device to your Nokia N79. You may be asked to keep or delete th e original cont ent in the othe r device, dependin g on the device model. to send content from your Nokia N7 9 to your other devic e If Switch cannot send an item, depending on the type of th e other devic e, you can add t he item to the Nokia folder to C:\Nokia or E:\Nokia i n y o u r N o k i a N79. When you se lect the fol der to transfer, the items are synchronised in the corresponding f older in the other device, and vice versa. 25 Your device
Use shortcu ts to repeat a tran sfer After a data transfer, you can save a shortcut with the transfer settings t o the main view to repeat the same transfer later. To edit the shortcut, scroll to it, and select Options > Shortcut setting s . You can, for example, create or chan ge the name of the shortc ut. A transfer log is shown after ev ery transfer. T o view the log of the last tr ansfer, scroll to a shortcut in the main view, and select Option s > View log . Handle transfe r confli cts If an item to be transfe rred has been edited in both devices, th e device at tempts to merge the changes automatically. If t his is not possible, there is a transfer conflict . Select Check on e by one , Priority to this phone , or Priority to other phone to solve the conflict. For furthe r instructions, select Options > Help . Display indi cators The device is being used in a GSM network (network servic e). The device is being u sed in a UMTS network (network servic e). You have one or more unread message s in the Inbox folder in Mes sagin g. You have received new e-mail in the remote mailbox. There are messages waiting to be sent in the Outbox folder. You have missed calls. The ringing type is set to silent, and the message alert tone and e- mail alert tone are set to off. A timed profile is active. The de vice keypa d is loc ked. A clock alarm is active. The second ph one line is being used (network service). All calls to the device are diverted to anot her number (network service) . If you have tw o phone lines, a number indicate s the active line . Your phone i s connected to a netw ork via wireless LAN or UMTS (net work service) and ready for an internet call. A compatible microSD card is in the device. A c o m p a t i b l e h e a d s e t i s c o n n e c t e d t o t h e d e v i c e . FM transmitter is ac tive but not t ransmitting. FM transmitter is active and transmitting. A compatible TV out cable is connected to the device. 26 Your device
A compatible text phone is conne cted to the device. A data call is acti ve (network service). A G P R S p a c k e t d a t a c o n n e c t i o n i s a c t i v e ( n e t w o r k service). indicates the connection is on hold and that a connection is available. A packet data connec tion is active in a part of the network that supports EG PRS (network service). indicates the co nnection is on hold and that a connection is availa ble. The icons indicate th at EGPRS is available in the network, but your device is not necessarily using EGPRS in the data transfer. A U M T S p a c k e t d a t a c o n n e c t i o n i s a c t i v e ( n e t w o r k service). indicates the connection is on hold and that a connection is available. High-speed downlink packet access (HSDPA) is supported and active (network service). indicates the connection is on hold and that a connection is available. See "Fast downloading" , p . 32 . You have set the de vice to scan for wireless LANs, and a wireless LAN is available (network service). See "About W LAN" , p. 40 . A wireless LAN connection is active in a network th at has encryption. A wireless LAN connection is active in a network that does not have encryption. Bluetooth connectivity is on. See "Bluetooth connecti vity" , p. 43 . Data is being transmitted using Bluetooth connecti vity. Whe n the indica tor is blinking, your device is tryi ng to connect w ith another de vice. A USB connection is active . Synchronisation is in progress. Shortcuts When in the menus, instea d of using the scroll key, you can use the number keys, # , a nd * to quickly access the applications. Fo r example, in th e main menu, press 2 to open Messaging or # to open the application or folder in the corresponding location in the menu. To switch between open application s, press and hold . Leaving applica tions running in the backgro und increase s the deman d on battery power and reduces the batter y life. To view your multimed ia content , press the multimedia key. To start a web connection (network service), in the standby mode, press and hold 0 . In many applications, to view the most common option items ( ), press the scroll key. 27 Your device
To change the p rofile, press the powe r key, and select a profile. To switch betw een the G eneral and Silent profiles, in the standby mode, press and hold # . To call your voice mailbox (network service), in the standby mode, press and hold 1 . To open a list of last dialled numbers, in the standby mode, press the call key. To use voice commands, in the standby mo de, press and hold the right se lectio n key. To remove an application from the menu, select it, and press C. Some applications may not be removed. Lock the keypad To lock and unlock the keys, use the lock switch at the top of th e device, next to the power key. To set the keypad to loc k automatically after a time- out, press , and select Tools > Setti ngs > Genera l > Security > Phone and SIM card > Keypad auto lock p eriod . To illuminate the keypad in low-light condi tions, briefly press the power key. Navi⢠wheel Hereafter referred to as scroll key. Use the Navi wheel t o move around th e menus and lists (up, down, left, or ri ght). Press the scroll key to select the action shown on to p of the key or to show the most used opt ions . To turn the Navi wheel setting on or off, press , and se lect Tools > Settings > General > Navi wheel > Navi wheel . When the Nav i wheel setting is switc hed on in the settings, you can scroll quickly through Photos, Music Player, Nokia Video Centre, Contacts, and Messaging lists, or the multimedia menu. 1. Move the tip of your finger gently arou nd the rim o f the scroll key clockwise or anticloc kwise. Kee p moving your finger until scrol ling starts on the display. 2. To continue scrolling, slide your finger around the rim of the scroll key clockwise or anticlockwise. Sleep mode indicator The inner rim of the Navi wheel illuminates slowly when th e device is in the sleep mode. The light varies periodically as if the device was breathing. To switch off th e illumination, press , and select Tools > Settings > General > Navi wheel > Breathing . 28 Your device
Multimedia menu With the multimedi a menu, you can access your most frequent ly used multim edia cont ent. The selected content is shown in the appropriate application. 1. To open or close the multimed ia men u, press the multimedia key. 2. To browse the tiles, scroll left or right, or, if the Navi wheel se tting is set on, slide your finger on the rim o f the scroll key. The tiles are th e following: â TV & video â V i e w y o ur l a s t w a t c h e d v i d e o clip, video clips stored on your de vice, or access video services. â Music â Enter Music player and the Now playing view, browse your songs and playlists, or download and manage podcasts. â Images â View your most recently taken images, start a slide show of your images or video clips, or view media files in albums. â Maps â View you r favo urite loc ation s in the Maps application. â Internet â View your favourite we b links in the browser. â Contacts â Add your own contacts, send messages, or make voice calls. To add a new contact to an empty posit ion on the list, press the scroll key, and select a contact . To send a message, in the multim edia menu, select a contact, and Options > Send text message or Send multim edia msg. . 3. To scroll up or down in a tile, press the scroll key up or down. T o select it ems, press the scroll key. To change the order of the til es, select Options > Arrange tiles . To return to the multim edia menu from an open application, press the mu ltimedia key. Mobile Search Press , and select Sear ch . You can also access Mobile Search directl y from the active standby mode, if th at has been activated in the settings. Use Mobile Se arch to acce ss internet search engines and to find and connect to local servi ces, website s, images, and mobile conten t. You can also search 29 Your device
content in your devi ce, such as ca lendar e ntries, e- mail, and other messages. Web search (network servic e) 1. In the Se arch main view, select Search the Internet . 2. Select a search e ngine. 3. Enter your text to searc h. 4. Press the scroll key to start the search. My content search To search content in your device, in the main view, enter your text to th e search field. The se arch results are displayed on the sc reen as you write. Headset You can connect a compatible headset or compatible headphon es to your device. You may need to sele ct the cable mode. Warning: When you use the headset, your abili ty to hear outside sounds may be affected. Do not use the headset where it can endanger your safety . Some headsets come in two parts, a remote control unit and hea dphones . A remot e control unit ha s a microphone and keys to answer or end a phone c all, adjust the volume, and play music or video files. To use the headphones with a remo te control unit, connect the unit to t he Nokia AV Connector (3.5 mm) in the de vice, th en conn ect the headp hones to the unit. To make handsfree phone calls, use a headset with a com patible re mote control u nit, or u se the microphone on t he device . To adjust the volume du ring a call, use the volume key on the device or, if available, on the headset. Some headsets have mult imedia volu me controls that can only be u sed to ad just th e volume for mu sic or video playback. You can also connect a co mpatibl e TV-out cable to the Nokia AV Connector (3.5 mm) of your devi ce. 30 Your device
Do not co nnect pr oducts th at create an output signal as this may cause dama ge to the device. Do not connec t any volta ge source to the Nokia AV Connector. When connecting any external device or any headset, other th an thos e approved by Nokia for use with th is device , to the No kia AV Conn ector, pa y speci al attentio n to volume le vels. Volume and loudspeaker control Warning: Listen to music at a moderate level. Continuous exposu re to high volume may damage your hearin g. Do not hold th e device near your ear when t he loudspeaker is in use, b ecause the volume may be extremely loud. To increase or de crease the volume level w hen you have an active call or are listening to a sound, use the volume key. The built-in loudspeaker allows you to speak and listen from a short distance w ithout h aving to hold the devic e to your ear. To use the loudspeaker during a call, press Loudsp. . To turn off th e loudspeaker, p ress Handset . Offline profile To activate t he offline profile, press the po wer key brief ly, an d sele ct Offl ine . Or, press , and select Tools > Profiles > Offline . The offline profile lets you use the device without connecting to the wireless netw ork. When you activate the offline profile, th e connection to the wireless netwo rk is turned off, as indicate d by in the signal strength indica tor area. All wireless RF signals to and from the devi ce are prevented. If you try to send messages, they are pl aced in the outbox to be sent later. When the of fline profile is active, you can u se your device wi thout a S IM card. Important: In the offline profile you cannot m a k e o r r e c e i v e a n y c a l l s , o r u s e o t h e r f e a t u r e s t h a t require cellu lar netwo rk cov erage. Ca lls may still be possible to the offici al emergency n umber programme d into your de vice. To mak e calls, yo u must first activate the phone func tion by ch anging profiles. If the device has b een locked, en ter the lock code. When you have activa ted the offline profile, you can still use the wirele ss LAN, for example, to read your e-mail or browse on th e intern et. Remember to 31 Your device
comply with any applicab le safety requirements when establishing and using a wireless L AN connection. You can also use Bluetooth connectivity while in the offline profile. To leave the offline profile, pr ess the power key briefly, and select another profile. The device re- enables wireless transmissions (providing there is sufficient signal strength). Fast downloading High-speed d ownlink packet access (HSDPA, also called 3.5G, indicated by ) is a n etwork servi ce in UMTS netwo rks and prov ides high- speed data downloads. When HSDPA support in th e device is activated and the device is connec ted to a UMTS network that supports HSDP A, downloading data such as messages, e-mail, and browser page s through the cell ular network may be faster. An active HSDPA connection is indicated by . See "Display indicators" , p. 26 . You can activate or deactivate supp ort for HSDPA in the device sett ings. See "Packet data settings" , p. 173 . For availability and sub scription to data c onnection services, contact your service provider. HSDPA only affects the do wnload speed; sending data to the network, such as messages and e-mail, is not affected. 32 Your device
Web browser With the We b browser, you can view hypertext markup language (HTML ) web pages on the internet as originally designed. You can also browse web pages that are designed specifically for mobile devices, and use extens ible hy pertext marku p language (XH TML), or the wirel ess markup lang uage (WML). To browse the web , you need to have an int ernet access point configured in your device. Browse the web Press , and select Web . Shortcut: To start the browser, press and hold 0 in the standby mode. Important: Use only services that you trust and that offer adequate security and protection against harmful software. Important: Only instal l and use applications and other software from trusted sources, such as applications that are Symbian Signed or have passed the Java Verified⢠testing. To browse a web page, in th e bookmarks view, select a bookmark, or enter t he address in the field ( ), and press the scroll key. Some web pages may contain material, such as graphics and sounds, that requires a large amount of memory to view. If your device runs out of memory while loading such a pag e, the graphics on the page are not shown. To browse web pages without graphics, to save memory, select Options > Settings > Page > Load content > Text only . To enter a new web page address you want to visit, select Options > Go to web addr ess . Tip: To visit a web page saved as a bookmark in the bookmarks view, while brow sing, press 1 , and select a bookmark. To retriev e the late st conten t of the pag e from the server, select Option s > Navigation options > Reload . To save the web address of the current page as a bookmark, select Options > Save as bookmark . To view snapshots of the pages you have visited during the current browsing session, sel ect Back 33 Web browser
(availabl e if Histor y lis t is set on in the browser settings and the c urrent page is not th e first page you visit). Select the page you want to go to. To save a page while browsing, select Option s > Tools > Save page . You can save pages and browse them later when offline. You can also group pages into folders. To access the pages you have saved, sel ect Options > Bookmar ks > Saved pa ges . To open a sublist of commands or ac tions for the page that is open, select Options > Service options (if supported by the web page). To prevent or allow t he automatic ope ning of multiple windows, select Options > Window > Block pop- ups or Allow pop-ups . Shortcuts while browsing â Press 1 to open your bookmarks. â Press 2 to search for keywords on the current page. â Press 3 to return to the previous page. â Press 5 to list all open windows. â Press 8 to show the page ov erview of the current page. Press 8 again to zoom in and view the desired section of the page. â Press 9 to enter a new web address. â Press 0 to go to the home page (if defined in settings). â Press * and # to zoom in or out on t he page. Tip: To return to the standby mode with the browser open in the background, press twice or the end key. To return t o the browser, press and hold , and select the browser. Browser toolbar The browser toolbar helps you select frequent ly used functions of the browser. To open the toolbar, pr ess and hold th e scroll key on an empty spot on a web page. To move within the toolbar, scroll left or right. To sele ct a feature, press the scroll key. In the toolbar, select from the followin g: â Frequently used link s â V i e w a l i s t o f t h e w e b addresses you visit frequently. â Page overview â See an overview of the current web page. â Find â Search for keywords within the current page. â Reload â Refresh th e page. â Subscribe to web feeds (if available) â Vi ew a list of available web feeds on the c urrent web page, and subscribe to a web feed. 34 Web browser
Navigate p ages Mini Map and pag e overvi ew help you n avigate web pages that contain a large amount of information. When Mini Map is set on in the browser settings and you scroll through a large web page, Mini Map opens and shows an overview of the we b page you browse. To set Mini Map on, select Options > Settings > General > Mini map > On . To move in Mini Map, scroll left, right, up, or down. When you find the desired location, stop scrolling. Mini Map disappears and le aves you at the select ed location. When you are browsing a web page that contains a large amount of informat ion, you can also use Page over view to view what kind of information the page contains. To show the page overview of the current page, press 8 . To find the desired spot on the page, scroll up, down, left, or right. Press 8 a g a i n t o z o o m i n a n d view the desire d section of th e page. Web feeds and blog s Web feeds are xml files on web pages that are use d by the weblog community and news organisations to share the latest headlines or text, for example, news feeds. Blogs or weblogs are web diaries. Most of the web feeds use RSS and Atom t echnologies. It is common to find web feed s on web, blog, and wiki pages. The Web application automa tically detects if a web page con tains web feeds. To subscribe to a w eb feed, select Option s > Subscrib e to web fe eds . To view the web feeds to which yo u have subscribed, in the bookmarks view, select Web feeds . To update a web feed, select it and Options > Refresh . To define how the web feeds are updated, select Option s > Settings > Web feeds . Widgets Your device supports widgets. Widgets are small, downloadable web applic ations that deliver multimed ia, news fee ds, and other inform ation, such as weather reports, to your device. Inst alled widgets appear as separa te applications in the Applicati ons folder. You can download widget s using the Down load! application or from the web. 35 Web browser
The default access point for widgets is the same as in th e web brow ser. W hen acti ve in the ba ckgro und, some widgets may update information automatically to your dev ice. Using widgets may involve the transmission of large amount s of data th rough your service provider's network. Co ntact you r servic e provider for information about data transmission charges. Content search To search for keywords, phone numbe rs, or e-mail addresses within the cu rrent web page, select Options > Find and the desired optio n. To go to the previous matc h, scroll up. To go to the n ext match, scroll down. Tip: To sea rch fo r keyw ords with in the page , press 2 . Download and purchase items You can download items such as ringing tones, images, operator logos, themes, and video clips. These items c an be provided free of charge, or you can purchase them. Downloaded items are handled by the respective appl icat ions in your device, for example, a downloaded photo can be saved in Photos. Important: Only install and use applications and other software from trusted sources, such as applications that are Symbian Sig ned or have passed the Java Verified testing. To download an item: 1. Selec t the link . 2. Select t he appropriat e option to p urchase the item (for example, Buy ). 3. Carefully read all the information provided. 4. To continue or cancel the download, select the appropriate opt ion (for example, Accept or Cancel ). When you start a download, a list of ongoing and completed downloads from the current browsing session is displayed. To modify the list, select Options > Do wnloads . In the list, scroll to an item, and select Opti ons to cancel ongoing downloads, or open, save, or delete completed downloads. Bookmarks The bookmarks view opens when you open the Web applica tion. You can select web addresses from a list 36 Web browser
or from a collection of bookmarks in the Recently visited pages folder. You c an also ent er the URL address of the web page you want to visit directly into the field ( ). indicates the start ing page defined for the default access point. You can save URL addresses as bookmarks while browsing on the in ternet. You can also save addresses received in messages to your bookmarks and send saved bookmarks. To open the bo okmarks view wh ile browsing, pre ss 1 , or select Options > Bookmarks . To edit the deta ils of a bookmark, such as the title, select Options > Bookmark manager > Edit . In the bookmarks view, you can also ope n other browser folders. The Web application allow s you to save web pages during browsing. In the Saved pages folder, you can view the content of t he pages you have saved off line. Web also keeps track of the web pages you visit during browsing. In the Recent ly visi ted page s folder, you can view the l ist of visited web pages. In Web feeds , you can vi ew saved lin ks to web feeds and blogs to which you have subscribed. Web feeds are commonly found on major news organisation web pages, personal weblogs, onli ne communities t hat offer th e la test headlines, and article summarie s. Web feeds use RSS and Atom technolo gies. Empty the cache The information or servic es you have accesse d are stored in the cach e memory of the de vice. A cache is a memory location that is used to st ore data te mpor arily. If you have tried t o access o r have accessed confidential information requiring passwords, empty the cache aft er each use. The information or services you have accessed are stored in the cac he. To empty the c ache, selec t Options > Clear privacy data > Ca che . End the connection To end the conne ction and view the browser p age offline, select Option s > Tools > Disconnect ; o r to end the connec tion and close the browser, select Option s > Exit . To take the browser to the background, press the end key once. To end the connection, press and hold the end key. To delete the in formation th e network serv er collects a bout your vi sits to various we b pages, select Options > Clear privacy data > Cookies . 37 Web browser
Connection security If the security indicator ( ) is displayed during a connection, th e data transmission b etween th e device and the inter net gateway or serv er is encrypted. The security icon does n ot indicate that th e data transmission between th e gateway and th e conten t server (or the plac e where th e requested resou rce is stored) is secure. The se rvice provider secu res the data transmission between t he gateway and th e content server. Securi ty certi ficates ma y be required for some services, such as banking services. You are notified if the identit y of the serve r is not authen tic or if you do not have the correct se curity certi ficate in your device. For more informatio n, contact your service provider. Web settings Press , and select Web . Select Options > Settings and from the following: General settings â Access point â Change the default access point. Some or all access points may be preset for your device by your service provider; you may not be able to change, create, edit, or remove them. â Homepage â Define the home page. â Mini map â Set Mini Map on or off. See "Navigate pages" , p. 35 . â History list â Wh ile browsing, to select Back to see a list of the pages you have visited during the current browsing session, set History lis t on. â Security warnings â Hide or show security notifications. â Java/ECMA script â En able or disabl e the use o f scripts. Page settings â Load content â Select wh ether you want to load im ages and oth er obje cts wh ile bro wsin g. If you select Text only , to load images or objects later during browsing, sel ect Options > Tools > Load i mage s . â Screen size â Sele ct be tween full screen and the normal view with the opt ions list. â Default encoding â If text charac ters are not shown correctly, you can select an other encoding according to language for the current page. â Block po p-ups â Allow or block automatic opening of different pop- ups while browsing. â Automatic reload â If you want the web pages to be refreshed automa tically whi le browsing, select On . â Font size â Define the font size that is used for web pages. Privacy settings 38 Web browser
â Recently visited pages â Enable or disable automatic bookmark collect ing. If you want t o continue saving the addresses of the visited web pages into the Recently v isited pa ges fol der, but hide the folder fr om the bookm arks view, select Hide folder . â Form data saving â If you do not want th e data you enter to different fo rms on a web page to be saved and used the ne xt time you op en the page , select Off . â Cookies â Enable or disabl e t he receiv ing and sending of cookies. Web feed settings â Automatic upda tes â Define wheth er you want the web feeds to be updated automatically and how often y ou want to update them. Settin g the application to retrieve web fe eds automatical ly may involve the transmission of larg e amounts of data through your servi ce provider's network. Contact your service provider for information about data transmission charges. â Acc. point for auto-upd ate â Select the desired access point for up dating. This option is only available when Automatic updates is on. 39 Web browser
Connections Your device offe rs several options to c onnect to the internet or to another co mpatible device or PC. Wireless LAN Your device supports wireless local area network (WLAN). With WLAN, you can con nect your device to the internet and c ompatible devices that have WLAN. About WLAN To use WLAN, it must be available in the location, and your device must be connected to the WLAN. Some WLANs are protected, and y ou need an access key fro m your servi ce prov ider t o connec t to them. Features that use WLA N, or that ar e allowed t o run in the backg round while usin g other feat ures, increase the d emand on battery power and reduc e the battery life. Your device supp orts the following WLAN features: â IEEE 802.11b/g sta ndard â Operation at 2.4 GHz â Wired equivalent privacy (WEP) with keys u p to 128 bits, W i-Fi pr otected acce ss (WPA), an d 802.1x encryption methods. These functions can be used only if they are supported by the network. WLAN connections To use WLAN, you must c reate an int ernet access point (IAP) for WLAN. Us e the access poin t for applica tions that need to connect to the intern et. See "WLAN internet access points" , p. 41 . Important: Always enable one of the available encryption meth ods to increase the security of your wirele ss LAN connection. Using encryption reduc e s the risk of unauthorised access to your data. A WLAN connection is established when you create a data connection u sing a WLAN internet access point. Th e active WLAN connection ends whe n you end the data con nection. You can use WL AN during a voice cal l or when pack et data is active. You can only be connected to one 40 Connections
WLAN access point device at a time, but seve ral applications can use the sa me internet access point. When the device is in th e o ffline profile, you can still use WLAN (if av ailable). Remember to comply with any applicable safety re quirements wh en establishing and usi ng a WLAN connection. Tip: To check the uniq ue media a ccess cont rol (MAC) address that identifies your device, enter *#62209526# in the standby mode. WLAN wizard The WLAN wizard he lps you t o connect t o a WLAN and manage your WLAN connecti ons. The WLAN wizard shows th e status of your WLAN connections in the active stand by mode. To view the available options, scroll to the row showing the status, and select it. If the search finds WLANs, for example, WLAN network found is displa yed, to create an internet access point (IAP) and start the web browser using this IAP, select the status and Start We b browsing . If you select a secured WL AN network, you are ask ed to enter the re levant p asscodes. To c onnect to a hidden network, you mu st enter the correct network name (serv ice set identifier, SSID). To create a new access point for a hidden WLAN, select New WLAN . If you are connec ted to a WL AN, the IAP name is displayed. To start the web browser using this IAP, select the status and Continue Web browsing . To end the conn ection in th e WLAN, select t he status and Disconnect WLAN . If WLAN scanning is off and you are not connected to any WLAN , WLAN scan ning off is displayed. To set scanning on and search for availabl e WLANs, select the status and press the scroll key. To start a search for available WLANs, select the status and Search for WLAN . To set WLAN scanning off, select the st atus and select WLAN scanning off . To access the WLAN wizard application in the menu, press , and select Tools > WLAN wiz. . WLAN internet access points Press , and select Tools > WLAN wiz. Select Option s and from the following: â Filter WLAN netw orks â Filter out WLANs in the list of found networks. The select ed networks are filtered out the next time the app lication searches for WLANs. â Details â View the details of a network shown in the list. If you sel ect an ac tive conn ection, the connection details are displayed. â Define access point â Create an inte rnet access point (IAP) in a WLAN. 41 Connections
â Edit access point â Edit the details of an existing IAP. You can also us e connection manager to crea te internet access poin ts. See "Active data connections" , p. 42 . Operating modes There are two operating mode s in WLAN: infrastructure and ad hoc. The infrastructure operating mode allows two kinds of communication: wireless devi ces are connected to each ot her through a WLAN access point device, or wireless de vices are connecte d to a wired LAN through a WLAN access point device. In the ad hoc o perating mode, de vices can sen d and receive data directly with each other. Connection manager Active data connections Press , and select Tools > Connectivit y > Conn. mgr. > A ctive data connections . In the ac tive data connection s view, yo u can see the open data connections: data calls packet data connec tions WLAN connections Note: The actual invoice for calls and services from your service provider may vary, depending on network features, rounding off for billing, taxes, and so fort h. To end a connection , select Options > Disconn ect . To c lose all open connections, select Options > Disco nnect all . To view th e details o f a connection, sele ct Options > Details . Available WLAN networks Press , and select Tools > Con nectivity > Conn. mgr. > Available WLAN net works . The available WLAN view shows a list of WLANs within range, their networ k mod e (infrastructure or ad hoc), and signal strength indicator. is shown for networks with e ncryption, an d if your devic e has an active connec tion in the n etwork. To view th e details o f a network, sel ect Opti ons > Details . To create an in ternet access point in a network, select Options > Define access point . 42 Connections
Bluetooth connectivity About Bluetooth conne ctivity You can make a wirel ess connection to othe r combatible devices, such as mobile pho nes, computers, headsets, an d car kits, wi th Bluetoot h connecti vity. You can use the conn ection to send images, video clips, music and sound clips, and notes, tran sfer files from your compatible PC, a nd print images with a compatible printer. Since devices with Bluet ooth wireless tech nology communicate using radio wave s, they do not need to be i n d ir e ct l in e- of - si g ht . H o we ve r , t he y mu st b e within 10 m etres (33 feet) of each other, although the conn ection may be subject to i nterferen ce from obstructions such as walls or from other electronic devices. This device is c ompliant with Bluetooth Specification 2.0 supporting the followin g profiles: Generic Audio/Vid eo Distribution Pr ofile, Advanc ed Audio Distribution Prof ile, Audio/Video Remote Control Profile, Basic Ima ging Profile, Ba sic Printing Profile, Dial-up Networking Profile, Fi le Transfer Profile, Hands-Free Profil e, Head set Profile, Human Interface Device Profile, Object Push Profile, SIM Access Profile, Sync hronization Profile , Serial Port Profile, and Phonebook A ccess Pro file. To ensu re interoperability between other devices supporting Bluetooth technology, use Nok ia approved enhancemen ts for this mode l. Check with the manufacturers of other de vices t o determine their compatibility with this device. Features using Blu etooth technolog y increase the deman d on ba ttery power and re duce the bat tery life. When the device is locked, you cannot use Bluet ooth connecti vity. Settings Press , and select Tools > Blue tooth . When you open the applicatio n for the first time, you are asked to define a name for your dev ice. You can change th e name later on. Select from the following: â Blueto oth â To make a wir ele ss con nect ion to another compatible device, first set Bluetooth connectivity On , then establish a con nection. To switch off Bluetoot h connectiv ity, select Off . â My phone's vi sibility â To allow your device to be found by other de vices with Bluetoot h wireless technology, select Shown to all . To set a time after which the visibility is set from shown to hidden, select Define period . To hide your device from other devices, selec t Hidden . 43 Connections
â My phon e's name â Edit the name shown to other devices wi th Bluetooth wire less technology. â Remote SIM mode â To enable another device, such as a compatible car ki t enhancement, to use the SIM card in your de vice to connect to the network, s elect On . See "Remote S IM mode" , p. 46 . Security tips Press , and select Tools > Blueto oth . When you are no t using Bluetooth connectivity, to control who can find your device and connect to it, select Bluetoot h > Off or My phone's visibil ity > Hidden . Do not pair wit h or accept connection requests from an unknow n devic e. Th is pr otec ts your device from harmful content. Send data using Bluetooth connectivity Several Blu etooth connect ions can be active at a time. For e xample, if yo u are connect ed to a compatible headset, you ca n also transfer files to anothe r compati ble de vi ce at the same time. 1. Open the ap plication where t he item you w ant to send is stored. For example, to send an image to another compatible device, open Photos. 2. Select t he item and Options > Send > Via Bluetoot h . Devices with Bluetooth wireless t echnolo gy that are within range are displayed. Device ic ons are as follows: computer phone audio or video device other device To interrupt t he search, select Sto p . 3. Select the de vice with which you want to connect. 4. If the other device requ ires pairing before data can be transmitted, a to ne sounds, and you are asked to enter a passcode. See "Pair devices" , p. 45 . When the conne ction is establishe d, Sending data is displayed. Tip: When searching for devices, some devices ma y show on ly the unique address (device address). To fin d the unique address of your device, enter *#2820# in the standby mode. 44 Connections
Pair devices To pair with compatible devices and view your paired devices, in the main view of Bluetooth connectivity, scroll right. Before pairing, create yo ur own passcode (1 to 16 digits), and agree with the owner of the other device to use the same code. Devices that do not have a user interface have a factory-set passcode. The passcode is used only once. 1. To pair wit h a device , select Options > New paired devi ce . Devices that are with in range are displa yed. 2. Select the device , and enter th e passcode. Th e same passcode must be entered on th e other device as well. 3. Some audio e nhancements conn ect automatically to your dev ice after pairing. Otherwise, scroll to the enhancemen t, and select Option s > Connect to audio device . Paired devices are indicated by in the device search. To set a device as authoris ed or unauthorised, scroll to the devi ce, and select from the fo llowing options: â Set as authorised â Connections between your devi ce and t he au thor ised de vice c an be ma de without your know ledge. No separate acceptance or authorisation is needed. Use this status for your own devices, such as your compa tibl e head set o r PC or devic es tha t bel ong to someone you trust. indicates auth orised devices in the paired devices view. â Set as unauthorised â Connection requests from this device must be accepted separate ly every time. To cancel a pairing, scro ll to the device, and select Option s > Delete . If you want to cancel all p airings, select Opti ons > Delete all . Receive data using Blue tooth connectivit y When you receive data through Bluetooth connectivity, a tone sounds, and you are asked if you want to accept the message. If you accept, is displayed, and the item is placed in the Inbox folder in Messaging. Me ssages received through Bluetoot h connecti vit y are ind icated by . Tip: If your device no tifies you that the memory is full when you try to recei ve data through Bl uetooth connectivity, chan ge memory card as the memory where the data is stored. 45 Connections
Block devices Press , and select Tools > Blueto oth . To block a device from establishing a Blueto oth connection to your device , scroll right to open Paire d device s . Select a devi ce you want to block and Option s > Block . To unblock a device, scroll right to Blocked devices , select a device , and Options > Delete . To unblock all blocked devices, selec t Option s > Delete all . If you reject a pairing re quest from another device, you are asked if you wa nt to block all fu ture connection requests from this dev ice. If you accept the query, the re mote device is added to the list of blocked devices. Remote SIM mode Before the remote SIM mode can be activated, the two devices must be paired and the pairing initiated from the other device. When pairing, use a 16-digit passcode, and set the othe r device as authorised. To use the remote SIM mode with a compa tibl e ca r kit enhancem ent, activate B luetooth connectivit y, and enable th e use of the remo te SIM mode with your device. Activa te the remote SIM mode from the other device. When the remot e SIM mode is on in your device, Remote SIM mode is displayed in the standby mode. The connection t o the wireless network is turned off, as indicated by in the signal strength indicato r area, and you cannot use SI M card services or features requiring cell ular network coverage. When the wireless device is in the remote SIM mode, you can only use a compatible connecte d enhancement, such as a car kit, to make or rec eive calls. Your wireless device wi ll not make any calls while in t his mode, except to the emer gency numbers programmed into your dev ice. To make calls from your device, you m ust leave the remote SIM mode. If the device is locked, enter the lock co de to unlock it. To leave the remote SI M mode, press the power ke y, and se lect Exi t remote SIM mo de . USB Press , and select Tools > Con nectivity > USB . To have the devic e ask the purp ose of the connection each time a c ompatible dat a cable is connected, select Ask on connection > Yes . If Ask on connection is set to off or you want to change the mode during an acti ve connection, 46 Connections
select USB connection mode and from the following: â PC Suite â Use Nokia PC application s such as Nokia Nseries PC suite, and Nokia Software Updater. â Mass storage â Transfer data between your device and a compatible PC. Use this mode also for downloading map s with the Noki a Map Loader PC applica tion. â Image transfer â Print images on a compatible printer. â Media tr ansfer â Synchronise music with Windows Media Player. PC connections You can use your device with a variety of compatible PC connectivity and data communications applications. With Nokia Nseries PC Suite you can, for example, tr ansfer images be tween your de vice and a compatible PC. For information on App le Macintosh support and connecting your device to an App le Macintosh device, visit www.nseries.com/mac. 47 Connections
Personalise your device You can personalise your device by changing the standby mode, main menu, to nes, themes, or font size. Most of the personalisation options, such as changing th e font size, can be accessed through t he device settings. Change the look of your device Press , and select Tools > Settings > Genera l > Personalisation > Them es . Use Themes to c hange the look of the display , such as the wal lpaper and icons. To change the theme that is used for all the application s in yo ur device , select Genera l . To preview a theme be fore activatin g it, select Options > Preview . To activate the theme, select Options > Set . The active theme is indicated by . The themes on a compatible memory card (if inserted) are indicated by . The themes on the memory card are not available if the memory card is not inserted in th e device. If you want to use the themes saved in the memory c ard without the memory card, save the themes in the device memory first. T o c h a n g e t h e l a y o u t o f t h e m a i n m e n u , s e l e c t Menu view . To open a browser conne ction and download more themes, in Gener al , select Do wnload th emes (network service). Use only services that you trust and that offer adequate security and protection against harmf ul software. To have a wallpaper image or a slide show of changing images as the background in the standby mode, select Wallpaper > Image or Sl ide s how . To chang e the ba ckground o f the call bubble shown when a call comes in, select Call image . Changeable back cover When you c hange the back cover of th e device, th e theme on the display c hanges to matc h the colour of the cover. 48 Personalise your device
To change the theme automatic ally, you must have a compatible back co ver that supports theme change. To select, wheth er you want the them e to ch ange automatically, press , and select Tools > Settings > Ge neral > Personalisation > Themes > Theme switch . Audio themes Press , and select Tools > Settings > General > Personalisat ion > Them es > Audio theme . In Audio themes, yo u ca n select a sound scheme such as 'Space' t o cover all de vice events, such as calling, battery low, and mechanical events. The sounds can be tones, synt hesised voice tags, or a combination of both. Select the sound sch eme you want to use in Acti ve audio theme . Note that activating an audio theme changes all your previous sound settings. If you want to retu rn to using the default t ones, select audio theme 'Nok ia'. You can change the sounds for differen t events individually by selecting one of the sound group s, for example, Me nu events . To add 3-D effe cts to the audio theme, select Option s > 3-D ringing to nes . See "3-D tones" , p. 50 . To change the language that is used for the synthesised voice tag, select Options > Set Speech language . If you have chan ged the tone s of individ ual events, you can save the them e by selecting Options > Save th eme . Set sounds for events To set the so und of an individual ev ent to silent, open an even t group, sele ct the event , and change it to Silent . To set a synthesi sed voice tag as the sound for an event, ope n an event group, select the event, and Speech . Enter the desired text, and press OK . Speech is not available if you have set Say call er's name on in Profiles . Set tones in Profiles Press , and select Tools > Pro file s . You can use profiles to set and customi se the ringing tones, message alert tones, and ot her tones for different events, enviro nments, or caller grou ps. To change th e profile, select a profile, and Option s > Activate , or press the power key in the 49 Personalise your device
standby mode. Scroll to th e profile you wan t to activ ate, an d sel ect OK . Tip: T o s w i t c h b e t w e e n t h e g e n e r a l a n d s i l e n t profiles in th e standby mode, press and hold # . To modify a profile, scro ll to the pr ofile, and select Options > Personalise . Scroll to the setting y ou want to change, and press the scroll key to op en the choices. Tones stored on a compatible memo ry card (if inserted) are indicated with . If you want to set a p rofile to be active a certain time, select Op tions > Timed . When the se t time expires, the profile chan ges back to the previou sly active one. Wh en a profile is timed, is displayed in the standby mode. The Offline profile canno t be timed. In the tones l ist, select Download sounds (network service) to open a list of bookmarks. You can select a bookmark and open a connect ion to a web page to do wnlo ad mo re ton es. If you want the c allerâÂÂs name t o be spoken wh en your device rings, select Options > Pers onalise > Say caller's nam e > On . The callerâÂÂs name must be found in Contacts. To create a new profile, select Options > Create new . 3-D tones Press , select Tools > Util ities > 3-D tones . With 3-D tones, you can enable three-dime nsional sound effects for ringing to nes. Not all ringing tones support 3-D effects. To enable the 3-D effects, selec t 3-D ringing tone effects > On . To change the ringing tone, select Ringing tone and the desired ringing tone. To change the 3 -D effect that is applied to the ringing tone, select Sound trajectory and the desired effect. To modify the effec t, select from t he following settings: â Trajectory speed â Scroll left or right to adjust the speed at which so und moves from one direction to another. T his setting is not available for all ringing tones. â Reverberation â Select the type of echo. â Doppler effect â Select On to have the ringing tone sound high er when you are closer to yo ur device, and lower when you are farther away. When you g et clos er to the dev ice, the ringi ng tone seems to becom e higher, and lower when you move away from it. This setting is not available for all ring ing tones. To listen to the rin ging tone with t he 3-D effect, select Options > Play tone . If you enable the 3-D 50 Personalise your device
tones but do not select any 3-D effect, stereo widening is applied to the ringing ton e. To adjus t the ri nging tone vo lume, selec t Tools > Profiles > Options > Personalise > Ringing volume . Modify the standby mode To change the look of the standby mode, press , and select Tools > Settings > Genera l > Personalisation > Stan dby m ode > Standby theme . The active standby display shows application shortcuts, and events from applications such as calendar and player. To change the selection key shortcuts or the default shortcut icons in the active standby mode, select Tools > Settings > General > Personalisation > Standby mode > Shortcuts . Some shortcuts may be fixed, and you cannot chang e them. To change the clock show n in the standby mode, press , and select Applicati ons > Clock > Option s > Settings > Clock type . You can also change the standby mode background image or what is shown in the power saver in the device setting s. Tip: To check wh ether there are applic ations running in the backgroun d, press and hold . To close the applications you do not use, scroll to an application in the list, and pr ess C . Leaving applications runnin g in the background increases the demand on battery power. Modify the main menu To change the main menu view, in the main menu, press and select Tools > Settings > General > Personalisation > Themes > Menu view . You can change the ma in menu to be sh own as Grid , List , Horseshoe , or V-shaped . To rearrange the main menu, in the main menu, select Options > Move , Move to folder , or New folde r . You can move applications used less frequently into folders and place applicati ons that you use more often int o the main menu. 51 Personalise your device
Positioning (GPS) You can use appl ications such as Maps and GPS data to find out your location , or measure distances and coordinates. These applications requ ire a GPS connection. About GPS The Global Positioning S ystem (GPS) is a worldwide radio navigation system that i ncludes 24 satellites and thei r ground st ations that moni tor the operation of the satellit e s. Your devic e has an internal GPS receiver. A GPS terminal receives low-power radio sign als from the sate llites and measu res the travel time of the signals. From the trav el time, the GPS receiver can calculate its loc ation to the accuracy of metres. The coordin ates in the GPS are expressed in deg rees and decimal degrees format using the international WGS-84 coordinate system. The Global Positioning System (GPS) is op erated by the government of the Unit ed States, which is solely responsible for its accuracy and maintenance. The accuracy of location data can be affected by adjustments to GPS satellites made by the United States government and is subject to change with the United States D epartment of Defense c ivil GPS policy and the Federal Radionavigation Plan. Accuracy can also be a ffected by poo r satellite geometry. Availability an d quality of GPS signals may be affected by your location, buildings, natural obstacles, and weather co nditions. The GPS receiver should only be used outd oors t o allow rece ption of GPS signals. Any GPS should not be used for precise location measurement, and you sh ould never rely solely on location data from th e GPS receiver and cellular radio networks for posi tioning or naviga tion. To enable or disable diffe rent positioning methods, such as Bl uetooth GPS, press , and select Tools > Settings > General > Positi oning > Position ing meth ods . Assisted GPS (A-GPS) Your device also supports Assisted GPS (A-GPS). A-GPS is a network service. Assisted GPS (A-GPS) is used to retrieve assistance data over a packet data connection, which assists in calculating the coordinates of your current location 52 Positioning (GPS)
when your device is receiving signals from satellites. When you activate A-GPS, your device receives useful satellite informatio n from a n assistance data server over th e cellular network. With the help of assisted data, your device c an obtain the GPS position faster. Your device is preconfigu re d to use the Nok ia A-GPS service, if no service prov ider-specific A- GPS settings are available. The assistance data is retrieved from the Nokia A-GPS service serv er only when needed. You must have an interne t access point defi ned in the device to retrieve a ssistance data fr om the Nokia A-GPS serv ice over a pa cket data c onnection. To define an access point for A-GPS, press , and select Tools > Settings > General > Positioning > Position ing server > Access point . A wireless LAN access point cannot be used for this service. Only a packet data interne t access point can be used. Your device asks for the inte rnet access point wh en GPS is used for th e first time. Hold your device correctly The GPS receiver is located on the back of t he device. When using the receiver, ma ke sure that you do not cover the ante nna with your hand. Establishing a GPS connec tion may take from a couple of seconds to seve ral minutes. Establ ishing a GPS connection in a vehicle may take longer. The GPS receiver draws its power from the device battery. Using the GPS receiver may drain the batter y fa ster. Tips on creating a GPS connection If your device cannot find the satellite signal, consider the followin g: â If you are indoor s, go outdoors to receive a better signal. â If you are out doors, move to a more open space . 53 Positioning (GPS)
â Ensure that your hand does not c over the GPS antenna of your device. See "Hold your device correctly" , p. 53 . â If the weather conditions are bad, the signal strength may be affected. â Some vehic les have ti nted (athe rmic) wi ndows, which may block the satellite signals. Check satellite signal status To check how ma ny satellit es your device has found, and whethe r your device is receiving sa tellite signals, press , and select Tools > Connectivity > GP S data > Position > Options > Satel lite status . Or, in th e Maps application , select Options > Map view > GPS info . If your device has found satellites, a bar for each satellite is show n in the satellite info view. The longer the bar, the stronger th e satellite signal. When your device has receiv ed enough data from the satellite signal to calculate the c oordinates of y our location, the bar turns black. Initially your device must receive sig nals from at least four satell ites to be able to ca lculate the coordinates of your loca tion. When the initial calculation has been made, it may be possible to continue calculating th e coordinates of your location with thr ee satellites. However, th e accuracy is generally bett er when more satellites are fo und. Position requests You may receive a request from a network service to receive your position information. Service providers may of fer information about local t opics, such as we ather or traf fic conditi ons, based on the location of your devic e. When you re ceive a positi on request, a message is displayed showing the service that is making the request. Select Accept to allow your p osition informati on to be sen t or Reject to deny the request. Landmarks Press , and select Tools > Con nectivity > Landmarks . With Landmarks, you can save the position information of specific loca tions in your device. You can sort the saved loca tions into different categories, such as business, and add other information to them, such as addresses. You can use 54 Positioning (GPS)
your saved la ndmarks in compatible applications, such as GPS data and Maps . GPS coordinates are expressed in degrees and decimal degrees format u sing the international WGS-84 coordinate system. To crea te a new land mark, select Options > New landmark . To make a positioning request for your current locatio n, select C urre nt posit ion . To enter the position informat ion manually, select Enter manually . To edit or add information to a saved landmark (for example, a street address), scroll to a landmark, and select Options > Edit . Scroll to the d esired field, and enter the information. You can sort your landmarks into preset categories, and create new categories. To edit and create new landmark categories, scroll right in Landmarks, and select Options > Edit categories . To add a landmark to a ca tegory, scroll to the landmark in Landmarks, and select Optio ns > Add to categor y . Scroll to each category to which y ou want to ad d the landmark, an d select it. To send one or several landmarks to a compatible device, select Optio ns > Send , and the meth od. Your receive d landmarks are plac ed in the Inbox folder in Messaging. GPS data GPS data is designed to provide route guidan ce information to a selected destina tion, position information about your current location, and traveling information, such as the approximate distance to the destin ation and approximate duration of travel. Press , and select Tools > Connecti vity > GPS data . The coordinate s in the GP S are expressed in degre es and deci mal degre es forma t usin g the in ternat ional WGS-84 coordinate system. To use GPS da ta, the GPS receiv er of your dev ice must initially receive posi tion information from at least four satellites to calculate th e coordinates of your location. When the initial calculation has b een made, it may be possible to continue calculating the coordinates of y our location with three satellites. However, the accuracy is generally better when more satellites are f ound. Route guidance Press , and select Tools > Connecti vity > GPS data > Navigation . Start the route guidance outdoors. If started indoors, the GPS rece iver may no t receive the necessary information from the satellites. 55 Positioning (GPS)
Route guidance uses a rotating compass on the device display. A red ball shows the direction to the destination, and the approx imate distance to it is shown inside the compass ring. Route guidance is desi gned to show the straightest route and the shortest dist ance to th e destination, measured in a straight line. Any obstacles on the route, such as buildings and natural obstacles, are ignored. Differences in altitude are not taken into account when calculatin g the distance. Route guidance is active only when you move. To set your tri p de stination, select Options > Set destinat ion and a landmark as the destination, or enter the l atitude and l on gitude coordinate s. Select Stop navigat ion to clear the destination set for your trip. Retrieve position information Press , an d selec t Tools > Connecti vity > GPS data > Position . In the position view, you can vi ew the position information of your current location. An estimat e of the accura cy of the location is displayed. To save your current loca tion as a landmark, select Options > Save position . Landmarks are saved locations with more i nfo rmation, and they can be used in oth er compatib le applications and transferred between compat ible device s. Trip meter The trip meter has limite d accuracy, an d rounding errors may oc cur. Accura cy can also be affect ed by availability and quality of GPS signals. Press , and select Tools > Co nnectivity > GPS data > Trip distance . Select Options > Start to activate trip distance calculation, and Stop to deactivate it. The calculated values remain on the display. Use this feature outdoors to receive a better GPS signal. Select Reset to set the tri p distance and ti me and average and maximum speeds to zero, and to start a new calcul ation. S elect Re start to set the odomete r and total time to zero. 56 Positioning (GPS)
Maps About Maps Press , and select Maps . With Maps, you can see your current location on the map, browse maps for diffe rent cities and co untries, search for addresses and diffe rent points of interest, plan routes from one lo cation to anothe r, view traffic details, and save locations as favourites and send them to compatible devices. You can also purchase extra services, such as guides, a turn-by-turn Drive & Walk naviga tion service with voice guidance, and a traffic information service. Maps uses GPS. See "Positioning (GPS)" , p. 52 . You can defi ne the posi tioning methods us ed with y our device in the device settings. See "Positioning settings" , p. 166 . For the most accurate location information, use either the internal GPS or a compatible external GPS receiver. When you use Maps for the first time, yo u may need to define an internet ac cess point for downloading map information for your current lo cation. To change the default access po int later, in Maps, select Option s > Tools > Settings > Internet > Network destination (shown only when you are online) . When you browse a map in Maps, th e map data for the area is auto matic ally dow nloaded to your device t hrough th e internet . A new map is downloaded only if you sc roll to an are a whic h is not covered by maps already downloaded. Some maps may be pre-loaded on the memory card in your devi ce. You can download more maps t o y ou r d e vi ce us i ng Nokia Map Loader PC software. See "Download maps" , p. 59 . Tip: You can also downl oad maps by using a wireless LAN connection. Downloading ma ps may i nvolve the transmission of large amounts of data through your servi ce provider's network . Contact your service provider for information about data transmission charges. If you want the Maps appli cation to establish an internet connec tion automatically when you st art the application, in Maps, s elect Op tions > Tools > Setti ngs > Inte rnet > Go online at start-up > Yes . 57 Maps
To receiv e a note wh en yo ur device registers to a network out side your home cellular network, select Options > Tools > Settings > Internet > Roaming warning > On (shown only when you are online). Cont act your network service provid er for details and roaming costs. Almost all digital cartog raphy is inaccurate and incomplete to some extent. Never rely solely on the cartography that you do wn load for use in this device. Browse map s The map coverage varies by country. When you open the Maps application, Maps zooms in to the location that was saved from your last session. If no position was saved from the last session, the Maps appl ication zooms in to the capital city o f the count ry you are in base d on the informatio n the dev ice rec eives from the cellular network. At the sam e time, the map of the location is downloaded, if it ha s not been downloaded during previous sessions. Your current location To establish a GPS connecti on and zoom in to yo ur current lo cation, se lect Options > My position , o r press 0 . If the power saver turns on while the device is attemp ting to esta blish a GPS connection, the attempt is interrupted. A GPS indicator is shown on the display. One bar is one satellite. When the dev ice tries to find a satellite, the b ar is yellow. When the device receives enough dat a from the satellite t o establish a GPS connec tion, the bar tu rns green. The mo re green bars, the stron ger the GPS c onnection. When the GPS connection is active, your curre nt locatio n is indicate d on the map with . Move and zoom To move on the map, scroll up, down, left, or right. The map is oriented towards north by default. The compass rose displays the orientation of the map and rotates during navigation when the or ient ation changes. When you browse the map on the display, a new m ap is automatically downloaded if you scroll to an area which is not covered by maps already downloaded. These maps are free of charge, but downloading may involve the transmission of large amounts of data through your service provider's ne twork. For 58 Maps
more information on data transmissi on charges, contact you r se rvice provider. The maps are automatically saved on a compatible memory card (if inserted and set as the default maps storage). To zoom in or out, press * or # . U se the scale bar t o estimate the distance between t wo points on the map. Adjust the map view To define the me tric system used in the map s, select Option s > Tools > Settings > Map > Syst em of measurement > Metric or Imperial . To define what kinds of po ints of interest are shown on the map, select Options > Tools > Set tings > Map > Cat egories and the desired categories. To select whethe r you want to view maps in 2-D mode, 3-D mode, as satellite image, or hybrid, select Option s > Map mode > Map , Map 3D , Satellite , or Hybrid . Satellite images may not be available for all geographic locations. To define whethe r you want th e map view to be a day vi ew or a n ight vie w, select Option s > Tools > Settings > Map > Colo urs > Day mode or Night mode . To adjust other internet, navigation, routing, and general map settings, select Option s > Tools > Settings . Download maps When you browse a map on the display in Maps, a new map is automatically downloaded if you scroll to an area which is not covered by maps already downloaded. You can view the amount of transferred data from the data counter (kB) shown on the display. The counter shows the amount of network traffic when you browse maps, create routes, or search for loca tions online. Do wnloading maps data may involve the transmission of large amounts of data through your service providerâÂÂs network. Conta ct your service provider for information about data transmission charges. To prevent the devic e from automatically downloading maps thro ugh the internet , for example, wh en you are outside your home c ellular network, or other map related data required by the extra services, select Options > Tools > Setti ngs > Inte rnet > Go online at start-up > No . To define how much memory card space you want to use for saving maps or voice guidance files, select Option s > Tools > Settings > Map > Maximum memory use > Max. memory card use . This option is availabl e on ly when a compatible memory card is inserted and set as the default maps storage. Wh en the memo ry is full, the ol dest map 59 Maps
data is deleted. The saved maps data can be deleted using Nokia Map Loader PC software. Nokia Map Loader N o k i a M a p L o a d e r i s P C s o f t w a r e t h a t y o u c a n u s e t o download and i nstall maps from the i nternet to a compatible memory card. You can also use it to download voice files for turn-by-turn navigation. To use Nokia Map Loader, you must first install it to a compatible PC. You can download the PC software from the internet at www.no kia.com/maps. Follow the instructio ns on the sc reen. You must use th e Maps application and brow se maps at least once befor e using Noki a Map Loader . Nokia Map Loader uses the Maps history informatio n to check the versio n of map data t o be downloaded. After you have instal led the PC so f tw ar e to y ou r P C , to download maps, do the following: 1. Connect your device to the PC by using a compatible USB data cable. Select Mass storage as th e USB connection mode. 2. Open Nokia Map Lo ader in you r PC. Nokia Map Loader c hecks the version of map data to be downloaded. 3. Select the maps or voi ce guidance files you want, and download and install them to your device. Tip: Use Nokia Map Loader to save on mobile data transfer fees. Find a place To search for a location or point of interest by keyword, in the main view, enter the name of the place or the desired keyword in the search field, and select Search . To import a location a ddress from your contact informat ion, selec t Options > Select from Contacts . To use a location on the map, for example, as a starting point for a nearby search, to plan a route, view its details, or start navigation (extra service), press the scroll key, and select the de sired option. To browse through plac es and attractions by categorie s in yo ur area, select Option s > Search , and a category. If you search by an address, you must enter th e city an d countr y. You ca n also use an address you have saved to a contact card in Conta cts . To save a location as a favo urite place, in the desired location, press the scroll key, select Add to My places , enter a name for th e pl ace, a nd select OK . You can also save th e location to a route or a collection. To view yo ur saved places, select Options > Fa vourites > My places . 60 Maps
To send a saved place to a co mpatible d evice, in the Places view, press the scroll key, and select Send . If you send the p lace in a text message, th e information is converted to plain text. To take a screen shot of your location, sele ct Option s > Tools > Save map screen shot . The screen shot is saved in Photos. To send the sc reen shot, open Photos, and sele ct the send opt ion from the active toolba r or th e options menu, and the method. To view your browsing hist ory, places you have viewed on a map, and ro utes and co llections you have created, select Options > Favourites , and the desired option. Plan a route To plan a route to a destinat ion, scroll to the desi red destination, press the sc roll key, and select Add to route . The location is added to th e route. To add more locations to the route, select Option s > Add route point . The first sele cted stopover is the starting point. To change the order of the stopovers, press the scroll key, and select Move . Extra services for Maps You can purchase a licence and download different kinds of guides, such as city a nd travel guides, for different cit ies to your device. You can al so purchase a licence for a turn-by-turn Dri ve & Walk navi gation service with voice guidance, and a traffic information service to use it in Maps. A navigation licence is region specific (region selected when purchasi ng the lice nce), and it can be us ed only on the selected area . The downloade d guides are automatically saved to your device. The licence you p urchase for a guide or navigation can be transferre d to anot her device, but the same licence can only be active in one device at a time. To view and update your licences, select Opt ions > Extras > My licenses . Traffic and guide information and related services are generated by third parties independent of Nokia. The information may be inaccurate and incomplete t o some extent and is subject to availability. Never rely solely on the aforementioned informatio n and related services. Downloading and using extr a services may involve the transmission of large amounts of data throug h your service providerâÂÂs network. Contact your service provider for information about data transmission charges. Navigation To purchase a Drive & Walk navigation service with voice guidance or Walk navigation only, select 61 Maps
Options > Extras > Drive & Walk or Walk . You can pay for the service th rough an accepted cred it card or have the amount charged to your p hone bill (if supported by your cellular network service provider). Drive navigation To purchase a Drive & Walk navigation service, select Options > Extras > Drive & W alk . When you us e drive n avigation for t he first time, you are prompted to select th e language of t he voice gui dance an d download the vo ice guidanc e files of the selected language. You c an also download voice guidance files using Nokia Map Loader. See "Download maps" , p. 59 . To change the language later, in the Maps main view, select Options > Tools > Settings > Navigation > Voice gu idance an d a lang uage , and download the voice guidance files fo r the selected la nguage. Walk navigation To purchase a Walk nav igation service, select Options > Extras > Walk . Walk navigation differs from drive navigation in many ways: The walking route ignores any possible limitati ons to c ar navigation, such as one-wa y streets and turn restrict ions, and includes areas such as pedestrian zones and parks. It also prioritises walkways and smaller roads, an d omits highways and motorways. The length of a walking route is limited to a maxi mum of 50 kilometres (31 miles) and the trav elling speed t o a maximum of 30 km/h (18 miles/h). If the sp eed limit is exc eeded, navigation stops and is resumed once the speed is back within limits. Turn-by-turn navigation or voice gu idance are not available for Walk navigation. Instead, a big arrow shows the route and a smal l arrow at the bottom of the screen points directly to destination. Satellite view is only available for Walk navigation. Navigate to the desired destination To start navig ation to th e desired destinat ion with GPS, sele ct any loc ation on the map or in a results list, an d Options > Drive to or Walk to . To switch between di fferent views during navigation, scroll left or righ t. To stop navigation, press Stop . To select navigation options, press Options during navigation. If driving navig ation is active, a menu view with various opti ons is displayed. Some keypad keys correspond to t he options in the view. For example, press 2 to repeat a voice command, 3 to switch between day mode and night mode, and 4 to save the c urrent pl ace. 62 Maps
Traffic information To purchase a l icence for a real-time traffic information serv ice, select Options > Extras > Traffic info . The service provides information about traffic events that may affect your travel. Downloading extra serv ices may in volve t he transmission of large amo unts of data throug h your service providerâÂÂs networ k. Contact your se rvice provider for inform ation about data transmission charges. To view information abou t traffic even ts that can cause dela ys or preven t you from reaching th e destination, select Option s > Traffic in fo . The events are sh own on the map as warnin g triangles and line indicators. You ca n use automatic rerouting to avoid them. To view more informatio n about an event and the possible rerouting option s, press the scroll key. To update the traffic information, select Update traffic info . To define how ofte n the traffic information is updated automatically, sel ect Option s > Tools > Settings > Navigation > Traffic info update . To automa tically create a n alternat ive route in ca se of a traffic e vent that would caus e delays or prevent you from reaching the destin ation, select Option s > Tools > Settings > Navigation > Rerout e due to tr affic > Automatic . Guides To purchase and download different kinds of guides, such as city an d travel guides, for d ifferent cities to your device, selec t Options > Extras > Guides . The guides provide i nformation about attractions, restaurants, hotels, a nd othe r points of interest. The guides must be download ed and purchased befo re use. To browse a downloaded guide, on the My guides tab in Guides, select a guide and a subcategory (if available). To download a new guide to your device, in Guides, select the desi red guide and Download > Yes . The purchase process starts au tomat ically. Yo u can pay for the guides using an acce pted credit card or have the amount ch arged to your phone bill (if supporte d by your cel lular network serv ice provid er). To confirm the purchase, sel ect OK twice. To receive a confirmation of the purchase throug h e-mail, enter your name and e-mail address, and select OK . 63 Maps
Music folder Music player Warning: Listen to music at a moderate level. Continu ous exposure to high volume ma y damage your hearing. D o not hold the device near your ear when the lo udspeaker is in use, because the volume may be extremely loud. Music player supports files formats such as AAC, AAC , eAAC , MP3, and WMA. Music player does not necessarily support all features of a file format or all the variations of file formats. You can also use Music player to listen to podcast episodes. Podcasting is the method for delive ring audio or video content ov er the int ernet using either RSS or Atom tec h nologies for playback on mobile devices and PCs. You can transfer music from other compa tible devices to your device. See "Transfer music to your device" , p. 67 . Play a son g or a podcast episode To open Music play er, press , and select Music > Music pl ayer . Tip: You can access the Music player from the multimedia menu. You may have to refresh the music and podcast libraries after you have updated the song or podcast selection in your device. To add all availa ble items to the l ibrary, in the Mu sic player main vie w, select Options > Ref resh library . To play a song or a podcast episode, do the following: 1. Select c ategories to navigate to the song or podcast epis ode you wa nt to he ar. If the Navi wheel setting is set on in the settings, to browse the lists, slide your finger on the rim of the sc roll key . 2. To play the selected files, press the scroll key. To pause playback, press the scroll key; to resume, press the scroll key again. To stop playback, scroll down. 64 Music folder
To fast forward or rewind , press and hold the scroll key to the right o r left. To go to the next item, scroll right. To return to the beginning of the item, scroll left. To skip to the previous item, scroll left again within 2 seconds afte r a son g or podc ast has started. To switch random play ( ) on or off, select Option s > Shuffle . To repeat the current item ( ), all items ( ), or to switch repeat off, select Options > Repeat . If you play podcasts, shuffle and repeat are automatically switched off. To adjust the volume, press the volume key. To modify the to ne of the music playback, select Option s > Equaliser . To modify the balanc e and stereo image or to enhance bass, select Opt ions > Audio settings . To view a visualisation during playback, select Option s > Show visualisation . To return to the standby mode and leave the player playing in the back ground, press the end key , or to switch to anothe r open appl icatio n, press a nd hold . To close the playe r, select Op tions > Exit . Music menu Press , and select Musi c > Music p layer . The music menu shows the avail able music. To view all songs, sorted songs, pla ylists, or podcasts in the music menu, select the desired option. When the Music player is playing in the background, to open the Now p laying view, press and hold the multimedia key. Playlists Press , and select Musi c > Music p layer . To view and manage playlists, in the music menu, select Playlists . To view details of the playlist, select Options > Playlist details . Create a playlist 1. Select Options > Creat e playlis t . 2. Enter a name for the playlist, and select OK . 3. To add songs now, select Yes ; or to add the songs later, select No . 65 Music folder
4. If you select Yes , select artists to find the songs you want to include in t he playlist . Press the scroll key to add items. To show the song list unde r an artist title, scroll right. To hide the so ng list, scroll left. 5. When you have made your selections, select Done . If a compatible memory card is inserted, the playlist is saved to the memory card. To add more songs la ter, when viewing the playlist, select Options > Add songs . To add songs, albums, artists, genres, and composers to a playlist from the different views of the music menu, select an item and Options > Add to playlist > Saved playlist or New playlist . To remove a song from a playlist, select Opti ons > Remove . This does not delete the song from the device; it only removes it from t he playlist . To reorder songs in a playlist, scroll to the song you want to move, and select Option s > Mo ve . To grab songs and drop them to a new position, use the scroll key. Podca sts Press , and select Music > Music player > Podcasts . The podcast menu displays the podcasts available in the devic e. Podcast episodes ha ve three state s: never played, partially playe d, and compl etely pl ayed. If an episode is partially play ed, it plays from th e last playback position the next time it is played. If an episode is neve r played or com pletely played, it plays from the beginning . Home network wi th music player You can play cont ent stored in your Nokia device remotely on compatible de vices in a home network. You can also copy file s from your Nokia device to other devices that are c onnected to the ho me network. Home netw ork must be configured first. See "About home ne twork" , p. 10 0 . Play a song or a podcast remotely 1. Press , a nd s elec t Music > Music player . 2. Select c ategories to navigate to the song or podcast episode yo u want to h ear. Slide your finger around the rim of the sc roll key to browse the lists. 3. Select the desired song or podc ast and Options > Play > Via home network . 4. Select the device in which the fil e is played. 66 Music folder
Copy songs or podcasts wirelessly To copy or transfer media files from your device to another compatible devi ce in a home network, select a fi le and Options > Copy to home network . Content sharing does not have t o be switched on in the ho me net work sett ings. See "Set sharing on and define content" , p. 102 . Transfer music to your device You can transfer music from a compatible PC or other compatib le devices using a compatible USB data cable or Bluetooth connectivity. PC requirements for music transf er: â Microsoft Windows XP operating system (or later) â A compatible version of the Windows Media Player application. Yo u can get more detail ed information about Windows Media Player compatibility from your device's product pages on the Nokia website. â Nokia Nseries PC Suite 2.1 or later Windows Media Player 10 may cause playback delays to W MDRM te chnolo gy prote cted fi les afte r they have been transferred to your d evice. Check Microsoft support website for a hotfix to Windows Media Player 10 or get a newer compatible version of Windows Media Play er. Transfer mu sic from PC You can use the followi ng methods to transfer music: â To view your device on a PC as a mass memory device wh ere you can transfer any data fil es, make the connect ion with a compatible USB data cable or Bluetooth connectivit y. If you are using a USB c able, s elect M ass storage as the connection mode. A comp atible memory card must be inserted in the device. â To synchronise music with Windows Media Player, connect a compatible USB data cable and select Media transfer as the connection mode. A compatible memory card must be inserted in the device. To change the defa ult USB connection mode, pres s , and select Tools > Connectivity > USB > USB conn ection mode . Transfer with Windows Media Player Music synchronisation functions may vary bet ween different versions of t he Windows Media Player application. For more information, see the correspon ding Wind ows Media Play er guides an d help. The following instructions are for Windows Media Player 11. 67 Music folder
Manual synchronisatio n With manual synch ronisation, you can select the songs and playlists that yo u want to move, copy, or remove. 1. After your device is connected with Windows Media Player, select your devi ce in the navigat ion pane on the right, if more than one device is conne cted. 2. In the left navigation pane, br owse the music files on your PC which you want to synchronise. 3. Drag and drop songs to the Sync List on the right. You can see th e amount of available memory in your device above the Sync List . 4. To remove songs or albums , select an item in the Sync List , right-cl ick, an d select Remove f rom list . 5. To star t the sy nch ronisat ion, c lick Start Sync . Automatic synchronisation 1. To activate t he automatic synchronisation function in Windows Media Player, click the Sync tab, select Nokia Handset > Set Up Sync... , and check th e Sync this device automatically check box. 2. Select the p laylists you want to synchronise automat ically in the Av aila ble pl aylis ts pane, and click Add . The selected items are transferred to the Playlists to sync pane. 3. To finalise the setup for automatic synchronisation, click Finish . When the Sync this device automatically check box is checked and you connect your dev ice to the PC, the music li brary in you r device is automatica lly updated based on the pl aylists you select for synchron isation in Windo ws Media Pla yer. If no playlists have been selected, the whole PC music library is selec ted f or sync hr onisation. If there is not enough free memory in your devic e, Windows Media Player selects manual synchronisation automa tically . To stop automatic synchronisation, cl ick the Sync tab, and select Stop Sync to 'No kia Handset' . Nokia Music Store In the Nokia Music Store (network se rvice) you can search, browse, and purchase music to download to your device. To purchase musi c, you first need to register for the service. To check the Nokia Music Store avai lability in your country, visit music.nokia.com. To access the Nokia Music Store, you must have a valid internet access point in the device. 68 Music folder
To open Nokia Music Store, press , and select Music > Music stor e . To find more music in different categories of the music menu, select Options > Find in Music store . Nokia Music Store settings The availability and appearance of the music store settings may vary. The settings may also be predefined and no t editable. If th e settings are not predefined, y ou may be asked to sel ect the access point to use when connecti ng to the music store. To select the access poin t, select Default access point . In the music store, you may be able to edit the settings by selecting Options > Settings . FM transmitter About the FM transmitter The availabil ity of this feature may vary by country. Some countries may restrict the use of t he FM transmitter. Before usin g the feature in a foreign country, see www.nseries.c om/fmtransmitter to check if use is permitted. With the FM transmitte r, you can play songs in your device th rough any compatible FM receive r, such as a car radio or a home stereo system. The operatin g distance o f the FM transmi tter is up to a maximum of 3 metres (10 feet). The transmission may be subject to interference due to obstructions, such as walls , other electronic device s, or from public radio stations. The FM transmitte r may cause interf erence to nearby FM receivers operating on the same frequency. T o avoid interference, always se arch for a f ree FM frequ ency on the rece iver bef ore using the FM transmit ter. The FM transmitter cannot be used at the same time as the FM radio of your device. The operati ng freque ncy range of th e transmitter is from 88.1 to 10 7.9 MHz. When the transmitter is on and transmitting sound, is displayed in the standby mode. If the transmitter is o n, but not tran smitting anythin g, is displayed and a periodic tone sounds. If the transmitter is not transmittin g anything for several minutes, it switches off automatically. Play a son g usin g FM transmit ter To play a song stored in your device through a compatible FM receiver, do the following: 1. Press , and select Music > Music player . 2. Select a song or a playlist to be played. 3. In the Now pla ying view, select Options > FM transmitter . 69 Music folder
4. To activate th e FM transmitte r, set FM transmitter to On , and ente r a frequency that is free from other transmissions. For example, if the frequenc y 107.8 MHz is free in your area and you tune your FM receiver to it, you must also tune the FM transmitte r to 107.8 MHz. 5. Tune the rec eiving devi ce to the same frequency, and select Options > Exit . To adjust the volume, u se the volume function in the rece iving dev ice. Liste n to music a t a mode rate level. Continu ous exposure to high volume ma y damage your hearing . To deactivate the F M transmitter, se lect Options > FM transm itter , and set FM transm itter to Off . If music is not played for several minutes, the transmitter switc hes off automatic ally. FM transmit ter setti ngs Press , and select Music > FM transmitt er . To activate the FM tr ansmitter, select FM transmitter > On . To set a frequency manu ally, select F requency and enter the desired value. To list the prev iously used freque ncies, select Options > L ast fr equenc ies . Nokia Podcasting With the No kia Podcasti ng application (network service), you can search , discover, subscribe to, and download podcasts over the air, and play, manage, and share audio and video podcasts with your device. Podcas ting setting s Before using Nokia Podcas ting, set your connection and download settings. The recommended connection me thod is WLAN. Check with your servic e provider for terms an d data service fees before usin g other connections. For example, a flat rate data plan can a llow large data transfers for one mon thly fee. Connection settings To edit the connection settings, press , and select Music > Podcasti ng > Options > Settings > Connect ion . Define the following: â Default access point â Select the ac cess point to define your conn ection to the internet. â Search service URL â Define the pod cast search service to be u sed in searches. Download settings 70 Music folder
To edit the do wnload set tings, press , and select Music > Podcasting > Option s > Settings > Download . Define the following: â Save to â Define th e locatio n where yo u want to save your podcasts. â Update interval â Define how often podcasts are updated. â Next update date â Define th e date of the next automatic update. â Next update time â Define the time of next automatic update. Automatic updates only occur if a specific defaul t access point is selected and Nokia Podcasting is running. If Nokia Podcasting i s not running, the automatic updates are not activat ed. â Download limit (%) â Define the size of the memory that is used for podcast downloads. â If lim it exceed s â Define what to do if the downloads exceed the download limit. Setting the applica tion to retrieve podcasts automatically may involve the transmission of large amounts of data through your service providerâÂÂs network. Contact your service provider for information about da ta transmission ch arges. To restore the default settings, sele ct Option s > Restore d efault in th e settings view. Search podcasts Search helps you to fi nd podcasts by keyword or title. The search engine uses t he podcast search serv ice you set up in Podcasting > Op tio ns > Settings > Connecti on > Search service URL . To search for podcasts, press , select Music > Podcasting > Search , and enter the desired keywords. Tip: Search looks for podcast ti tles and keywords in descriptions, not specific episodes. Gene ral topics, suc h as football or hip-hop, usually give better results than a specific team or artist. To subscribe to marked c hannels and add th em to your podcasts , select Subs cribe . You can also add a podcast by selecting one. To start a new search, select Options > New search . To go the we bsite of the podcast, se lect Options > Open web page ( network service). To see the de tails of a podca st, select Op tion s > Descriptio n . To sen d sel ected pod cast s to anot her c ompat ible device, select Option s > Send . 71 Music folder
Dire cto ri es Directories help you t o find new podcast episodes to which to subsc ribe. To open directories, press , and select Music > Podcasting > Directories . Contents of t he direct ories change. Select the desired directory folder to update it (n etwork service). The colour of the f older chan ges, when the update is comp lete. Directorie s can include to p podcasts liste d by popularity or themed fold ers. To open the desir ed folder topic, select it an d Open . A list of podcasts is displayed. To subscribe to a podcast , select the title, and Update . After you have subscribed to episodes of a podcast, you can download, manage, and play them in the podcasts menu. To add a new directory or folder, select Options > New > Web directory or Folder . Select a title, URL of the .opml (outline proce ssor markup language) file, and Done . To edit the selected folder, web link, or web directory, select Options > Edit . To import an .opml file st or ed on y our devi ce, sele ct Options > Import OPML file . Select the location of the file, and import it. To send a directory f older as a multimedia message or using Blueto oth connectivity, select the folder and Option s > Send . When you rece ive a message with an .opml file using Bluetooth connectivity, open the file to save the file into the Received f o l d e r i n d i r e c t o r i e s . O p e n the folder to subscribe to any of the links to add to your podcasts. Downloads After you have subscribed to a podcast, from directories, search, or by entering a URL, yo u can manage, download, and play episodes in Podcasts . To see the podcasts you ha ve subscribed to, select Podcasting > Podcasts . To see individual episo de titles (an ep isode is a particular media file of a podcast), select the podcast title. To start a download , select the episode title. To download or to continue to download selected or marked episodes, select Download . You ca n download multiple episodes at the same time. To play a portio n of a po dcast during download or after partial downloading, select the podcast and Options > Play preview . 72 Music folder
Fully downloaded podcasts can be found in the Podcasts folder, but are not show n until the library is refreshed. Play and manage podcasts To display the available ep isodes from the selec ted podcast, in Podcasts , select Op en . Under each episode, you see the file format, th e size of the file, and time of the upload. When the podc ast is fully downloaded , to play t he full episode, select it and Play . T o u p d a t e t h e s e l e c t e d p o d c a s t o r m a r k e d p o d c a s t s , for a new episode, sele ct Options > Update . To stop the updatin g, select Op tions > Stop update . To add a new podcast by entering the URL of the podcast, select Opti ons > New podcast . If you do not have an access point de fined or if during packet data connection you are asked to enter a user na me and password, contact yo ur servic e provid er. To edit the UR L of the select ed podcast, select Option s > Edit . To delete a downloaded podc ast or marked podcasts from your device, select Option s > Delete . To send the sele cted podcast or marked podcast s to another compatible device as .opml files as a multimedia message or by Bluetoot h connectivit y, select Options > Send . To update, delete, and send a group of selec ted podcasts at once, select Options > Mark/ Unmark , mark the desired podcasts, and select Option s to choose the desired action. To open th e websit e of the p odcast (n etwork service), select Options > Open web pag e . Some podcasts pro vide the opportu nity to intera ct with the cr eators by commenting an d voting. T o connect to the inte rnet to do th is, select Options > View comments . Radio applications Press , select Music > Radio , and Visual Radio or Intern et radio . FM radio You can use the radio as a traditional FM radio and automatic ally tune into an d save stations. If you tune into st ations that o ffer th e Visual Radio service (network service), you will see information related to the radio programme on the display. The radio supports Radio Data System (RDS) functionality. Radio stat ions supporting RDS may display information, su ch as the name of the station. If activated in the settings, RDS also 73 Music folder
attempts to scan for an alte rnative frequen cy for the currently playing station, if the reception is weak. The radio supports radio broadcast data sy stem (RBDS) funct ional ity. Radi o stations supporting RDS may display information, such as the name of the station. If activated in the se ttings, RDS also attempts to scan for an alte rnative frequen cy for the currently playing station, if the reception is weak. When you open th e radio for the first time, a wizard helps you to save local radio sta tions (network service). If you cannot access the Vi sual Radio service, the operators and radio statio ns in your area may not support Visual Radio. Listen to the radio The FM radio depends on an antenna other than the wireless device antenna. A compatible h eadset or enhanc ement needs to be attached to the device for the FM radio to function properly . Press , and select Musi c > Rad io > Visual Radio . The quality of the radio broadcast depends on the coverage of the radio station in that particular area. You can make a call or answer an incoming call while listening to th e radio. The radio is muted when there is an activ e call. To start a statio n search, select or . To change the freque ncy manually, select Options > Ma nual tuni ng . If you have saved radio stations in your device , to go to the ne xt or previo us saved station, select or . To adjust the volume, u se the volume key. Warning: Listen to music at a moderate level. Continuous exposu re to high volume may damage your hearing. Do not hold the device near your ear when the loud speaker is in use, because the vo lume may be ext remel y loud. To listen to the radio us ing the loudspeaker, select Options > Ac tivate loudspeaker . To view available stations based on location, select Options > Sta tion directory (network service). To save the station to which you are currently tuned to your station list, select Opt ions > Save station . To open the list of your saved stations, select Options > Sta tions . To return to the st andby mode wh ile listening to th e FM radio in the back ground, select Opti ons > Play in bac kgro und . 74 Music folder
View visual content To check availability and costs and to subscribe to the service , contact y o ur service provider. To view available visual content w hen listening to a saved station that has a visual service ID, select Option s > Start visual service . Saved stations To open th e list of yo ur saved stations, select Option s > Stations . To listen to a save d station, select Options > Station > Listen . To view available visual content for a station with Visual Radio service, select Option s > Station > Start visual servic e . To change station details, select Options > Station > Edit . FM radio settings Press , and select Music > Radio > Visual Radio > Options > Settings â Alternative frequenc ies â To automatic ally search for alternative freq uenci es if t h e reception is weak, sel ect Auto scan on . â Auto-start service â To start Visual Radio automatically w hen you select a saved station that offers Visual Radio service, select Yes . â Access point â S elect the acc ess point used for the data connection when u sing Visual radio service. You do not need an access point to use the application as an FM radio. â Current region â Select the region where you currently are. This setting is displayed only if there is no network c overage when you start th e applica tion. Your device can display the identit y name of the FM station to which you are tuned if the name is being transmitted by the station. Nokia Internet Radio With the Nokia Internet Radio application (network service), you can listen to available radio stations on the internet. To list en to radio stations, you must have a WLAN or packet data access point defined in your devi ce. Listen ing to th e statio ns may involv e the transmission of large amounts of data throug h your service provider's network. The recommended connection method is WLAN. Check with your service provider for terms and data service fees before using other connect ions. For example, a flat rate data plan can all ow large data tra nsfers for a set monthly fee. Listen to intern et radio stations Press , and select Musi c > Radio > Internet radio . 75 Music folder
Warning: Listen to music at a moderate level. Continu ous exposure to high volume ma y damage your hearing. D o not hold the device near your ear when the lo udspeaker is in use, because the volume may be extremely loud. To listen to a radio station on the in ternet, do the following: 1. Select a station from your favouri tes or the station directory, or se arch stations by their name from the Nokia Internet Radio service. To add a station manual ly, select Opt ions > Add station manually . You can also browse for station links wi th the Web applica tion. Compatible links are automatically opened in the Internet Radio application . 2. Select Listen . The Now playing view opens displaying information about the cu rrently playing station and song. To stop the playback, press the scroll key; to resume, press the scroll key again. To adjust the volume, u se the volume key. To view station information, select Op tion s > Station information (not available if you hav e saved the station manually). If you are listening to a station saved in your favourites, scroll left or right to listen to the previous or next saved station. Favourite stations To view and listen to your favourite stations, press , and select Music > Radio > Internet radio > Favourites . To add a station manually to favourites, select Options > Ad d statio n manual ly . Ente r the web addres s of the st ation a nd a na me that y ou wa nt to appear in the favourites list. To add the currently playin g station to favourites, select Options > Add to Favourit es . To view station informatio n, to move a station up or down in the list, or to delet e a station from the favourites, select Options > Station and the desired option. To view only stations beginning with particular letters or nu mbers, start en tering the characte rs. Matching sta tions are displayed. Search for stations To search for radio stations in the Nokia Internet Radio servic e by their na me, do the f ollowing: 1. In the application main view, select Search . 2. Enter a station name or th e first lett ers of it in the search field , and select Search . 76 Music folder
Matching stations are displayed . To listen to a station, select it, and Listen . To save a station to your favourites, select it, and Option s > Add to Favourites . To make anot her se arc h, se lect Options > Search again . Station directory Press , and select Radio > Internet radio > Station directory . The station directory is maintained by Nok ia. If you want to list en to int ernet radio stations outside t he directory, add station information manually or browse for station links on the interne t with the Web application. Select how you want the available stations to be sorted: â Brows e by genr e â View the available radio station genres. â Brows e by langua ge â View the l anguages in which there are stations broadc asting. â Brows e by country â View the countries in which there are stations broadc asting. â Top stations â View the most popular stations in the dire ctory. Internet radio settings Press , and select Musi c > Radio > Internet radio > Optio ns > Settings . To select the d efault access point to connec t to the network, select Default access point and from the available options. Select Always ask if you want the device to ask for t he access point ev ery time you open the application. To change th e connection speeds for differen t connecti on type s, select from the following: â GPRS connection bitrate â for GPRS packet data connections â 3G connec tion bitra te â for 3G packet data connections â Wi-Fi connec tion bitrate â for WLAN connections The quality of the radio broadcast depends on the selected c onnection speed. The higher t he speed, the better the quality. To avoid buffering, use the highest qualit y only with high spee d connections. 77 Music folder
Camera About the camera Your Nokia N79 has two cameras. The main, high- resolution camera, is on th e back of the dev ice. The secondary, lower resolution camera is on the front. You can use both cameras to capture images and record videos. Your device supports an image capture resolution of 2592x19 44 pixels. T he image reso lution in this guide may appear different. The images and video clips are saved in Photos. See "Photos" , p. 89 . The produced images are in the JPEG format. Video cl ips are recorded in the MPEG-4 file format with the .mp4 file exte nsion, or in the 3GPP file format with the .3gp file extension (shari ng quali ty). See "Video settings" , p. 87 . To free memory for new images and v ideo clips, transfer files to a compat ible PC using a compatible USB data cable, for exampl e, and remove th e files from your device. The device inform s you when the memory is full. You can th en free up memory in the current storage or chan ge the memory in use. You can send images and vi deo clips in a multimedia message, as an e-mail atta ch ment, or by using othe r connection methods, such as Bluetooth connectivity or a wireless L AN connection. You can also upload them to a co mpatible online album. See " Share images and videos online " , p. 96 . Activate the camera To activate the main came ra, open the lens cover. To activ ate the ma in camera when the lens cove r is already open an d the camer a is act ive in the background, press and hol d the capture key. To close the main camera, close the lens cover. Keep a safe distance when using the f lash. Do not use the flash on people or animals at close range. Do not cover the flash whi le taking a picture. Image capture Still image camera indicators The still image camera viewfind er displays the following: 78 Camera
1 â Capture mode indicator 2 â Active toolbar (not displayed during image capture) . See "Active toolbar" , p. 79 . 3 â Battery cha rge level indi cator 4 â Image resolution indicat or 5 â Image counter (t he estimated number of images you c an capt ure usin g the c urrent imag e quality setting and memory) 6 â The device memory ( ) and memory card ( ) indicators, which show where images are saved 7 â GPS signal indicator. See "Location information" , p. 81 . Active toolbar The activ e toolbar provid es you with shortcuts to different items and sett ings before and after capturing an image or recording a video. Scroll to items, and select them by pressing the scroll key. You can also define when the act ive toolbar is visible on the displ ay. The settings in th e active toolbar retu rn to the default settings afte r you close the camera. To view the active too lbar before and after capturing an image or recording a video, select Option s > Show tool bar . To view th e active toolbar only when you need it, select Op tions > Hide toolbar . To activate th e active t oolbar when it is hidden, press the scrol l key. The toolbar is visible for 5 seconds. In the active t oolbar, select from t he following: to switch between the video mode and the image mode to select the scene to switch the video light on or off (video mode only) to select the flash mode (images only) to activate the self-time r (images only). See "You in the pictu reâÂÂself-t imer" , p. 83 . to activate t he sequenc e mode (images on ly). See "Capture images in a sequence" , p. 82 . to select a colour effect to show or hide the viewfinder grid (images only) to adjust white balance 79 Camera
to adjust the expo sure compensatio n (images only) to adjust sharpness (images only) to adjust contrast (images only) to adjust light sensitivity (images only) The icons ch ange to ref lect the cu rrent setting. Saving the captured image may take longer if you change the zoom, lighting, or colour settings. See "Aft er taking a picture" , p. 81 . See "After recording a video" , p. 85 . The active toolbar in Photos has different o ptions. See "Ac tive toolbar" , p. 91 . Capture images When capturing an image, note the following: â Use both hands to keep the camera still. â The quality of a digitally zoomed image is lower than that of a nonzoomed image. â The camera goes int o the battery sav ing mode if there are no keypresses for a moment. To continue captu ring images, press th e capture key. To capture an image, do the f ollowing: 1. If the camera is in th e video mode, select the image mode from the active toolbar. 2. To lock the focus on an object, press the capture key halfway down (main camera only, not available in landscape or sport scene. See "Act ive toolbar" , p. 79 . ). A gre en lock ed focus indicator appears on the display. If the focus was not locked, a red focus indi cator appears. Release the capture key, and press it halfway down again. Yo u can a lso capture an ima ge withou t locking the focus. 3. To cap ture an im age, press the capt ure key. Do not move the device before the image is saved and the final image appears on the screen. To zoom in or out when capturing an image, use the zoom key in your devic e. To activate the fron t camera, sele ct Options > Us e secondary camera . To capture an image, press the scroll key. To zoom in or out, scr oll up or down. To leave the camera open in the back ground and use other applications, press . To return to the camera, press and hold the ca pture key. 80 Camera
Location information You can automatically add capture location information to the file details of the captured material. For example, in the Photos application you can then view the location where an image was captured. To add location inform ation to all captured material, in Camera, select Options > Settings > Record location > Yes . Location inform ation indica tors at the bottom of the display: â â Location informati on unavailable. GPS stays on in the backgro und for several minutes. If a satellite connection is foun d and the indicator changes to within that time, all the images and video captured during that time are tagged based on the receiv ed GPS posit ioning informat ion. â â Location information is available. Location information is added to the file details. See "Still image camera settings" , p. 86 . Files with location information are indicated by in the Photos appl ication. After taking a picture After you take a pi cture, select from the follo wing options in the active tool bar (available only if Show captu red i mage is enabled in the still image camera setting s): â If you do not wan t to keep t he image, select Delete ( ). â To send the image usin g a multimedia message, e-mail, or other conn ec tion methods, such as Bluetooth conne ctivity, press the call key, or select Send ( ). See "Write and se nd messages" , p. 118 . If you are in a call, select Send to cal ler ( ). â To add the image to an album, select Add to album â To view informat ion about the image, select Details â To send the image to a compatible online album, select (available only if you have set up an account for an album). See " Share images and videos online " , p. 96 . To zoom in an image after taking it, select Option s > Go to Photos to open the image, and use the zoom ke y on the side of your device. To use the im age as wa llpaper in th e active sta ndby mode, select Options > Set as wallpaper . To set the image as a call image for a contact, select Option s > Assign to contact . 81 Camera
To return to the vi ewfinder to capture a new image, press the capture key. Flash The flash is available only in th e main camera. Keep a safe distance when using the f lash. Do not use the flash on people or animals at close range. Do not cover t he flash while taking a picture. The camera of your device has a dual LED f lash for low ligh t c ondit ions. Select the desired flash mode from the active toolbar: Au tomati c ( ), Red-eye ( ), On ( ), and Off ( ). Scenes Scenes are only available in the main camera. A scene helps you to find the right colour and lighting setting s for the current environment. The settings of each sc ene have be en set according to a certain style or environment. The default scen e in the image mode is Auto , a nd in the v ideo mo de Automatic (both indicated with ). To change the sc ene, in the act ive toolbar, selec t Scene modes and a scene. To make your o wn scene suitable for a certain environment, scroll to User defined , and select Options > Ch ange . In the u ser defined scene you can adjust different lig hting and colour settings. To c o p y t h e s e t t i n g s o f ano ther scene, sele ct Based on scene mode and the desired scene. To save the changes and return to the scenes list, press Back . To activate your own scene, sc roll to Us er defined , press the scroll key, and select Select . Capture images in a sequence The sequence mode is available only in the main camera. To set the c amera to capture image s in sequence (if enough memory is available), in th e active toolbar, select Sequence mode . To start capturing images in a quick sequence, select Burst , and press and hold the capture key. The device captures images until you release t he key or until the memory runs ou t. If you press the capture key briefly, the device captures six image in a sequence. To capture two or more images in defined interva ls, select the desire d time interval. To capture the images, press the capture k ey. To stop c apturing images, sele ct Cancel . The number of imag es taken depends on the available memory. 82 Camera
The captured images are shown in a grid on the display. To view an image, press the scroll key. If you used a time interval, only the last cap tured image is shown on the display. You can view the other images in the Photos application. You can also use the sequence mode with the self- timer. To return to th e sequence mode viewfinder, press the capture key. To switch off the sequen ce mode, in the active toolbar, select Sequence mode > Single shot . You in th e pictur eâÂÂself-timer The self-timer is available only in the main camera. Use the self-timer t o delay the capture so t hat you can incl ude yo urself in the pic ture. To set the self-timer d elay, in the ac tive toolbar, select Self timer > 2 seconds , 10 seconds , or 20 seconds . To activate the self-t imer, select Acti vate . The device beeps when the ti mer is running and the quadrangle blinks just before the im age capture. The camera takes th e picture aft er the sele cted delay elapses. To switch off the self-timer, in the active toolbar, select Self timer > Off . Tip: In th e active toolbar, select Self timer > 2 seconds to keep your hand st eady when taking a picture . Tips on taking good photographs Picture quality Use the app ropriate p icture qualit y. The camer a has several picture q uality modes. Use the highest setting to make sure that the camera produces the best picture quality availa ble. Note however, that better picture quality requ ires more storage space. For multimedia message (MMS) and e-mail attachments it may be necessary to use the smallest picture quality mode op timised for MMS sendin g. You can define the qua lity in the camera settings. See "Still image camera settings" , p. 86 . Background Use a simple backgrou nd. For portraits and other pictures with pe ople, avoid ha ving your subject in front of a cl uttere d, comple x backgroun d that may distract at tention from th e subject. Move the camera, or th e subjec t, when these conditions cannot be me t. Move the camera close r to the objec t to take clearer portra its. Depth When shooting landscapes and sceneries, add depth to your p ictures by placing objects in the 83 Camera
foreground. If the foreground object is too close to the camera, it may be blurred. Lighting conditions Changing the source, amoun t , and direction of light can change photographs dramatically. Here are some typical ligh ting condit ions: â Light source behi nd the subjec t. Avoid placing your subject in front of a strong light source. If the light source is behind the sub ject or visib le in the display, the resultin g picture may have weak contrast, may be too dark, and may contain unwant ed light effec ts. â Sidelit subject. Strong side light gives a dra matic effect but may be too harsh, resulting in too much contrast. â Light source in front of the subject. Harsh sunlight may cause th e subjects to squint their eyes. The contrast may also be too high. â Optimal lighting is found in situations where there is plenty of diffused, soft light available, for example, on a bright, partially cloudy day or on a sunny day in the shadow of trees. Video recording Video ca pture i ndicat ors The vi deo view finder disp lays the fo llowing : 1 â Capture mode indicator 2 â Video stabilisation on indicator See "Video settings" , p. 87 . 3 â Audio mute on indicator 4 â Active toolbar (not di splayed during recording). See "Active toolbar" , p. 79 . 5 â Battery ch arge level ind icator 6 â Video quality indicator. To change this setting, select Options > Settings > Video quality . 7 â Video clip file type 8 â Available recording time. When you are recording, the current video length indicator also shows the elapsed and remaining time. 9 â The location to which the vi deo clip is saved. 10 â GPS signal indicator. See "Location informat ion" , p. 81 . To display all viewfinder indicators, select Options > Sh ow icons . Select Hide icons to 84 Camera
display o nly the vi deo stat us indicators, and during the recording, the time remaining, zoom bar when zooming, and the selection keys. Record videos 1. If the camera is in th e image mode, select the video mode from the active toolbar. 2. To start recording, pre ss the capture key. Th e red reco rd ic on ( ) is displayed and a tone sounds. 3. To pause recording at any time, press Pause . Select Continue to re sume. If you pause record ing a nd do no t pre ss any k ey withi n one minute, the recording stops. To zoom in or o ut of the subject , use the zoom key in your d evice . 4. To stop recording, press the capture key. The video clip is automatically saved in Photos. Th e maximum length of a video clip is app roximately 30 seconds with sharin g quality and 90 minutes with other quality settings. To activate the front c amera, select Options > Use secondary camera . To sta rt recording a video, press the scroll key. To zoom in or out, scroll up or down. After recording a video After you record a video clip, select from the following options in th e active toolbar (available only if Show captured video is set t o On in the video settings): â To immediately play th e video clip you just recorded, select Play ( ). â If you do not want to keep the video, select Delete ( ). â To send the video clip using a multimedia message, e-mail, or ot her connection methods, such as Blue tooth co nnectivit y, press the cal l key, or select Send ( ). See "Write and send messages" , p. 118 . See "Send data usin g Bluetoot h connectivity" , p. 44 . This option is not available during a call. You may not be able to send video clips saved in the MPEG-4 file format in a multimedia messa ge. You can also send t he video clip to a person you are talking to . Select Send to ca ller ( ) (only available during a call). â To add the video clip to an album, select Add to album â To view information about the video clip, select Details â To upload the video c lip to a compatible online albu m, s elec t (only available if you have set up 85 Camera
an account for a compat ible online al bum). See " Share images and videos online " , p. 96 . â To return to the viewfinder to record a new video clip, press the captu re key. Camera settings There are two kinds o f settings for the camera: setup settings and main se ttings. The setup settings return to the defaul t settings afte r you close th e camera, but the main se ttings remain the same until you change them agai n. To adjust the setu p settings, use the opt ions in the activ e toolbar. See "Colour and lighting settings" , p. 87 . To change the main settings, in the image or video mode, select Options > Settings . Still image camera settings To change the main settings, in the image mode, select Options > Setti ngs and from the following: â Image quality â Set the resolution (main camera only). The better the image quality , the more memory the image consumes. â Add to album â Save the image to an album in Photos. â Record location â To add GPS location coordinates to each image file, select Yes . Receiving a GPS signal may take time or the signal may not be available. See "Locati on information" , p. 81 . â Show captured image â Select whether to view the capt ured image after it is taken or to continue ima ge capturing i mmediately. â Default image name â Define the default name for the captured images. â Extended digital zoom â The sett ing is only available in the main camera. On (con tinu ous) allows the zoom increments to be smooth and continuous between digital and extended digital zoom, On (p aus ed) allows the zoom increments to pause at the digital and extended digital step point, and Off allows a limited amount of zoom while retaining the i mage resolution. Use the extended zoom only whe n getting close r to the subject is more important than the final image quality. The overall quality of a digitally zoomed image is always lower than that of an unzoomed image. â Capture tone â S e t t h e t o n e th a t s o u n ds w h e n you capture an image. â Memory in u se â Select w here to store your images. â Rotate image â Select whether you want images that are captu red when the device is h eld upright to be rotate d when you ope n them in Gallery. â Restore camera settings â Restore the camera settings t o defa ult value s. 86 Camera
Colour and lighti ng setting s In the active toolbar, se lect from the following: â Flash mode ( ) (image only) â S elect the desired flash mode. â Colour tone ( ) â Select a colour effect. â Switch video light on or Switch video light off â Switch the video ligh t on or off (video mode only). â White balance ( ) â Select the current lighting condition. This allows the camera to reproduce colours more accurately. â Exposure co mpensation ( ) (image only) â If you are shooting a dark subject against a very light background, such as snow, adjust the exposure to 1 or 2 to compensate for the background brightness. For light subjects against a dark background, use -1 or -2. â Sharpn ess ( ) (image only) â Adjust the sharpness of the imag e. â Contra st ( ) (image only) â Adjust the difference bet ween the lightest and darkest parts of the image. â Ligh t sensit ivity ( ) (image only) â Inc rease the light sensitivity in low light conditions to avoid too dark images. The screen display chang es to match the settings you make. The avai lable se ttings vary depending on the selected camera. The setup settings are shooting-mode specific. Switching between the modes does not reset t he defin ed setti ngs. The setup set tings return to the default settings when you cl ose the ca mera. If you select a new scene , the colour and lighting settings are replaced by the selected scen e. You can change the setup settings afte r selecting a sc ene if needed. Video settings To change the main settings, in th e video mode, select Options > Settings and from the following: â Video quality â Set the qualit y of the video clip . Select Sharing , if you want to send the v ideo clip using a multimedia message. The clip i s recorded with QCIF resolution, i n 3GPP format, and the size is li mited to 3 00 kB ( app roxima tely 30 seco nds). You may not be able to send video clips saved in the MPEG-4 format in a mult imedia message. â Record location â To add GPS location coordinates to eac h file, select Yes . Receiving the GPS signal may take time or the signal may not be available. See "Location information", p. 81 . â Video stabilisation â Reduce the effe cts of the camera shaking when recording a video. 87 Camera
â Audio recording â Select wh ether to record sound. â Add to album â Add the record ed video clip to an album in Photos. â Show captured video â Se lect to view the first frame of the recorded video clip af ter the recording stops. To view the entire vide o clip, select Play from the active toolbar (main camera) or Option s > Play (secondary camera). â Default video name â Enter the def ault name for captu red vide o clips. â Memory in u se â Select where you want to store your video clip s. â Restore camera s ettings â Restore th e camera settings to default val ues. 88 Camera
Photos About Photos Press , select Photos and from the following: â Captu red â to show all the photos and videos you have take n â Months â to show photos and videos categorised by the mon th they where take n â Albums â to show the default albums and those you have created â Tags â to sho w tags yo u have create d for ea ch item â Downloads â to show items and videos downloaded from the web or rec eived via MMS or email â All â to vi ew all items â Share online â to post photos or v ideos to the web Files stored on your compatible memory c ard (if inserted) are indicated wit h . To open a file, press the scroll key. Video clips open and play in Video centre. See "Nokia Video Centre" , p. 106 . To copy or move files to another m emory location, select a file , Option s > Move and copy , and from the availabl e options. View im ages an d video s Press , select Photos and one of the following: â All â View all images and videos. â Captu red â View images captured an d video clips recorded with the came ra of your device. â Downloads â Vi ew downlo aded vide o clips and video clips saved in Video centre. Images and video clips can also be sent to you in a multimedia message, as an e-mail attachment, or through Bluet ooth connectivity. To be abl e to view a received image or video clip in Photos, you must first save it. 89 Photos
The images and video clip files are in a loop and ordered by date and t ime . The number of files is displayed. To browse the files one by one, scroll left or right. To browse files in groups, scroll up or down. Or, if the Navi whee l setting is activated, to browse the files, slide your finger on the rim of the scroll key. To open a file, press the sc roll key. When an image opens, to zoom in the image, press the zoom key on the side of your device. The zoom ing ratio is not stored permanent ly. To edit a video clip or an image, select Op tions > Edit . See "Edit images" , p. 94 . To see whe re an image marked with was captured, select Options > Show on map . To print your images on a compatible printer, or to store them on a compatible memory card (if inserted) for printing, select Option s > Print . See "Image pr int" , p. 95 . To m ove i mages to an albu m for later printing, select Opt ions > Ad d to albumPrint later . View and edit file details To view and edit image or video prope rties, select Options > Details and from the following: â Tags â Contains currently used tags. Se lect Add to add more tags to th e current file. See "Tags" , p. 91 . â Descriptio n â To add a free-form description of the file, select the field. â Location â This field displays the G PS location information, if available. â Title â This field contains a t humbnail image of the file and the curren t file name. To edit the name, select the fie ld. â Albums â Displays in which albums the current file is located. â Resolution â Displays the size of the image in pixels. â Duration â Displays the length of the video. â Usage rights â Sele ct View to view the DRM rights of this file. See "Licen ces" , p. 145 . Organise images and videos You can organise files in Photos as follows: â To view items in th e Tags view, add t ags to them. See "Tag s" , p. 91 . â To view items by mon ths, select Months . 90 Photos
â To create an alb um to stor e items, select Albums > Optio ns > New album . To add an image or a video clip to an album in Photos, select the it em and Add to album from the active toolbar. See "Alb ums" , p. 91 . To delete an image or vi deo clip, select the image and Delete from the ac tive toolbar. Active toolbar The active toolbar is available only whe n you have selected an image or a video clip in a view. In the activ e toolbar, scro ll up or down to different items, and select them by pressing the scroll key. The available options vary depending on the view you are in and whether you have selected an image or a video clip. To hide the toolbar, select Options > Hide icons . To activate the active toolbar when it is hidden, press the scroll key. Select from the following: to play the selected video clip to send the sele cted image or vide o clip to upload the selected image or video clip to a compatible online album (o nly availabl e if you have set up an account for a co mpatible online album). See " Share images and videos online " , p. 96 . to add the selec ted item to a n album to manage tags and other pr operties of the selected it em to delete the selec ted image or vi deo clip Albums With albums, you can convenient ly manage your images and video clips. To view the albums list in Photos, select Al bums in the main view. To create a new album in the albu ms view, select Option s > New album . To add a picture or a video clip to an alb um in Photos, scroll to a p icture or video c lip, and select Option s > Add to album . A list of albums opens. Select the album to which you want to add t he picture or video clip. The item you added to the album is still visible in Photos . To remove a file from an album, open the album, scroll to the fi le, and select Options > Remove from alb um . Tags Use tags to c ategori ze medi a items in Photos. You can create and delete tags in Tag manager. Ta g 91 Photos
manager shows the tags currently in use and the number of items associated with each tag. T o o p e n T a g m a n a g e r , s e l e c t a n i m a g e o r v i d e o c l i p and se lect Options > Details > Tag manager . To create a tag, sele ct Options > New tag . To view the list in most frequ ently used order, selec t Options > Mo st used . To view the list in al phabetical order, select Options > Al phabetica l . To see the tags you have created, select Tags in the Photos main view. The size of the tag n ame corresponds to the nu mber of items th e tag is assigned to. Select a tag to view all the images associated with the tag. To assign a tag to an image, select an image and select Options > Add tags . To remove an image from a tag, open a tag and select Options > Remov e from tag . Slide show To view your images as a slide show, select an image and Options > Slide show > Start > Play forwards or Play backwards to start the slide show. The slide show starts from th e selected file. To view o nly the sele cted images as a sl ide show, select Options > Mark/Unmark > Mark to mark images, and Options > Slide show > Start > Play forwa rds or Play backwards to start the sl ide show. Select from the following: â Continue â to resume the slide show, if paused â End â to clo se the slide show To browse the images, scroll left or right. Before starting the slide show, adjust the slide show settings. Select Opt ions > Sl ide s how > Settings , and from t he following: â Music â to add sound to the slide show. â Song â to select a music file from the list â Delay between slides â to adjust the tempo of the slide show â Transiti on â to make the slide show move smoothly from one slide to ano ther, and zoom in and out in the images randomly To adjust the volume during the slide show, use the volume key in your device. TV-out mode To view th e captured image s and video clips on a compatible TV, use a Nokia Video Connectivity Cable. 92 Photos
Before viewing the images and video clips on TV, you may need to configure th e TV-out settings for the applicable TV system and TV aspect ratio. See "Enhanc ement se tting s" , p. 162 . You cannot use the TV as th e camera viewfinder in TV-out mo de. To watch images and vi deo clips on TV, do the following: 1. Connect a Nokia Video Conn ectiv ity Cable to the video input of a compatible T V. 2. Connect the ot her end of the Nokia Video Connectivity Cable to the Nokia AV Connector of your device . 3. You may need t o select th e cable mo de. 4. Press , select Gal lery and browse for the file you want to view. The images are shown in the image viewer, and the video clips are played in Video centre. All audio, including the active calls, stereo video clip sound, key tone, and ringing tone is routed to the TV when the Nokia Video Connectivity Cable is connected to the device. You can use the device microphone normally. For all applications ot her than the fo lders in Photos , the TV screen displays what is displayed on the screen of your device. The opened image is display ed in full-screen on the TV. When you open an image in the thumbnail view while it is vi ewed on th e TV, zooming in is not available. When you open a highlighted video clip, Vi deo centre starts playing the vi deo clip o n the device displa y and t he T V scree n. See "RealPla yer " , p. 144. You can view images as a slide show on TV. All ite ms in an album or marked images are displayed on the TV in full-screen while the selected music plays. See "Slide show" , p. 92 . The qua lity of t he TV ima ge may va ry due to different resolu tion of th e devices. Wireless radio signals, such as incoming calls, may cause interference in the TV image. 93 Photos
Edit images Image editor To edit the pict ures after t aking them or the one s already saved in Photos, select Options > Edit . The image editor opens. To open a grid where y ou can select diffe rent edit options indicated by small icons, select Options > Apply effect . Yo u can crop and rotate the image; adjust the brightness, colour, contrast, and resolution; and add effects, text, clip art, or a frame to the pic ture. Crop image To crop an image, select Options > Ap ply effect > Crop , and a predefined aspect ratio from the list. To crop the image size manually, selec t Manual . If you select Manual , a cross appears in the upper left corner of the image. Use the scroll key t o select the area to crop, and select Set . Another cross appears in the l ower right corner. Again select the area to be cropp ed. To adjust the first selected area, select Back . The selec ted areas form a rectangle that forms the cropped image. If you select a predefin ed aspect ratio, select the upper left corner of the area to be cropped. To resize the highl ighted area, use the scrol l key. To fre eze the selected area, press the scroll key . To move the area with in the pict ure, use the scro ll key. T o select the area to be cropped, press the scroll key. Reduce red-eye To reduce red-eye in an image, select Options > Apply effect > Red eye reducti on . Move the cross onto the eye, and press the scro ll key. A loop appears on the displa y. T o r e s i z e t h e l o o p t o fit the size of t he eye, use the sc roll key. To reduce the redness, press the sc roll key. When you have finished edit ing the image, press Done . To save the changes and return to the previous view, press Ba ck . Useful shortcuts You can use the following shortcut s when editing images: â To view a full-screen image, press * . To return to the normal view, press * again. â To rotate an image clockwise or counterclockwise, press 3 or 1 . â To zoom in or out, pre ss 5 or 0 . â To move on a zoomed image, sc roll up, down, left, or right. 94 Photos
Edit videos The video editor supports .3gp and .mp4 v ideo file formats, and .aac, .amr, .mp3, and .wav audio file formats. It does not ne ce ssarily support al l features of a file format or all the variations of file formats. To edit video clips in Phot os, scroll to a vi deo clip, select Options > Edit , and from the following: â Merg e â to a dd an im age or a vi deo cl ip t o the beginning o r the end o f the sele cted video clip â Chang e sound â to add a new sound clip, and to replace the original so und in the video clip . â Add text â to add text to the begin ning or the end of the video clip â Cut â to trim the vide o and m ark the sections you want to keep in th e video clip To take a snapshot of a vi deo clip, in the cu t video view, sel ect Opt ions > Take sn apshot . In the thumbnail prev iew view, press th e scroll key, and select Take snapshot . Print images Image print To print images with Image print, select the image you want to pr int, and t he print option in Photos, camera, image editor, or image viewer. Use Image print to print your images using a compatible USB data cable, or Bluetooth connectivity. You can also print images using wireless LAN. If a compatible memory c ard is inserted, you can store the images to the memory card, and print them using a compatible printer. You can only print images that are in .jpeg format. The picture s taken wi th the cam era are automatically saved in .jpeg format. Printer selection To print images with Image print , select the image and the print op tion in Phot os, camera, image editor, or image viewer. When you use Image print fo r the first time, a list of available compatible printers is displayed . Select a printer. The printe r is set as the default printer. To use a printer compat ible with PictBridge, connect t he co mpatible data cable before you select the print option, and ch eck that the data c able mode is set to Image print or Ask on connection . See "USB" , p. 46 . The printer is automatically displayed when you select the print option. If the default p rinter is not available , a list of available printers is displayed. To change th e default printer , select Options > Setti ngs > Default printer . 95 Photos
Print preview After you select the print er, the selected image s are displayed using pr edefin ed layouts. To change the layout, scroll left or right to browse through th e avai lable lay outs f or the selecte d printer. If the images do no t fit o n a single page, scroll up or down to display the additi onal pages. Print settings The available options va ry depending on the capabilities of the printing de vice you selecte d. To set a defa ult printer, select Options > Default printer . To select the pa per size, select Paper size , th e siz e of paper from the list, and OK . Select Cancel to return to the pr evious view . Print on line With Print online , you can order prints of images o n l i n e d i r e c t l y t o y o u r h o m e o r t o a s t o r e w h e r e y o u can pick them up. You can also orde r different products with the selected image, such as mugs or mouse pads. The available products depend on the service provider. For more information on the application, see the guides available at the No kia pro duct support pages or your local N okia webs ite. Share images and videos online You can share images and video clips in compatible online albums, weblogs, or in other compatible online sharing services on the web. You can upload content, save unfinished posts as drafts and continue later, and view the conte nt of the albums. The supported co ntent types may vary depe nding on the service provider. To share images and videos online, you must have an acc oun t wit h an onli ne image sharing service. You can usu ally subscribe to such a service on the web page of your service provide r. Contact your service provider fo r more information. Using this service may involve the transmission of large amounts of data throug h your service provider's network. Contact your service pr ovider for information about data transmission charges. The recommended connection me thod is WLAN. To upload a file from Photos to the online service, press , and sele ct Phot os . Select an album, scroll to the desired fi le, and select Option s > Send > Post t o we b , or select the file and from the active toolbar. 96 Photos
For more information on the application and compatible servic e providers, see the No kia product support pa ges or your local N okia website. 97 Photos
Gallery To access your images, video clips, and songs, or store and organise sound clips and streaming links, press , and select Ap plica tions > Media > Gallery . Main view Press , and select Applic ations > Media > Gallery , and fr om the following: â Photos â to view images and videos in Photos. See "About Photos" , p. 89 . â Video clips â to vi e w v id eo s in Vi de o cen t re â Songs â to op en Musi c player . See "Music player" , p. 64 . â Sound clips â to listen to sound clips â Streaming links â to view and open streaming links â Presentations â to view pre sentations You can browse and open folders and copy and move items to folders. You can also create albums and copy and add items to albums. See "Albums " , p. 91 . Files stored on your compatible memory card (if inserted) are indicated with . To open a file, press the sc roll key. Video clips, RAM files, and streaming links open and play in Video centre, and music and sound clips in Music pla yer. To copy or move files to the memory card (if inserted) or to device memory, select a file and Options > Mo ve and cop y > Copy and from the available option s. Sounds This folder con tains all the soun ds you have created with the Recorder application or downloaded from the web. To listen to sound files, press , select Applications > Me dia > Gallery > Sound clips and a sound file. To pause th e playback, press the scroll key. To fast-forward or rewind, scroll right or left. To download sound s, select the dow nload link . 98 Gallery
Streaming links To open streaming links, press , and select Applicati ons > Media > Gallery > Streaming links . Select a link , and press the scroll key. To add a new streaming link, select Op tions > New link . Pres entations With presentat ions, you can view SVG (scalable vector graphics) files, such as cartoons and maps. SVG images maintain their appearance when printed or viewed w ith different screen sizes and resolutions. To view SVG files, press , and select Applicati ons > Media > Gallery > Presentations . Scroll to an image, and sel ect Option s > Play . To pause playing, select Option s > Pause . To zoom in, press 5 . To zoom out, press 0 . To rotate the image 90 degrees clockwise or counterclockwise, press 1 or 3 , respectively. To rotate the image 45 degrees, p ress 7 or 9 . To switch between full an d normal screen, press * . 99 Gallery
Home network About home network Your device is compatible with Universal Plug and Play (UPnP) and certified by Digital Living Network Alliance (DLNA). You can use a wireless LAN (WLAN) access point device or a WLAN router to create a home network. Then you ca n connect compatible UPnP devices that support WLAN to the network. Compatible devic es may be your mobile d evice, a compatible PC, sound syst em, or television, or a compatible wireless multim edia receiver connected to a sound system or a television. To us e th e WLAN fun ctio n of y our de vice i n a h ome network, you must have a working WLAN home connection setup and have other UPnP enable d home devices to connec t to the same home network. See "Wireless LAN" , p. 40 . After setting up your h ome network you can share photos, m usic, and v ideo wit h your frie nds and family at home. You are also able to store your media to a media server or retrieve media files from a compatible home server. You can play music stored in your Nokia N 79 using a DLNA certified home stereo system, con trolling the playlists and volume levels directly from your Nokia N79. You can also view images captured wit h the camera of your Nokia N79 on a compatible TV screen, all controlled with the N okia N79 over W LAN. The home network uses t he security settings of the WLAN connection. Use the home network feature in a WLAN infrastructu re network with a WLAN acc ess point devi ce and encrypt ion enable d. You can share an d synchronise media file s in your mobile device with other compatible UPnP devices using the home network. To enable the h ome network func tionality and manage the settings, press , and select Tools > Connectivity > Home media . You can also use the home ne twork to view, play, and copy compatible media files t o and from your mobile device. See "View and share media files" , p. 102 . Your device is connect ed to the home network only if you accept a connecti on request from another compatible device, or select the option to v iew, play, or copy media files on your device or search for other devices. 100 Home network
Important security information When you configure your WLAN home network, enable an encryption meth od on your access point device, then on the other device s you intend to connect to your h ome network. Refer to the documentatio n of the device s. Keep any passcodes secret and in a safe place separate from th e devices. You can view or c hange the settings of t he WLAN internet access poin t in yo ur device . See "Acce ss points" , p. 170 . If you use the ad h oc operating mod e to creat e a home network with a co mpatible device, enable one of the encryption meth ods in WLAN securi ty mode when you configure the internet access point. See "Con nectio n set tings" , p. 169 . This st ep reduces the risk of an unwanted party join ing the ad hoc network. Your device notifies you if anothe r device a ttempts to connect t o it and the h ome network. Do n ot accept connection requests from an unknown device. If you use WLA N in a network that does not have encryption, switch off shar ing your files with other devices, or do not share any private media files. See "Settings for home network" , p. 101 . Settings for home network To share media files saved in Photos with other UPnP compatible and DL NA certified devices through WLAN, you must crea te and configure your WLAN home internet acce ss point, the n configure the sett ings fo r home ne twork i n the Ho me media application. See "WLA N interne t access points" , p. 41 . See "Con nectio n sett ings" , p. 169 . The options relate d to home network are not available in applications before the settings in the Home media application have been configured. When you access the Home media applica tion for the first tim e, the setup wiza rd opens and helps you define the home ne twork settings for your device. To use the setu p wizard late r, in the Home med ia main view, select Options > Run wizard , and follow the instructions on the display. To connect a compatibl e PC to the home network, on the PC, you must install the related software. You get the software from the CD-ROM or DVD-ROM supplied with your device, or you can download it from the device su pport pages on t he Nokia website. Configure settings To configure the settings for home network, select Tools > Connectivity > Home media > Option s > Settings and from the following: 101 Home network
â Home access point â Sele ct Always ask if you want the device to ask for the home access point every time yo u connec t to the home ne twork, Create new to define a new a ccess point that is used automatica lly when you use the h ome network, or None . If your home network does not have WLAN security se tting s enab led, you get a security warning. You can continue and switch the WLAN security on later; or canc el defining the access point and first switch on the WLAN security. See "Access points" , p. 17 0 . â Device name â Enter a name for your device that is shown to the other compatible devices in the home netw ork. â Copy to â Select the memory where y ou want to save copied media files. Set sharing on and define content Select Tools > Connectivity > Home media > Share content and from the following: â Conten t sharing â A l l o w o r d e n y s h a r i n g m e d i a files with compa tible devices. Do not set content sharing on b efore you hav e configu red all the other settings. If you set content sharin g on, the other UPnP compatible devices in th e home network can view and copy your files you have selected for sharing in Images & video , and use playlists you have selected i n Music . If you do not want the other devices to access your files, set content sharing off. â Images & video â Select media files for sharing with other devices, or view the sharing status of images and v ideos. To up date the conten t of the folder, select Options > Refresh conten t . â Music â Select playlists for sharing with other devices, or view the sharing status and content of playl ists. To up date the content of th e folde r, select Options > Refresh content . View and share media files To share your media files with other UPnP compatible devices in the home network, set content sharing on. See "Set sharing on and define content" , p. 10 2 . If conte nt shar ing is off in y our device, you can still view and copy the media files stored in another home network device if it is allowed by the other device. Show media files stored in your device To show your images, videos, and sound clips in another home network device , such as a comp atible TV, do the following: 1. In Photos, select an image or a video clip; or in Gallery, select a sound clip, and Options > Show via home netwo rk . 102 Home network
2. Select a compati ble device in which the media fi l e i s s h o w n . T h e i m a g e s ar e s h o w n b o t h i n t he other home network device an d your device, and the video clips and sound clips are played only in the other device. 3. To stop sharing, select Options > Stop showing . Show media files stored in the other device To show media files that are stored on another home network device in your device (or in a compatible TV, for ex ample), do the following: 1. Press , and select Tools > Connectivity > Home media > Browse ho me . Your device starts the search of ot her compati ble device s. Device names start to appear on the display. 2. Select a device from the list. 3. Select the type o f media you want to view from the other devic e. The available file types depend on the fe atures of the other de vice. To search files with di fferent crit eria, sele ct Option s > Find . To sort the found files, select Option s > Sort by . 4. Select the media file or folder you wan t to view. 5. Press the scroll key, an d select Play or Show , and On dev ice or Via home network . 6. S e l e ct t h e d e v i c e i n w h i c h y o u w a n t t o s h o w t h e file. To ad just t he volu me when play ing a v ideo or soun d clip, scroll left or right. To stop sharing the media file, select Bac k or Stop (available when playing videos and music). Tip: You can print imag es saved in Photos through a home network wit h a UPnP compatible printer. See "Image print" , p. 95 . Content sh aring does no t have t o be switc hed on. Copy media files To copy or transfer media files from your device to another compatible de vice, such as a UPnP compatible PC, select a file in Photos and Options > Move and copy > Copy to ho me network or Move to home net. . Content sharing does not have to be switched on. To copy or transfer files from t he other device to your dev ice, sele ct a file in the ot her device and the desired copying option from the options list. Content sha ring does no t have to be swit ched on. Home synchronisation Synchronise media files You can synchronise the media fil es in your mobile device with those in your home device s. Make sure 103 Home network
that your mobile devic e is within range of your home WLAN and the home network has been set up. To set up home synchronisati on, select > Tools > Connectivity > Home media > Home sync , and complete the wizard. To run the wizard later, in Home synchronisation main view, select Options > Run wizard . To manually synchronise content in your mobile device wi th conten t in yo ur home devices, select Sync now . Synchronisation settings To change the synchronisation settings, select Options > Syn chronisat ion settin gs , and from the followin g: â Synchronisation â Set automatic or manual synchronisation. â Source devices â Select the so urce device s for synchronisation. â Memory in u se â View and select the memory used. â Memory manager â T o be i n f o r m e d wh en t h e device is running ou t of me mory, select Ask when full . Define incoming files To define and manage list s for incoming media files, press , and select Tools > Connectivity > Home media > Home sync > From home > Options > Op en . To define the ki nds of files you w ant to transfe r to your device, select them f rom the list. To edit the transfer settings, select Option s > Edit and from the following: â List name â Enter a new name for the list. â Shrink images â Shrink images to save memory. â Amount â De fine the maximum number or total size of th e files. â Starting with â Define the download order. â From â Define the date of the oldest file you want to download. Only available for imag es and video clips. â Until â Define the date of the latest file you want to download. Only available for imag es and video clips. For music files you can also specify the genre, art ist, album, and track you want to d ownload, and the source dev ice used for downlo ading. To browse files in a specific ca tegory in your dev ice, select a file type and Options > Show files . 104 Home network
To create a predef ined or cu stomised list for incoming files, select Options > New list . To change the priority order of the lists, select Option s > Change prio rity . Select the list you want to move and Grab , move the list to the new location, and select Drop to place it there. Define outgoing files To specify which types of file s in your de vice to synchr onise with your hom e media devices and how to synchronise them , press , and select Tools > Connectivity > Home media > Home sync > To home > Options > Open . Select the media type, Options , corresponding settings, and from the following: â Target devices â Select target devices to synchronise with or disa ble synchron isation. â Keep on pho ne â Select Yes to keep the media content in your de vice after synchroni sation. With images, you can also select wh ether to k eep the original or a scaled version of it in your device. Selecting the origi nal size consumes more memory. 105 Home network
Nokia Video Centre With Nokia Video Centre (n etwork service), you can download and stream video clips over the air from compatible internet vide o servic es usin g packet data or WLAN. You can also transfer video cl ips from a compa tible PC to your de vice an d view the m in Video Centre. Using packet data access po ints to do wnload vi deos may involve the transmission of larg e amounts of data through your service provi der's network. Contact your service provider for information about data transmission charges. Your devic e may ha ve predefin ed services. Service prov iders may prov ide free c ontent or charge a fee. Check the pricing in the service or from the service prov ider. View and down load vi deo clips Connect to video services 1. Press , a nd s elect Vide o cent re . 2. To connect to a service , select Video directory and the desired video service from th e service catalogue. Tip: You can ac cess the video services on the TV & video tile in the multimedia menu. View a video clip To browse th e content o f installed video services, sel ect Video feeds . To select a video clip, use the scr oll key. The co ntent of some vid eo servic es is divided into c ategories ; to browse video clips, select a category. To search for a video clip in the servi ce, select Video sear ch . Search may not be available in all services. To view information about the selected video clip, select Options > Video det ails . Some video clips can be st reamed over the air, but others must be first down loaded to your device. To download a video clip, select Options > 106 Nokia Video Centre
Download . Downl oads continue i n the background if you exit the applicatio n. The downloaded video clips are saved in My videos . To stream a video clip or view a downloaded one, select Options > Play . When th e video clip is pl aying, to cont rol the video player, us e the scroll key and the select ion keys. To adjust the volume, press the volume key. Schedule downloads Setting the a pplication to download video cl ips automatically may involve the transmission of large amounts of data through you r service provider's network. Contact your service provider for information a bout data tr a nsmission charges. To schedule an automatic do wnload for video clips in a service, select a category and Options > Schedule downloads . Video c entre automatically downloads new video clips daily at the time you define. To cancel scheduled downloads for a category, select Manual download as the download method. Video feeds The cont ent of th e installe d video service s is distributed usin g RSS fee ds. You can vi ew and manage your feeds in Video fe eds . To check your current f eed subscriptions, select Option s > Feed su bscripti ons . To refresh the content of all feeds, select Opti ons > Refres h feeds . To subscribe to new feeds, select Options > Add feed . Select Via Video directory to select a feed from the services i n the video direc tory, or Add manually to add a video feed add ress. To view the videos av ailable in a feed, scroll to it, and press the scroll key. To view information about a video, select Option s > Feed details . To update the c ontents of t he current feed, select Option s > Refresh list . To manage your account options for a given feed, if available, select Options > Manage account . To remove a feed from yo ur subscriptions, select Option s > Remove feed . You may not be able to remove some prein stalled feed s. My videos My videos is a storage place for all videos in the Video centre application. Yo u can list downloaded videos and video clips re corded w ith the dev ice camera in separate views. To open My videos, press , and select Video ce ntre > My videos . To open folders an d view video clips, u se the scro ll key. To contr ol the video p layer when th e video c lip 107 Nokia Video Centre
is play ing, use the scr oll key a nd the se lectio n keys. To adjust the volume, press the volume key. To turn sound on or off, select Options > Mu te or Unmute . To view file details, select Options > Video details . To play a downloaded video clip in the home network, s elect Op tions > Show via home network . Home network must be configured first. See "About h ome netw ork" , p. 100 . To move video clips to other folders in your device, select Options > Move to folder . To create a new folder, select New folder . To move video clips to a co mpatible mem ory card, select Options > Move to me mory card . Transfer videos from your PC Transfer your own video clips to V ideo centre f rom compatible devices using a compatible USB data cable. Video centre will di splay only the video clips which are in a format supported by your device. 1. To view your device on a PC as a mass memory device where y ou can transfer an y data files, make the connec tion with a U SB data cable. 2. Selec t Mass storage as the connection mode. A compatible memory card needs to be inserted in the device. 3. Select the vi deo clips you wa nt to copy from your PC. 4. Transfer the video c lips to E:\ My Videos in t he memory card. The transferr ed video clips appear in the My videos folder in Video centre. Video files in other folders of your device are not displayed. Video centre settings In the Video cent re main view, se lect Options > Settings and from the following: â Video service selection â Select the video servic es you want to ap pear in Vi deo centr e. You can also view the de ta ils of a video service. â Defaul t access po ints â Select Always ask or User-d efine d to choose the access points used for the data connection. Using packet data access points to downloa d files may involve the transmission of large am ounts of data through your servi ce provi der's netw ork. Cont act your servic e provide r for information about data transmission charges. 108 Nokia Video Centre
â Parental control â Activate the parental loc k for video services, if the service provider has set age limi ts for videos . â Thumbnails â Select whether to download and view thumbnail images in video feeds. 109 Nokia Video Centre
N-Gage About N-Gage N-Gage is a mobile gaming platform available for a range of compatible Nokia mobile devices. You can access N-Gage games, players, a nd content through the N-Gage appli cation on your device. You can also download games and access s o m e f e a t u r e s o n y o u r computer at www.n-ga ge.com. With N-Gage , you can do wnload and buy games, and play them by yourself or with f riends. You can download game trials to try ou t new games, and buy the ones you like. N-Gage also prov ides a way to keep in touch with other play ers, and to trac k and share your scores and other ga ming achievements. To use N-Gage, you need a GPRS or 3G conne ction. You can also use WLAN if available. You also need the connection to access on line features such as downloading games, ga me licenses, multip layer gaming, or chat. You also ne ed the connection to participate in online or multiplayer games, or to send messages to other players. All N-Gage services, where connection to N-Gage servers is required, such as game file downloading, game purch ase, onli ne ga mes, multiplayer gaming, creating a player name, chat, and messaging, involve transmission of large amounts of data. Your service provider w ill charge for data transfer. For more information abou t data transf er plans, contact your mobile service provide r. N-Gage views The N-Gage application consists of five different parts. Home opens when you start the N-G age applica tion. You can start playin g or resume the game yo u played last, che ck your current N-G age points, find more games, read your messages, or connect with an N-Gag e friend who is available to play. In My games, you can play and manage games you have downloaded to your device. You can instal l and delete games, rate and review gam es you ha ve played, and recomm end them to yo ur N-Gage friends. In My profile, you can manage your profile information and details, an d keep a record of your N-Gage gaming history. 110 N-Gage
In My friends, you can invite other N-Gage players to your friends list, and se e if th ey are onli ne and avail able to play . You c a n also send messages to your N-Gage friends. In Showroom, you can find information about N-Gage games, in cluding screenshots a nd player reviews. Yo u can also tr y out ne w games by downloading game trials, or enh ance your ga ming experience with game extras for g ames already on your devi ce. Get started Create a player name You can download, purchase, and play games without a play er name, but c reating one is recommended. A player name enables you to participate in the N-Gage commu nity, conn ect with other players, and share your gaming achievements , recommendat ions, and reviews. You also need a player name to transfer your profile details and N-Gage poin ts to another dev ice. When you start the N-Gage application and connect to the N-Gage service f or the first time, you are prompted to cre ate an N-Gag e player name. Yo u can connect to t he network, for examp le, by sett ing your availability by selecting Options > Set Availa bili ty > Avai lable to Pla y . If you alrea dy have an N-Ga ge p la y er n am e, se l ec t I have an account, and enter your user name and password to log in. To create a new player name: 1. Select Register New Account. 2. Enter your date of birth, desired player name, and password. If t he player name is already in use, N-Gage suggests a list of available similar names. 3. T o r e g i s t e r y o u r p l a y e r n a m e , e n t e r y o u r d e t a i l s , read and accept the terms and conditions, and select Register . You can also create your playe r name on the N-Gage website at www.n-gage.com. When you have c reated a play er name, e dit your settings and personal information in the private tab in My profile. Data transfer charges may apply f or player name creation on your dev ice. Start a game To start playing the ga me you last pla yed, go to Home, and select St art G ame . To resume a paused game, selec t Options > Resume Game . 111 N-Gage
Track your prog ress To view your current N-Ga ge poin ts, go to Home, and se lect Track My Progress . Play wi th fri ends To connect with N-Gage players on your friends list and to invi te them to a game, sele ct Play With Friends . N-Gage suggests a friend to play with based on your previous gaming history and the availability of you r N-Gage friends. To find a different friend to play with, select Options > View My Friends . This item is not displayed if your fri ends list is empty. See "Con nect with othe r players" , p. 113 . Play and manage games To play and manage the games downloaded and installed on your device, select My Games . The games are sorted by the la st-pl ayed da te wi th the most recent first. There are five possible types of games in My games: â Full games â These are games you have purchased with a full licence. There may be several licence types available, depending on the game and your region. â Trial games â These are full game files to which you have access only for a limited time or which have l imited co ntent. W hen the trial expires, y ou must purchase a licence to unlock the full game and continue. These games are marked with a trail banner. â Demo games â These are smaller sections of the game with only a very limited set of features and levels. These games are marked with a de mo banner. â Full expired â These are games that y ou have purchased with a limited lic ence, which is now expired. These games are marked with a clock and an arrow. â Not available â These are full games which you have removed, or whic h you have downloaded but the installation was not comple ted. These games are shown as unavailable in the games list. Also, games installed on the memory card are shown as unavail able when th e memory card has been removed. If a game extra has been downloaded but not fully installed, the respective game grap hic is also unavailable and the game cannot be played until the game extra has been installed. 112 N-Gage
Edit profile details To edit your public profile de tails, select Options > Edit Profile , open the public ta b, and select from the following: â Icon â Add an image to represe nt you. When you change the icon, N-Ga ge shows a list of all the images in your device Gallery that can be used as the icon. Se lect the i mage yo u want from the list, or use the search to find it. â Motto â Add a short personal message. To ed it the text, sele ct Change . â Favorite Game(s) â Enter the names of your favourite games. â Device Model â The model number of your device. This is defined automatically and cannot be edited. â Show Location â Select whether to display your city and country in your public profile. You can change your location in the private tab. After you update your profil e, log in to the serv ice with your play er name to ensure that the changes you made to your profile are synchronised wi th the N-Gage server. Connect with other players To connect with other N-Gage players and to manage your Friends list, go to My friends. You can search for a particular N-Gage player, invite them to your Friends list, and then see which of your friends are online and available to play. You can also send and receive privat e messages and game recommendations. Find and add friends T o i n v i t e a n N - G a g e p l a y e r t o y o u r f r i e n d s l i s t , e n t e r the player's player name to the Add a Frie nd field in the friends list. Add a message to the invitation, if needed. To send the invitation, select Send . If the player ac cepts the invitation, t he play er appears on your friends list. If you do not have any N- Gage friends and want to meet other players, go to N-Gage Arena at www.n- gage.com, and v isit the chatrooms and forums. View friend inform ation To view information about a friend, such as the friend's current N-Gage po ints o r the most rec ently played games, scroll to the player on your friends list. You must be online and connected to the N- Gage service to see the current on line status of your friends. The indica tor next to the player name shows the friendâÂÂs availability. You can send private messages to your N-Gage friends even if you are unavai lable or offline. 113 N-Gage
Sort the friends list To sort your friends by availability, player name, or N-Gage points, select Opt ions > Sort Friends By . Rate a player To r at e a p la ye r , s cr o l l t o t he p la y er on yo ur f ri e nd s list, and select Options > Rate Player . You can give a player a rating from one to five stars. The rat ing you give affects the playerâÂÂs rep utation in the community. Send messages In My Friends, you can exchange private messages with players in your Friends List . If your Friend is currently logged in to the N-Gage service, the Friend can respond to your message and you can chat one- on-one, similar to instant messaging. To view new messages received from an N-G age Friend, scroll to the frien d on your F riends list, an d select Options > View Message . Read messages are deleted automatically when y ou exit N-Gage . To view Game recommendations, select Options > View Reco mmendati on . Game recommendations are deleted auto matically a we ek after you rec eive them. To send a message to a N-Gage Friend, scroll to the Friend on your Friends List, and select Option s > Send Message . The maximum size of a Private Messa ge is 1 15 c haract ers . To send the message, select Submit . You need a GPRS, 3G, or wireless LAN connection to be able to use th e messaging feature. Data transfer charges may apply. For mo re information, contact your mobile service provider. N-Gage settings To change your N- Gage set tings, select Options > Edit Pro file and scroll to the Private tab. To edit the settings throughout the N- Gage application, select Options > N-Gage S ettings . Select from the following: â Player Name â You can e dit the Pl ayer Name only unti l you log in to the networ k for the first time. After that, y ou cannot edit it. â Personal Settings â You can define personal details, whi ch are not s hown in y our publi c profile, an d subscribe to the N- Gage newsletter. You can also define whether you want to receive notifications from your N-Gage F riends while you are playing games. â Connection Settings â You can allow N-Gage to connect to the network au tomatically w hen needed, and de fine your preferred access point and the data t ransfer limit that triggers an alert. 114 N-Gage
â Account De tails â Your purcha se preferences. When you purc hase a game, you are asked if you want to save your billin g details, including your credit card number, for faster purchasing in the future. 115 N-Gage
Messaging Only d evi ces th at hav e com pati ble f eatu res c an receive and display multimedia messages. The appearance of a message may vary dependin g on the receiving device. Messaging main view Press , and select Messaging (network service). To create a new message, select New message . Messaging contains the followin g folders: â Inbox â Received message s, except e-mail and cell broadcast messages, are stored here. â My folders â Organise your messages into folders. Tip: To avoid rewriting messages that you send often, use te xts in the Templates folder in My folders . You can al so create and save your own templ ates. â New mailbox â Connec t to you r remote mailbox to retrieve yo ur new e-mail messages, or view you r previously retrie ved e-mail messages offline. â Drafts â Draft messages that have not been sent are stored here. â Sent â The last messages that have been sent, excluding messages sent using Bluetooth connectivit y, are stored here. You can change the number of messages to save in this folder. â Outbox â Messages waiting to be sent are temporarily stored in the outbox, for example, when your devic e is outsid e network coverage. â Reports â You can request th e network to send you a delivery repo rt of the text message s and multimedia messages you have sent (network service). To enter and send servic e requests (also known as USSD commands), such as activation commands for network servic es, to your service provider, select Options > Service commands in the Messaging main view. Cell broadcast (network service) allows you to receive messages on various topi cs, such as weather or t raffic co nditions , from your service provider. For available topics and relevant topic numbers, contact your service provider. In the Messaging main view, select Option s > Cell broadcast . 116 Messaging
Cell broadcast messages cannot be received in UMTS networks. A packe t data connection may preven t cell broadcast reception. Write text Your device supports tradit ional text input an d predictive tex t input. With predicti ve text, you c an enter any letter with a single keypre ss. Predictive text input is based on a bu ilt-in dictionary to which you can add new words. When you w rite text , is displayed when you write text using traditional text input and when us ing p redic tive te xt inp ut. Traditional text input Press a number key ( 1 âÂÂ9 ) rep eatedly until the desired character appears. There are more characters available for a number key than are printed on th e key. If the next letter is loca ted on the same key as the present on e, wait un til the cursor appe ars (or scroll right to end the t ime-out period), and enter the letter. To insert a space, press 0 . To move the cursor to the next line, press 0 three times. Predictive text input With predicti ve input, you c an enter any letter w ith a single keypress. Predicti ve text input is b ased on a built-in dictionary to which you c an add n ew words. 1. To turn pred ictive text i nput on or o ff in the general settings, press , and select Tools > Settings > General > Personalisation > Langu age > Predictive text . 2. To write the desired word, press the keys 2 âÂÂ9 . Press each key only onc e for one lett er. For example, to write "Nokia" wh en the English dictionary is selected, press 6 for N, 6 for o, 5 for k, 4 for i, and 2 for a. The word suggest ion changes afte r each keypress. 3. When you finish writin g the word correctly, scroll right to confirm it, or press 0 to add a space. If the word is not correct, press * repeatedly to view the matching w ords the dictionary h as found one by one. If the ? character is shown after the word, the word is not in the di ctionar y. To add a word to the dictio nary, select Spell , enter the word using traditional text in put, and sele ct OK . The word is added to the dictionary. When the dictionary is full, a new word replaces the oldest added word. 117 Messaging
4. Start writing the next word. Tips on text input To insert a number in the lett er mode, pr ess and hold the desired number key. To switch betw een the different charac ter modes, press # . To delete a ch aracter, press C . T o de lete more tha n one character, press and hold C . The most common punctuat ion marks are available under 1 . To scroll th em through one by one, if you use traditional text input, press 1 repeatedly. If you use predictiv e text input, press 1 , and th en * repeatedly. To open a list of specia l characters, press and hold * . Tip: To select several special characters from the special characters list, press 5 after each highlighted cha racter. Change the writing language When you are writing text, you can change the writing languag e. For example, if you are writing text using a non-La tin alph abet and want to write Latin characters, such as e-mail or web addresses, you may need to change the writing language. To change the writing lang uage, select Op tion s > Writing language and a writing language tha t uses Latin characters. After changing the writin g language, for example, if you press 6 repeatedly to reach a specific charac ter, c hanging the wri ting l anguage gives you access to char acte rs in a diff erent or der. Edit text and lists To copy and past e text, wh ile pressin g and holding # , scroll lef t or right to highlight te xt. To copy th e text to the clipboard, while still holding # , select Copy . To insert the text in to a document, press and hold # , and sel ect Paste . To mark an item in a list , scroll to it, and press # . To mark multiple items in a list, press and hold # while you scroll up or do wn. To end the selection , stop scrolling, and release # . Write and send messa ges Press , and select Mess aging . Before yo u can create a multimedia message or write an e- mail, y ou must have th e correct connection settin gs in plac e. See "Define the e- mail settings" , p. 121 . 118 Messaging
The wireless network may limit the size of MMS messages. If the inserted picture exc eeds this limit the devi ce ma y make it smaller so that it can be sent by MMS. Check the size limit of e- mail messages with your service provider. If you attempt to send an e-mail message that exceeds the size limit of the e-mail server, the message is left in the Outbox folder, an d the devi ce attempts to resend it periodically. Send ing an e-mail requires a data connection, and continuous attempts to resend the e-mail may increase you r phone bill. In the Outbox folder, you can delete such a message, or move it to the Drafts folder. 1. Select New message > Message to send a text or multimedia message (MMS), Audio messa ge to send a multimedia message that includes one soun d clip, or E-mail to send an e- mail message. 2. In the To field, press the scro ll key to sele ct recipients or groups from co ntacts, or en ter the recipientâÂÂs pho ne number or e-ma il address. To add a semicolon ( ; ) that separates the recipients, press * . You can also cop y and paste the number or address from the clipboard. 3. In the Subje ct field, en ter the subje ct of the e- mail. To change the fields th at are visible, select Options > Message header fields . 4. In the message field, wri te the message. To insert a template or note, select Options > Insert > Insert text > Template , or Not e . 5. To add a media object to a multimedia message, select Options > Inser t content , the object type or source, and the desired object. To insert a business card, slide, note, or some other file to the message, select Options > Inse rt content > Insert other . 6. To capture an image or record a video clip or sound for a multimedia message, select Options > Insert > Inser t image > New , Insert video clip > New , or Insert sound clip > New . 7. To add an attachment to an e-mail, select Options and the attachment type. E-mail attachments are indicated by . 8. To send the me ssage, select Options > Send , or press the call key. Note: The message sent icon or text on your d e v i c e s c r e e n d o e s n o t i n d i c a t e t h a t t h e m e s s a g e i s received at the intend ed destination. 119 Messaging
Your device supports text messages beyond the limit for a single messag e. Longer message s are sent as two or more messa ges. Your service provider may charge accordingly. Ch aracters with accents or other marks, and characte rs fr om so me l angu age options, take up more space, and limit the num ber of characters that can be sent in a single message. You may not be able to send video cl ips that are saved in the MP4 file format o r that exceed the size limit of the wireless network in a multime dia message. Tip: You can c ombine images, video, soun d, and text to a p resentation and se nd it in a multimedia message. S tart to create a multimedia message, and select Op tions > Insert > Insert presentation . The option is shown only if MMS creati on mode is set to Guided or Free . See "Multimedia message settings" , p. 124 . Messaging inbox Receive messages Press , and select Messaging > Inbox . In the Inbox folder, indicates an unread text message, an unread multimedia message, an unread audio message, and data received through Bluetoot h connectivity. When you re ceive a message, an d 1 new message are shown in the standby mode. To open the message, select Sho w . To open a message in Inbox, scroll to it, and pre ss the scroll key. To reply to a received message, select Options > Reply . Multimedia m essages Important: Exercise caut ion when opening messages. Messages may conta in malicious software or otherwise be harmful to your device or PC. You may receive a notification that a multimedia message is waiting in the multimedia message centre. To start a packet data connec tion to retrieve the message to your device, select Options > Retrieve . When you o pen a mu ltimedia message ( ), you may see an image and a message. is shown if sound is included, or if video is inclu ded. To pl ay the sound or the v ideo, select t he indicator. To see the media ob jects that have been inclu ded in the multimedia message, select Opti ons > Objects . If the message in cludes a multimedia presentation, is displayed. To play the pr esentation, select the indicator . 120 Messaging
Data, settings, and web se rvice messag es Your device can recei ve many kinds of messages that contain data, such as business cards, ringing tones, operator logos, ca lendar entries, and e-mail notifications. You may al so receive setti ngs from your service provider or company information management department in a co nfiguration message. To save the data from the message, select Option s and the corresp onding option. Web service messages are notifications (for example, news headl ines) and may contain a text message or a link. For avail ability and subscription, contact you r se rvice provider. Message reader With Message reader yo u can l isten to text, multimedia, and audio messages and e-mail. To change the message reading settings in the Speech application, select Option s > Speech . See "Speech " , p. 159 . To listen to new messages or e-mail, in the standby mode, press and hold the left select ion key un til Message reader starts. To listen to messages from your Inbox or e-mail from your Mailbox, select a message and Opt ions > Listen . To stop the reading, press the end key. To pause and continue the reading, press the scrol l key. To skip to the next message , scroll right. To replay the current message or e-mail, scroll left. To skip to the previous messa ge, scroll left in the beginning of the message. To adjust the volume, scroll up or down. To view the cu rrent message or e-mail in text format witho ut the sound, select Options > View . Mailbox Define the e-mail settings Tip: To define your mailbox settings, press , and select Messa ging > Mailboxes . To use e-mail, you must hav e a valid internet acc ess point (IAP) in the device and define your e-mail settings correctly . See "Access points" , p. 17 0 . See "E-mail settings" , p. 125 . You must have a separate e-mail account. Follow the instructions given by your remote mailbox and internet service provider (ISP). If you select New mailbox in the Messaging main view an d have not s et up your e -mail accou nt, you 121 Messaging
are pro mpted to do so. T o start creati ng the e-mai l settings with the mailbox gu ide, select Start . When you creat e a new mailbox, the name you giv e to the mail box replaces New mailbox in the Messaging main view. You can have up to six mailboxes. Open the mailbox Press , and select Messaging and a mailbox. When you open t he mailbox, the d evice asks if you want to co nnect to th e mailbox ( Connect t o mailbox? ). To connect to your mailbo x and retrieve new e-mail headings or messages, select Yes . When you view messages online, you are continuousl y connected to a remote mailbox using a data connection. To view previous ly retrieved e-mail messages offline, select No . To create a new e-mail message, select New message > E-mail in the Messa ging main view or Options > Create mess age > E-mail in your mailbox. See "Write and send messages" , p. 118 . Retrieve e-mail messages Press , and select Messaging and a mailbox. If you are offline, select Op tions > Connect to start a connection to th e remote mailbox. Important: Exercise caut ion when opening messages. Messages may conta in malicious software or otherwise be harmful to your device or PC. 1. When you have an op en connection to a remote mailbox, select Option s > Retrieve e-mail > New to retrieve all new messages, Selected to retrieve only selected messages, or All to retrieve all messages from the mailbox. To stop retrieving messages, select Cancel . 2. To close the c onnection and view the e-mail messages offline, select Options > Disconnect . 3. To open an e-mail message, press the scroll key. If the e-mail message has not been retrieved and you are offline, you a re asked if you want to retrieve thi s message from the ma ilbox. To view e-mail attachmen ts, open the message, and select the attachmen t field indicated by . If the indicator is unava ilable, the messa ge has not been retrieved to the device ; select Op tions > Retrieve . To retrieve e-mail messa ges automatically, select Options > E-m ail settings > Automatic retrieval . See "Automatic retrieval settings" , p. 127 . 122 Messaging
Setting the device to retr ieve e-mail automatically may involve the tra nsmissi on of large amounts of data through your service provider's network. Contact your service provid er for information about data transmission charges. Delete e-mail messages Press , and select Messa ging and a mailbox. To delete the contents of an e-mail message from the device while stil l re taining it in the remote mailbox, select Opti ons > Delete . In Delete e- mail from: , selec t Phone only . The device mirrors the e-mail heading s in the remote mailbox. Although you delete the message content, th e e-mail headin g stays in your dev ice. If you want to remove the heading as well , you must first delete t he e-mail message fro m your remote mailbox, then make a connection from your device to the remote mailbox again to update the st atus. To delete an e-mail from th e device and the remote mailbox, select Opti ons > Delete > Phone and server . To cancel deleting an e -mail from the device and server, scroll to an e-mail that has been marked to be deleted during the next connection , and select Options > Restore . Disconnect from the mailbox When you are online, to end th e data connection to the rem ote mai lbox, sele ct Options > Disconnect . View messag es on a SIM c ard Press , and select Messa ging . Before you c an view S IM messages, you must copy them to a fo lder in yo ur device. 1. In the Messaging ma in view, selec t Options > SIM messages . 2. Select Options > Mark/Un mark > Mark or Mark all to mark messages. 3. Select Options > Cop y . A list of folders opens. 4. To start copying, select a folder and OK . T o view the messages, op en the f older. Messaging settings The settings may be precon figured in you r device, or you may receiv e them in a message. To enter settings manually, fill in all fields marked with Must be defined or an asterisk. Some or all message cent res or access points may be preset for yo ur device by you r servic e provide r, 123 Messaging
and you may not be able to change, create, edit, or remove them. Text message setti ngs Press , and select Messaging > Options > Settings > Text message . Select from the following: â Message cen tres â V iew a list of all text message cent res that hav e been d efined. â Message cen tre in use â Select which message centre to use to de liver text messages. â Character encoding â To use character conversion to another encoding syst em when available, select Reduced support . â Receive report â Select whether the netw ork sends delivery reports on your messages (network service). â Message validity â Select how long the message centre re sends your message if the first attempt fails (network service). If the message cannot be sent withi n the validity period, the message is deleted from the message centre. â Message sent as â Contact your service provider to learn if your message centre is able to convert t ext messages into these other formats. â Preferred connection â S elect the conn ection to use. â Reply via same centre â Select whether you want the reply message to be sent using the same text message ce ntre numbe r (network service). Multimedia m essage settings Press , and select Mess aging > Option s > Settings > Multimedia messa ge . Select from the following: â Image size â Define the size of the image in a multimedia message. â MMS creation mo de â If you select Gu ided , the device info rms you if yo u try to send a message that may not be supp orted by the reci pient. If you select Restricted , the de vice prevents y ou from sending messages that ma y not be supported. To include conten t in your messages with out notifications, select Free . â Access poin t in use â Select which access point is used as the pre ferred connec tion. â Multimedia retrieval â Se lect how you want to receive messages. To receive messages automatically in your home cellula r network, select Auto in home netw. . Outside your home cellular network, you receive a notification tha t there is a message to re trieve in the multimedia message centre. 124 Messaging
Outside your home cellular network, sending and receiving multimedia messa ges may cost you more. If you select Multimedia retr ieval > Always automatic , your devi ce autom atica lly makes an active pack et data co nnection to retrieve th e message both in and outside your home cellular network. â Allow anonym ous msgs. â Select whether you want to reject me ssages from an anony mous sender. â Receive adverts â Define whether you w ant to receive multimedia message advertisements. â Receive reports â S elect whe ther you want the status of the sent message t o b e s h o w n i n t h e l o g (network servic e). â Deny repo rt send ing â Select whether you want to prevent your de vice from sending delivery reports of received messages. â Message vali dity â Select for how long the message centre resends yo ur message if the fi rst attempt fails ( network service). If the message cannot be sent within this time period, the message is deleted from the message centre. E-mail setti ngs Manage mailboxes Press , and select Messa ging > Options > Settings > E-ma il . To select which mailbox you want to use to send e- mail, select Mailbox in use and a mai lbo x. To remove a mailbox and its messages from your device, select Mailboxes , scroll to the desired mailbox, and press C . To create a new mailbox, in Mailboxes , sele ct Option s > New mailbox . The name you give to the new mailbox replaces New mailbox in the Messaging main view. You can have up t o six mailboxes. Select Mailboxes and a mailbox to change the connection settin gs, user settings, re trieval settings, and aut omatic retrieval sett ings. Connection settings Press , and select Messa ging > Options > Setti ngs > E-mail > Mailboxes , a mailbox, and Connection se ttings . To edit the se ttings fo r the e -mail yo u receive, se lect Incoming e-mail , and from the following: â User name â Enter your user name given to you by your service provider. â Passwo rd â Enter your password. If you leave this field blank, you are prompted for the password when you try to connect to your remote mailbox. 125 Messaging
â Incoming mail server â Enter the IP address or host name of the mail server that receives your e-mail. â Access point in use â Select an internet access point (IA P). See "Access po ints" , p. 170 . â Mailbox name â Enter a name for the mailbox. â Mailbox typ e â Defines the e-mail protoc ol that your remote mailbox service provider recommends. The options are POP3 and IMAP4 . This setting cannot be changed. â Security â Select the security op tion used to secure the connection to the remot e mailbox. â Port â Define a port for the connection. â APOP secure login (for POP3 only) â Use with the POP3 proto col to encrypt th e sending of passwords to the remote e-mail server while connecting to the mailbox. To edit the settings for the e-mail you send, se lect Outgoing e-mail and from the following: â My e-mail address â E nter the e-ma il address given to you by your se rvice provid er. â Outgoing mail server â Enter the IP address or host name of the mail server that sends your e- mail. You may only be able to use t he outgoing server of your service provider. Contact your service provider for more information. The settings for User name , Password, Access point in us e , Security , and Port are si milar to the ones in Incoming e-mail . User settings Press , and select Mess aging > Option s > Settings > E-mail > Mailboxes , a mailbox, and User settings . Select from the following: â My name â Enter your own name. Your name replaces your e-mail address in t he recipientâÂÂs device when the recipientâÂÂs dev ice supports t his function. â Send message â Define how e-ma il is sent from your device. Sele ct Immediately for the d evice to connec t to the ma ilbox when you select Send message . If you se lect During next conn. , e - mail is sent when the connect ion to the remote mailbox is available. â Send copy to self â Sel ect whether you want t o s e n d a c o p y o f t h e e - m a i l t o y o u r o w n m a i l b o x . â Include sign ature â Select wh ether you want to attach a signature to your e-mail messages. â New e-mail alerts â Select whe ther you want to receive t he new e-mail indication s (a tone, a note, and a mail indicator) when new mail is received. Retrieval settings Press , and select Mess aging > Option s > Settings > E-mail > Mailboxes , a mailbox, and Retrieval settings . Select from the following: 126 Messaging
â E-mail retrieval â Define which parts of the e- mail are retrieved: Headers only , Size limit (POP3) , or Msgs. & attachs. (POP3). â Retrieval amount â Define how many new e- mail messages are retrieved to the mailbox. â IMAP4 folder path (f or IMAP4 only) â De fine the folder path for folder s to be subscribed. â Folder sub scriptions (for I MAP4 only) â Subscribe to other folders in the remote mailbox, and retrieve co ntent from those fo lders. Automatic retrieval settin gs Press , and select Messa ging > Options > Settings > E-ma il > Mailbox es , a mailbox, and Automati c retri eval . Select from the following: â E-mail notifications â To automatically retrie ve the h eadings t o your de vice whe n you receive new e-mail in your remote mailbox, select Auto-u pdate or Only in home netw. . â E-mail retrieval â To automatic ally retrieve the headings of new e-mail messages from your remote mailbox at de fined times, select Enabled or Only in home netw . . Define when and how often the messages are retrieved. E-mail notifications and E-mail retrieval cannot be active at the same time. Setting the device to retr ieve e-mail automatically may involve the tra nsmissi on of large amounts of data through you r service provider's network. Contact your service provid er for information about data transmission charges. Web service m essage setting s Press , and select Messa ging > Options > Setti ngs > Service message . Select whet her you want to receive service messages. If you want to set the device to automatically activate the browser and start a network co nnecti on to retrie ve conte nt when you receive a service message, select Downl oad messages > Automatically . Cell broadcast se ttings Check the available topics and related topic numbers with your service provider. Press , and select Messa ging > Options > Setti ngs > Cell broadcast . Select from the following: â Reception â Select whethe r you want to receive cell broadcast messages. â Language â Select the languages in which you want to receive messages: All , Selected , or Other . â Topic detection â Select whether the device automatically search es for new topic numbers, 127 Messaging
and saves the n ew numbers without a name to the topic list. Other settings Press , and select Messaging > Options > Settings > Other . Select from the following: â Save sent messages â Select whether you want to save a copy of the text messages, multimedia messages, or e-mail that you sen d to the Sent folder. â Number of saved msgs. â Define how many sent messages are saved to the sent folder at a time. When the limit is reached, the oldest message is deleted. â Memory in us e â Select the memory where you want to save your messag es. 128 Messaging
Make calls Voice calls 1. In the standby mode, e nter the ph one number, including the area code. To remove a number, press C . For international calls, press * twice fo r the character (which replaces the international access code), and enter t he country code, area code (omit the leading zero if necessary), and phone number. The character as a replacement for the internation al access code may not work in all regions. In this ca se, enter the international access code directly. 2. To make the call, press the call key. 3. To end the call (or to cancel the call attempt), press the en d key. Pressing the end key always ends a call, even if another applica tion is active. To make a call from Contacts, press , and select Contacts . Scroll to the desired name, or enter the first letters of t he name to the search field . To call the contact, press th e call key. If you have saved several numbers for a contact, select the desired number from the list, and press the call key. Options during a call To adjust the v olume during a call, use the volume key on the side of you r device . You can al so use the scroll key. If you have set the volume to Mute , select Unmute fi rst. To send an image or a vi deo clip in a multimedia message to the other participant of the call, select Option s > Send MMS (in UMTS networks only). You can edit the messag e and change the re cipient before sending. Press the ca ll key to send the file to a compatible device (network service). To put an active voice call on h old while answering another inco ming cal l, select Op tion s > Hold . To switch bet ween the ac tive and t he held call, select Option s > Swap . To send DTMF tone strings (for example, a password), select Option s > Se nd DTM F . Enter the DTMF string or search for it in Contacts. To enter a wait character (w) or a pa use character (p), press * repeatedly . To send the to ne, select OK . You can add DTMF tones to the p hone number or D TMF fields in a contact card. 129 Make calls
Tip: When you h ave onl y one acti ve voice call, to put the call o n hold, press the call key. To activate the call, press t he call key again. During an active call , to route the sound from the handset to the loudspeaker, select Option s > Activ ate lo udspeak er . If you have atta ched a compatible headset with B luetoot h connectivi ty, to route the sound to the headset, select Options > Activ ate han dsfree . To switch back to th e handset, select Options > Activate handset . To end an active call and repl ace it by answering the waiting call, select Opt ions > Replace . If you have several calls active, to end them all, select Options > End all calls . Many of the options that you can use during a voice call are network services. Voice and video mailboxes To call your voice or v ideo mailbox (ne twork services, video mailbox av ailable only in the UMTS network), press and hold 1 in the st andby mode, and se lect Voic e mail box or Video mail box . To change the phone num ber of your voice or v ideo mailbox, press , and select Tools > Util ities > Call mail box , a mailbox, and Optio ns > Change number . Enter the number (obtained from your network service pr ovider), and select OK . Answer or decline a call To answer the call, press the call key. T o m u t e t h e r i n g i n g t o n e o f a n i n c o m i n g c a l l , s e l e c t Silence . If you do not want to answer a call, press the end key. If you activate the Ca ll divert > Voice calls > If busy function in phone settin gs to forward calls, declining an incoming cal l also forwards the call. When you s elect Silence to mute the ring ing tone of an incoming call, you can send a text message without rejecting the call, informing the cal ler that you canno t answer t he call. Sele ct Options > Send message . To set up this opti on and write a standard text message, select Tools > Settings > Phone > Call > Reject call with message . Make a conference call 1. Make a call to the first part icipant. 2. To make a call to anot her participant, select Options > New call . The first call is pu t on hold. 130 Make calls
3. When the new call is answered, to join the first participant in the conferen ce call, select Option s > Conference . To add a new person to the call, repeat step 2, and select Option s > Conferen ce > Ad d to confere nce . Yo ur dev ice suppor ts confere nce calls between a maximum of six participants, including yourself. To have a private conver sation with one of the participants, select Options > Conference > Private . Select a par tic ipant, and sel ect Private . The conferen ce call is put on hold on your device. The other part icipants can still continue t he confer ence call. After you f inish the private conv ersation, select Options > Conferen ce to re turn to the co nference call. To drop a participant, select Options > Conferen ce > Drop participant , scroll to the participant, and select Drop . 4. To end th e active conferenc e call, press th e end key. 1-touch dial a phone number To activate the feature, press , and se lect Tools > Settings > Phone > Ca ll > Speed dialling . To assign a phone num ber to on e of the num ber keys (2-9), press , and select Tools > Utilitie s > Speed di al . Scroll to the key to which you want to assign the phone number, and select Options > Assign . 1 i s reserved for the voice or video mailbox, and for starting the web browser. To call in the sta ndby mode, press the assigned key and the call key. Call waiting You can answe r a call whil e you have an other call in p r o g r e s s . T o a c t i v a t e c a l l w a i t i n g , s e l e c t Settings > Phone > Call > Call waiting (network service). To answer the waiting call , press the call key. Th e first call is put on hold. To switch b etween t h e two calls, select Swap . To connect an incoming call or a call on hold w ith an active call and to disconne ct yourself from the calls, select Options > Transfer . To end th e activ e call, press the end key. To end both calls, select Option s > End all calls . Voice dialling Your device supports e nhanced voice commands. Enhanced voice commands are not depende nt on the speakerâÂÂs voice, so do not need to record voice 131 Make calls
tags in advance. The device creates a voice tag for the entries in c ontacts, and compares the spoken voice tag to it. The voice recognition in the device adapts to t he main userâÂÂs voice to recognise the voice commands better. The voice tag for a contact is the name or nickname that is saved on t he contact card. To listen to the synthesised voice tag, op en a contact card, and select Options > Voice tag details > Play voice tag . Make a call with a voice tag Note: Using voice tags may be difficu lt in a noisy environment or during an eme rgency, so you should n ot rely solely u pon voi ce dial ling i n all circumstances. When you use voice dia lling, the loudspeak er is in u s e. Ho l d t h e d e v i ce a t a short distance awa y when you say the voice tag. 1. To start voice diall ing, in the stan dby mode, press and hold the righ t selection key. If a compatible headset wit h the head set key is attached, press and hold the h eadset key to start voice dialling. 2. A short tone sounds, and Spea k now is displayed. Say clearly the name or nickname that is saved on the contact card. 3. The device plays a synthe sised voice tag for the recognise d contact in t he selected d evice language, and displays the name and number. If you do not w ant to ca ll that contac t, select Next within 2.5 seconds to view a list of other matches or Quit to cancel voice dialling. If several numbers are saved under the name, the device selects the default number if it has been set. If not, the devi ce sele ct s the first available number in a contact card. Make a video call When you make a v ideo call (network service), you can see a real-time, tw o-way vi deo between you and the recip ient of th e call. The live vid eo image, or video image ca ptured by th e camera in you r device is shown to the video call recipient. To be able to make a video call, you must have a USIM card and be in the coverage of a UMTS network. For availability of and subscription to video call services, contact your ne twork service provider. A video call ca n only be made between two parties. The v ideo c all ca n be ma de to a compatible mobile device or an ISDN client. Video calls cannot be made while another voice, v ideo, or data call is active. Icons 132 Make calls
You a re not rece iving video (t he recipient is not sending video or th e network is not transmittin g it). You have denied video se nding from your device. To send a still image instead, select Tools > Settings > Phone > Call > Image in video call . Even if you denied vi deo sending durin g a video call, the call is still charged as a video call. Check the pricing with your service provider. 1. To start a video c all, enter the p hone number in the standby mode, or select Contacts and a contact. 2. Select Options > Call > Vid eo ca ll . The second ary camera on th e front is used by default for video calls. St arting a video call may take a while. Waiting for video image is shown. If the call is not successful (for example, video calls are not supported by th e network, or the receiving device is not compatible), you are asked if you want to try a normal call or send a text or multimedia message instead. The video call is active when you see two video images, and hear the sound through th e loudspeaker. The call rec ipient may deny video sending ( ), in whic h case you only hear th e sound and may see a still image or a grey backgro und graphic. 3. To end the video call, p ress the en d key. Options during a video call To change between showing video or hearing only sound, select Options > Enabl e , or Disable and the desired option. To use the main camera to send video, select Option s > Use main camera . To switch back to the secon dary ca mera, select Options > Use second ary came ra . To take a snapshot of the vide o you ar e sending, select Opt ions > Send snapshot . Video sending is paused and the snapshot is shown to the recipient. The snapshot is not saved. Press Cancel to resume sending video. To zoom your image in or out, select Options > Zoom . To route the aud io to a compatible hea dset with Bluetooth connectivity atta ched to your device, select Options > Activate hands free . To route th e audio back to the loudspeaker of your device, select Option s > Acti vate h and set . To chang e the v ide o quality, select Options > Video preference . Normal quality is framerate 10 fps. Use Clearer detail for small, static details. Use Smoothe r moti on for moving images. To adjust the volume duri ng a video call, use the volume key on the side of the device. 133 Make calls
Answer or declin e a video call When a video call arrives, is displayed. To answer the video call, press the call key. Allow video image to be s ent to call er? is displayed. To start sending live video image, select Yes . If you do no t activate the video call, yo u only hear the sound of the caller. A grey scre en replac es the video image. To replace the grey sc reen with a still image cap tured by the camera in your device, sele ct Tools > Settings > Phone > Ca ll > Image in video c all . To end the video call, p ress the en d key. Video sharing Use video sharing (network service) to send live video or a video clip from y our mobile devi ce to another compatible mobile device during a voice call. The loudspeaker is act ive when y ou activate V ideo sharing. If you do not want to use the loudspea ker for the voice call while you share video, y ou can also use a compatible headset. Video sharing requir ements Video sharing requires a UMTS connection . For more informat ion on t he se rvice, UMTS network availability, and fees associated with using this service, contact your service provider. To use video sharing you must do the following: â Ensure tha t your devi ce is set up for person-to- person connections. â Ensure you have an active UMTS connection and are within UMTS network c overage. If you move outside the UMTS network du ring a video sharing session, the sharing stop s while your voice call continues. â Ensure that both the sender and recipient are registered to the UMT S network. If you in vite someone to a sharing session and the recipientâÂÂs device is not within UMTS network coverage, does not have video sharing installed, or person- to-person conn ections set u p, the recipi ent does not receive invi tations. You receive an error message that indicate s that the re cipient canno t accept th e invitati on. Settings To set up v ideo sharing , you need person -to-perso n and UMTS connection settings. 134 Make calls
Person-to-person co nnection settings A person-to- person conn ection is also known as a Session Initiation Protocol (SIP) connection. The SIP profile settings must be configu red in your device before you can use video sharing . Ask your service provider for the SIP prof ile settings, and save them in your device. Your serv ice provider may send you the settings or give you a list of the needed parameters. To add a SIP address to a contact card: 1. Press , and select Contacts . 2. Open the contact card (or start a new card for that person). 3. Select Options > Add detail > Share video . 4. Enter the SIP address in the format username@domainname (you ca n use an IP address instead of a domain name). If you do not know the SIP address for the contact, you can use t he phon e number of the recipient, including the country code, to share video (if supported by the network service provider). UMTS connection settings To set up y our UMTS conne ction: â Contact your servic e provid er to establish an agreement for you to use t he UMTS network. â Ensure that your devi ce UMTS access point connection settings are confi gured properly. Share live video or video clips During an acti ve voic e call , select Options > Shar e video : 1. To share live video du ring the call, select Live vide o . To share a video clip, select Recorded clip and the clip you wa nt to share. You may need to convert th e video clip into a suitable format to be able to share it. If Clip must be converted for sharing. Continue? is shown, select OK . 2. Your device sen ds the invitation to th e SIP address. If the recipient has several SIP addresses or phone numbers including the country code saved in Contacts, select the desired address or number. If the SIP add ress or phone nu mber of th e recipien t is not available, enter the address or nu mber of th e recipien t including the country code, and select OK to send the in vitation. Sharin g begin s automa ticall y when the r ecipie nt accepts th e invit ation. Options during video sharing t o z o o m t h e v i d e o ( a v a i l a b l e f o r s e n d e r o n l y ) 135 Make calls
to adjust the brig htness (available for sender only) or to mute or unmute the microphone or to switch the lo udspeaker on and off to switch to full sc reen mode (available for receiver only) 3. To end the sharing session, select Stop . To end the voice call, p ress the end ke y. When you end the call, video sharing also ends. To save the live video you shared, select Save when prompted. The shared v ideo is saved in Photos. If you access other appl ications whil e you are sharing a video clip, the sha ring is paused. To return to the vide o sharing vi ew and to continue sharing, in the ac tive stan dby mode, select Options > Continue . Accept an invi tatio n You cannot receiv e invitations when yo u are outside UMTS network coverage. When someone sends you a video sharing invitation, your devic e ri ngs and the sender's name or SIP address are displayed. To accept the invitati on, select Accept . To reject the invitation, select Reject , or press the end key. Pressing the end key also e nds the vo ice call. The sender receiv es a message that you rejecte d the invita tion. When you receive a v ideo clip, to mu te the soun d of the clip, select Mute . To end video sharing, select Stop . Video sharing also ends if the active voice call ends. Log The log stores information about the communication history of the device. The device registers missed and received calls only if the network suppo rts these func tions, the device is switched on, and within the network service area. Recent calls Press , and select Tools > Log . To view missed, received , and dialled voice calls, select Recent calls . The device registers missed and received calls only if the network supports t hese functions, the device is sw itched on , and within the network service area. To clear all recent call lists, select Option s > Clea r recent calls . To clear one of the call registers, open the register you want to erase, and sele ct Options > Cl ear list . To clear an individual event, open a register, scroll to the event, and press C . 136 Make calls
Call duration Press , and select Tools > Log . To view the ap proximat e durati on of received and dialled calls, select Cal l duration . Note: The actual invoice fo r calls and services from your servic e provider may vary, depe nding on network features, rounding off for bill ing, taxes, and so forth. To clear call duration timers, select Options > Clear timers . For this you need the lock c ode. Packet data Press , and select Tools > Log . To check t he amount of data sent and rec eived during packet data connections, select Packet data . For example, you may b e charged for your packet data connections by the amount of data sent and received. Monitor all communication events Press , and select Tools > Lo g > Recent calls . Icons in the log are as follows: Incoming Outgoing Missed communicat ion events To open the general log where you can monitor all voice calls, text messages, or data and wireless LAN connections registered b y the device, scroll right . Subevents, such as a text message sent in more than one part and packet data conne ctions, are logged as one communi cation eve n t. Connections to your mailbox, multimedia me ssaging centre, or web pages are shown as pa cket data conne ctions. To add an unkn own phone number from the log to your contacts, select Opt ions > Save to Contacts . To filter the log, select Opt ions > Filter and a filter. To erase the contents of the log, recent calls register, and messagin g delivery reports permanently, sele ct Options > Clear log . Selec t Yes to confirm. To remove a single event from one of the recent calls logs, press C . To set the log duration, select Options > Setti ngs > Log duration . If you select No log , all the log co ntents, rece nt calls registe r, and messaging delivery re ports a re permanently dele ted. Tip: In th e details view, you can copy a phone number to the clipboard, and paste it into a text message, for example. Select Options > Use number > Copy . 137 Make calls
To view how much data is transferred and how long a certain pa cket da ta conne ction lasts, scroll to an incoming or outgoing event indicat ed by Pack. , and select Options > View details . 138 Make calls
Internet calls About internet calls With the internet c all serv ice (network service), you can make and receiv e calls over the int ernet. Internet calls can be established between computers, between mobi le phones, and between a VoIP device and a traditional telephone. To be a ble to use the serv ice, you must subscribe to the service, and have a user account. To make or receive an internet call, you must be in the service area of a wirele ss LAN, and connected to an internet call service. Activate internet calls To make or receive inte rnet calls, contact your service provider to re ceive the internet call connection set tings. When th e settings have been installed, a new tab for internet calls appears in Contacts . To connect to an internet call serv ice, your device must be in a network service area. 1. To acti vate your inte rnet call service, open Contacts . 2. Scroll to the intern et calls tab, and select Options > Activate se rvice . To search for available wireless LAN connections, select Options > Search for WLAN . Tip: When you have activa ted an internet call s e r v i c e , y o u c a n m a k e a n i n t e r n e t c a l l f r o m a l l applications where you can make a regular voice call. Make internet calls When you have activated th e int ernet call feature, you can make an internet call from all applications where you can make a regular v oice call, such as Co n t a c t s o r th e L o g . F o r e xa m p l e , i n C o n t a c t s, s c r o l l to the desired co ntact, and select Option s > Call > Internet call . To make an internet call in th e standby mod e, enter the phone number or intern et address, and press the call key. T o m a k e a n i n t e r n e t c a l l t o a n i n t e r n e t a d d r e s s t h a t does not start wi th a digit, press any number key when the device is in the stan dby mode, then p ress # for a few seconds to clear the display and to 139 Internet calls
switch the device from the numbe r mode to the letter mo de. Ente r the inte rnet address, and press the call key. Blocked cont acts Blocked contacts are pr evented from se eing your online status. To add contacts to your blocked contacts list, select the contact and Op tions > Block co ntact . To unblock a contact , scroll to it, and sele ct Options > Unbl ock . When yo u unblo ck a contact , you allow the contact to see your online status. To see your blocked con tacts, open Contacts . Scroll to the internet calls tab, and select Op tions > View blocked list . Manage internet call services To view or edit int ernet communication settings, select Connectivity > Net settings and from the following: â Add new service â to add a new internet call service â Advanced settings â t o v i e w o r e d i t a d va n c e d call settings Internet call settings To view or edit intern et call settings, select Options > Co ntacts . Scroll to the internet c alls tab, and se lect Op tions > Settings . Select from the following: â Service connectivity â Select the destination settings for inte rnet call connec tivity, and edit destination details. To change a destination, sc roll to the service, and select Change . â Availability requests â Select whether to automatically accept all incoming presence requests with out a con firmation query. â Service information â To vi ew techn ical information about th e selected servic e. â Advanced settings â Set adva nced settin gs for the service, such as security settings. 140 Internet calls
Contacts (phonebook) In Contacts, you can sa ve and update contact information, such as ph one numbers, home addresses, or e-mail addresses of your con tacts. You can add a personal ringing tone or a thumbnail image to a contact card. Yo u can also create contact groups, which allow you to send text messages or e-mail to many recipients at the same t ime. Save and edit name s and numbers 1. Press , and select Contacts > Options > New c ont act . 2. Fill i n the fi elds that yo u want, and select Done . To edit co ntact ca rds, scro ll to a contact, and select Option s > Edit . You can also sear ch for the desired contact by en tering the first letters of t he name to the search fie ld. To attach an image to a cont act card, open the contact card, and select Opti ons > Add image . The image is shown when the contact calls. Manage names and numbers To ad d a cont act to a g roup, sel ect Option s > Add to group (shown only i f you hav e created a group) . To check to which groups a cont act belon gs, sele ct the conta ct and Options > Belongs t o groups . To delete a c ontact card, se lect a card, and press C . To delete several contact cards at the same time, select Options > Ma rk/Unmar k to mark the desired contact cards, and press C to delete. To send co ntact inform ation, select a c ard, Option s > Send , and the desired option. To listen to the voice ta g assigned to the contact, select a co ntact card an d Options > Voice tag details > Play voice tag . Default numbers and addresses Press , and select Cont acts . You can assign default numbers or addresses to a contact ca rd. In this way if a contact has seve ral numbers or addresses, you can easily call or send a 141 Contacts (phonebook)
message to the co ntact to a ce rtain number or address. The d efault numbe r is also used in voice dialling. 1. In the contacts list , select a contact. 2. Select Option s > Defaults . 3. Select a defaul t to which y ou want to add a number or an address, and select Assign . 4. Select a number or an a ddress you want to set as a default. The default number or addre ss is underlined in the contact card. Add ringing tones for contacts Press , and select Contacts . To define a ringing tone for a contact or a contact group: 1. Press the scroll key to open a contact card or go to the groups list, and select a conta ct group. 2. Select Option s > Ringing tone . 3. Select the rin ging tone you want to use . When a contact or group member c alls you, the device plays the selected ringing tone (if th e callerâÂÂs p ho n e n u m b e r i s s en t w i t h t h e ca l l a n d y o u r de v i c e recognises it). To remove the rin ging tone, select Default tone from the list of ringing tones. Copy contacts When you o pen Cont acts for the first time, the device asks if you want to copy names and numbers from the SIM card to y our device. To start copying, select OK . If you do not want to copy the SIM contacts to you r device, select Cancel . The device ask s if you want to view the SIM cont acts in the con tacts directory. To view the contact s, select OK . Contacts opens, and you can see names stored on your S IM card marked with . SIM services For availability and information on using SIM card services, contact your SIM ca rd vendor. This ma y be the service provider or other v endor. SIM contacts To add the names and numbers stored on the SIM card to the co ntacts li st in Contacts, select Options > Settings > Conta cts to dis play > SIM memory . You can add and edit S IM contacts, or call them. 142 Contacts (phonebook)
The numbers you save in Contacts are not automa tically sa ved to your SI M card. To save numbers to the SIM card, in Contacts, select a contact and Options > Copy > SIM memory . Fixed dialling To restrict calls from your devi ce to s elec ted pho ne numbers, in Contacts, select Options > Fi xed dial contac ts . You need your PIN2 code to activate and deactivate fixed dialling or edit your fixed dialling contacts. When fixed dialling is activated, calls may be possible to the official eme rgency number programmed into your device. To view the list of fixed dialling numbers, select Option s > SIM numbers . This option is only shown if supported by your SIM card. To add new numbers to th e fixed dialling list, select Option s > New SIM contact . When you use fixed dialling, packet data connections are not possibl e, except wh en sending text messages over a pack et data connect ion. For this, the me ssage centre nu mber and the re cipientâÂÂs phone number must be i ncluded on the fixe d dialling list. Manage contac t groups Create con tact groups 1. In Contacts, scroll right to open the grou ps list. 2. Select Options > Ne w gr oup . 3. Write a name for the grou p or use the default name, and s elect OK . 4. Select the group and Option s > Add members . 5. Scroll to a con tact, and press the scroll key to mark each contact you want to add. 6. Select OK . To rename a group, select Options > Rename , enter the n ew name, and select OK . Remove members from a group 1. In the grou ps list, sele ct th e gro up you want to modify. 2. Scroll to the c ontact, and select Options > Remove from group . 3. To remove the contact from th e group, select Yes . 143 Contacts (phonebook)
Media folder RealPlayer With RealPlayer, you can pl ay video clips or stream media files over the air without saving them to the device first. RealPlayer supports files wi th extensions such as . 3gp, .mp4, or .rm. However, RealPlay er does not necessarily support all file formats or all the variations of file formats. Play v ide o cli ps Press , and select Applic ations > Media > RealPlayer . To play a saved media file, select Video cli ps , a clip, and Play . To list previously played files, in the application main view, select Recently pl ayed . To adjust the volume, u se the volume key. After you select a media file, select Options and from the follo wing: â Send â Send a file using a multimedia message, e-mail, or other conne ction methods, such as Bluetooth connectivit y. â Use video â Assign a video to a contact or set it as a ringing tone. â Mark/Unm ark â Mark items in the list to send or delete mul tiple it em s at the same time. â View details â View details of th e selected item, such as format, re solution, and duration. â Settings â Edit the settin gs for video playb ack and streaming. Stream content over the air Many service pr oviders require you to use an internet access point (IAP ) for your default acc ess point. Other service prov iders allow you to use a WAP access point. In RealPlayer, yo u can on ly open an rtsp:// URL address. However, RealPlayer plays a .ram file if you open an HTTP link to it in a browser. To stream content over th e air (network service), in RealPlayer or Photos, sele ct a streami ng link saved in the Streaming link s folder. You can also receive a streaming link in a text messa ge or multimedia message, or open a link on a web page. Before live content begins stre aming, your devi ce connects to 144 Media folder
the site an d starts l oading the content. The conten t is not saved in your device. Real Play er s ett ings Press , and select Appl icatio ns > Me dia > RealPlaye r . You may receive RealPlayer settings in a special message from the se rvice provid er. For more information, contact yo ur service provider. Select Options > Settin gs and from the following: â Video â Select whether v ideo clips are played i n f u l l s c r e e n o r i n t h e n o r m a l v i e w , a n d w h e t h e r the clips are automatic a lly repeated after they finish playing. â Streaming â Select whethe r to use a proxy server, change the default access point, and set the port range used when connecting. Contact your serv ice pr ovider for the correct settings. Advanc ed settings To edit th e advanced se ttin g s, in the settings view, select Streaming > Network > Options > Advanced settings . To select the ba ndwidth used for a network, select the network setting an d the desired value. To edit the bandwidt h yourself, sele ct User defined . Adobe Flash Player Press , and select Applica tions > Media > Flash Player . Use Adobe Flash Player to view, play, and interact with compatible flash files made for mobile devices. To open a flash file, select it, and Open . Licences To view digital rights licences, press , and select Applicati ons > Me dia > Licences . Digital rights management Content owners may use different types of digi tal rights management (DRM) te chnologi es to protect their intel lectual pro perty, including copyrights. This device uses various types of DRM software to access DRM-pr otected con tent. With this d evice you can access co ntent pro tected with W MDRM 10, OMA DRM 1.0, and O MA DRM 2.0. If c ertain DRM software fails to protect the con tent, content owners may ask that such DRM software's ability to access new DRM- protected content be revo ked. R evoca tion ma y also prevent rene wal of such DRM-p rotected con tent already in your device. Revocation of suc h DRM software does not affe ct the use of c ontent protected with other ty pes of DRM or the use of non- DRM-protecte d content . 145 Media folder
Digital rights manag ement (DRM) pro tected co ntent comes with an associat ed activation key that defines your rig hts to use the c ontent. If your device has OMA DR M-protected content, to back up both the activati on keys and the conte nt, use the backup featu re of Nokia Nserie s PC Suite.Ot her transfer me thods may not tran sfer the acti vation key s which nee d to b e rest ored with the content for you to be a ble to continue the use of OMA DRM-protecte d content aft er the device memory is formatted. Yo u may also need t o restore the activation keys in case th e files on your device get corrupted. If your device has WMDRM-prot ected content, bot h the activation keys and the c ontent will be lost if th e device memory is formatted. You may also lose the activation keys and the conten t if the files on your device get corrupted. Losing the act ivation ke ys or the conten t may limit your ability to use the same content on your device again. For more informat ion, con tact y our ser vice provider . Some activation keys may be connected to a specific SIM card, and th e protected content can be acce ssed only if the SIM card is inserted in th e device. In the main vie w, select from th e followi ng: â Valid licenc es â View licences that are connected to media files or w hose validity period has not begun. â Invalid licences â View licences that are not valid; the time period for using the media file is exceeded or there is a prote cted media file in the device but no connected activati on key. â Not in use â Vi ew li cence s th at hav e no m edia files connected to them in th e device. To buy more usage time fo r a media file, select an invalid licence an d Options > Get new licence (web service messages must be enabled). See "Web service message settings", p. 127 . To view details of an activation key, scroll to it, and press the scroll key. Recorder Press , and select Appl ications > Media > Recorder . With Recorder, you can record voice memos and telephone conversations. The recorder cannot be used when a data call or GPRS connection is active . To record a te lephone co nversation, open Recorde r during a voice call. B oth parties hear a tone every 5 seconds during recording. 146 Media folder
Time management Clock Alarm clock Press , and select Appl icatio ns > Cl ock . To view your acti ve and in active alarms, scroll right to the alarm tab. To set a new alarm, select Option s > New alarm . Define the repe tition, if needed. When an alarm is active, is shown. To turn off the sounding alarm, select Stop . To stop the alarm for a certain time period, select Snooze . If your device is switched off when an alarm is due, your devi ce switches i tse lf on and starts sounding the alarm tone. Tip: T o d e f i n e t h e t i m e p e riod after which the alarm sounds again when you set it to snooze, select Options > Settings > Alarm sn ooze time . To cancel an alarm, select Options > Remove alarm . To change the time , date, and clock t ype settings, select Options > Settings . To automatically update th e time, date, an d time zone information to your device (network service), in the settin gs, select Automatic time update > On . World clock Press , and select Applica tions > Clock . To view the time in diffe re nt locations, scroll rig ht to the world clock tab. To add locatio ns to the list, select Options > Ad d location . You can add a maximum of 15 locations to the list. To set your current location , scroll to a location, and select Options > Set as current location . The location is displayed in the clock main view, and the time in your device is changed according to the selected lo cation . Ensure that th e time is correct and matches your time zone. Calendar Create a calendar entry Press , and select Applica tions > Calendar . 147 Time manag emen t
1. To add a new calendar entry, scroll to the desired date, and select Options > New entry and one of the following: â Meeting â to remind you of an appointment that has a specific date and time â Meeting request â to create and send a new meeting requ est. You must hav e a mailbox set up for send ing requests. See "Manage mailboxes" , p . 125 . â Memo â to write a general en try for a day â Anniversary â to remind you of birthdays or special dates (e ntries are repeated annually) â To-do â to remind you of a task that must be done by a specific date 2. Fi l l i n t h e f i e l d s . T o s e t a n a l ar m, s e l e c t Alarm > On , and enter the alarm time and date. To add a description for an entry, select Options > Add description . 3. To save the entry, se lect Done . Tip: In the day, week, or mon th cale ndar view, press any key ( 1 -0 ). An appointment entry opens, and the c haracters you en ter are adde d to th e subj ect fie ld. In the to -do vie w, a to-do note entry open s. When the calend ar alarm sounds, select Silence to turn off the soun d. The reminder te xt stays on t he screen. To stop the calendar alarm, select Sto p . To set the alarm to snooze, select Snooze . Tip: To define the ti me period a fter which th e calendar alarm sounds again when you set it to snooze, press , and select Applications > Calen dar > Opti ons > Settings > Alarm sn ooze time . Calendar views To change the starting day of the week or the view that is shown when you open the calenda r, select Options > Settings . In the settings, you can also modify the calendar alar m tone, alarm snooze time, and the title for t he week view. To go to a certain da te, select Options > Go to date . To jump to today, press # . To switch be tween the mo nth view , week view , day view, and to-do v iew, press * . To send a calendar note to a compatible device, select Options > Send . If the other device is not compa tible with Coordinated Universal Time (UTC), the time 148 Time manag emen t
information of received ca lendar entries may not be displayed correctly. Manage calendar entries To delete several events at a time, go to the month view, an d select Options > Delete entry > Before date or All entries . To mark a task as completed, scroll to it in the to-d o view, a nd sele ct Options > Mark as done . You can synchronise your calenda r with a compatible PC using Nokia Nseries PC Suite. When creating a c alendar e ntry, set the desired synchronisatio n option. 149 Time manag emen t
Office folder Quickoffi ce With the Q uickoffice applicatio ns, you can view .doc, .xls, .ppt, .pps, and .txt do cuments and download software. Not all file formats or features are supported. Apple Macintosh is not supported. To view a fil e, press , and select Applications > Office > Quickof fice . Select the locat ion from which you want to view files, browse t o the desired folder, and se lect a fi le. The fil es open in the respective applications depending on the file format. To download software using Quickmanager, in the main view, select Quickmanager ; or, when browsing files, scroll to the Quick manager tab. If you experience problems with the Quickoffice applications, visit www.quickoffice.com , or send e- mail to support S60@quickoffic e.com. Quickword With Quick word, you can view Microsoft Word documents with your device. Quickword supports docu ments saved in .doc and .txt f ormats create d with Micro soft Word 97, 2000, XP, and 2003. No t all variations or featu res of the file formats are supported. To upgrade to a version of Quickword that supports editing, when you have a file open, select Options > Up dates and upgrades . The upgrade is ch argea ble. Quicksheet With Quicksheet, y ou can view Microsoft Excel files with your device. Quicksheet supports spread sheet files in .xls format created wit h Microsoft Exce l 97, 2000, XP, or 2003 . Not all variations or features of the file formats are supported. To upgrade to a version of Qu icksh eet that s upports editing, when you have a file open, select Options > Up dates and upgrades . The upgrade is ch argea ble. Quickpoint With Quickpoint, you can vie w Microsoft PowerPoint presen tations with your device. 150 Office folder
Quickp oint supports pres entations saved in .ppt and .pps formats create d with Microsoft PowerPoint 2000, XP, an d 2003. Not all variation s or featu res of the file formats are supported. To upgrade to a version of Quickpoint that supports editing, when you have a file open, select Option s > Updates and upgrades . The upgrade is chargeable. Quickmanager With Quickmanager, you can download software, including updates, u pgrades, and othe r useful applications. You can pay for the downloads b y phone bill or credit card. Notes Press , and select Appl icatio ns > Off ice > Notes . To write a note, start enterin g the text. The note editor opens automati cally. To open a note, scroll to it, and select Open . To send a note to other compatible de vices, select Option s > Send . To delete a no te, press C . Tip: To delete several notes, select Options > Mark/Unmar k to mark the notes, and press C . To synchronise or to define synchronisati on settings for a note, select Option s > Synchronisatio n > Start or Settings . Adobe reader Press , and select Applica tions > Offic e > Adobe PDF . With Adobe reader, you can rea d PDF documents wi th yo u r d ev i ce ; s e ar ch f o r t ex t i n t he do c um en t s; modify settings, such as zoom level and page views; and send PDF files using e-mail. Converter Press , and select Applica tions > Offic e > Converter . With Converter, you can convert mea sures from one unit to another. The converter has limit ed accuracy, and rounding errors may occur. 1. In the Type fiel d, select the mea sure you want to use. 2. In first Unit field, select the unit from which you want to convert. 151 Office folder
3. In the next Un it field, selec t the unit to which you want to convert. 4. In the first A mount field, ente r the value you want to convert. The other Amount field change s automat ically to sho w the conve rted value. Convert currency Select Type > Currency . Before you can make currency conversions, you must select a base currency and add exchange rates. The default base currency is Home . The rate of the base currency is alway s 1 . 1. Select Option s > Currency rates . 2. The default n ame for the curre ncy items is Foreign . To rename a currency, select Options > Rename currency . 3. Add the exchange rates for the currencies, and press Done . 4. In the sec ond Unit field, select the currenc y to which you want to conve rt. 5. In the first A mount field, ente r the value you want to convert. The other Amount field change s automat ically to sho w the conve rted value. To change the base currency, select Options > Currency rates , a currency and Options > Set as base currency . When you cha nge base curre ncy, you must enter new exchange rates because all previously set exchange rates are cleared. Zip manag er Press , and select Appl ications > Office > Zip . With Zi p manager, you can crea te new archive files to store compressed .zip file s; add single or multiple compressed files or director ies to an ar chiv e; set, clear, or change the archive password for protected archives; and change setting s, such as compression level and file na me encoding. 152 Office folder
Applications folder Calculator Press , and select Appl icatio ns > Cal culator . This calculator has limited accuracy and is designed for simple calculations. To make a calculation, ente r the first number of t he calculation. Select a funct i on such as add or subtract from the function map. Enter the second number of the ca lcul atio n, and sel ect = . The calculator performs operations in the order they are entered . The result of the calcu lation remains in the ed itor field and can be used as th e first number of a new calculation. To save the results of a calculation, select Opti ons > Memory > Sa ve . The saved result replaces the previously st ored result in the memory . To retrieve the results of a calcul ation from the memory and use them in a calculation, select Option s > Memory > Recal l . To view the last saved result, select Options > Last result . Exiting the Calculator application or switching off the de vice does not clear the memory . You can recall the last save d result the next ti me you open the Calculator application. Application manager With Application manager, you ca n see the software packages installed in yo ur device. You can view details of installed applications, remove applications, and define installation settings. Press , and select Applica tions > App. mgr. . You can install two type s of applications and software to your device: â J2ME applications based on Java technology with the extension . jad or .jar â Other applications and software suitable for the Symbian operating system with the extension .sis or .sisx Only install software spec ificall y desig ned f or you r device: Nokia N79. Softwa re provide rs will often refer to the official mode l number of this product: N79-1. 153 Applications folder
Install applicatio ns and software You can transfer installa tion files to you r device from a compatible co mputer, dow nload them during browsing, or receive them in a multimedia message, as an e-mail a ttachment, or using other connectivity methods, su ch as Bluetooth connectivity. You can use Nokia App lication Insta ller in Nokia PC Suite to install an a pplication to your device. Icons in Appli cation manager indicate the following: .sis or .sisx application Java application application not fully installed application installed in the memory card Important: Only install and use applications and other software from trusted sources, such as applica tions that are Symbian Sig ned or have passed the Java Verified testing. Before installation , note the following: â To view the applicatio n type, versi on number, and the supplier or manufacturer of the application, select Options > View det ails . To display the security ce rtificate deta ils of the application, in Detai ls: , scroll to Certif icates: , and select View details . See "Certificate management" , p. 164 . â If you install a file that contains an up date or repair to an existing application, you can only restore the original appl ication if you have the original installati on file or a full backup copy of the removed software pa ckage. To restore the original application , remo ve the application, and install the application again from the original installation file or the backup c opy. The .jar file is required for installing Java applications. If it is missing, the device may ask you to download it. If there is no access point defined for the application, you are asked to select one. When y ou are downloading the .jar file, you may ne ed to enter a us er name and password to access the server. You obtain these from the supplier or manufacturer of the application. To install an applic ation or softwa re: 1. To locate an installation file, press , and select Applications > App. mgr. . Alternatively, search installation files usi ng File manager, or open a message in Messaging > Inbox that contains an installa tion file. 2. In Application manager, select Options > Install . In other applica tions, scroll to the installation file, and sel ect it to start the installation. 154 Applications folder
During installation, th e device shows information about t he progress of the installation. If you in stal l an application without a digital signature or certification, the device displays a warning. Continu e installation only if you are sure of the orig in and contents of th e application. To start an installed applic ation, locate it in the menu, and select it. If the application does not have a default folder defined, it is installed in the Applicati ons folder in the main menu. To see which software packages are installe d or removed and wh en, se lect Options > View log . Important: Yo ur devi ce can on ly support o ne antivirus application. Having more than one application with antivirus functionality could affect performance and ope ration or cause the device to stop functioning. After you install applications to a compatible memory card, installation files (.sis, .sisx) remain in the device memory. The files may use large amounts of memory and preve nt you from storing other files. To main tain suffici ent me mory, use Nokia Nserie s PC Suite to back up installa tion files to a compatible PC, then use the file manager to remove the installation files from the device memory. If the .sis file is a message attachment , delete th e message from the Messaging inbox. Remove applications and software Press , and select Applica tions > App. mgr. . Scroll to a software package, and select Optio ns > Remove . Select Yes to confirm. If you remove software, yo u can only reinstall it if you ha ve the original softw are packa ge or a full backup of the r emov ed sof twar e packag e. If you remove a software package , you may no longer be able to open documents crea ted with that softw are. If another software pa ckage depends on the software package that you removed, the other software package may stop working. Refer to the documen tation of th e install ed software p ackage for details. Settings Press , and select Applica tions > App. mgr. . Select Options > Setti ngs and from the following: â Software installation â S elect whethe r Symbian software that has n o verified digital signature can be inst alled. â Online certif icate ch eck â Select to check the online ce rtific ates bef ore ins tallin g an applica tion. â Default web addr ess â Set the defaul t address used when c hecking online certific ates. 155 Applications folder
Some Java application s may require that a message be sent or a network connection be made to a specific access point to download extra data or components. In the Ap plication manager main view, scroll to an a pplication , and select Options > Open to change settings re lated to that specific applica tion. 156 Applications folder
Tools folder File manager Press , and select Tools > File mgr. . About File manager With File manager, you can browse, manage, and open files on your device, memory c ard, or a compatible external drive. To map or delete drives, or to define settings for a co mp at i bl e r e mo t e d r iv e c o nn ec t ed to y ou r de vi c e, select Options > Remote drives . The available options d epend on t he memory y ou select. Find and organise files To find a file, selec t Options > Find . Enter a search text that matches t he file name. T o m o v e a n d c o p y f i l e s a n d f o l d e r s , o r t o c r e a t e n e w folders in the me mory, select Op tion s > Organis e , and the desired option. To sort fi le s, select Options > Sort by , and the desired category. Edit memory card These options are availabl e only if a compatible memory card is inserted in the device. To rename or format a memory c ard, select Option s > Memory card options . To password protect a me mory card, select Options > Memory card p assword . To remove the memory card safely without any loss of data, sel ect Option s > Remove memory card . Back up fil es on a memory card To back up files, select the file types you want to back up on a memory card, and Options > Back up now . Ensure that your me mory card has enough free memory for the files that yo u have ch osen to back up . Voice commands Press , and select Tools > Utilities > Voice comm. . You can use enhance d voic e commands to control your devi ce. See "Voice dialling" , p. 131 . 157 Tools folder
To activate enhanced voic e commands to start applicatio ns and profiles, pre ss and hold the right selection key in the stan dby mode. To use enhanced voice commands, press and hold the right selection key in the standby mode, and speak a voice command. The voice command is the name of the application or profile displayed in the list. To edit the voice com mands, in the Voice comman ds application , select an item , such as an application or a profile, and Edit . To listen to the synthesised voice tag, select Options > Playback . To remove a voice command that y ou added manually, sele ct Options > Remove voice command . Select Options > Settings and from the following: â Synthesiser â to switch on or off the synthesiser that plays re cognised voice tags and commands in the selec ted device language â Playback volume â to adjust the playback volume for the voice commands â Recognition sensitivity â t o a d j u s t h o w e a s i l y the synthesiser recognises speech. If the sensitivity is set too high, it may not accept commands because of backg round noise. â Command verification â to select whether th e s p o k e n c o m m a n d i s a c c e p t e d m a n u a l l y , b y v o i c e , or automatically â Remove voice adapts. â to reset voic e recognition learning, for examp le, when the main user of the device h as changed Sync Press , and select Tools > Sync . Sync enables you to synchronise your notes, calendar entries, text and multimedia messages, browser bookmarks, or contacts with various compatible application s on a compatible computer or on the internet. You may receive synchronisation settings in a special message from yo ur service provider. A synchronisation profile cont ains the necessary settings for synchronisation. When you o pen the applicat ion, the de fault or previously u sed sync profil e is displayed. To modify the profile, scroll to a sy nc item and select Mark to includ e it in t he prof ile or Unmark to leave it out. To manage sync profiles , select Options and the desired option. To synchronise data, select Options > Synchro nise . To cancel synchronisation before it finishes, select Cancel . 158 Tools folder
Device manager Press , and select Tools > Utilities > Device mgr. . Use Device man ager to connect t o a server an d receive configuration sett ings for your device, to create new se rver profiles, or to view and manage existing server prof iles. You may receive serv er profiles and different configuration setting s from your service providers and company inform ation management department. These configuration setting s may include connec tion and other settin gs used by different applications in your devic e. Scroll to a server profile, and select Options and from the following: â Start configuration â Co nnect to th e server and receive con figuration settings for your device. â New server pr ofile â Create a server profile. To delete a server profil e, scroll to it, and press C . Speech With Speech, yo u can set the language, v oice, and voice properti es for the message reader. Press , and select Tools > Utilities > Speech . To set the language for the message reader, select Language . To download additional languages to your devi ce, sel ect Options > Downl oad languages . Tip: When you dow nload a new l anguage, you mu st dow nlo ad at le ast one vo ice for that language. To set the speakin g voice, select Voice . The voice depends on the selected language. To set the speaking rate, select Speed . To set the speaking volume, select Volume . To view details of a voice, scroll right to th e voice tab, scroll to t he voice, and sele ct Option s > Voice details . To listen to a voice, scroll to the voice, an d select Options > Play voice . To delete languages or voic es, scroll to th e item and select Options > Delete . Message reader settings To change the message rea der settings, scroll to the Setti ngs tab, and define the following: â Language detection â turn automatic re ading language detection on or off. â Cont inuous r eading â turn continuous reading of all selected messages on or of f. â Speech prompts â select whether the message reader inserts prompts in messages. 159 Tools folder
â Audio source â select whether you want to listen to the message throu gh the loudsp eaker or the device. 160 Tools folder
Settings Some settings may be pres et for the device by your service provider, and you ma y not be able to change them. General settings In general settings, yo u can edit the general settings of your device or restore the device t o original default settings. You can adjust time and da te setting s also in the clock. See "Clo ck " , p. 147 . Personal isati on setti ngs Press , and select Tools > Settings > General > Personalisation . You can edit settin gs related to the display, standby mode, and gene ral functi ons of y our device. Themes allows you to change the look of the display. Voice commands opens the settings for the Voice commands application. See "Voi ce commands" , p. 157 . Tones allows you to change the tones of the calendar, clo ck, and curre ntly active pro file. Display â Light sensor â Scroll left or right to adjust the light sensor that observes the lighting conditions and adjusts the brightne ss of the display. Th e light sensor may cause the displa y to flicker in low light. â Font size â Adjust the siz e of the text and icons on the display. â Power saver time-out â Select the time-out period after which the power saver is activated. â Welco me note / logo â The welcome note or logo is displayed briefly each time you switch on the device. Selec t Default to use the default image, Text to wri te a welc ome note, or Image to select an image from Photos. â Light time-out â Select a time -out after whic h the backlight of the disp lay is switch ed off. Standby mode â Shortcuts â Assign shortcut s to the selection keys to be used in th e standby mode and select which applications are shown in the active toolbar. 161 Settings
If the active standby is set off, you can assign keypad shortcuts for the different presses of the scroll key. â Change Menu view â Selec t Horizontal icon bar to view a horiz ontal toolb ar and the conten t from different applications on the screen. Select Vertical icon bar to view a vertical toolbar on the screen. The content from differen t applications is hidden. To display the conten t, select a shortcut and press the scroll key left. Select Basic to switch off active toolbar. â Operator logo â This setting is only available if you have received and saved an operator logo. Select Off if you d o not want the logo t o be shown. Language Changing the sett ings for the ph one language or writing languag e affects every application in your device until you change these setting s again. â Phone language â Change the langua ge of the display text in your devic e. This also affects the format used for date an d time and the separators used, for example, in calculations. Automatic selects the language accordin g to the information on your SIM card. After you change the language, t he device rest arts. â Writin g langu age â Change the writing language. This affects the characters available when writing text an d the predic tive text dictionary use d. â Predictive text â Set p redicti ve text inpu t on or off for all editors in the de vice. The predic tive text dictionary is not available for al l languages. Enhanceme nt settings Press , and select Tools > Settings > Genera l > Enha ncement . Some enhancem ent connec tors indicate w hich type of enhanceme nt is connected to the device. See "Display indicators" , p. 26 . The available settings dep end on the type of enhancement. Select an enhancement and from th e following: â Default prof ile â S et the profile that you w ant activated each time you connec t a cert ain compatible enhancement t o your device. â Automatic answer â Select whether you want the device to answe r an incomin g call automatica lly after 5 se conds. If the ringing ty pe is set to Beep once or Silent, automatic answer is disabled. â Lights â Set whether lights remain on after the time-out. TV-out settings To change the settin gs for a TV-out connec tion, select TV-Out and from the following: 162 Settings
â Default pr ofile â Set t he pr o fi le t ha t y o u w an t activate d each time you conne ct a Nokia Video Connectivity Cable to your d evice. â TV screen size â Select the aspect ratio of the TV: Normal or Widescreen for widescreen TV s. â TV system â Select the analogue video signal system that is compatible with your TV. â Flicker filter â To improve image quality on the screen of your TV, select On . The flicker filter may not diminish image fl icker on all TV screens. Navi wheel settings Press , and select Tools > Settings > General > Navi wheel . Navi wheel When the Navi wheel setting is set on, you can browse through files and lists in certain applications by sliding your finger on the rim of the scroll key. When the Navi wheel setting is set off, to move up, down, left, or righ t, press the scroll key in the desired direction. Breathing The rim around the Nav i wheel illuminates slowly when the devi ce is in sle e p mode. To switch off t he illumination, press , and select Tools > Settings > Ge neral > Navi wheel > Breathing . Sensor settings In most applications , the display ro tates automatically between th e portrait and landscape modes based on the orientation of the device. To change t he sett ing fo r automatic displ ay rotation, select Settings > General > Sensor settings > Turnin g control and whether you want the display to rotate automatic ally. To ensure that the automatic display rotati on works, hold the device in an up right positi on. Automatic rotation does not work if you ch ange the display rotation setting ma nually in an application. When you exit the applicat ion, automatic rotation is activated again. Security settings Phone and SIM Press , and select Tools > Settings > General > Security > Phone and SIM card and from the following: â PIN code request â When active , the code is requested each time the device is switched on. Deactivating the PIN c ode request may n ot be allowed by some SIM cards. â PIN co de , PIN2 code , and Lock code â You can change the PIN code, PIN2 code, and lo ck code. 163 Settings
These codes can only incl ude the numbers from 0 to 9 . If you forget th e PIN o r the PIN2 co de, contact your service pro vider. If you forget the lo ck code, contact a Nokia Care point or your service provider. See "Access codes" , p. 21 . Avoid using access codes similar to the emergency n umbers to pr event ac cidental dialling of the emergency number. â Keypad autolock period â Select whether the keypad is lo cked wh en your dev ice has been idle for a certain period of time. Tip: To lock or unlock the keypad manually, press the left selection key, then * . â Phone autolock peri od â To avoid unauthorised use, you can se t a time-out after which the de vice aut omatical ly lock s. A locked device cannot be used until the correct lock code is entered. To turn off the auto lock period, select None . Tip: T o l o c k t h e d e v i c e m a n u a l l y , p r e s s t h e power key. A list of commands opens. Select Lock phone . In the offline or flight prof iles, you may need to unlock the device and change to the calling profile before making a call. â Lock if SIM card changed â You can set the device to ask for the loc k code when an unknown SIM card is inserted into your device. The device maintains a list of SIM cards that are recognised as the ownerâÂÂs cards. â Closed user group â You can specify a group of people to whom you can call and who c an call you (network service). When calls are limited to cl osed user groups, calls may be possible to the of ficial emergen cy number progra mmed i nto you r device. â Confirm SI M services â You can set the device to display confirmation messages when you are using a SIM card servic e (network service). Certificate management Press , and select Tools > Settings > Genera l > Security > Certific ate m anagem ent . Digital certificates do not guarant ee safety; they are used to verify the origin of soft ware. In the certificate management main view , you can see a list of authority cert ificates that are stored in your device. Scroll right to see a list of personal certificates, if available. Digital certificates should be used if you want to connect to an online bank or another sit e or remote server for actions that involve transferring confidential information. They should also be used if you want to re duce th e risk of viruses or other 164 Settings
malicious software and be sure of the authenticity of software when down loading and installing software. Important: Even if the use o f certifica tes makes the risks involved in remot e connections and software installation co nsiderably smaller, they must be used correctly in order to benefit from increased security. The ex istence of a certificate does not offer any prote ction by itself; the certificate manager mu st cont ain correct, authentic, or tr usted certific ates for in creased security to be available. Certificates have a restricted lifetime. If "Expired certificate" or "Certificate not valid ye t" is shown, even if th e certificate should be val id, check t hat the current date and time in your device are correct. View certificate detailsâÂÂcheck authenticity You can only be sure of the correc t identity of a server when the signat ure and th e validity period of a server certif icate have been checked. You are notified if the identity of t he server is not authentic or if you do not have the corre ct security certificate in your device. To check certificate details, scroll to a certificate, and select Options > Cer tificate details . The validity of the certific ate is checked, and one of t he following notes may be displayed: â Certi ficate no t truste d â You have no t set any applica tion to use the certificate. â Expired certificate â The certificate validity period has ended. â Certificate not valid yet â The certificate validity period has not yet begun. â Certificate co rrupted â The certificate cannot be used. Contact th e certificate issuer. Change the trust settings Before ch anging a ny cert ificate settin gs, yo u must make sure that y ou really tr ust the owner of th e certificate and that the ce rtificate really belongs to the listed owner. Scroll to an authority certificate, and select Option s > Trust settings . Depending on the certif icate, a list of the ap plications that can u se the selected c ertificate is shown . For examp le: â Symbian installation : Ye s â The certificate is able to certify the origin of a new Symbian operating system application. â Internet : Yes â The certificate is able to certify servers. â App. installatio n : Yes â The certificate is able to certify the origin of a new Java⢠application. Select Options > E dit tru st sett ing to change the value . 165 Settings
Security module Press , and select Tools > Settings > Genera l > Security > Security mo dule . T o v i e w o r e d i t a s e c u r i t y m o d u l e ( i f a v a i l a b l e ) , s c r o l l to it, and press the scroll key. To view detailed information about a security module, scroll to it, and se lect Options > Security details . Restore original s ettings Press , and select Tools > Settings > Genera l > Factory settings . You can reset some of the settings to their original values. To do this, you need the lock code. After resetting , the device may take a long er time to power on. Document s and files are unaffected. Positioni ng setting s Press , and select Tools > Settings > Genera l > Positioning . Positioning methods â Integrate d GPS â Use the integrated GPS receive r of y our devi ce. â Assisted GP S â Use Assisted GPS (A-GPS) to receive assistance data from a n assistance data server. See "Assisted GPS (A-GPS)" , p. 52 . â Bluetoot h GPS â Use a compatible external GPS receiver with Bluet ooth co nnectivit y. â Network based â Use information from the cellular network (network service). Positioning server To define an access point, and positionin g server for A-GPS, select Posit ioning se rver . The positioning server may be prese t by your service p rovider, and you may not be able to edit the set tings. Notation settings To select which me asurement system you wa nt to use for sp eeds and distances, select Measurem ent system > Metric or Imperial . To define in which format the coordinate information is shown in you r devi ce, se lect Coordinate fo rmat , and the desired format. Phone settings In phone setting s, you can edit settings related to phone calls and network. Call settings Press , and select Tools > Settings > Phone > Call . â Send my caller ID â You ca n set your phone number to be displayed to ( Yes ) or hidden from 166 Settings
( No ) the person to whom you are calling, or the value may be set by your service prov ider when you make a subscription ( Set by network ) (network servic e). â Send my internet call ID â You can set y our internet ca ller ID to be displayed to or hidden from the person to whom you are calling. â Call wa iting â To be alerted for incoming c alls (network service ) while you are in a call, select Activ ate . T o check wh ether the f unction is activ ated, se lect Check st atus . â Internet call waiting â T o b e n o t i f i e d o f a n e w incoming intern et call w hile y ou have a call in progress, select Activa ted . â Internet call alert â To be alerted for incoming internet calls, select On . If you select Off , y ou are not alerted, but you receiv e a notification if you missed a call. â Reject call with mess age â To send a text message to a caller informing why you could not answer the call, select Yes . â Message te xt â W r i t e a t e x t t o b e s e n t i n a t e x t message whe n you reject a call. â Image in vide o call â I f v i d e o i s n o t s e n t d u r i n g a video c all, you c an sele ct a s till i mage t o be displayed instead. â Automatic redial â Select On , and your device makes a maximum of 10 attempts to connect the call after an unsuccessful call attempt. To st op automatic redialling, press th e end ke y. â Show call duration â Activate this setting if you want the leng th of a call to be displ ayed during the call. â Summary after call â Activate this setting if you want the le ngth of a call to be displaye d after the call. â Speed dial â Select On , and the numbers assigned to the num ber keys (2 to 9) c an be dialled by pressing and holding the key. See "1- touch dial a phone numbe r" , p. 131 . â Anykey answer â Selec t On , and you can answer an incoming call by briefl y pressing any keypad key, excep t the power key. â Line in use â This setting (network servi ce) is shown only if the SIM card supports two subscriber numbers, that is, two phone lines. Select wh ich phon e line you want t o use for making calls and sending text messages. Call s on both lines can be answer e d irrespec tive o f the selected line. If you select Lin e 2 and have not subscribed to th is netw ork service, you are not able to make calls. When line 2 is selected, is shown in the standby mode. â Line change â To prevent line selection (network service), select Disable if supported by your SIM card. To change this set ting, you need the PIN2 code. 167 Settings
Call divert Press , and select Tools > Settings > Phone > Call divert . Call divert al lows you to divert incoming calls to your voice mailbox or anot her phone number. For details, contact y our service provider. To activate call divert, select Activ ate . T o che ck whether the op tion is active, selec t Check status . Several diverting options ca n be active at the same time. When all calls are diverted, is shown i n the standby mode. Call barring and call diverting cannot be active at the same time. Call barring Press , and select Tools > Settings > Phone > Call barring . Call barring (network servic e) a llows you to restrict the calls that you m ake or receive wit h the devic e. For example, you can restrict all outgoing international call s or incoming calls when you are abroad. To change the setting s, you need the barring password from your service pr ovider. Call barring and call diverting cannot be active at the same time. When calls are barred, calls may be possible to certain officia l emergency numbers. Voice call barring Select the desired barrin g option, and set it on ( Activate ) or off ( Deactiv ate ), or check wheth er the option is active ( Check stat us ). Call barring affects all calls, in cluding data calls. Internet call barring To select whether anon ymous calls are allowed from the int ernet, set Anonymous call barring on or off. Network s ettings Your device can automatically switch between the GSM and UMTS networks. The GSM network is indicated with in the standby mode. The UMTS network is indicated with . Press , and select Tools > Settings > Phone > Network and from the following: â Network mode â Select whic h network to use. If you select Dual mo de , the device u ses the GSM or UMTS network automatica lly, according to the network parameters and the roaming agreements betw een the wireless se rvice providers. For details an d roaming costs, contact your network service pr ovider. This option is shown only if supported by the wireless service provider. 168 Settings
A roaming agreement is an agreement between two or more service providers to enable the users of one service prov ider to use th e services of other service providers. â Operator selection â Select Automatic to set the device to searc h for and selec t one of the availa ble net works , or Manual to manually select the network from a list. If t he connection to the manually selected network i s lost, t he device sounds an error tone and asks you to reselect a network. Th e sele cted network must have a roaming agreement with your home cellular network. â Cell info display â Set the devic e to indicate when it is used in a cellular network based on microcellular network (MCN) technology and to activa te cell inf o receptio n. Connection settings In connection settings, you can edit access points and other connectivity settings. You can also edit settings for Bl uetooth connectivity in the Bluetooth connectivity application. See "Settings" , p. 43 . You can also edit se ttings for data cable connec tions in the USB application. See "USB" , p. 46 . Data connections and access points Your device supp orts packet data connections (network service), such as GPRS in the GSM n etwork. When you use your device in GSM and UMTS networks, multiple data connection s can be active at the same time, and acce ss points can share a data connecti on. In th e UMTS netw ork, da ta conn ections remain active during voice calls. You can a lso use a WLAN da ta connect ion. Only one connecti on in one wi reless LAN can b e active at a time, but several applications can use the same internet access point. To establish a data conne ction, an access point is required. Yo u can defi ne different kinds of access points, such as the following: â MMS access point to send and receive multimedia messages â Internet acce ss point ( IAP ) to send and receive e- mail an d connect to the interne t Check the ty pe of access poin t you need w ith your service provider for the se rvice you want to access. For availability and subs cription to pac ket data connecti on services, c ontact your servi ce provider. 169 Settings
Access points Create a new access point Press , and select Tools > Settings > Connection > Destinations . You may receive access point settings in a message from a service provider. Some or all access points may be preset fo r your device by your service provide r, and you m ay not be able to change, crea te, edit, or remove th em. When you open one of the ac cess point gr oups ( , , , ), you can see the access point types: indicates a protected access point indicates a packet data access point indicates a WLAN access point Tip: You can create internet a ccess points in a wireless LAN with the WLAN wizard. To create a new ac cess point, select New access point . The device asks to chec k for available connections. After the se arch, connections that are already available are shown and can be shared by a new access point. If you ski p this step, you are asked to select a connect ion method and to define the settings needed. To edit the settings of an access poin t, open one of the access point groups, select an access poin t and Edit . Follow the instructio ns from your serv ice provider. â Connection name â Enter a name for the connection. â Data be arer â Select the data connection type . Depending on th e data connecti on you select, only certain setting fields are av ailable. Fi ll in all fields marked with Must be define d o r w i t h a r e d * . O t h e r fields can be left e mpty, unless your service provider has instructed otherwise. To use a data connection , your service provider must support this feature, and if necessary, activate it for your SIM card. Create access point groups Press , and select Tools > Settings > Connection > Destinations . Some applica tions allow you to use access point groups for network connection . To avoid selecting a single access point every time the device makes a net work co nnection , you c an create a group that cont ains various access points to connect to t hat network and define the order in which the access points are used. For example, you can add wireless LAN (WLAN) and packet data access points to an in ternet access point group and use th e group fo r browsing the web. If you give WLAN the highe st priority, the device 170 Settings
connects to the interne t through WLAN if available and through packet data if not. To create a new acce ss point group, select Option s > Manage > New destination . To ad d acce ss poin ts to an access point group, select the grou p and Options > New a ccess poin t . To copy an existing access point fr om another gr oup, select the group, an existing access point, and Option s > Organise > Copy to other dest. . To change th e priority order of access poin ts within a group, select an access point and Opti ons > Organis e > Ch ange priorit y . Packet data access points Press , and select Tools > Settings > Connection > Destinations > New access point , and follow the instructions on the screen. Or, open one of the access po int groups, select an access point marked wi th , and select Edit . Follow the instructions fr om your service pro vider. Select from the following: â Access point name â You obtain the access point name from your service provi der. â User name â The user name may be needed t o make a data connection, and is usually provided by the service provider. â Prompt password â If you must enter the password every time you log in to a server, or if you do not want to save your password in th e device , sele ct Yes . â Passwo rd â A password may b e needed to make a da ta connection and is usually provided by the service provider. â Authentication â S e l e c t Secure to always send your password encrypted or Normal to send your password encrypted when possible. â Home page â Depend ing on t he acc ess point you are sett ing up, enter the w eb address or the address of the multimedia message cen tre. Select Options > Advanced settings and from the following: â Network type â Select t he internet prot ocol type to transfer data to and from your device. Th e other settings depen d on the selected netw ork type. â Phone IP address (for IPv4 only) â Enter the IP address of your device. â DNS addresses â Enter the IP addresses of the primary and secondary DNS servers, if required by your service provider. To obtain these addresses, contact yo ur internet service provider. â Prox y server address â Enter the address of the proxy server. â Proxy port number â Enter the port numbe r of the proxy server. 171 Settings
WLAN internet access points Press , and select Tools > Settings > Connection > Destinations > New access point , and follow the instruct ions on the screen. Or, open one of the access p oint groups, select an access poin t marked with , and selec t Edit . Follow the instructions from your WLAN service provider. â WLAN network name â Select Enter manually or Search fo r networ ks . If you select an existing net work, WLAN network mode and WLAN security mode are determined by the settings of its access point device. â Network status â Define whet her the netw ork name is displayed. â WLAN network mode â Select Ad-hoc to create an ad hoc networ k and to allow de vices to send an d rece ive da ta directly; a WLAN access point device is not needed. In an ad hoc ne twork, all devices must use the same WLAN network name . â WLAN security mode â Select the encrypt ion used: WEP , 802.1x (not for ad hoc networks), or WPA/WPA2 . If you sele ct Open network , no encryption is used. The W EP, 802.1x, and WPA functions can be used only if the network supports them. To enter the settin gs for the selected sec urity mode, select WLAN securit y settings . Security settings for WEP â WEP key in use â Select the wired equivalent privacy (WEP) k ey number . You can c reate up to four WEP keys. The sa me settings must be entered on the WLAN access point device. â Authentication type â Select Open or Shared for the authentication typ e between your device and the WLA N access point device. â WEP key settings â Enter WEP encryption (length o f the ke y), WEP k ey format ( ASCI I or Hexadeci mal ), and WEP key (the WEP key data in the selec ted format). Security settings for 80 2.1x and WPA/WPA2 â WPA/WPA2 â Select the mea ns of authen ticatio n: EAP to use an extensible authentic ation prot ocol (EAP) pl ug-in, or Pre- shared key to use a password. Com plete the appropriate settings: â EAP plug-in settings â Enter the settings as your service provider instructs. â Pre-sh ared key â Enter a password. The same password must be entered on the WLAN access point device. â WPA2 only mode â Only WPA2 enabled devices are allowed to establis h a connection in this mode. 172 Settings
Advanced WLAN settings Select Options > Advanced settings and from the following: â IPv4 settings â Ente r the IP address of your device, the subnet IP address, the default gateway, and the IP addresses of the primary and secondary DNS servers. Contact your internet service provider for t hese addresses. â IPv6 settings â D e f i n e t h e t y p e o f D N S a d d r e s s . â Ad-hoc channel (only for Ad-hoc ) â To enter a channel number (1-11) manually, se lect User defined . â Proxy server address â Enter the address for the proxy serv er. â Proxy port number â Enter the proxy port number. Packet data settings Press , and select Tools > Settings > Connection > Pack et data . The packet data settings affect all access points using a packet data connection. â Packet data connection â If you select When available an d you a re in a n etwor k that suppor ts packet data, the dev ice registers to the packet data network. Starting an active packet data connection (for example, to send and receive e- mail) is qu icker. If there is no packet data coverage, the device periodically tries to establish a packet data connection. If you select When needed , th e device use s a packet data connection only if you start an application or action t hat nee ds it . â Access point â The access point name is needed to use your device as a packet data modem to a compatible computer. â High speed packet a ccess â Enable or disable the use of HSDPA (network servic e) in UMTS networks. Wireless L AN settings Press , and select Tools > Settings > Connecti on > Wireless LAN . â Show WLAN availa bility â Select whether is displayed in the stan dby mode whe n a wire less LAN is av ailable. â Scan for net works â If you set Show WLAN availability to Yes , select how of ten the devic e searches for available wireless LANs and updates the indicator. To view advanced settings, selec t Options > Advanced s ettings . Ch anging wire less LAN advanc ed settin gs is not rec ommended . 173 Settings
SIP settings Press , and select Tools > Settings > Connection > SIP settings . Session Initiation Protocol (SIP) settings are needed for certain network servic es using SIP. You may receive the settings in a special text message from your servic e provid er. You can v iew, dele te, or create these setting profiles in SIP settings. Configurations Press , and select Tools > Settings > Connection > Configur ations . You may recei ve trusted serv er settings fro m your service provider in a co nfiguration message. You can save view or delete these settings in configurations. Access point name co ntrol Press , and select Tools > Settings > Connection > APN control . With the access p oint name control se rvice, you can restrict packet data co nnections and allow your device t o use o nly certain pa cket data ac cess points. This setting is only available if your SIM card supports the access po int control service. To set the control service on or off or to change the allowed access points, select Options and the correspon ding opti on. To cha nge the op tions, you need your PIN2 code. Contact your service provider for the code. Application settings To edit the settings of so me of the applications in your device, press , and select Tools > Settings > Applications . To edit the settings, you can also select Option s > Settings in each application. 174 Settings
Troubleshooting Q: What is my pass word for the lock, PIN, or PUK codes? A: The defau lt lock cod e is 12345 . If you forget the lock cod e, cont act your dev ice dea ler. If you fo rget a PIN or PUK code, or if you have not received such a code, co ntact you r network service provid er. For information about passwor ds, contact your access point provider, for example, a commerc ial internet service provider (ISP) or network service provi der. Q: How do I c lose an applicatio n that is not responding? A: Press and hold . To close an application, scrol l to it, and press C . Pressing C does not close Music player. To close Mu sic player, se lect it fro m the list, and Options > Exit . Q: Why do images look sm udgy? A: Ensure that the camera lens protect ion windows are clean. Q: Why do missing, discoloured, o r bright dots appear on the sc reen every time I tur n on my de vice? A: This is a characteri stic of this type of disp lay. Some displays may contai n pixels or dots that remain on or off. This is normal, no t a fault. Q: Why can't my device establish a GPS connec tion? A: Find more information about GPS, GPS receiver, satellite signals, and loca tion information in th is user guide. See "Posi tioning (GPS)" , p. 52 . Q: Why canâÂÂt I find my friendâ s device while using Bluetooth c onnectivity? A: Check that both devices are compatible, have activated Bluetooth conn ectivity, and are not in hidden mode. Check also th at the distance between the two de vices is not ov er 10 metre s (33 feet) and that there are no walls or othe r obstructions between the de vices. Q: Why canâÂÂt I end a Blueto oth connection? A: If another de vice is connected to your device, you can end th e connec tion from the o ther devic e or deactivate Blu etooth connectivity in your device. 175 Troubleshootin g
Press , and select Tools > Blueto oth > Bluetooth > Off . Q: Why canâÂÂt the other device see the files stored on m y device in the home netw ork? A: Make sure that you h ave configured the home network sett ings, conten t sharing is turned on in your device, and the other device is UPnP compatible. Q: What can I do if my hom e network connection stop s working? A: Switch off the wirele ss LAN (WLAN) connection from your compatible PC and your device, and switch it on again. If this does n ot help, rest art your compatible PC and your device. If the connec tion still does not work, reconfigure the WLAN setti ngs in both your compatible PC and dev ice. See "Wireless LAN" , p. 40 . Se e "Conne ction settings" , p. 169 . Q: Why can't I see my compatible PC in my device in the ho me network? A: If you are using a firewall applica tion in your compatible PC, check that it allows home media server to use t he external conn ection (you can add Home media server to the firewall application's exceptions list). Check from the firewall settings that the firewall applicatio n allows traf fic to the followin g ports: 1900, 491 52, 49153, and 49154. Some WLAN access point devices have a built-in firewall. In such cases, check that th e firewall in the access point device does not block t raffic to th e followin g ports: 1900, 4915 2, 49153, and 49154. Check that the WLAN settings are the same in your device and compatible PC. Q: Why can't I see a wireless LAN (WLAN) access point even though I know I'm wi thin its range? A: The WLAN access point may use a hidden service set identifier (SSID). You can only access networks that use a hidden SS ID if you know the correc t SSID, and have create d a WLAN internet acc ess point for the network on you r Nokia device. Q: How do I switch wireless LAN (WLAN) of f on my Nokia device? A: The WLAN on your No kia dev ice switche s off when you a re not con nected or trying to conne ct to another access point, or no t scanning for available networks. To further reduce battery consumption, you can specify that your Nokia de vice does not scan, or scans less often, for available networks in the background. WLAN switches off in between background scans. To change the background scan settings: 1. Press , and selec t Tools > Settings > Connection > Wireless LAN . 176 Troubleshootin g
2. To increase the backgrou nd scan time interval, adjust the time in Scan for networks . To stop background scans, select Show WLAN availabi lit y > Never . 3. To save your changes, press Back . When Sho w WLAN avai labil ity is set to Neve r , the WLAN availability icon is not sho wn in the standby mode. Howe ver, you can st ill manually scan for availa ble WLAN networks, and connect to WLAN networks as usual. Q: How can I save my data before deleting it? A: To save data, use Nokia Nseries PC Suite to synchronise with or to make a back- up copy of all data to a compa tible compute r. You can also send data using Bluetooth conne ctivity to a compatible device. Yo u can also st ore data on a compatib le memory card. Q: What do I d o if the mem ory is full? A: Delete items from the device memo ry or mass memory. If your device displays t he note Not enough memory to perform operation. Delete some data first. or Memory low. De lete some data from phone memory . when you are deleting several items at the same time, delete items one by one, beginning w ith the smallest items. See "Free memory" , p. 23 . Q: Why canâÂÂt I select a contact for my message? A: The contact card does not ha ve a phone number, an address, or an e-mail address. Press , select Contacts , the relevant contact, and edit t he contact card. Q: How can I end the data connection when the device star ts a data connectio n again and again? A: The device may be trying to retrieve a multimedia message from the multim edia message centre. To stop the device from ma king a data connec tion, press , and select Messaging > Options > Setti ngs > Multimedia message > Multimedi a retrieval and Manual to have the multimedia messaging centre save me ssages to be retrieved later, or Off to ignore all incoming multimedia messages. If you select Manual , you receive a notification when you have a new message in the multimedia message ce ntre. If you sele ct Off , the device does not make any network conne ctions related to multimedia me ssaging. To set the device to use a packet data connection only if you start an application or action that needs it, press , and select Tools > Settings > Connection > Packet data > Packet data connection > When needed . If this does not help, swit ch the devic e off, and switch it on again. 177 Troubleshootin g
Q: Why do I have problems connectin g the devic e to my PC ? A: Ensure that you have th e latest version of Nokia Nseries PC Sui te and that it is installed and running on your compatible PC. For further information on how to use Nokia Nseries PC Su ite, see the Nok ia Nseries PC Suite help or visit the Nokia support pages. Q: Can I use my device as a fax modem with a compatible PC? A: You cannot use your device as a fax modem. Howeve r, with cal l divert ing (network service), you can divert incoming fax calls to a fax number. 178 Troubleshootin g
Enhancements Warning: Use only batteries, chargers, and enhancements approved by Nokia for use with this particular model. The use of any other types may invalidate any approval or warranty, and may be dangerous. For availability o f approved en hancements, please check with your dealer. Whe n you disconnect the power cord of an y enhanceme nt, grasp and p ull the plug, not th e cord. 179 Enhancements
Battery and charger information Battery and ch arger information Your device is powered by a rec hargeable battery. The battery intend ed for use with this device is BL-6F . Nokia may make additional battery models available for this device. Th is device is intended for use when suppl ied with power from the followi ng chargers: AC-5, AC-8 , DC-1 , DC-8, DC-9 . The exact charger model number may vary depending on the type of plug. Th e plug variant is iden tified by one o f the following: E, EB, X, AR, U, A, C, or UB. The battery can be charged and discharged hundreds of times, but it will eventu ally wear out. When the ta lk and stan dby times are noticeably shorter th an normal, replace th e battery. Use only Nokia approved batteries, and recharge your battery only with Nokia approved chargers designated for this devi ce. Use of an unapproved battery or charger may present a risk of fire, explosion, leakage, or other hazard. If a battery is being used for the first time or if the battery has not be en used for a pr olonged period, it may be necessary to connect the charger, then disconnect and reconnec t it to begin charging the battery. If the battery is completely disc harged, it may take several minutes before th e charging indicator appears on the di splay or befor e any ca lls can be made. Always switch the device off and disconnect the charger before remo ving the battery. Unplug the ch arger from the elec trical plug and the device wh en not in use . Do not leave a fully charged battery connected to a charger, since overcharging may shorten its lifetime. If left unused, a fully charged battery will lose its charge over time. Always try to k eep the batter y between 15ðC and 25ðC (59ðF and 77ðF) . Extreme t emperatures reduce the capacity and life time of the battery . A device with a hot or cold battery may not work temporarily. Battery pe rf ormance is particularly limited in temperatures well below freezing. Do not sho rt-circuit the bat tery. Accident al short- circuiting can occur whe n a metalli c object such as a coin, c lip, or pen causes direct connect ion of the positive ( ) and negative (-) terminals of the battery. (These look like metal s trips on the battery.) This might happen, for examp le, when you carry a spare battery in your pocket or purse. Short- 180 Battery and charger information
circuiting the term inals may damage the battery or the connectin g object. Do not dispose of batt eries in a fire as th ey may explode. Batteries may also explode if damaged. Dispose of batteries according to lo cal regulations. Please recycle when possible. Do not dispose as household waste. Do not dismantle, cut, open, cr ush, bend, d eform, puncture, or shred cells or batteries. In the event of a battery leak, do not allow the liquid to come in contact wi th the skin or eyes. In the event of such a leak, flush yo ur skin or eye s immediat ely with water, or seek medical help. Do not modi fy, remanufacture, at tempt to i nsert foreign objects into the battery, or immerse or expose it to water or other liquids. Improper battery use may result in a fire, explosion, or other hazard. If the device or battery is droppe d, especially on a hard surface, and you believ e the battery has been damaged, ta ke it to a service centre for inspection befo re contin uing to u se it. Use the battery only for its inten ded purpose . Never use any charger or battery that is damaged. Keep your battery out of the reach of small children. Nokia battery authentication guidelines Always use original N okia batteries for your safety. To check that you are getting an original Nokia batte ry, purc has e it from an au thori sed Nok ia dealer, and inspect the ho logram label using the following steps: Successful completion of the steps is not a total assurance of the au thenticity of t he battery. If you have any reason to bel ieve that your battery is not an authentic, original Nokia battery, you should refrain from using it, and take it to the n earest authorised Nokia service point or dealer for assistance. Your authoris ed Nokia service point or dealer will inspect the battery fo r authenticity. If authenticity c annot be verified, re turn the batt ery to the place of purc hase. Authenticate hologram 1. When you look at the hologram on the label, you should see the Nokia connecting hands symbol from one angle and the Nokia Original Enhancem ents logo when looking from another angle . 181 Battery and charger information
2. When you angle th e hologram left, right, dow n and up, you should see 1, 2, 3 and 4 dots on each side respectively. What if your batt ery is not authent ic? If you cannot confirm that yo ur Nokia batte ry with the hologram on the labe l is an authentic Nokia battery, please do not use the battery. Take it to th e nearest authorised Nokia se r vice po int or deal er for assistance. The use of a battery th at is not approved by the manufacturer may be dangerous and may result in poor performance and damage to your device and its enhancements. It may also invalidate any approval or warranty ap plying to the device . For additional information, refer to the warranty and reference leaflet included with your Nokia device. 182 Battery and charger information
Care and maintenance Your device is a product of superior design and craftsmanship and should be treated with care. The following suggestions will hel p you prote ct your warranty coverage. â Keep the device dry. Prec ipitation, humidity, and all types of liquids or moisture can contain minerals that will corrode electro nic circuits. If your de vice doe s get wet, rem ove th e batte ry, and allow the device to dry completely before replacing it. â Do not use or store the device in dusty, dirty areas. Its moving parts and electronic components can be damaged. â Do not store t he device in hot areas. Hi gh temperatures can shorten th e life of electronic devices, damage batteries, and warp or melt certain plastics. â Do not store th e device in c old areas. When t he device returns to it s normal temperature, moisture can form inside the device and damage electroni c circuit boards. â Do not attemp t to open the dev ice othe r than as instructed in this gu ide. â Do not drop, knock, o r shake the de vice. Rough handling can break in ternal circuit boards and fine mechanics. â Do not use h arsh chemicals, cleani ng solvents, or strong detergents to clean th e device. â Do not pain t the de vice. Pain t can clog the moving parts and prev ent proper operat ion. â Use a soft, clean, dry cloth to clean any lenses, such as camera, proximity sensor, and light sensor lenses. â Use only the su pplied or an appr oved replacem ent ante nna. Una uthorised a ntennas, modifications, or attachments c ould damage the device and may violate regulations governing radio devices. â Use chargers indoors. â A l w a y s c r e a t e a b a c k u p o f d a t a y o u w a n t t o k e e p , such as co ntacts and cal endar notes. â To reset the dev ice from time to time for optimum performance, power o ff the device and remove the batt ery. These suggestions apply equally to your device, battery, charger, or any enha ncement. If any devic e 183 Care a nd maintenance
is not working pr operly, take it to the n earest authorised service fa cility for service. Disposal The crossed-out w heeled-bin symb ol on your product, literature, or packaging reminds you that all electrical an d electronic products, batteries, and accumulators must be taken to separate collec tion at t he end of their working life. This requirement applies to the European Union and other locations where sepa rate collection systems are available . Do not dispo se of these products as unsorted municipal waste. By returning the p roducts to collection you help prevent uncontrolle d waste disposal and promote the reuse of material resources. More detailed informat ion is av ailable fr om the product retailer, local waste authorit ies, national produce r responsibility organization s, or your local Nokia representativ e. For the product Ec o-Declaratio n or instructions for returning your obsolete product, go to country-specific information at www.nokia.com . 184 Care a nd maintenance
Additional safety information Small children Your device and its en hancements may cont ain small parts. Keep them out of the reach of small children. Operating environment This device meet s RF exposure gu idelines wh en used either in th e normal use p osition against the ear or when positione d at least 1. 5 centimetre s (5/8 inch) away from the body. When a carry case, belt clip, or holder is used for body-worn operat ion, it should not cont ain metal and sh ould pos ition t he device the above- stated di stance from your body. To transmit data files or messages, this device requires a quality connection to the network. In some cases, transmission of data files or messages may be delayed until such a c onne ction i s av ail able . Ensure the above separati on distance instructions are follo wed until the transmission is co mpleted. Parts of the device are magnetic. Metallic materials may be attracte d to the dev ice. Do not place credit cards or other magne tic storage med ia near the device, because in formation stored on them may be erased. Medical devices Operation of a ny radio transmitting equipment, including wireless phones, may interfere with the functionality of inadequately prot ected medical devices. Consult a physician or t he manufacturer of the medical device to determine if they are adequately shielded from exte rnal RF energy or if you have any ques tions. Sw itch of f your devic e in health care facilities wh en any regulations po sted in these areas instruct you to do so. Hospitals or health care facilities may be using equip ment that could be sensitive to external R F energy. Implanted medical devices Manufacture rs of medical d evices re commend that a minimum separation of 15.3 centimetre s (6 inches) should be maintained between a wireless device and a n impla nted me dical device, such as a pacemaker or implanted ca rdioverter defibrillator, to avoid potential interf erence w ith the medical device. Persons who have such devices should: 185 Additional safety information
â Always keep the wireless devi ce mo re t han 15. 3 centimetres (6 inches) from the me dical device when the wirel ess device is t urned on. â Not carry the wireless devi ce in a breast pock et. â Hold the wireless devic e to the ear opposite the medical device to mini mise the poten tial for interference. â Turn the wireless device off immediatel y if there is any reason to suspec t that interference is taking place. â Read and follow the directions from the manufa cturer of their impl anted med ical dev ice. If you have any questions about using your wireless device with an implante d medical device, consult your health care provider. Hearin g aid s Some digital wireless devices may interfere with some hearing aids. If inte rfe rence oc curs, consu lt your serv ice pr ovider . Hearing ai ds Warning: For heari ng aid co mpatibil ity, you must turn off the Blue tooth connectivity. Your mobile device model complies with FCC rules governing hearing aid compatibility. These rules require an M3 microphone or higher value. The M- value, shown on the device box , refers to lower radio frequency (RF) emissions. A higher M-valu e generally indicates that a device model has a lower RF emissions level, which may improve the likelihood that th e device will operate with c ertain hearing aids. S ome hearing aids are more immune than others to interfere nce. Please consult your hearin g heal th prof essi onal t o det ermine the M- rating of your hearing aid and whether your hearing aid will w ork with th is device. More information on accessibility can be found at www.noki aaccessibi lity.com. Vehicles RF signals may affect improperly installed or inadequately shielded electronic syst ems in motor vehicles such as electron ic fuel injection systems, electronic an tiskid (ant ilock) braking systems, electronic speed c ontrol systems, and air b ag systems. For more inform ation, check with the manufacturer, or its represe ntative, of your vehicle or any equipment th at has been added. Only qualified personnel should service the device or install the device in a vehicle. Faulty install ation or service may be dangerous and may invalidate any warranty that may apply to the de vice. Check regularly that all wireless device equipment in your 186 Additional safety information
vehicle is mounted and operating properly. Do not store or carry flammable liqu ids, gases, or explosive materials in the same co mpartment as the device, its parts, or enhanc ements. For veh icles equipped with an air bag, remember that air bags inflate with great force. Do not place ob jects, including installed or portable wireless equipmen t in the area over the air bag or in the air bag deployment area. If in- vehicle wirele ss equipment is improperly inst alled and the air bag inflates, serious injur y could result. Using your device while flying in ai rcraft is prohibited. Switch off your d evice before boarding an aircraft. The use of wireless teledevices in an aircraft may be dangerous to the operation of the aircraft, disrupt the wi reless telephone network, and may be illegal. Potentially explosive environments Switch of f your de vice wh en in any area with a potentially explosiv e atmosphere, and obey all signs and instructions. Potentially explosive atmospheres include areas where you would normally be advised to turn off y our vehicle engine . Sparks in such areas could cause an explosion or fire resulting in bodily injury or even death. Switc h off the device at refuelling points such as near gas pumps at service stations . Observe restrictions on the use of radio equipm ent in fuel de pots, storage , and distribution areas; ch emical plants; or where blasting operations are in progress. Area s with a potentially explo sive atmosph ere are often, but not always, clearly marked. They include below deck on boats, chemical transfer or storage facil ities and areas where the air contains chemicals or particles such as grain, dust, or metal powders. You should check with th e manufacturers of vehicl es using liquefied petroleum gas (such as propane or butane) to determine if this device can be safel y used in their vic inity. Emergency calls Important: This device operates using radio signals, wireless networks, landline networks, and user-programmed function s. If your device supports voic e calls over th e internet (internet calls), activate b oth the interne t calls and th e cellular phone. The device wi ll attempt to make emergency calls over both the cellular networks an d through your interne t call provider if both are activated. Connections in all conditions cannot be guar anteed . You shou ld ne ver rely solely on any wireless device for esse ntial communications lik e medical emergencies. To make an emergency call: 187 Additional safety information
1. If the device is not on, switch it on. Check f or adequate signa l strength. Dependin g on your device , you ma y also ne ed to com plete the following: â Insert a SIM card if your device uses one. â Remove certain c all restrictions you have activa ted i n your dev ice. â Change your profile from offline or flight profile mode to an active profile. 2. Press the end ke y as many times as ne eded to clear the display and ready th e device for c alls. 3. Enter th e official emerge ncy numb er for your present location. E mergency numbers vary by location. 4. Press the call key. When making an emergen cy call, giv e all the necessary information as accurately as possible. Your wireless device ma y be the only means of communication at the scene of an accident. Do not end the call until given p ermission to do so. CERTIFICATION INFORMATION (SAR) This mobi le device meets g uidel ines f or exposure to radio waves. Your mobile device is a radio transmitter and receiver. It is designed not t o exceed the limits for exposure to radio waves recommended by international guid elines. These guidelines were developed by the in dependent scientific organisation ICNIRP and include safety margins designed to assure the pr otection of all persons, regardless of age and heal th. The exposure guidelines for mobile de vices employ a unit of measu rement known as the Specific Absorption Rate or SAR. The SAR limit stated in the ICNIRP guidelines is 2.0 watts/k ilogram (W/kg) averaged over 10 grams of tissue. Tests for SAR are conducted using standard ope rating positions wit h the device transmitting at its highest certified power level in all tested frequency bands. The a ctual SAR level of an operating device can be below the maximum value because the devic e is designed to use only the powe r required to reac h the network. That amount changes depending on a number of factors such as how close you are to a network base station. The highest SAR value und er the ICNIRP guidelines for use of the device at the ear is 1.17 W/ kg. Use of device accesso ries and enh ancements may result in di fferent SAR va lues. SAR v alues ma y vary depending on n ational repo rting and testing requirements and the netw ork band . Additional SAR 188 Additional safety information
information may be provided under product information at www.nokia .com. Your mobile device is al so designed to meet the requirements for exposure to radio waves established by the Fe deral Communications Commission (USA) and Industry Canada. These requirements set a SAR limit of 1.6 W/kg averaged over one gram of tissue . The highest SAR value reported under this standard during product certification for u se at the ear is 1.42 W/kg and when properly worn on the body is 1 .10 W/kg. 189 Additional safety information
Index Symbols/Numerics 1-touch di aling 131 A access codes 21 access points 41, 170 groups 170 accessories See enhancem ents active standby mode 51, 161 active toolbar 81 in camera 79 in Photos 91 address book See contacts alarm clock 147 alarm, calendar note 148 albums, media 91 anniversary notes 147 answering calls 130 antennas 17 application manager 153 applications 153 updating 20 assisted GPS (A -GPS) 52 attachments 120, 122 audio messages 118 audio themes 49 auto-update for time/ date 147 B back cover changing 48 backing up device memory 157 backlight time-out 161 battery power saver setting 161 saving power 22 birthday notes 147 blogs 35 Bluetooth conne ctivity blocking devices 46 device address 44 device visibility 43 low memory 45 pairing devices 4 5 receiving data 4 5 security 44 sending data 44 settings 43 switching on/off 4 3 bookmarks 36 bright ness, dis play 161 browser bookmarks 36 browsing pages 33, 35 cache memory 37 downloads 36 security 38 settings 38 widgets 35 C cable connection 46 cache memory 37 calculator 153 calendar 147 call log 137 call waiting 131 calls 129 answering 130 conference 130 duration of 137 internet calls 139 options during 129 recording 146 rejecting 130 190 Index
settings 166 camer a colour 87 flash 82 image quality 86 imaging mode 80 indicators 78 lighting 87 location information 81 options 81 scenes 82 self-timer 83 sequence mode 82 settings 86 video mode 85 video quality 87 cell broa dcast messages 116 certificates 164 character encoding 118 chart s spreadsheet 150 clipboard, copying to 118 clock 5 1, 147 comput er conn ection s 47 See also data connections conference calls 130 configu rati on See settings connection manager 42 contacts copying 142 default information 141 deleting 141 editing 141 groups 143 images in 141 names an d numbers 141 ringing tones 142 saving 141 sending 141 synchronising 158 voice tags 141 converter 151 copying text to clipboard 118 copyright prot ection 14 5 currency convert er 151 D data connections cable 46 device manager 159 PC connectivity 4 7 synchronisation 158 date and time 147 declining calls 130 device manager 159 dialled numbers 136 dismissing calls 130 display setti ngs 161 DLNA 100 documen t applica tions 150 downloads 36 DRM (digital r ights management) 145 duration of calls 137 E e-mail messages 121 end all calls option 131 enhancement setti ngs 162 Excel, Microsoft 150 F factory settings, restoring 166 feeds, news 35 file manager 157 Flash Player 145 FM radio 73 FM transmitter 69 playing songs 6 9 settings 70 font settings 161 G gallery sounds 98 191 Index
streaming links 99 games 110 general information 19 GPS position requests 54 GPS (Global Posit ioning System) 52 grid view of menus 51 H headset 30 help appli cation 19 home network 6 6, 100 copying files 103 sharing content 102 home synchroni sation incoming files 104 setting up 103 settings 104 HSDPA ( high-sp eed down link packet ac cess) 32 I IAPs (internet access points) 41 images editing 94 printing 95, 96 sharing online 96 inbox, message 120 indicators and icons 26 installation of applications 154 internet call se rvices managing 140 internet calls 139 activating 139 blocking contacts 140 making 139 settings 140 internet connection 33 See also browser interne t radio favourites 76 listening 75 settings 77 station directory 77 J J2ME Java application support 153 Java scripts/ applications 153 K keyguard 28, 164 keypad 28, 164 L landmarks 54 language settings 162 licences 145 light settings 161 list view of menus 51 location informatio n 52 lock code 21 locking keypad 164 locking keypad 28 loudspeak er 31 M mailbox e-mail 121 video 130 voice 130 main menu 5 1 Maps 57 media Flash Player 145 music player 64 radio 73 RealPlayer 144 streaming 144 voice recorder 146 meeting note s 147 meetin gs, setting up 147 memo notes 147, 151 memory clearing 23 192 Index
web cache 37 message reader 121 selecting voice 159 messages e-mail 121 folders for 116 icon for incoming 120 multimedia 120 settings 123 voice 130 Mini Map 35 MMS (multimedia message service) 11 8, 120 multimedia menu 2 9 multimedia messages 118, 120 music player 64 playlists 65 transferring music 67 muting soun d 130 my numbers 141 N N-Gage 110 settings 114 N-Gage views 110 Navi wheel 28 navigation tools 5 2 network settings 1 68 news feeds 35 notes 151 O offline mode 31 one-touch dial ing 131 operator logo 162 options menu for calls 129 outbox, me ssage 116 P packet data connection access point settings 171 counters 137 settings 173 page overview 35 PDF reader 15 1 personal cer tificates 164 personalisati on 48, 16 1 phonebook See contacts photog raphs See camera Photos active toolbar 85 organising files 90 photos editing 94 file details 90 red-eye 94 tags 91 viewing 89 PictBridge 95 PIN code 21 PIN2 c ode 21 playing messages 121 podcasting directories 72 downloads 72 playing 73 searching 71 settings 70 positioning info rmation 52 positioning set tings 166 power saver 161 PowerPoint , Microsoft 150 predictive text entry mode 117 presentations multimedia 150 presentations, multimedia 99 , 120 printing images 95 profiles offline restrictions 31 proxy settings 171 PUK codes 21 punctuation, text entry 118 193 Index
Q Quickmanager 151 Quickpoint 150 Quickshe et 150 Quickword 150 R Radio settings 75 radio 73 RBDS (Radio Broadcast Data System) 73 RDS (Radio Data System) 73 RealPlayer 144 recordin g calls 146 sounds 146 recording video clips 8 5 red-eye remo val 94 redial feature 167 rejectin g calls 130 remote mailbox 121 remote SIM mode 46 ringing tones 49, 50 roaming 168 S scenes, image and video 82 screen settin gs 161 scroll key 28 security certificat es 164 web browser 38 WEP 172 WPA 172 security code 21 security modu le 166 self-ti mer, camera 83 sensor settings 163 sent mess ages f older 116 service commands 116 service messages 121 setting wizard 24 settings access point name control 174 access points 170 applications 174 Bluetooth conn ectivity 43 call barring 168 call divert 168 calls 1 66 camera 86 certificat es 164 configuration 174 display 161 FM radio 75 FM transmitter 70 home network 101 internet calls 140 internet radio 77 language 162 Navi wheel 163 network 168 packet dat a 173 packet da ta access points 171 personalisation 161 podcasting 70 positioning 166 RealPlayer 145 SIP 174 standby 161 tv-out 162 Video centre 108 video sharing 134 web browser 38 WLAN 173 WLAN internet access points 172 shared video 134 shooting modes, camera 82 signature, digital 165 SIM card messages 123 SIM card security 163 SIP 174 slide sho w 92 194 Index
SMS (short message service) 11 8 software ap pl ications 153 software update 20 songs 6 4 sounds 49 speaker phone 31 special characters, text entry 118 Speech 159 standby mode 5 1, 161 streaming li nks 9 9 streaming media 144 Symbian applications 153 synchronisation settings 104 synchronisation of data 158 T text ent ry 11 7 text messages receiving and reading 120 replying to 120 sending 118 settings 124 SIM messages 123 themes 4 8 time and date 147 time zone sett ings 147 time-ou t for bac klight 161 tones 49 ring settings 50 settings 161 toolbar 79, 9 1 transferring data 24 transferr ing music 67 troubles hooting 175 trust settings 165 TV configuration 162 tv-out mode 92 U unlocking keypad 28, 164 UPIN code 21 UPnP (Univers al Plug and P lay architecture) 100 UPUK code 21 USB cable connection 46 useful information 19 V video call s 132, 134 options during 133 Video Centre 106 Video centre downloading 106 viewing 106 video clips shared 134 video settings 87 Visual Radio 73 voice applications 157 voice calls See calls voice commands 13 1, 157 voice recorder 14 6 volume controls 31 W wallpaper 48 web conne ction 33 web logs 35 week settings, calendar 148 welcome 24 welcome note 1 61 WEP 172 widgets 35 wireless LAN (WLAN) 40 wireless LAN settings 173 Word, Micros oft 1 50 world clock 147 WPA 172 wrist strap 17 Z zip manager 152 zooming 80, 85 195 Index
é 2008 Nokia. All rights reserved. DECLARATION O F CONFORM ITY Hereby, NOKIA COR PORATION decla res that this RM-350 product is in compliance with the essen tial requirements and other relev ant provisions of Directive 1999/5 /EC. A copy o f the Decla ration of Conformity can be foun d at h ttp:// www.nokia.com/phon es/declaration_of_co nformity/. Nokia, Nokia Con necting People, Ns eries, N79, N- Gage, Navi and Vi sual R adio are trademarks or re gistered trademarks of Nokia Co rporation. Noki a tune is a sound mark of Nokia Corporatio n. Other product and comp any names mentioned herein may be trademarks or tradenames of their respective owners. Reproducti on, transfer, d istributi on, or storage of p art or all of t he contents in this document in any form without the prior written permission of Nok ia is prohibited. This software is based in part of the work of the FreeType Team . This product is covered by one or more of the followi ng patent s : Un i t e d S t a t es P a t en t 5,155,805, United States Paten t 5,325,479, United States Pate n t 5,159,668, U nited States Paten t 2232861 and Fra nce Patent 90057 12 . US Patent No 5818437 and other pending patents. T9 text input soft ware Copyright é 19 9 8-2008. Tegi c Communication s, Inc. All rig hts reserved. This product includes s oftware licensed from Symb ian Software L td é1998-2008. Symbian and Symbian OS a re trademarks o f Symbian Ltd. Java and all Java-based marks are trademarks or registered trademarks of Sun Microsystems, Inc. Portions of the Nokia Maps softw are are é 2002-2008 T he FreeType Project. All righ ts reserved. This product is li censed under the MPEG-4 Visual Paten t Portfo lio License (i) for personal and noncommercial use in connection with informatio n which has been encoded in compliance with the MPEG-4 Visual S tandard by a consumer en gaged in a person al and noncommercial activity a nd (ii) for use in connect ion with MPEG- 4 video prov ided by a licensed video prov ider. No licens e is granted or shall be implied for any ot her use. A dditional inf ormation, including that related to promotional, internal, and commercial uses , may be obtained fro m MPEG LA, LLC. See http://w ww.mpegla. com Nokia operates a policy of ongoing develop ment. Nokia reserves th e right to make changes and improvemen ts to any of the product s describe d in this document without prior notice. TO THE MAX IMUM EX TENT PERM ITTED BY APPLICA BLE LA W, UNDER N O CI RCUMST ANCES SHALL N OKIA OR AN Y OF ITS LICENSO RS BE RESPONSIBLE FO R ANY LOSS OF DATA OR INCOM E OR ANY SPECIA L, INC IDENTA L, CONSEQUENTIAL OR INDIRECT DAMA GES HOWSOEVE R CAUSED. THE CO NTENTS OF THI S DOCU MENT A RE PR OVIDED "A S IS" . EXCEP T AS RE QUIRE D BY AP PLICA BLE LA W, NO WA RRANT IES OF ANY KIND , EITH ER EXP RESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, T HE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITN ESS FOR A PARTICUL AR PURPOS E, ARE MAD E IN RELA TION
TO THE ACC URACY, R ELIABILIT Y OR CONTEN TS OF TH IS DOCUME NT. NOKIA RE SERVES THE RIGHT TO REVISE THIS DOCUMENT OR WITH DRAW IT AT ANY TIM E WITHOUT PRI OR NOTICE. Reverse engineerin g of any software in th e Nokia de vice is prohibited to the extent permitted by a pplicable la w. Insofar as thi s user guide contains any limitatio ns on N okia's representa tions, wa rranties, damages and liab ilities, such limitations shall l ikewise limit any repr ese ntations, warra nties, damages a nd lia bilities of Nokia's l icensors. The availability of particular products an d applications and services f or these products may vary by region. Please check with your Nokia dealer for details, and a vailab ility of la nguage opt ions. Export controls This device may contain commo dities, technolo gy or software subject to export laws and regulations from the US and oth er countr ies. Dive rsion contrary to law is prohibited. FCC/INDUSTR Y CANADA NOTICE Your device may cause TV or radio in terferen ce (for example, when using a telephon e in close proximity to receiving equipment) . The FCC or Industr y Canada can require you to stop usi ng your telephone if such inte rferen ce cannot be eliminated. If you req uire assistance, conta ct your local service facility. This device complies with part 15 of the FCC r ules. Operation is subject to the follow ing two conditi ons: (1) This de vice may not cause ha rmful interference, a nd (2) this device must accept any interference received, includin g interference that may cause u ndesired operat ion. Any changes or modifications not expressly approved by Nokia coul d vo id the user's authority to operate this equipment. Issue 1
Contents Safety................. ........... ............ ........... ......11 About your device............................................ .............11 Network services................................ ...........................12 Get st ar ted ..... ......... ...... ........ ........ ..... ........ 14 Keys and parts (front )...................................................14 Key s an d pa rt s (b ack an d si de s).. ....... ............ ....... ......15 Insert SIM card and battery..........................................15 Switch the device on....... ................ .................... ..........16 Charge the battery..................................... ...................1 7 Attach wris t strap....... .............. .............. .............. .........17 Antenna locations........................................................ .17 Get c onne ct ed.. ........ ..... ......... ....... ...... .......1 8 Find help......... .......... ....... ........ ....... ....... ....19 Instructions inside - In -device help...................... .......19 Get started.................................................................... .19 Accessibility solutions ................. ..................... ............ .19 Additional applica tions.......... .......... ........ ......... ........ ...19 Software updates...... ....................................................20 Application Update...................... ........... ........... .......... .20 Settings......................................................................... .21 Access codes....................... .................... ................... ....21 Prolong battery life............................ ...........................22 Free memory................ ............. ............. .............. .........23 Your device........... ............. .......... ............. ..24 Welcome.................................. ............................ ..........24 Nokia Switch..... .................................... .........................24 Transfer content. ........................................................24 Syn ch roni se , r etr iev e, or s end co nte nt.... ................25 Display indicators....... ........................ ...........................26 Shortcuts........................ ................................................ 27 Lock the keypad................. ............ ................ ............ ...28 Navi⢠wheel..................................................................28 Multimedia menu...... ....................................................29 Mobile Search.......................... ............... ............... ........29 Headset.......................................... ................................30 Volu me and lou dsp ea ker co ntro l. ......... ....... ........ ....... 31 Offline profile............... ............... .................... ...............31 Fast downloading........................ ............. ............. .......32 Web browser........ .......... .......... .......... ........33 Browse the web.......................... ................ ..................3 3 Browser toolbar.................. ............. ............. ............. ...34 Navigate pages. ................. .................. .................. ........35 Web feeds and blogs............ ......... .......... ......... .......... ..35 Widgets..........................................................................35 Content search....... ................ .................... .................... 36 Download and purchase items..................... ...............36 Bookmarks..................................................................... 36 Empty the cache ............................................................37 End the connection...................................................... .37 Connection security................ ......... ........... ......... .........3 8 Web settings................. ................... ........................ ......38 Connections... ........... ........... ............. ..........40 Wireless LAN..................................................................4 0 About WLAN................................................................40 Contents
WLAN connections. ................... .............. ....................40 WLAN wizard.. .................. ............. .................. ............41 WLAN internet a ccess points.....................................41 Operating modes ................. ......................... ..............42 Connection manager................. ........ ....... ........ ........ ....42 Active data connecti ons......... ................ ........... .........42 Available WLAN n etworks........... .................. .............42 Bluetooth connectivit y............. ........... ............ ........... ..43 About Bluetooth connectivity.............. ....... ........ ......43 Settings................................... ............... .....................43 Security tips............................. ................ ................... 44 Sen d d ata us ing Blu et oot h co nn ect ivi ty. ...... ....... ....4 4 Pair devices.................................................................45 Re ce i v e d a t a u s in g Bl u et o ot h co n n ec t iv i ty ............. 4 5 Block devices............... .............. ................... ...............46 Remote SIM mode......................... .............. ............... 46 USB.......... ................. ................ ................. ................. .....46 PC connections.......................... ............... ........... ..........47 Personalise your device........ ...... ... ....... .....48 Change the look of your device............. ....... ...... ...... ...48 Changeable ba ck cover................................................ .48 Audio themes............................ ............... ............... ......49 Set tones in Profiles...................................................... 49 3-D tones............. ..................... ...................... ................50 Modify the standby mode............... ....... ....... ....... ...... ..51 Modify the main menu..................... .......... ........... .......51 Positioning ( GPS)........... .............. .......... .....52 About GPS..... ............... .............. ............... ............. .........52 Assisted GPS (A-GPS)................ ........ ........... ........ ........ ..52 Hold your device correctly........................ ....................53 Tip s on cre at ing a G PS con ne cti on... ..... ......... ....... ......5 3 Position requests .............. ............. ............. ............. .....54 Landmarks.................................................... .................54 GPS data.........................................................................55 Route guidance............... ......... .......... ......... .......... .....55 Ret rie ve posi ti on i nfo rma ti on. ......... ....... ............ .....5 6 Trip meter............................................. ...................... 56 Maps...........................................................57 About Maps....................................................................57 Browse maps.................................................................58 Download maps ................ ................ .................. ..........59 Find a place....... ............................. ............................... .60 Extra services for Maps.................... ........... ............ ......61 Navigation.. .............. ........... ............. ............. ..............61 Traffic info rmation.....................................................63 Guides........................ ...................................... ............63 Music folder.......... ............................ ..........64 Music player..................................................... ..............64 Pla y a s ong or a p odca st ep isod e. ........ ........... ......... 64 Music menu.............................................. ...................65 Playlists............................... ................. .................... ...65 Podcasts................................... .......................... .........66 Hom e ne tw ork with mu sic pl ay er. ........ ........ .......... .66 Transfer music to your device...................................67 Transfer music from PC.......................... ................. 67 Transfer with Window s Media Player. ...................67 Nokia Music Store.... ...................................... ................68 FM transmitter.......................................... .....................69 About the FM transmitter...................... ............. .......69 Pla y a son g us ing FM tra ns mit ter ...... ....... ........ ........ 69 FM transmitter set tings........... ........ ....... ........ ........ ...70 Nokia Podcasting........................ ............ ............. .........70 Podcasting settings ................... .................... .............70 Search podcasts.................... ......................................71 Contents
Directories...................... ............................................. 72 Downloads............................................................ ......72 Play and manage podcasts............ ......................... ...73 Radio applications................... .......... .......... .......... .......73 FM radio ................... ................... ........................ ........73 Listen to the radio...................................................74 View visual con tent.................................................75 Saved stations.......... ..................... .......................... .75 FM radio settings................................... ..................7 5 Nokia Internet Radio. ....................... .................. ........75 Listen to internet radio stations................. ......... ..75 Favourite stations..... ............ .................... .............. .76 Search for sta tions............ ............. ............. ........... ..76 Station directory................ ......................................77 Internet radio settings.......... ................................. .77 Camera.................. ................. ............. .......78 About the camera................... .......... ......... ......... ..........7 8 Activate the camera......................................................78 Image capture.............................................................. .78 Sti ll ima ge c am er a in di cato rs ....... ....... ....... ....... ...... .78 Active toolbar.................. ............ ........... ............ ........79 Capture images. ..................... ................. ....................80 Location informat ion.................................................8 1 After taking a pict ure.................................................81 Flash........ .............. .............. ............. .............. ............ ..82 Scenes.......... ........................ .......................... ..............82 Capture images in a sequence............. .......... ...........8 2 You in the pictureâÂÂself-t imer...... ....... ...... ........ .......83 Tips on takin g good photograp hs............ ......... .......83 Video recording....................................................... ......84 Video capture indicators............ ...... ........ ...... ....... ....84 Record videos............. ............ ............. ............ ...........85 After recording a video..............................................85 Camera settings....... .............. .................. .............. ........86 Still image camera settin gs.......................................86 Colour and lighting settings........... ...........................87 Video settings.................................... .........................87 Photos................................... .....................89 About Photos.................................................................89 View images and videos...... .................... .....................89 View and edit file details... ..................... ................. .....90 Organise images a nd videos........................................90 Active toolbar.............................. ......................... .........91 Albums.................................. ...................... ...................91 Tags................................................................................91 Slide show............ .................... ............... .................... ...92 TV-out mode..................................................................92 Edit images....................................................................94 Image editor...............................................................94 Crop image...................... ........................................... .94 Reduce red-eye...........................................................94 Useful shortcuts......... ............................ .....................94 Edit videos...................... ............... .............. ............... ...95 Print images.......................... ................ ..................... ...95 Image print.................................................................95 Printer selection.................. ........... ........... ............ ..95 Print preview..................... ............. ............ ............ .96 Print settings.... .......... ............. ............ ............ .........96 Print online.......................................... .......................9 6 Share images and v ideos online .......... ................ .......96 Gallery.......................................... ..............98 Main view.......... ...................... ....................... ................98 Sounds............. ................. .................. ................. ...........98 Streaming links........................... ................. ............ .....99 Presentations...................... ............ ............ ............ ......99 Contents
Home network............... ............. ........... ..100 About home network................... .......... .......... ..........100 Imp ort ant se cu rit y i nf orm ati on. ...... ....... ....... ....... .... 101 Settings for h ome network........................................ 101 Set sharing on and defin e content...................... ......102 View and share media files.......... ..............................102 Copy media files..........................................................103 Home synchronisation.... ........... ................ ............. ....103 Synchronise media files. ................................... .......103 Synchronisation settin gs.........................................104 Define incoming files...............................................104 Define outgoing files.................. .......... ......... ......... .105 Nok ia Vid eo Cen tr e.................................. 10 6 View and download video clips...... ........................... 106 Video feeds..................................................................107 My videos.................................................................... .107 Transfer videos from your PC............................. ........108 Video centre settings.... ................................ ..............108 N-Gage........... ............. .................. ............110 About N-Gage............................. .................... .............110 N-Gage views....... ..................... ............................ .......110 Get started...................................................................111 Create a player name...............................................111 Start a game.......................................... ...................111 Track your progress................. .......... .......... .......... ..112 Play with friends.......................... ............. ............ ...112 Play and manage ga mes......................... ...................112 Edit profile details........ ....................... .................. ......113 Connect with other pla yers........................................ 113 Find and add friends................................................113 View friend information..........................................113 Sort the friends list............ ....... ........ ....... ......... .......114 Rate a pl ayer................................. ............................114 Send messages.........................................................114 N-Gage setting s..................................................... ......114 Messaging................ .......... ......... .......... ...116 Messaging main view ..................................... ............116 Write text. .............................. ........................... ...........117 Traditional text inp ut........... ........ ........ ........ ........ ...117 Predictive text input......................... .............. .........117 Tips on text inpu t....................................... ..............118 Change the writing language........... ...... ....... ...... ...118 Edit text and lists. ............... ............ ............... .......... .118 Write and send messages............................ ............. .118 Messaging inbox.......................... ............... ............... .120 Receive messages.............. ......... ......... ........ ......... ...120 Multimedia mes sages..............................................120 Dat a, s et tin gs, an d w eb s erv ic e me ss age s............121 Message reader.......................................... .................121 Mailbox.............. ............... ................... ................ .........121 Define the e-mail settings.......................................121 Open the mailbox.............. ...................... .................122 Retrieve e-mail messages........... ...... ...... ....... ...... ...122 Delete e-mail messages..... ................. .................... .123 Disconnect from th e mailbox............. .....................123 View messages on a SIM card............................... .....123 Messaging settin gs..................... ..................... ...........123 Text message set tings............................................ .124 Multimedia mes sage settings.................................124 E-mail settings........... ....................... ........................125 Manage mailboxes ............ .......... ......... .......... .......125 Connection settings.............. ....... ........ ....... ......... .125 User settings......................................................... .126 Retrieval settings.............. ....... ........... ........ ....... ...126 Au toma ti c re tri ev al set tin gs ......... ................ .......1 27 Contents
Web service message se ttings................................127 Cell broadcast settings ................. .............. ..............127 Other settings............................................... ............128 Make calls....................... ..........................129 Voice calls ................. ............ .............. ................... .....129 Options during a call. ................ .......... ................ ........129 Voice and video mailboxes.......... ........ ........ ........ ......130 Answer or decline a call.............. ...... ....... ...... ....... .....130 Make a conference call........... ........ ......... .......... .........130 1-touch dial a phone number....................................131 Call waiting................... ................................. ..............131 Voice dialling.................................... ...........................131 Make a video call................ .........................................132 Options during a video ca ll.............. .............. ............133 Answer or decline a video call............................. ......134 Video sharing...................... .............. .............. ............134 Video sharing requirements.............. ...... ...... ...... ...134 Settings.......................................................... ...........134 Sha re liv e vi de o or vid eo cli ps. ......... ....... .......... ..... 135 Accept an invitation.................................................136 Log....................... ...................... ...................... .............136 Recent calls............................................ ...................136 Call duration......................... ............. .............. .........137 Packet data.................................................. .............137 Mon ito r al l c omm uni ca tio n e ven ts.... ....................137 Internet calls............................................139 About internet calls.................... .......... ........... ...........139 Activate inte rnet calls.................................................139 Make internet calls ........ ................................. ............139 Blocked contacts.................................. ...................... .140 Mana ge int er net c al l s erv ice s... ...... ....... ....... ........ ..... 140 Internet call setting s........ ........... ....... ........ ........ ........140 Contacts (phonebook )........................... ...141 Save and edit names and numbers............. ..............141 Mana ge nam es and num be rs... ....... ......... ....... ......... .14 1 Default numbers and addres ses................................141 Add ringing tones for contacts.................. ............... .142 Copy contacts.................. ........... ........... ........... ...........142 SIM services........... ............ ............... ................ ............ 142 SIM contacts......................................... .....................142 Fixed dialling............................................... .............143 Manage contact groups..............................................143 Media folder.................................. ...........144 RealPlayer ...................................................................144 Play video clips.........................................................144 Stream content over th e air....................................144 RealPlayer settin gs............... .................. .............. ....145 Adobe Flash Player.................... ........................ ..........145 Licences.................... .................... .......................... ......145 Recorder.................... ....................... ................. ...........146 Time management..... ........... ............ .......147 Clock ............................................ ................................147 Alarm clock.......... ............ ............... ............ ............... 147 World clock......................... .................... ................. .147 Calendar.......................................................................147 Create a calendar entry.. ................ ................. .........147 Calendar views................ .......... .......... .......... .......... .148 Manage calenda r entries....................... ..................149 Office folder. .......... ......... ........ ......... ......... 150 Quickoffice...................................................................150 Quickword............... ............................. ..................... 150 Quicksheet........................ ............... .............. ...........150 Quickpoint..... ................... ............... ................... .......150 Contents
Quickmanager............................. .............. ...............151 Notes............................................................................151 Adobe reader............................ ........................... ........151 Converter.................... ................ ................ .................151 Zip manager........................ ............. ............. ............. .152 Applications f older.................. ............. ....153 Calculator.....................................................................153 Application mana ger........................... ...................... .153 Install applicat ions and software ......................... .154 Remove applications and software........................155 Settings................................................ .....................155 Tools folder.......................... .................. ..157 File manager....... ................... .............. ................... .....157 About File manager....... .......... ............... ........... .......157 Find and organise files............... ......... ........... .........157 Edit memory card.....................................................157 Back up files on a memory ca rd.............. ............ ....157 Voice commands.........................................................157 Sync...................................................... ........................158 Device manager.................... .......... .......... .............. ....159 Speech .................................. ...................................... .159 Settings..................... ..................... ..........161 General settings................................................. .........161 Personalisation setti ngs..........................................161 Enhancement setting s......................... ....................162 Navi wheel settings............... ........ ........ ............ ......163 Sensor settings.........................................................163 Security settings..... ......................................... .........163 Phone and SIM............................................. ..........163 Certificate mana gement.......................................164 Security module....... ............ ..................... ............. 166 Restore original settin gs................... .............. ........166 Positioning settin gs.................................................166 Phone settings....................... ............ ............ ............ .166 Call settings ................ ............. ................. ................. 166 Call divert.......................................... ........................168 Call barring........... .............. .................. .............. .......168 Network settings...... .................. ........................ ......168 Connection settings....................................................169 Dat a c onne ct ion s a nd a cc ess po int s......................169 Access points.................... ............. .................. .........170 Create a new acces s point............. .......... ......... ....170 Create access p oint groups........ ...................... .....170 Packet data acce ss points..... ................................ 171 WLAN internet access point s................................172 Packet data settings................ ....... ............ ....... ......173 Wireless LAN settings.............. ....... ...... ........ ...... .....173 SIP settings............................................ ...................174 Configurations..........................................................174 Access point name control....................... ........... ....174 Application settings .................................................... 174 Tro ub les hoo ti ng ...... ...... ...... ..... ....... ........ 17 5 Enhancements.... .............. .................... ....179 Battery and charger information.............180 Bat te ry a nd cha rge r i nf orm ati on. ....... ........ ...... ........ 18 0 Nok ia ba tter y a ut hent ic ati on guid el in es............. ....181 Authenticate hologram............... ......... ........ ........ ...181 What if your battery is not authentic?...................182 Car e a nd m ain tena nce ........... ............ ......1 83 Disposal...... .................. ................... .................. ...........184 Contents
Add iti ona l s afe ty inf orma ti on ........... ......185 Small children........ ....................... .................. .............185 Operating environment. ................ ..................... ........185 Medical devices................. ............ ............. ................ .185 Implanted medical devices............ ....... ........ ....... ...185 Hearing aids........ ....................... .................. .............186 Hearing aids.................... ............ ............ ................ ....186 Vehicles........................................................................186 Pote nt ial ly ex plo siv e e nvi ron me nts .........................18 7 Emergency calls............... ................................. ...........187 CERT IFIC AT ION I NF ORMA TIO N (S AR )......... ............ ......1 88 Index.................................................... ....190 Contents
Safety Read these simple guidelines. Not following the m may be dangerous or illega l. Read the complete user guide for further information. SWITCH ON S AFELY Do not switch the device on when wireless phone use is prohibited or when it may cause interference or danger. ROAD SAFETY COMES FI RST Obey all local laws. Al ways keep your hands free to operate the vehicle while driving. Your first consideration while driving should be road safety. INTERFERENCE All wireless devices may be su sceptible to interference, which could affect performan ce. SWITCH OFF IN RESTR ICTED ARE AS Follow any restrictions. Switch the device off in aircraft, near medi cal equipment, fuel, chemicals, or blasting areas. QUALIFIED SER VICE Only qualified pers onnel may install or repair this product. ENHANCEMEN TS AND BATTERIES Use only approved enhancements and batteries. Do not connect incompatible product s. ENHANC EMENTS Use only approved enhancements. Do not connect incompatible products. WATER-R ESISTANCE Your device is not water-resistant. Keep it dry. About your device The wireless device described in this guide is approved for use on the (E)GSM 850, 900, 1800, 1900 , and UMTS 850, 1900 MHz networks. Contact your service provider for more information about networks. When using the featu res in this device, obey all laws and respect loca l customs, privacy a nd legitimate rights of others, including copyrights. Copyright protection may pr event some images, music, and other content from being copied, modified, or transferr ed. 11 Safety
Your device supports several methods of connectivity. Like computers, your device may be exposed to viruses and other harmful content. Exercise caution w ith messages, connect ivity re quests, brows ing, and downloads. Only install an d use s ervices and other software from trustworthy sources th at offer adequate security and protecti on agains t harmful software, such as applications that are S ymb ian Signed or ha ve passed the Java Verified⢠testing. C onsider installing antiviru s and other security software on your device and any connec ted comp uter. Your device may have preinstalled bookmarks and links for third-party inte rnet sites. You ma y also acce ss other third-party sites through you r device. Th ird-party sites are not affiliated w ith Nokia, and N okia does not endorse or assume liabilit y for them. If you choose to access such sites, you should ta ke precautions for security or content. Warning: To use any features in this device, other than the al arm clock, the device must be switched on. Do not swit ch the device on when wireless device use may cause interference or danger. The office applications support common features of Microsoft Word, PowerPoint, and Excel (Microsoft Office 2000, XP, and 2003). Not all file formats can be viewed or mod ifi ed . Remember to make back-up copie s or keep a written record of all important information stored in your devi ce. When connecting to any ot her device, read its user guide for detailed safety in structions. Do not conn ect incompatible products. The images in t his guide may differ from your device display. Network services To use the device you must have service from a wireles s service provider. Many of the features require special network features. These features are not available on all networks; other networks may require that you make specific arrangements with your service provider before you can us e the network services . Using network services involves tr ansmission of data. C heck with your service provider for details about fees i n your home network and when ro aming on other networks. Your service provider can give you instructions and explain what charge s will apply. Some net works may have limitations that affect how you can use network services. For instance, some n etworks may not sup port all language-dependent ch aracters and se rvices. Your service provider may have requested that certain features be disabled or not activated in your device. If so, these features will not appear on your device menu. Your device may also have a special config uration such 12 Safety
as changes in menu names , menu order, and icons. Contact your service provid er for more information. This device supports WAP 2.0 p rotocols (HTTP and SSL) that run on TCP/IP protocol s. Some features of this device, such as MMS, web br owsing, and e-mail, require network support for these technologies. 13 Safety
Get started Keys and parts (front) 1 â Earpiece 2 â Selection keys 3 â Multimedia key 4 â Menu key 5 â Call key 6 â Numeric keypad 7 â Microphone 8 â Navi⢠wheel; hereafter referred to as the scroll key. 9 â End key 10 â Clear key C 11 â Secondary c amera 12 â Light sensor 1 â Power key 2 â Nokia AV Connector for compatible headsets and he adph ones 14 Get started
3 â Key lock switch for locking and unlocking the keys Keys and parts (back and sides) 1 and 9 â Stereo speaker with 3-D sound e ffect 2 â Zoom/Volume key 3 â 2-stage capture key fo r auto-focus, still image capture, an d video record ing 4 â Flash and video light 5 â Main camera for high resolution (up to 5 megapixels) image ca pture and video recording 6 â Memory card slot for a compatible microSD card and Micro USB co nnector to connect to a compatible PC 7 â Charger connector 8 â Hole for a wrist strap Insert SIM card and battery Always switc h the de vice off and disconnect the charger before removing the battery. 1. With the back of the device facing you, press and hold the release button and lift up the cove r. 15 Get started
2. Insert the SIM card into the card holder. Ensure that the contact area on the card is facing down. 3. Insert the battery. 4. To replace the cover, direct the top locking catch toward its slot, and press down until th e cover locks i nto pla ce. Remove SIM card To remove the SIM card, slide the latch to the direction of the arrow. Switch the device on 1. Press and hold the power key. 2. If the device asks for a PIN code or lock code, enter it, and press the left selectio n key. The fa ctory setting for the lock code is 12345 . If you forget the code a nd yo ur devic e is locke d, your de vice wi ll require service and additional charges may apply. For more information, contact a Nokia Care point or your device dealer. 16 Get started
Charge the battery 1. Connect a compatible charger to a wall outlet. 2. Connect t he power cord to the device. If the battery is complet ely discha rged, i t may take a while bef ore the charging indicator starts scrolling. 3. When the batter y is fully charged, the charging indicator stops scrolling. Disconnect the charger from the device, then from the wall ou tlet. Tip: Discon nect the c harger from th e wall outlet when th e charger is not in use. A charger that is conn ected to th e outlet consumes power ev en when it is n ot connecte d to the dev ice. Attach wrist strap 1. Remove the back cov er. 2. Thread a wrist strap, and tighten it. 3. Replace the c over. Antenna locations Your devi ce may h ave intern al and ex ternal antennas. As with any radio transmitting device, avoid touching the ante nna area unn ecessarily while the antenna is transmitting or receiving. Contact with su ch an antenna affects the communi cation quali ty and may cau se the de vice to operate at a higher powe r level than otherwise needed and may reduce the battery lif e. 1 â Cellular ante nna 2 â FM transmitter antenna 3 â Bluetooth and wireless LAN antenna, and GPS receiver 17 Get started
Get connected Your device supp orts the following con nectivity methods: â 2G and 3 G netw orks â Bluetooth connec tivity â to transfer files an d connect t o compatible enhan cements. See "Bluetooth connectivity" , p. 43 . â Nokia AV connector (3.5 mm) â t o connect to compatible headsets, headphones, or home stereo sets â USB data cable â to connect to compatible devices, such as printers and PCs. See "USB" , p. 46 . â Wireless LAN (WLAN) â to co nnect to the in ternet and WLAN enabled devices. See "Wireless LAN" , p. 40 . â GPS â to receive transmissions from GPS satellite s to measure yo ur locati on. See "Positioning (GPS)" , p. 52 . â FM transmitter â to listen to songs in your device through compa tible FM receiv ers, such as car radios or home stereo sets. See "Play a son g using FM transmitter" , p. 69 . 18 Get connected
Find help For local services and warranty information, plea se refer to the separate booklet. Instructions inside - In- device help Your device conta ins instructions t o help you use it. When an application is op en, to acc ess the help text for the current view, select Options > Help . To open help from the main menu, select Tools > Util ities > Help , and the relevant application. You can find links t o related topics at t he end of the help text. To make th e inst ructions easier to read, you can change the size of the text. If you click on an underlined word, a short explanation is displayed. Help uses the following indicators: shows a link to a related help topic. shows a link to the application being discussed. When you are reading the instructions, to switch between help and the application that is open in the bac kground, press and hold , or select the appl ication link ( ). Tip: To place Help in the main menu, select Tools > Util ities , high light Help , and select Options > Move to folder and the main menu. Get started See the get started guide for key s and parts information, instructions for setting up the device and for other essential information. Accessibility solutions Nokia is committed to making mobile phones easy to use for all individuals, including those with disabilities . For more inf ormatio n, visit the No kia website at www.nok iaaccessibility.com. Additional applications There are various applica tions provided by Nokia and different third-party software developers that help you do more with your device. These applications are explained in the guides that are 19 Find help
available on the produc t su pport pages of t he Nokia websit e. Software updates Nokia may produc e software updates that offer new features, enhanced functions, and improved performance. You may be able to request these updates through th e Nokia Software Up dater PC applica tion. Software up da tes may not be available for all products or their variants. Not all operators may endorse the latest software versions available. To update the device softw are, you need the Nokia Software Updater applicat ion and a compati ble PC with Microsoft Windows 2000 , XP, or Vista operating system, broadband internet access, and a compat ible dat a cable to connect yo ur device to the PC. Warning: If you install a software update, you cannot use t he device, even to make emergency calls, until the installation is completed and the device is restarted. Be su re to back up data before accepting install ation of a n update. The size of a software update is approximately 5-10 MB using your device an d 100 MB using a PC. The download and installa tion may take up to 20 minutes with De vice manager and up to 30 minutes with Nokia Soft ware Updater. To get more information an d to download the Nokia Software Updater application, visit www.nokiausa .com/software update in the United States or www.nokia-lat inoamerica.com/nsu in Latin America. If software updates over the air are supported by your network, you may also be able to request updates through the devi ce. Your device may be able t o period ically c heck for new software update s with Nokia Soft ware Checker. Press , and select Tools > SW checker . Tip: To check the softwa re version in your device, enter *#0000# in the standby mode. Application Update Press , and select Appl ications > App. update . With Applica tion Update, you can che ck the available updates for applications and downl oad them to your dev ice. After updating your device software using Application Update, the instructions in the user guide or the helps ma y not be up to date. To download the avai lable updates, select Options > Sta rt update . 20 Find help
To unmark updates, scroll to them, and press the scroll key. To view information on an update, select Options > View deta ils . To change the settings , select Opti ons > Settings . Settings Your device no rmally has MMS, GPRS, streaming, and mobile inte rnet setting s auto matically configure d, based on your network service prov ider information. You may have settings from your service providers already in stalled in your device, or you may receive or reques t the se ttings from t he network service providers as a special message. You can cha nge the general set tings in your device, such as language, standby mode, display, and keypad lock settings. See "Sett ings" , p. 161 . Access codes If you forget an y of the access codes, contact your service provider. â Pers onal iden tificat ion number (PIN) c ode â This code protects your SIM card against unauthorised use. Th e PIN code (4 to 8 d igits) is usually supplied with th e SIM card. After three consecutive in correct PIN code entr ies, the code is blocked, and you need the PUK code to unblo ck it. â U P I N c o d e â T h i s c o d e m a y b e s u p p l i e d w i t h t h e USIM ca rd. T he USIM ca rd is a n enhanc ed ver sion of the SIM card and is supported by U MTS mobile phones. â PI N 2 c o d e â T h i s c o d e ( 4 t o 8 d i g i t s ) i s s u p p l i e d with some SIM cards, and is required to access some functions in your devi ce. â Lock cod e (also known as security cod e) â The lock code he lps you t o protect your dev ice against unaut horised use. You can create and change the code, and set the d evice to request the code. Keep the new code sec ret and in a safe place separate from your d evice. If you forget th e code and your device is locked, your de vice will require service and additional charges may apply. For more informat ion, contact a Nokia Care point or your device d ealer. â Personal unblocking key (PUK ) code and PUK2 code â These codes (8 digits) are required to change a blocked PIN code or PIN2 code, respectively. If th e code s are not supplied with the SIM card, contact the operator whose SIM card is in your device. â UPUK code â This code (8 digits) is required to change a blocked UPIN code. If the code is not supplied with the USIM card, conta ct the operato r whose USIM card is in your device. 21 Find help
Prolong battery life Many features in your device i ncrease the demand on ba ttery po wer an d redu ce the ba ttery lif e time . To save battery p ower, note th e following: â Features that use Bluetooth tec hnology, or allowing such fe atures to run in the backgrou nd while using other featur es, increase the demand on battery power. Turn Bluetooth technology off when you d o not need it . â Features that use wireless LAN (WLAN), or allowing such fe atures to run in the backgrou nd while using other featur es, increase the demand on battery power. WLAN on your Nokia device switches off when you are not t rying to connect, not connec ted to an access point, or not sc anning for available networks. To further reduce battery consumption, you can specify that your device does not scan, or scans less often, for available networks in the background. See "Wireless LAN" , p. 40 . When Scan for networks is set to Never , the WLAN availability icon is not shown in the standby mode. Ho wever, you can still manually scan for available WLAN networks and connect to WLAN netw orks as usual. â If you have set Packet data connection to When available in connection settings, and there is no packet data c overage (GPRS), the device periodically trie s to establish a packet data connection. To pr olong the operating time of your device, sele ct Packet data connection > When needed . â The Maps application downloads new map information when you scrol l to new areas on the map, which inc reases the demand on battery power. You c an prevent th e automatic dow nload of new maps. See "Maps" , p. 57 . â If the signal stre ngth of the cell ular network varies much in your area, your device must scan for the available netw ork repeatedly. This increases the demand on battery power. If the network mode is se t to dual mode in the network settings, the de vi ce sea rches f or the UMTS network. To only use the GSM network, press , and select Tools > Settings > Phone > Network > Network mode > GSM . â The backlight of the display increases the demand on battery power. In the display settings, you can change the time-out after which the backlight is switched off, and adjust the light se nsor that observe s lighting conditions and adjusts the display brightness. Press , and select Tools > Settings > General > Personalisation > Display and Light time- out or Brightness . â Leaving applicati ons running in the background increases the demand on battery p ower. To close 22 Find help
the applications you do not use, press and hold , scroll to an applicatio n in the list, and press C . Pressing C does not close Music player. To c lose Music player, select it from the list and Op tions > Exit . â To turn on the po wer save mode, press the power key, and selec t Activate power saving . To turn off the power save mode, press the power key, and se lect Deactiv ate power s aving . You may not be able to c hange the se ttings o f ce rtain application s when the power save mode is turned on. Free memory To view how much memory different data types consume, press , and select Tools > File mgr. , the desired memory, and Options > De tails > Memory . To remove data you no lo nger need, use File manager or go to the respec tive appl ication. Yo u can remove the following: â Messages in the folders in Messaging and retrieved e-mail messa ges from the mailbox â Saved web pages â Contact information â Calendar notes â Applications shown in Application manager tha t you do not need â Installation files (.sis or .sisx) of applications you have installed. Transfer the installation files to a compatible PC. â Images and video clips in Photos. Back up the files to a compatible PC using Nokia Nseries PC Suite. 23 Find help
Your device Welcome When you switc h on your devic e for the first time , the Welcome applicat ion is displayed. Select from the following: â Sett. wizard â to configure various settings, such as e-mail. For mo re information on the Settings wizard application, see the guides available at the Nokia product support pages or your local N okia webs ite. â Switch â to transfer conten t, such as contacts and calendar entries, from a compatible Nokia device. See "Transfer content" , p. 24 . There ma y als o be a dem onstr ation about your device available in th e Welcome application. To access the W elcome ap plication later, press , and s elec t Tools > Utilit ies > Welcom e . You can also access the individual applications from their menu locations. Nokia Switch Transfer content You can use the Switch application to copy co ntent such as phone n umbers, addresses, calendar items, and images from your previous Noki a device to your Nokia N79 using Bl uetooth connectivity. The type of content th at can be transferr ed depends on the model of the devi ce from which you want to transfer content. I f that devic e supports synchronisation, you can also synchronise data between th e devices. Your Nokia N79 n otifies y ou if the other dev ice is not compatibl e. If the other device cannot be switched on wit hout a SIM card, you can insert your SIM card in it. When your Nokia N79 is switched on without a SIM card, the offline profile is automatically activated, and transfer can be done. Transfer content for the first time 1. To retrieve data fro m the other dev ice for the first time, on your Nokia N79, select Switch in the Welcome application, or press , and select Tools > Utilities > Switch . 24 Your device
2. Select th e connection type you want to use to transfer the data. Both devices must support the selected c onnection type. 3. If you select Blue tooth, conn ect the two de vices. To have your dev ice sea rch for de vices with Bluetooth connectivity, se lect Continue . Select the device from which you wa nt to transfe r content. You are asked to enter a cod e on your Nokia N79. Enter a code (1-16 digits), and select OK . Enter the same code o n the other device , and select OK . The devic es are now paired. See "Pair device s" , p. 45 . Some earlier Nokia devices may not have the Switch application. In this case, the Switch application is sent to the other devic e as a message. To install the Sw itch application on the other device, op en the m essage, and follow t he instructions on the display. 4. From your Nokia N79, select the content you want to transfer from the other device. When the transfe r has started, you ca n cancel it and continue later. Content is transferred from the memo ry of the other device to the co rresponding location in yo ur Nokia N79. The transfer time depends on the amount of data to be transferred. Synchronise, re trieve, or s end content After the first t ransfer, sele ct from the following to start a new transfer, depend ing on the mo del of the other dev ice: to synchron ise conten t between your Nokia N79 and the other device , if the other device supports synchronisation. The syn chronisation is two-way. If an item is de leted in one device, it is delet ed in b oth. Yo u cannot resto re delet ed items with synchronisation. to retrieve conte nt from the ot her device to your Nokia N79. With retrieval, cont ent is transferred from the other device to your Nokia N79. You may be asked to keep or delete th e original cont ent in the othe r device, dependin g on the device model. to send content from your Nokia N7 9 to your other devic e If Switch cannot send an item, depending on the type of th e other devic e, you can add t he item to the Nokia folder to C:\Nokia or E:\Nokia i n y o u r N o k i a N79. When you se lect the fol der to transfer, the items are synchronised in the corresponding f older in the other device, and vice versa. 25 Your device
Use shortcu ts to repeat a tran sfer After a data transfer, you can save a shortcut with the transfer settings t o the main view to repeat the same transfer later. To edit the shortcut, scroll to it, and select Options > Shortcut setting s . You can, for example, create or chan ge the name of the shortc ut. A transfer log is shown after ev ery transfer. T o view the log of the last tr ansfer, scroll to a shortcut in the main view, and select Option s > View log . Handle transfe r confli cts If an item to be transfe rred has been edited in both devices, th e device at tempts to merge the changes automatically. If t his is not possible, there is a transfer conflict . Select Check on e by one , Priority to this phone , or Priority to other phone to solve the conflict. For furthe r instructions, select Options > Help . Display indi cators The device is being used in a GSM network (network servic e). The device is being u sed in a UMTS network (network servic e). You have one or more unread message s in the Inbox folder in Mes sagin g. You have received new e-mail in the remote mailbox. There are messages waiting to be sent in the Outbox folder. You have missed calls. The ringing type is set to silent, and the message alert tone and e- mail alert tone are set to off. A timed profile is active. The de vice keypa d is loc ked. A clock alarm is active. The second ph one line is being used (network service). All calls to the device are diverted to anot her number (network service) . If you have tw o phone lines, a number indicate s the active line . Your phone i s connected to a netw ork via wireless LAN or UMTS (net work service) and ready for an internet call. A compatible microSD card is in the device. A c o m p a t i b l e h e a d s e t i s c o n n e c t e d t o t h e d e v i c e . FM transmitter is ac tive but not t ransmitting. FM transmitter is active and transmitting. A compatible TV out cable is connected to the device. 26 Your device
A compatible text phone is conne cted to the device. A data call is acti ve (network service). A G P R S p a c k e t d a t a c o n n e c t i o n i s a c t i v e ( n e t w o r k service). indicates the connection is on hold and that a connection is available. A packet data connec tion is active in a part of the network that supports EG PRS (network service). indicates the co nnection is on hold and that a connection is availa ble. The icons indicate th at EGPRS is available in the network, but your device is not necessarily using EGPRS in the data transfer. A U M T S p a c k e t d a t a c o n n e c t i o n i s a c t i v e ( n e t w o r k service). indicates the connection is on hold and that a connection is available. High-speed downlink packet access (HSDPA) is supported and active (network service). indicates the connection is on hold and that a connection is available. See "Fast downloading" , p . 32 . You have set the de vice to scan for wireless LANs, and a wireless LAN is available (network service). See "About W LAN" , p. 40 . A wireless LAN connection is active in a network th at has encryption. A wireless LAN connection is active in a network that does not have encryption. Bluetooth connectivity is on. See "Bluetooth connecti vity" , p. 43 . Data is being transmitted using Bluetooth connecti vity. Whe n the indica tor is blinking, your device is tryi ng to connect w ith another de vice. A USB connection is active . Synchronisation is in progress. Shortcuts When in the menus, instea d of using the scroll key, you can use the number keys, # , a nd * to quickly access the applications. Fo r example, in th e main menu, press 2 to open Messaging or # to open the application or folder in the corresponding location in the menu. To switch between open application s, press and hold . Leaving applica tions running in the backgro und increase s the deman d on battery power and reduces the batter y life. To view your multimed ia content , press the multimedia key. To start a web connection (network service), in the standby mode, press and hold 0 . In many applications, to view the most common option items ( ), press the scroll key. 27 Your device
To change the p rofile, press the powe r key, and select a profile. To switch betw een the G eneral and Silent profiles, in the standby mode, press and hold # . To call your voice mailbox (network service), in the standby mode, press and hold 1 . To open a list of last dialled numbers, in the standby mode, press the call key. To use voice commands, in the standby mo de, press and hold the right se lectio n key. To remove an application from the menu, select it, and press C. Some applications may not be removed. Lock the keypad To lock and unlock the keys, use the lock switch at the top of th e device, next to the power key. To set the keypad to loc k automatically after a time- out, press , and select Tools > Setti ngs > Genera l > Security > Phone and SIM card > Keypad auto lock p eriod . To illuminate the keypad in low-light condi tions, briefly press the power key. Navi⢠wheel Hereafter referred to as scroll key. Use the Navi wheel t o move around th e menus and lists (up, down, left, or ri ght). Press the scroll key to select the action shown on to p of the key or to show the most used opt ions . To turn the Navi wheel setting on or off, press , and se lect Tools > Settings > General > Navi wheel > Navi wheel . When the Nav i wheel setting is switc hed on in the settings, you can scroll quickly through Photos, Music Player, Nokia Video Centre, Contacts, and Messaging lists, or the multimedia menu. 1. Move the tip of your finger gently arou nd the rim o f the scroll key clockwise or anticloc kwise. Kee p moving your finger until scrol ling starts on the display. 2. To continue scrolling, slide your finger around the rim of the scroll key clockwise or anticlockwise. Sleep mode indicator The inner rim of the Navi wheel illuminates slowly when th e device is in the sleep mode. The light varies periodically as if the device was breathing. To switch off th e illumination, press , and select Tools > Settings > General > Navi wheel > Breathing . 28 Your device
Multimedia menu With the multimedi a menu, you can access your most frequent ly used multim edia cont ent. The selected content is shown in the appropriate application. 1. To open or close the multimed ia men u, press the multimedia key. 2. To browse the tiles, scroll left or right, or, if the Navi wheel se tting is set on, slide your finger on the rim o f the scroll key. The tiles are th e following: â TV & video â V i e w y o ur l a s t w a t c h e d v i d e o clip, video clips stored on your de vice, or access video services. â Music â Enter Music player and the Now playing view, browse your songs and playlists, or download and manage podcasts. â Images â View your most recently taken images, start a slide show of your images or video clips, or view media files in albums. â Maps â View you r favo urite loc ation s in the Maps application. â Internet â View your favourite we b links in the browser. â Contacts â Add your own contacts, send messages, or make voice calls. To add a new contact to an empty posit ion on the list, press the scroll key, and select a contact . To send a message, in the multim edia menu, select a contact, and Options > Send text message or Send multim edia msg. . 3. To scroll up or down in a tile, press the scroll key up or down. T o select it ems, press the scroll key. To change the order of the til es, select Options > Arrange tiles . To return to the multim edia menu from an open application, press the mu ltimedia key. Mobile Search Press , and select Sear ch . You can also access Mobile Search directl y from the active standby mode, if th at has been activated in the settings. Use Mobile Se arch to acce ss internet search engines and to find and connect to local servi ces, website s, images, and mobile conten t. You can also search 29 Your device
content in your devi ce, such as ca lendar e ntries, e- mail, and other messages. Web search (network servic e) 1. In the Se arch main view, select Search the Internet . 2. Select a search e ngine. 3. Enter your text to searc h. 4. Press the scroll key to start the search. My content search To search content in your device, in the main view, enter your text to th e search field. The se arch results are displayed on the sc reen as you write. Headset You can connect a compatible headset or compatible headphon es to your device. You may need to sele ct the cable mode. Warning: When you use the headset, your abili ty to hear outside sounds may be affected. Do not use the headset where it can endanger your safety . Some headsets come in two parts, a remote control unit and hea dphones . A remot e control unit ha s a microphone and keys to answer or end a phone c all, adjust the volume, and play music or video files. To use the headphones with a remo te control unit, connect the unit to t he Nokia AV Connector (3.5 mm) in the de vice, th en conn ect the headp hones to the unit. To make handsfree phone calls, use a headset with a com patible re mote control u nit, or u se the microphone on t he device . To adjust the volume du ring a call, use the volume key on the device or, if available, on the headset. Some headsets have mult imedia volu me controls that can only be u sed to ad just th e volume for mu sic or video playback. You can also connect a co mpatibl e TV-out cable to the Nokia AV Connector (3.5 mm) of your devi ce. 30 Your device
Do not co nnect pr oducts th at create an output signal as this may cause dama ge to the device. Do not connec t any volta ge source to the Nokia AV Connector. When connecting any external device or any headset, other th an thos e approved by Nokia for use with th is device , to the No kia AV Conn ector, pa y speci al attentio n to volume le vels. Volume and loudspeaker control Warning: Listen to music at a moderate level. Continuous exposu re to high volume may damage your hearin g. Do not hold th e device near your ear when t he loudspeaker is in use, b ecause the volume may be extremely loud. To increase or de crease the volume level w hen you have an active call or are listening to a sound, use the volume key. The built-in loudspeaker allows you to speak and listen from a short distance w ithout h aving to hold the devic e to your ear. To use the loudspeaker during a call, press Loudsp. . To turn off th e loudspeaker, p ress Handset . Offline profile To activate t he offline profile, press the po wer key brief ly, an d sele ct Offl ine . Or, press , and select Tools > Profiles > Offline . The offline profile lets you use the device without connecting to the wireless netw ork. When you activate the offline profile, th e connection to the wireless netwo rk is turned off, as indicate d by in the signal strength indica tor area. All wireless RF signals to and from the devi ce are prevented. If you try to send messages, they are pl aced in the outbox to be sent later. When the of fline profile is active, you can u se your device wi thout a S IM card. Important: In the offline profile you cannot m a k e o r r e c e i v e a n y c a l l s , o r u s e o t h e r f e a t u r e s t h a t require cellu lar netwo rk cov erage. Ca lls may still be possible to the offici al emergency n umber programme d into your de vice. To mak e calls, yo u must first activate the phone func tion by ch anging profiles. If the device has b een locked, en ter the lock code. When you have activa ted the offline profile, you can still use the wirele ss LAN, for example, to read your e-mail or browse on th e intern et. Remember to 31 Your device
comply with any applicab le safety requirements when establishing and using a wireless L AN connection. You can also use Bluetooth connectivity while in the offline profile. To leave the offline profile, pr ess the power key briefly, and select another profile. The device re- enables wireless transmissions (providing there is sufficient signal strength). Fast downloading High-speed d ownlink packet access (HSDPA, also called 3.5G, indicated by ) is a n etwork servi ce in UMTS netwo rks and prov ides high- speed data downloads. When HSDPA support in th e device is activated and the device is connec ted to a UMTS network that supports HSDP A, downloading data such as messages, e-mail, and browser page s through the cell ular network may be faster. An active HSDPA connection is indicated by . See "Display indicators" , p. 26 . You can activate or deactivate supp ort for HSDPA in the device sett ings. See "Packet data settings" , p. 173 . For availability and sub scription to data c onnection services, contact your service provider. HSDPA only affects the do wnload speed; sending data to the network, such as messages and e-mail, is not affected. 32 Your device
Web browser With the We b browser, you can view hypertext markup language (HTML ) web pages on the internet as originally designed. You can also browse web pages that are designed specifically for mobile devices, and use extens ible hy pertext marku p language (XH TML), or the wirel ess markup lang uage (WML). To browse the web , you need to have an int ernet access point configured in your device. Browse the web Press , and select Web . Shortcut: To start the browser, press and hold 0 in the standby mode. Important: Use only services that you trust and that offer adequate security and protection against harmful software. Important: Only instal l and use applications and other software from trusted sources, such as applications that are Symbian Signed or have passed the Java Verified⢠testing. To browse a web page, in th e bookmarks view, select a bookmark, or enter t he address in the field ( ), and press the scroll key. Some web pages may contain material, such as graphics and sounds, that requires a large amount of memory to view. If your device runs out of memory while loading such a pag e, the graphics on the page are not shown. To browse web pages without graphics, to save memory, select Options > Settings > Page > Load content > Text only . To enter a new web page address you want to visit, select Options > Go to web addr ess . Tip: To visit a web page saved as a bookmark in the bookmarks view, while brow sing, press 1 , and select a bookmark. To retriev e the late st conten t of the pag e from the server, select Option s > Navigation options > Reload . To save the web address of the current page as a bookmark, select Options > Save as bookmark . To view snapshots of the pages you have visited during the current browsing session, sel ect Back 33 Web browser
(availabl e if Histor y lis t is set on in the browser settings and the c urrent page is not th e first page you visit). Select the page you want to go to. To save a page while browsing, select Option s > Tools > Save page . You can save pages and browse them later when offline. You can also group pages into folders. To access the pages you have saved, sel ect Options > Bookmar ks > Saved pa ges . To open a sublist of commands or ac tions for the page that is open, select Options > Service options (if supported by the web page). To prevent or allow t he automatic ope ning of multiple windows, select Options > Window > Block pop- ups or Allow pop-ups . Shortcuts while browsing â Press 1 to open your bookmarks. â Press 2 to search for keywords on the current page. â Press 3 to return to the previous page. â Press 5 to list all open windows. â Press 8 to show the page ov erview of the current page. Press 8 again to zoom in and view the desired section of the page. â Press 9 to enter a new web address. â Press 0 to go to the home page (if defined in settings). â Press * and # to zoom in or out on t he page. Tip: To return to the standby mode with the browser open in the background, press twice or the end key. To return t o the browser, press and hold , and select the browser. Browser toolbar The browser toolbar helps you select frequent ly used functions of the browser. To open the toolbar, pr ess and hold th e scroll key on an empty spot on a web page. To move within the toolbar, scroll left or right. To sele ct a feature, press the scroll key. In the toolbar, select from the followin g: â Frequently used link s â V i e w a l i s t o f t h e w e b addresses you visit frequently. â Page overview â See an overview of the current web page. â Find â Search for keywords within the current page. â Reload â Refresh th e page. â Subscribe to web feeds (if available) â Vi ew a list of available web feeds on the c urrent web page, and subscribe to a web feed. 34 Web browser
Navigate p ages Mini Map and pag e overvi ew help you n avigate web pages that contain a large amount of information. When Mini Map is set on in the browser settings and you scroll through a large web page, Mini Map opens and shows an overview of the we b page you browse. To set Mini Map on, select Options > Settings > General > Mini map > On . To move in Mini Map, scroll left, right, up, or down. When you find the desired location, stop scrolling. Mini Map disappears and le aves you at the select ed location. When you are browsing a web page that contains a large amount of informat ion, you can also use Page over view to view what kind of information the page contains. To show the page overview of the current page, press 8 . To find the desired spot on the page, scroll up, down, left, or right. Press 8 a g a i n t o z o o m i n a n d view the desire d section of th e page. Web feeds and blog s Web feeds are xml files on web pages that are use d by the weblog community and news organisations to share the latest headlines or text, for example, news feeds. Blogs or weblogs are web diaries. Most of the web feeds use RSS and Atom t echnologies. It is common to find web feed s on web, blog, and wiki pages. The Web application automa tically detects if a web page con tains web feeds. To subscribe to a w eb feed, select Option s > Subscrib e to web fe eds . To view the web feeds to which yo u have subscribed, in the bookmarks view, select Web feeds . To update a web feed, select it and Options > Refresh . To define how the web feeds are updated, select Option s > Settings > Web feeds . Widgets Your device supports widgets. Widgets are small, downloadable web applic ations that deliver multimed ia, news fee ds, and other inform ation, such as weather reports, to your device. Inst alled widgets appear as separa te applications in the Applicati ons folder. You can download widget s using the Down load! application or from the web. 35 Web browser
The default access point for widgets is the same as in th e web brow ser. W hen acti ve in the ba ckgro und, some widgets may update information automatically to your dev ice. Using widgets may involve the transmission of large amount s of data th rough your service provider's network. Co ntact you r servic e provider for information about data transmission charges. Content search To search for keywords, phone numbe rs, or e-mail addresses within the cu rrent web page, select Options > Find and the desired optio n. To go to the previous matc h, scroll up. To go to the n ext match, scroll down. Tip: To sea rch fo r keyw ords with in the page , press 2 . Download and purchase items You can download items such as ringing tones, images, operator logos, themes, and video clips. These items c an be provided free of charge, or you can purchase them. Downloaded items are handled by the respective appl icat ions in your device, for example, a downloaded photo can be saved in Photos. Important: Only install and use applications and other software from trusted sources, such as applications that are Symbian Sig ned or have passed the Java Verified testing. To download an item: 1. Selec t the link . 2. Select t he appropriat e option to p urchase the item (for example, Buy ). 3. Carefully read all the information provided. 4. To continue or cancel the download, select the appropriate opt ion (for example, Accept or Cancel ). When you start a download, a list of ongoing and completed downloads from the current browsing session is displayed. To modify the list, select Options > Do wnloads . In the list, scroll to an item, and select Opti ons to cancel ongoing downloads, or open, save, or delete completed downloads. Bookmarks The bookmarks view opens when you open the Web applica tion. You can select web addresses from a list 36 Web browser
or from a collection of bookmarks in the Recently visited pages folder. You c an also ent er the URL address of the web page you want to visit directly into the field ( ). indicates the start ing page defined for the default access point. You can save URL addresses as bookmarks while browsing on the in ternet. You can also save addresses received in messages to your bookmarks and send saved bookmarks. To open the bo okmarks view wh ile browsing, pre ss 1 , or select Options > Bookmarks . To edit the deta ils of a bookmark, such as the title, select Options > Bookmark manager > Edit . In the bookmarks view, you can also ope n other browser folders. The Web application allow s you to save web pages during browsing. In the Saved pages folder, you can view the content of t he pages you have saved off line. Web also keeps track of the web pages you visit during browsing. In the Recent ly visi ted page s folder, you can view the l ist of visited web pages. In Web feeds , you can vi ew saved lin ks to web feeds and blogs to which you have subscribed. Web feeds are commonly found on major news organisation web pages, personal weblogs, onli ne communities t hat offer th e la test headlines, and article summarie s. Web feeds use RSS and Atom technolo gies. Empty the cache The information or servic es you have accesse d are stored in the cach e memory of the de vice. A cache is a memory location that is used to st ore data te mpor arily. If you have tried t o access o r have accessed confidential information requiring passwords, empty the cache aft er each use. The information or services you have accessed are stored in the cac he. To empty the c ache, selec t Options > Clear privacy data > Ca che . End the connection To end the conne ction and view the browser p age offline, select Option s > Tools > Disconnect ; o r to end the connec tion and close the browser, select Option s > Exit . To take the browser to the background, press the end key once. To end the connection, press and hold the end key. To delete the in formation th e network serv er collects a bout your vi sits to various we b pages, select Options > Clear privacy data > Cookies . 37 Web browser
Connection security If the security indicator ( ) is displayed during a connection, th e data transmission b etween th e device and the inter net gateway or serv er is encrypted. The security icon does n ot indicate that th e data transmission between th e gateway and th e conten t server (or the plac e where th e requested resou rce is stored) is secure. The se rvice provider secu res the data transmission between t he gateway and th e content server. Securi ty certi ficates ma y be required for some services, such as banking services. You are notified if the identit y of the serve r is not authen tic or if you do not have the correct se curity certi ficate in your device. For more informatio n, contact your service provider. Web settings Press , and select Web . Select Options > Settings and from the following: General settings â Access point â Change the default access point. Some or all access points may be preset for your device by your service provider; you may not be able to change, create, edit, or remove them. â Homepage â Define the home page. â Mini map â Set Mini Map on or off. See "Navigate pages" , p. 35 . â History list â Wh ile browsing, to select Back to see a list of the pages you have visited during the current browsing session, set History lis t on. â Security warnings â Hide or show security notifications. â Java/ECMA script â En able or disabl e the use o f scripts. Page settings â Load content â Select wh ether you want to load im ages and oth er obje cts wh ile bro wsin g. If you select Text only , to load images or objects later during browsing, sel ect Options > Tools > Load i mage s . â Screen size â Sele ct be tween full screen and the normal view with the opt ions list. â Default encoding â If text charac ters are not shown correctly, you can select an other encoding according to language for the current page. â Block po p-ups â Allow or block automatic opening of different pop- ups while browsing. â Automatic reload â If you want the web pages to be refreshed automa tically whi le browsing, select On . â Font size â Define the font size that is used for web pages. Privacy settings 38 Web browser
â Recently visited pages â Enable or disable automatic bookmark collect ing. If you want t o continue saving the addresses of the visited web pages into the Recently v isited pa ges fol der, but hide the folder fr om the bookm arks view, select Hide folder . â Form data saving â If you do not want th e data you enter to different fo rms on a web page to be saved and used the ne xt time you op en the page , select Off . â Cookies â Enable or disabl e t he receiv ing and sending of cookies. Web feed settings â Automatic upda tes â Define wheth er you want the web feeds to be updated automatically and how often y ou want to update them. Settin g the application to retrieve web fe eds automatical ly may involve the transmission of larg e amounts of data through your servi ce provider's network. Contact your service provider for information about data transmission charges. â Acc. point for auto-upd ate â Select the desired access point for up dating. This option is only available when Automatic updates is on. 39 Web browser
Connections Your device offe rs several options to c onnect to the internet or to another co mpatible device or PC. Wireless LAN Your device supports wireless local area network (WLAN). With WLAN, you can con nect your device to the internet and c ompatible devices that have WLAN. About WLAN To use WLAN, it must be available in the location, and your device must be connected to the WLAN. Some WLANs are protected, and y ou need an access key fro m your servi ce prov ider t o connec t to them. Features that use WLA N, or that ar e allowed t o run in the backg round while usin g other feat ures, increase the d emand on battery power and reduc e the battery life. Your device supp orts the following WLAN features: â IEEE 802.11b/g sta ndard â Operation at 2.4 GHz â Wired equivalent privacy (WEP) with keys u p to 128 bits, W i-Fi pr otected acce ss (WPA), an d 802.1x encryption methods. These functions can be used only if they are supported by the network. WLAN connections To use WLAN, you must c reate an int ernet access point (IAP) for WLAN. Us e the access poin t for applica tions that need to connect to the intern et. See "WLAN internet access points" , p. 41 . Important: Always enable one of the available encryption meth ods to increase the security of your wirele ss LAN connection. Using encryption reduc e s the risk of unauthorised access to your data. A WLAN connection is established when you create a data connection u sing a WLAN internet access point. Th e active WLAN connection ends whe n you end the data con nection. You can use WL AN during a voice cal l or when pack et data is active. You can only be connected to one 40 Connections
WLAN access point device at a time, but seve ral applications can use the sa me internet access point. When the device is in th e o ffline profile, you can still use WLAN (if av ailable). Remember to comply with any applicable safety re quirements wh en establishing and usi ng a WLAN connection. Tip: To check the uniq ue media a ccess cont rol (MAC) address that identifies your device, enter *#62209526# in the standby mode. WLAN wizard The WLAN wizard he lps you t o connect t o a WLAN and manage your WLAN connecti ons. The WLAN wizard shows th e status of your WLAN connections in the active stand by mode. To view the available options, scroll to the row showing the status, and select it. If the search finds WLANs, for example, WLAN network found is displa yed, to create an internet access point (IAP) and start the web browser using this IAP, select the status and Start We b browsing . If you select a secured WL AN network, you are ask ed to enter the re levant p asscodes. To c onnect to a hidden network, you mu st enter the correct network name (serv ice set identifier, SSID). To create a new access point for a hidden WLAN, select New WLAN . If you are connec ted to a WL AN, the IAP name is displayed. To start the web browser using this IAP, select the status and Continue Web browsing . To end the conn ection in th e WLAN, select t he status and Disconnect WLAN . If WLAN scanning is off and you are not connected to any WLAN , WLAN scan ning off is displayed. To set scanning on and search for availabl e WLANs, select the status and press the scroll key. To start a search for available WLANs, select the status and Search for WLAN . To set WLAN scanning off, select the st atus and select WLAN scanning off . To access the WLAN wizard application in the menu, press , and select Tools > WLAN wiz. . WLAN internet access points Press , and select Tools > WLAN wiz. Select Option s and from the following: â Filter WLAN netw orks â Filter out WLANs in the list of found networks. The select ed networks are filtered out the next time the app lication searches for WLANs. â Details â View the details of a network shown in the list. If you sel ect an ac tive conn ection, the connection details are displayed. â Define access point â Create an inte rnet access point (IAP) in a WLAN. 41 Connections
â Edit access point â Edit the details of an existing IAP. You can also us e connection manager to crea te internet access poin ts. See "Active data connections" , p. 42 . Operating modes There are two operating mode s in WLAN: infrastructure and ad hoc. The infrastructure operating mode allows two kinds of communication: wireless devi ces are connected to each ot her through a WLAN access point device, or wireless de vices are connecte d to a wired LAN through a WLAN access point device. In the ad hoc o perating mode, de vices can sen d and receive data directly with each other. Connection manager Active data connections Press , and select Tools > Connectivit y > Conn. mgr. > A ctive data connections . In the ac tive data connection s view, yo u can see the open data connections: data calls packet data connec tions WLAN connections Note: The actual invoice for calls and services from your service provider may vary, depending on network features, rounding off for billing, taxes, and so fort h. To end a connection , select Options > Disconn ect . To c lose all open connections, select Options > Disco nnect all . To view th e details o f a connection, sele ct Options > Details . Available WLAN networks Press , and select Tools > Con nectivity > Conn. mgr. > Available WLAN net works . The available WLAN view shows a list of WLANs within range, their networ k mod e (infrastructure or ad hoc), and signal strength indicator. is shown for networks with e ncryption, an d if your devic e has an active connec tion in the n etwork. To view th e details o f a network, sel ect Opti ons > Details . To create an in ternet access point in a network, select Options > Define access point . 42 Connections
Bluetooth connectivity About Bluetooth conne ctivity You can make a wirel ess connection to othe r combatible devices, such as mobile pho nes, computers, headsets, an d car kits, wi th Bluetoot h connecti vity. You can use the conn ection to send images, video clips, music and sound clips, and notes, tran sfer files from your compatible PC, a nd print images with a compatible printer. Since devices with Bluet ooth wireless tech nology communicate using radio wave s, they do not need to be i n d ir e ct l in e- of - si g ht . H o we ve r , t he y mu st b e within 10 m etres (33 feet) of each other, although the conn ection may be subject to i nterferen ce from obstructions such as walls or from other electronic devices. This device is c ompliant with Bluetooth Specification 2.0 supporting the followin g profiles: Generic Audio/Vid eo Distribution Pr ofile, Advanc ed Audio Distribution Prof ile, Audio/Video Remote Control Profile, Basic Ima ging Profile, Ba sic Printing Profile, Dial-up Networking Profile, Fi le Transfer Profile, Hands-Free Profil e, Head set Profile, Human Interface Device Profile, Object Push Profile, SIM Access Profile, Sync hronization Profile , Serial Port Profile, and Phonebook A ccess Pro file. To ensu re interoperability between other devices supporting Bluetooth technology, use Nok ia approved enhancemen ts for this mode l. Check with the manufacturers of other de vices t o determine their compatibility with this device. Features using Blu etooth technolog y increase the deman d on ba ttery power and re duce the bat tery life. When the device is locked, you cannot use Bluet ooth connecti vity. Settings Press , and select Tools > Blue tooth . When you open the applicatio n for the first time, you are asked to define a name for your dev ice. You can change th e name later on. Select from the following: â Blueto oth â To make a wir ele ss con nect ion to another compatible device, first set Bluetooth connectivity On , then establish a con nection. To switch off Bluetoot h connectiv ity, select Off . â My phone's vi sibility â To allow your device to be found by other de vices with Bluetoot h wireless technology, select Shown to all . To set a time after which the visibility is set from shown to hidden, select Define period . To hide your device from other devices, selec t Hidden . 43 Connections
â My phon e's name â Edit the name shown to other devices wi th Bluetooth wire less technology. â Remote SIM mode â To enable another device, such as a compatible car ki t enhancement, to use the SIM card in your de vice to connect to the network, s elect On . See "Remote S IM mode" , p. 46 . Security tips Press , and select Tools > Blueto oth . When you are no t using Bluetooth connectivity, to control who can find your device and connect to it, select Bluetoot h > Off or My phone's visibil ity > Hidden . Do not pair wit h or accept connection requests from an unknow n devic e. Th is pr otec ts your device from harmful content. Send data using Bluetooth connectivity Several Blu etooth connect ions can be active at a time. For e xample, if yo u are connect ed to a compatible headset, you ca n also transfer files to anothe r compati ble de vi ce at the same time. 1. Open the ap plication where t he item you w ant to send is stored. For example, to send an image to another compatible device, open Photos. 2. Select t he item and Options > Send > Via Bluetoot h . Devices with Bluetooth wireless t echnolo gy that are within range are displayed. Device ic ons are as follows: computer phone audio or video device other device To interrupt t he search, select Sto p . 3. Select the de vice with which you want to connect. 4. If the other device requ ires pairing before data can be transmitted, a to ne sounds, and you are asked to enter a passcode. See "Pair devices" , p. 45 . When the conne ction is establishe d, Sending data is displayed. Tip: When searching for devices, some devices ma y show on ly the unique address (device address). To fin d the unique address of your device, enter *#2820# in the standby mode. 44 Connections
Pair devices To pair with compatible devices and view your paired devices, in the main view of Bluetooth connectivity, scroll right. Before pairing, create yo ur own passcode (1 to 16 digits), and agree with the owner of the other device to use the same code. Devices that do not have a user interface have a factory-set passcode. The passcode is used only once. 1. To pair wit h a device , select Options > New paired devi ce . Devices that are with in range are displa yed. 2. Select the device , and enter th e passcode. Th e same passcode must be entered on th e other device as well. 3. Some audio e nhancements conn ect automatically to your dev ice after pairing. Otherwise, scroll to the enhancemen t, and select Option s > Connect to audio device . Paired devices are indicated by in the device search. To set a device as authoris ed or unauthorised, scroll to the devi ce, and select from the fo llowing options: â Set as authorised â Connections between your devi ce and t he au thor ised de vice c an be ma de without your know ledge. No separate acceptance or authorisation is needed. Use this status for your own devices, such as your compa tibl e head set o r PC or devic es tha t bel ong to someone you trust. indicates auth orised devices in the paired devices view. â Set as unauthorised â Connection requests from this device must be accepted separate ly every time. To cancel a pairing, scro ll to the device, and select Option s > Delete . If you want to cancel all p airings, select Opti ons > Delete all . Receive data using Blue tooth connectivit y When you receive data through Bluetooth connectivity, a tone sounds, and you are asked if you want to accept the message. If you accept, is displayed, and the item is placed in the Inbox folder in Messaging. Me ssages received through Bluetoot h connecti vit y are ind icated by . Tip: If your device no tifies you that the memory is full when you try to recei ve data through Bl uetooth connectivity, chan ge memory card as the memory where the data is stored. 45 Connections
Block devices Press , and select Tools > Blueto oth . To block a device from establishing a Blueto oth connection to your device , scroll right to open Paire d device s . Select a devi ce you want to block and Option s > Block . To unblock a device, scroll right to Blocked devices , select a device , and Options > Delete . To unblock all blocked devices, selec t Option s > Delete all . If you reject a pairing re quest from another device, you are asked if you wa nt to block all fu ture connection requests from this dev ice. If you accept the query, the re mote device is added to the list of blocked devices. Remote SIM mode Before the remote SIM mode can be activated, the two devices must be paired and the pairing initiated from the other device. When pairing, use a 16-digit passcode, and set the othe r device as authorised. To use the remote SIM mode with a compa tibl e ca r kit enhancem ent, activate B luetooth connectivit y, and enable th e use of the remo te SIM mode with your device. Activa te the remote SIM mode from the other device. When the remot e SIM mode is on in your device, Remote SIM mode is displayed in the standby mode. The connection t o the wireless network is turned off, as indicated by in the signal strength indicato r area, and you cannot use SI M card services or features requiring cell ular network coverage. When the wireless device is in the remote SIM mode, you can only use a compatible connecte d enhancement, such as a car kit, to make or rec eive calls. Your wireless device wi ll not make any calls while in t his mode, except to the emer gency numbers programmed into your dev ice. To make calls from your device, you m ust leave the remote SIM mode. If the device is locked, enter the lock co de to unlock it. To leave the remote SI M mode, press the power ke y, and se lect Exi t remote SIM mo de . USB Press , and select Tools > Con nectivity > USB . To have the devic e ask the purp ose of the connection each time a c ompatible dat a cable is connected, select Ask on connection > Yes . If Ask on connection is set to off or you want to change the mode during an acti ve connection, 46 Connections
select USB connection mode and from the following: â PC Suite â Use Nokia PC application s such as Nokia Nseries PC suite, and Nokia Software Updater. â Mass storage â Transfer data between your device and a compatible PC. Use this mode also for downloading map s with the Noki a Map Loader PC applica tion. â Image transfer â Print images on a compatible printer. â Media tr ansfer â Synchronise music with Windows Media Player. PC connections You can use your device with a variety of compatible PC connectivity and data communications applications. With Nokia Nseries PC Suite you can, for example, tr ansfer images be tween your de vice and a compatible PC. For information on App le Macintosh support and connecting your device to an App le Macintosh device, visit www.nseries.com/mac. 47 Connections
Personalise your device You can personalise your device by changing the standby mode, main menu, to nes, themes, or font size. Most of the personalisation options, such as changing th e font size, can be accessed through t he device settings. Change the look of your device Press , and select Tools > Settings > Genera l > Personalisation > Them es . Use Themes to c hange the look of the display , such as the wal lpaper and icons. To change the theme that is used for all the application s in yo ur device , select Genera l . To preview a theme be fore activatin g it, select Options > Preview . To activate the theme, select Options > Set . The active theme is indicated by . The themes on a compatible memory card (if inserted) are indicated by . The themes on the memory card are not available if the memory card is not inserted in th e device. If you want to use the themes saved in the memory c ard without the memory card, save the themes in the device memory first. T o c h a n g e t h e l a y o u t o f t h e m a i n m e n u , s e l e c t Menu view . To open a browser conne ction and download more themes, in Gener al , select Do wnload th emes (network service). Use only services that you trust and that offer adequate security and protection against harmf ul software. To have a wallpaper image or a slide show of changing images as the background in the standby mode, select Wallpaper > Image or Sl ide s how . To chang e the ba ckground o f the call bubble shown when a call comes in, select Call image . Changeable back cover When you c hange the back cover of th e device, th e theme on the display c hanges to matc h the colour of the cover. 48 Personalise your device
To change the theme automatic ally, you must have a compatible back co ver that supports theme change. To select, wheth er you want the them e to ch ange automatically, press , and select Tools > Settings > Ge neral > Personalisation > Themes > Theme switch . Audio themes Press , and select Tools > Settings > General > Personalisat ion > Them es > Audio theme . In Audio themes, yo u ca n select a sound scheme such as 'Space' t o cover all de vice events, such as calling, battery low, and mechanical events. The sounds can be tones, synt hesised voice tags, or a combination of both. Select the sound sch eme you want to use in Acti ve audio theme . Note that activating an audio theme changes all your previous sound settings. If you want to retu rn to using the default t ones, select audio theme 'Nok ia'. You can change the sounds for differen t events individually by selecting one of the sound group s, for example, Me nu events . To add 3-D effe cts to the audio theme, select Option s > 3-D ringing to nes . See "3-D tones" , p. 50 . To change the language that is used for the synthesised voice tag, select Options > Set Speech language . If you have chan ged the tone s of individ ual events, you can save the them e by selecting Options > Save th eme . Set sounds for events To set the so und of an individual ev ent to silent, open an even t group, sele ct the event , and change it to Silent . To set a synthesi sed voice tag as the sound for an event, ope n an event group, select the event, and Speech . Enter the desired text, and press OK . Speech is not available if you have set Say call er's name on in Profiles . Set tones in Profiles Press , and select Tools > Pro file s . You can use profiles to set and customi se the ringing tones, message alert tones, and ot her tones for different events, enviro nments, or caller grou ps. To change th e profile, select a profile, and Option s > Activate , or press the power key in the 49 Personalise your device
standby mode. Scroll to th e profile you wan t to activ ate, an d sel ect OK . Tip: T o s w i t c h b e t w e e n t h e g e n e r a l a n d s i l e n t profiles in th e standby mode, press and hold # . To modify a profile, scro ll to the pr ofile, and select Options > Personalise . Scroll to the setting y ou want to change, and press the scroll key to op en the choices. Tones stored on a compatible memo ry card (if inserted) are indicated with . If you want to set a p rofile to be active a certain time, select Op tions > Timed . When the se t time expires, the profile chan ges back to the previou sly active one. Wh en a profile is timed, is displayed in the standby mode. The Offline profile canno t be timed. In the tones l ist, select Download sounds (network service) to open a list of bookmarks. You can select a bookmark and open a connect ion to a web page to do wnlo ad mo re ton es. If you want the c allerâÂÂs name t o be spoken wh en your device rings, select Options > Pers onalise > Say caller's nam e > On . The callerâÂÂs name must be found in Contacts. To create a new profile, select Options > Create new . 3-D tones Press , select Tools > Util ities > 3-D tones . With 3-D tones, you can enable three-dime nsional sound effects for ringing to nes. Not all ringing tones support 3-D effects. To enable the 3-D effects, selec t 3-D ringing tone effects > On . To change the ringing tone, select Ringing tone and the desired ringing tone. To change the 3 -D effect that is applied to the ringing tone, select Sound trajectory and the desired effect. To modify the effec t, select from t he following settings: â Trajectory speed â Scroll left or right to adjust the speed at which so und moves from one direction to another. T his setting is not available for all ringing tones. â Reverberation â Select the type of echo. â Doppler effect â Select On to have the ringing tone sound high er when you are closer to yo ur device, and lower when you are farther away. When you g et clos er to the dev ice, the ringi ng tone seems to becom e higher, and lower when you move away from it. This setting is not available for all ring ing tones. To listen to the rin ging tone with t he 3-D effect, select Options > Play tone . If you enable the 3-D 50 Personalise your device
tones but do not select any 3-D effect, stereo widening is applied to the ringing ton e. To adjus t the ri nging tone vo lume, selec t Tools > Profiles > Options > Personalise > Ringing volume . Modify the standby mode To change the look of the standby mode, press , and select Tools > Settings > Genera l > Personalisation > Stan dby m ode > Standby theme . The active standby display shows application shortcuts, and events from applications such as calendar and player. To change the selection key shortcuts or the default shortcut icons in the active standby mode, select Tools > Settings > General > Personalisation > Standby mode > Shortcuts . Some shortcuts may be fixed, and you cannot chang e them. To change the clock show n in the standby mode, press , and select Applicati ons > Clock > Option s > Settings > Clock type . You can also change the standby mode background image or what is shown in the power saver in the device setting s. Tip: To check wh ether there are applic ations running in the backgroun d, press and hold . To close the applications you do not use, scroll to an application in the list, and pr ess C . Leaving applications runnin g in the background increases the demand on battery power. Modify the main menu To change the main menu view, in the main menu, press and select Tools > Settings > General > Personalisation > Themes > Menu view . You can change the ma in menu to be sh own as Grid , List , Horseshoe , or V-shaped . To rearrange the main menu, in the main menu, select Options > Move , Move to folder , or New folde r . You can move applications used less frequently into folders and place applicati ons that you use more often int o the main menu. 51 Personalise your device
Positioning (GPS) You can use appl ications such as Maps and GPS data to find out your location , or measure distances and coordinates. These applications requ ire a GPS connection. About GPS The Global Positioning S ystem (GPS) is a worldwide radio navigation system that i ncludes 24 satellites and thei r ground st ations that moni tor the operation of the satellit e s. Your devic e has an internal GPS receiver. A GPS terminal receives low-power radio sign als from the sate llites and measu res the travel time of the signals. From the trav el time, the GPS receiver can calculate its loc ation to the accuracy of metres. The coordin ates in the GPS are expressed in deg rees and decimal degrees format using the international WGS-84 coordinate system. The Global Positioning System (GPS) is op erated by the government of the Unit ed States, which is solely responsible for its accuracy and maintenance. The accuracy of location data can be affected by adjustments to GPS satellites made by the United States government and is subject to change with the United States D epartment of Defense c ivil GPS policy and the Federal Radionavigation Plan. Accuracy can also be a ffected by poo r satellite geometry. Availability an d quality of GPS signals may be affected by your location, buildings, natural obstacles, and weather co nditions. The GPS receiver should only be used outd oors t o allow rece ption of GPS signals. Any GPS should not be used for precise location measurement, and you sh ould never rely solely on location data from th e GPS receiver and cellular radio networks for posi tioning or naviga tion. To enable or disable diffe rent positioning methods, such as Bl uetooth GPS, press , and select Tools > Settings > General > Positi oning > Position ing meth ods . Assisted GPS (A-GPS) Your device also supports Assisted GPS (A-GPS). A-GPS is a network service. Assisted GPS (A-GPS) is used to retrieve assistance data over a packet data connection, which assists in calculating the coordinates of your current location 52 Positioning (GPS)
when your device is receiving signals from satellites. When you activate A-GPS, your device receives useful satellite informatio n from a n assistance data server over th e cellular network. With the help of assisted data, your device c an obtain the GPS position faster. Your device is preconfigu re d to use the Nok ia A-GPS service, if no service prov ider-specific A- GPS settings are available. The assistance data is retrieved from the Nokia A-GPS service serv er only when needed. You must have an interne t access point defi ned in the device to retrieve a ssistance data fr om the Nokia A-GPS serv ice over a pa cket data c onnection. To define an access point for A-GPS, press , and select Tools > Settings > General > Positioning > Position ing server > Access point . A wireless LAN access point cannot be used for this service. Only a packet data interne t access point can be used. Your device asks for the inte rnet access point wh en GPS is used for th e first time. Hold your device correctly The GPS receiver is located on the back of t he device. When using the receiver, ma ke sure that you do not cover the ante nna with your hand. Establishing a GPS connec tion may take from a couple of seconds to seve ral minutes. Establ ishing a GPS connection in a vehicle may take longer. The GPS receiver draws its power from the device battery. Using the GPS receiver may drain the batter y fa ster. Tips on creating a GPS connection If your device cannot find the satellite signal, consider the followin g: â If you are indoor s, go outdoors to receive a better signal. â If you are out doors, move to a more open space . 53 Positioning (GPS)
â Ensure that your hand does not c over the GPS antenna of your device. See "Hold your device correctly" , p. 53 . â If the weather conditions are bad, the signal strength may be affected. â Some vehic les have ti nted (athe rmic) wi ndows, which may block the satellite signals. Check satellite signal status To check how ma ny satellit es your device has found, and whethe r your device is receiving sa tellite signals, press , and select Tools > Connectivity > GP S data > Position > Options > Satel lite status . Or, in th e Maps application , select Options > Map view > GPS info . If your device has found satellites, a bar for each satellite is show n in the satellite info view. The longer the bar, the stronger th e satellite signal. When your device has receiv ed enough data from the satellite signal to calculate the c oordinates of y our location, the bar turns black. Initially your device must receive sig nals from at least four satell ites to be able to ca lculate the coordinates of your loca tion. When the initial calculation has been made, it may be possible to continue calculating th e coordinates of your location with thr ee satellites. However, th e accuracy is generally bett er when more satellites are fo und. Position requests You may receive a request from a network service to receive your position information. Service providers may of fer information about local t opics, such as we ather or traf fic conditi ons, based on the location of your devic e. When you re ceive a positi on request, a message is displayed showing the service that is making the request. Select Accept to allow your p osition informati on to be sen t or Reject to deny the request. Landmarks Press , and select Tools > Con nectivity > Landmarks . With Landmarks, you can save the position information of specific loca tions in your device. You can sort the saved loca tions into different categories, such as business, and add other information to them, such as addresses. You can use 54 Positioning (GPS)
your saved la ndmarks in compatible applications, such as GPS data and Maps . GPS coordinates are expressed in degrees and decimal degrees format u sing the international WGS-84 coordinate system. To crea te a new land mark, select Options > New landmark . To make a positioning request for your current locatio n, select C urre nt posit ion . To enter the position informat ion manually, select Enter manually . To edit or add information to a saved landmark (for example, a street address), scroll to a landmark, and select Options > Edit . Scroll to the d esired field, and enter the information. You can sort your landmarks into preset categories, and create new categories. To edit and create new landmark categories, scroll right in Landmarks, and select Options > Edit categories . To add a landmark to a ca tegory, scroll to the landmark in Landmarks, and select Optio ns > Add to categor y . Scroll to each category to which y ou want to ad d the landmark, an d select it. To send one or several landmarks to a compatible device, select Optio ns > Send , and the meth od. Your receive d landmarks are plac ed in the Inbox folder in Messaging. GPS data GPS data is designed to provide route guidan ce information to a selected destina tion, position information about your current location, and traveling information, such as the approximate distance to the destin ation and approximate duration of travel. Press , and select Tools > Connecti vity > GPS data . The coordinate s in the GP S are expressed in degre es and deci mal degre es forma t usin g the in ternat ional WGS-84 coordinate system. To use GPS da ta, the GPS receiv er of your dev ice must initially receive posi tion information from at least four satellites to calculate th e coordinates of your location. When the initial calculation has b een made, it may be possible to continue calculating the coordinates of y our location with three satellites. However, the accuracy is generally better when more satellites are f ound. Route guidance Press , and select Tools > Connecti vity > GPS data > Navigation . Start the route guidance outdoors. If started indoors, the GPS rece iver may no t receive the necessary information from the satellites. 55 Positioning (GPS)
Route guidance uses a rotating compass on the device display. A red ball shows the direction to the destination, and the approx imate distance to it is shown inside the compass ring. Route guidance is desi gned to show the straightest route and the shortest dist ance to th e destination, measured in a straight line. Any obstacles on the route, such as buildings and natural obstacles, are ignored. Differences in altitude are not taken into account when calculatin g the distance. Route guidance is active only when you move. To set your tri p de stination, select Options > Set destinat ion and a landmark as the destination, or enter the l atitude and l on gitude coordinate s. Select Stop navigat ion to clear the destination set for your trip. Retrieve position information Press , an d selec t Tools > Connecti vity > GPS data > Position . In the position view, you can vi ew the position information of your current location. An estimat e of the accura cy of the location is displayed. To save your current loca tion as a landmark, select Options > Save position . Landmarks are saved locations with more i nfo rmation, and they can be used in oth er compatib le applications and transferred between compat ible device s. Trip meter The trip meter has limite d accuracy, an d rounding errors may oc cur. Accura cy can also be affect ed by availability and quality of GPS signals. Press , and select Tools > Co nnectivity > GPS data > Trip distance . Select Options > Start to activate trip distance calculation, and Stop to deactivate it. The calculated values remain on the display. Use this feature outdoors to receive a better GPS signal. Select Reset to set the tri p distance and ti me and average and maximum speeds to zero, and to start a new calcul ation. S elect Re start to set the odomete r and total time to zero. 56 Positioning (GPS)
Maps About Maps Press , and select Maps . With Maps, you can see your current location on the map, browse maps for diffe rent cities and co untries, search for addresses and diffe rent points of interest, plan routes from one lo cation to anothe r, view traffic details, and save locations as favourites and send them to compatible devices. You can also purchase extra services, such as guides, a turn-by-turn Drive & Walk naviga tion service with voice guidance, and a traffic information service. Maps uses GPS. See "Positioning (GPS)" , p. 52 . You can defi ne the posi tioning methods us ed with y our device in the device settings. See "Positioning settings" , p. 166 . For the most accurate location information, use either the internal GPS or a compatible external GPS receiver. When you use Maps for the first time, yo u may need to define an internet ac cess point for downloading map information for your current lo cation. To change the default access po int later, in Maps, select Option s > Tools > Settings > Internet > Network destination (shown only when you are online) . When you browse a map in Maps, th e map data for the area is auto matic ally dow nloaded to your device t hrough th e internet . A new map is downloaded only if you sc roll to an are a whic h is not covered by maps already downloaded. Some maps may be pre-loaded on the memory card in your devi ce. You can download more maps t o y ou r d e vi ce us i ng Nokia Map Loader PC software. See "Download maps" , p. 59 . Tip: You can also downl oad maps by using a wireless LAN connection. Downloading ma ps may i nvolve the transmission of large amounts of data through your servi ce provider's network . Contact your service provider for information about data transmission charges. If you want the Maps appli cation to establish an internet connec tion automatically when you st art the application, in Maps, s elect Op tions > Tools > Setti ngs > Inte rnet > Go online at start-up > Yes . 57 Maps
To receiv e a note wh en yo ur device registers to a network out side your home cellular network, select Options > Tools > Settings > Internet > Roaming warning > On (shown only when you are online). Cont act your network service provid er for details and roaming costs. Almost all digital cartog raphy is inaccurate and incomplete to some extent. Never rely solely on the cartography that you do wn load for use in this device. Browse map s The map coverage varies by country. When you open the Maps application, Maps zooms in to the location that was saved from your last session. If no position was saved from the last session, the Maps appl ication zooms in to the capital city o f the count ry you are in base d on the informatio n the dev ice rec eives from the cellular network. At the sam e time, the map of the location is downloaded, if it ha s not been downloaded during previous sessions. Your current location To establish a GPS connecti on and zoom in to yo ur current lo cation, se lect Options > My position , o r press 0 . If the power saver turns on while the device is attemp ting to esta blish a GPS connection, the attempt is interrupted. A GPS indicator is shown on the display. One bar is one satellite. When the dev ice tries to find a satellite, the b ar is yellow. When the device receives enough dat a from the satellite t o establish a GPS connec tion, the bar tu rns green. The mo re green bars, the stron ger the GPS c onnection. When the GPS connection is active, your curre nt locatio n is indicate d on the map with . Move and zoom To move on the map, scroll up, down, left, or right. The map is oriented towards north by default. The compass rose displays the orientation of the map and rotates during navigation when the or ient ation changes. When you browse the map on the display, a new m ap is automatically downloaded if you scroll to an area which is not covered by maps already downloaded. These maps are free of charge, but downloading may involve the transmission of large amounts of data through your service provider's ne twork. For 58 Maps
more information on data transmissi on charges, contact you r se rvice provider. The maps are automatically saved on a compatible memory card (if inserted and set as the default maps storage). To zoom in or out, press * or # . U se the scale bar t o estimate the distance between t wo points on the map. Adjust the map view To define the me tric system used in the map s, select Option s > Tools > Settings > Map > Syst em of measurement > Metric or Imperial . To define what kinds of po ints of interest are shown on the map, select Options > Tools > Set tings > Map > Cat egories and the desired categories. To select whethe r you want to view maps in 2-D mode, 3-D mode, as satellite image, or hybrid, select Option s > Map mode > Map , Map 3D , Satellite , or Hybrid . Satellite images may not be available for all geographic locations. To define whethe r you want th e map view to be a day vi ew or a n ight vie w, select Option s > Tools > Settings > Map > Colo urs > Day mode or Night mode . To adjust other internet, navigation, routing, and general map settings, select Option s > Tools > Settings . Download maps When you browse a map on the display in Maps, a new map is automatically downloaded if you scroll to an area which is not covered by maps already downloaded. You can view the amount of transferred data from the data counter (kB) shown on the display. The counter shows the amount of network traffic when you browse maps, create routes, or search for loca tions online. Do wnloading maps data may involve the transmission of large amounts of data through your service providerâÂÂs network. Conta ct your service provider for information about data transmission charges. To prevent the devic e from automatically downloading maps thro ugh the internet , for example, wh en you are outside your home c ellular network, or other map related data required by the extra services, select Options > Tools > Setti ngs > Inte rnet > Go online at start-up > No . To define how much memory card space you want to use for saving maps or voice guidance files, select Option s > Tools > Settings > Map > Maximum memory use > Max. memory card use . This option is availabl e on ly when a compatible memory card is inserted and set as the default maps storage. Wh en the memo ry is full, the ol dest map 59 Maps
data is deleted. The saved maps data can be deleted using Nokia Map Loader PC software. Nokia Map Loader N o k i a M a p L o a d e r i s P C s o f t w a r e t h a t y o u c a n u s e t o download and i nstall maps from the i nternet to a compatible memory card. You can also use it to download voice files for turn-by-turn navigation. To use Nokia Map Loader, you must first install it to a compatible PC. You can download the PC software from the internet at www.no kia.com/maps. Follow the instructio ns on the sc reen. You must use th e Maps application and brow se maps at least once befor e using Noki a Map Loader . Nokia Map Loader uses the Maps history informatio n to check the versio n of map data t o be downloaded. After you have instal led the PC so f tw ar e to y ou r P C , to download maps, do the following: 1. Connect your device to the PC by using a compatible USB data cable. Select Mass storage as th e USB connection mode. 2. Open Nokia Map Lo ader in you r PC. Nokia Map Loader c hecks the version of map data to be downloaded. 3. Select the maps or voi ce guidance files you want, and download and install them to your device. Tip: Use Nokia Map Loader to save on mobile data transfer fees. Find a place To search for a location or point of interest by keyword, in the main view, enter the name of the place or the desired keyword in the search field, and select Search . To import a location a ddress from your contact informat ion, selec t Options > Select from Contacts . To use a location on the map, for example, as a starting point for a nearby search, to plan a route, view its details, or start navigation (extra service), press the scroll key, and select the de sired option. To browse through plac es and attractions by categorie s in yo ur area, select Option s > Search , and a category. If you search by an address, you must enter th e city an d countr y. You ca n also use an address you have saved to a contact card in Conta cts . To save a location as a favo urite place, in the desired location, press the scroll key, select Add to My places , enter a name for th e pl ace, a nd select OK . You can also save th e location to a route or a collection. To view yo ur saved places, select Options > Fa vourites > My places . 60 Maps
To send a saved place to a co mpatible d evice, in the Places view, press the scroll key, and select Send . If you send the p lace in a text message, th e information is converted to plain text. To take a screen shot of your location, sele ct Option s > Tools > Save map screen shot . The screen shot is saved in Photos. To send the sc reen shot, open Photos, and sele ct the send opt ion from the active toolba r or th e options menu, and the method. To view your browsing hist ory, places you have viewed on a map, and ro utes and co llections you have created, select Options > Favourites , and the desired option. Plan a route To plan a route to a destinat ion, scroll to the desi red destination, press the sc roll key, and select Add to route . The location is added to th e route. To add more locations to the route, select Option s > Add route point . The first sele cted stopover is the starting point. To change the order of the stopovers, press the scroll key, and select Move . Extra services for Maps You can purchase a licence and download different kinds of guides, such as city a nd travel guides, for different cit ies to your device. You can al so purchase a licence for a turn-by-turn Dri ve & Walk navi gation service with voice guidance, and a traffic information service to use it in Maps. A navigation licence is region specific (region selected when purchasi ng the lice nce), and it can be us ed only on the selected area . The downloade d guides are automatically saved to your device. The licence you p urchase for a guide or navigation can be transferre d to anot her device, but the same licence can only be active in one device at a time. To view and update your licences, select Opt ions > Extras > My licenses . Traffic and guide information and related services are generated by third parties independent of Nokia. The information may be inaccurate and incomplete t o some extent and is subject to availability. Never rely solely on the aforementioned informatio n and related services. Downloading and using extr a services may involve the transmission of large amounts of data throug h your service providerâÂÂs network. Contact your service provider for information about data transmission charges. Navigation To purchase a Drive & Walk navigation service with voice guidance or Walk navigation only, select 61 Maps
Options > Extras > Drive & Walk or Walk . You can pay for the service th rough an accepted cred it card or have the amount charged to your p hone bill (if supported by your cellular network service provider). Drive navigation To purchase a Drive & Walk navigation service, select Options > Extras > Drive & W alk . When you us e drive n avigation for t he first time, you are prompted to select th e language of t he voice gui dance an d download the vo ice guidanc e files of the selected language. You c an also download voice guidance files using Nokia Map Loader. See "Download maps" , p. 59 . To change the language later, in the Maps main view, select Options > Tools > Settings > Navigation > Voice gu idance an d a lang uage , and download the voice guidance files fo r the selected la nguage. Walk navigation To purchase a Walk nav igation service, select Options > Extras > Walk . Walk navigation differs from drive navigation in many ways: The walking route ignores any possible limitati ons to c ar navigation, such as one-wa y streets and turn restrict ions, and includes areas such as pedestrian zones and parks. It also prioritises walkways and smaller roads, an d omits highways and motorways. The length of a walking route is limited to a maxi mum of 50 kilometres (31 miles) and the trav elling speed t o a maximum of 30 km/h (18 miles/h). If the sp eed limit is exc eeded, navigation stops and is resumed once the speed is back within limits. Turn-by-turn navigation or voice gu idance are not available for Walk navigation. Instead, a big arrow shows the route and a smal l arrow at the bottom of the screen points directly to destination. Satellite view is only available for Walk navigation. Navigate to the desired destination To start navig ation to th e desired destinat ion with GPS, sele ct any loc ation on the map or in a results list, an d Options > Drive to or Walk to . To switch between di fferent views during navigation, scroll left or righ t. To stop navigation, press Stop . To select navigation options, press Options during navigation. If driving navig ation is active, a menu view with various opti ons is displayed. Some keypad keys correspond to t he options in the view. For example, press 2 to repeat a voice command, 3 to switch between day mode and night mode, and 4 to save the c urrent pl ace. 62 Maps
Traffic information To purchase a l icence for a real-time traffic information serv ice, select Options > Extras > Traffic info . The service provides information about traffic events that may affect your travel. Downloading extra serv ices may in volve t he transmission of large amo unts of data throug h your service providerâÂÂs networ k. Contact your se rvice provider for inform ation about data transmission charges. To view information abou t traffic even ts that can cause dela ys or preven t you from reaching th e destination, select Option s > Traffic in fo . The events are sh own on the map as warnin g triangles and line indicators. You ca n use automatic rerouting to avoid them. To view more informatio n about an event and the possible rerouting option s, press the scroll key. To update the traffic information, select Update traffic info . To define how ofte n the traffic information is updated automatically, sel ect Option s > Tools > Settings > Navigation > Traffic info update . To automa tically create a n alternat ive route in ca se of a traffic e vent that would caus e delays or prevent you from reaching the destin ation, select Option s > Tools > Settings > Navigation > Rerout e due to tr affic > Automatic . Guides To purchase and download different kinds of guides, such as city an d travel guides, for d ifferent cities to your device, selec t Options > Extras > Guides . The guides provide i nformation about attractions, restaurants, hotels, a nd othe r points of interest. The guides must be download ed and purchased befo re use. To browse a downloaded guide, on the My guides tab in Guides, select a guide and a subcategory (if available). To download a new guide to your device, in Guides, select the desi red guide and Download > Yes . The purchase process starts au tomat ically. Yo u can pay for the guides using an acce pted credit card or have the amount ch arged to your phone bill (if supporte d by your cel lular network serv ice provid er). To confirm the purchase, sel ect OK twice. To receive a confirmation of the purchase throug h e-mail, enter your name and e-mail address, and select OK . 63 Maps
Music folder Music player Warning: Listen to music at a moderate level. Continu ous exposure to high volume ma y damage your hearing. D o not hold the device near your ear when the lo udspeaker is in use, because the volume may be extremely loud. Music player supports files formats such as AAC, AAC , eAAC , MP3, and WMA. Music player does not necessarily support all features of a file format or all the variations of file formats. You can also use Music player to listen to podcast episodes. Podcasting is the method for delive ring audio or video content ov er the int ernet using either RSS or Atom tec h nologies for playback on mobile devices and PCs. You can transfer music from other compa tible devices to your device. See "Transfer music to your device" , p. 67 . Play a son g or a podcast episode To open Music play er, press , and select Music > Music pl ayer . Tip: You can access the Music player from the multimedia menu. You may have to refresh the music and podcast libraries after you have updated the song or podcast selection in your device. To add all availa ble items to the l ibrary, in the Mu sic player main vie w, select Options > Ref resh library . To play a song or a podcast episode, do the following: 1. Select c ategories to navigate to the song or podcast epis ode you wa nt to he ar. If the Navi wheel setting is set on in the settings, to browse the lists, slide your finger on the rim of the sc roll key . 2. To play the selected files, press the scroll key. To pause playback, press the scroll key; to resume, press the scroll key again. To stop playback, scroll down. 64 Music folder
To fast forward or rewind , press and hold the scroll key to the right o r left. To go to the next item, scroll right. To return to the beginning of the item, scroll left. To skip to the previous item, scroll left again within 2 seconds afte r a son g or podc ast has started. To switch random play ( ) on or off, select Option s > Shuffle . To repeat the current item ( ), all items ( ), or to switch repeat off, select Options > Repeat . If you play podcasts, shuffle and repeat are automatically switched off. To adjust the volume, press the volume key. To modify the to ne of the music playback, select Option s > Equaliser . To modify the balanc e and stereo image or to enhance bass, select Opt ions > Audio settings . To view a visualisation during playback, select Option s > Show visualisation . To return to the standby mode and leave the player playing in the back ground, press the end key , or to switch to anothe r open appl icatio n, press a nd hold . To close the playe r, select Op tions > Exit . Music menu Press , and select Musi c > Music p layer . The music menu shows the avail able music. To view all songs, sorted songs, pla ylists, or podcasts in the music menu, select the desired option. When the Music player is playing in the background, to open the Now p laying view, press and hold the multimedia key. Playlists Press , and select Musi c > Music p layer . To view and manage playlists, in the music menu, select Playlists . To view details of the playlist, select Options > Playlist details . Create a playlist 1. Select Options > Creat e playlis t . 2. Enter a name for the playlist, and select OK . 3. To add songs now, select Yes ; or to add the songs later, select No . 65 Music folder
4. If you select Yes , select artists to find the songs you want to include in t he playlist . Press the scroll key to add items. To show the song list unde r an artist title, scroll right. To hide the so ng list, scroll left. 5. When you have made your selections, select Done . If a compatible memory card is inserted, the playlist is saved to the memory card. To add more songs la ter, when viewing the playlist, select Options > Add songs . To add songs, albums, artists, genres, and composers to a playlist from the different views of the music menu, select an item and Options > Add to playlist > Saved playlist or New playlist . To remove a song from a playlist, select Opti ons > Remove . This does not delete the song from the device; it only removes it from t he playlist . To reorder songs in a playlist, scroll to the song you want to move, and select Option s > Mo ve . To grab songs and drop them to a new position, use the scroll key. Podca sts Press , and select Music > Music player > Podcasts . The podcast menu displays the podcasts available in the devic e. Podcast episodes ha ve three state s: never played, partially playe d, and compl etely pl ayed. If an episode is partially play ed, it plays from th e last playback position the next time it is played. If an episode is neve r played or com pletely played, it plays from the beginning . Home network wi th music player You can play cont ent stored in your Nokia device remotely on compatible de vices in a home network. You can also copy file s from your Nokia device to other devices that are c onnected to the ho me network. Home netw ork must be configured first. See "About home ne twork" , p. 10 0 . Play a song or a podcast remotely 1. Press , a nd s elec t Music > Music player . 2. Select c ategories to navigate to the song or podcast episode yo u want to h ear. Slide your finger around the rim of the sc roll key to browse the lists. 3. Select the desired song or podc ast and Options > Play > Via home network . 4. Select the device in which the fil e is played. 66 Music folder
Copy songs or podcasts wirelessly To copy or transfer media files from your device to another compatible devi ce in a home network, select a fi le and Options > Copy to home network . Content sharing does not have t o be switched on in the ho me net work sett ings. See "Set sharing on and define content" , p. 102 . Transfer music to your device You can transfer music from a compatible PC or other compatib le devices using a compatible USB data cable or Bluetooth connectivity. PC requirements for music transf er: â Microsoft Windows XP operating system (or later) â A compatible version of the Windows Media Player application. Yo u can get more detail ed information about Windows Media Player compatibility from your device's product pages on the Nokia website. â Nokia Nseries PC Suite 2.1 or later Windows Media Player 10 may cause playback delays to W MDRM te chnolo gy prote cted fi les afte r they have been transferred to your d evice. Check Microsoft support website for a hotfix to Windows Media Player 10 or get a newer compatible version of Windows Media Play er. Transfer mu sic from PC You can use the followi ng methods to transfer music: â To view your device on a PC as a mass memory device wh ere you can transfer any data fil es, make the connect ion with a compatible USB data cable or Bluetooth connectivit y. If you are using a USB c able, s elect M ass storage as the connection mode. A comp atible memory card must be inserted in the device. â To synchronise music with Windows Media Player, connect a compatible USB data cable and select Media transfer as the connection mode. A compatible memory card must be inserted in the device. To change the defa ult USB connection mode, pres s , and select Tools > Connectivity > USB > USB conn ection mode . Transfer with Windows Media Player Music synchronisation functions may vary bet ween different versions of t he Windows Media Player application. For more information, see the correspon ding Wind ows Media Play er guides an d help. The following instructions are for Windows Media Player 11. 67 Music folder
Manual synchronisatio n With manual synch ronisation, you can select the songs and playlists that yo u want to move, copy, or remove. 1. After your device is connected with Windows Media Player, select your devi ce in the navigat ion pane on the right, if more than one device is conne cted. 2. In the left navigation pane, br owse the music files on your PC which you want to synchronise. 3. Drag and drop songs to the Sync List on the right. You can see th e amount of available memory in your device above the Sync List . 4. To remove songs or albums , select an item in the Sync List , right-cl ick, an d select Remove f rom list . 5. To star t the sy nch ronisat ion, c lick Start Sync . Automatic synchronisation 1. To activate t he automatic synchronisation function in Windows Media Player, click the Sync tab, select Nokia Handset > Set Up Sync... , and check th e Sync this device automatically check box. 2. Select the p laylists you want to synchronise automat ically in the Av aila ble pl aylis ts pane, and click Add . The selected items are transferred to the Playlists to sync pane. 3. To finalise the setup for automatic synchronisation, click Finish . When the Sync this device automatically check box is checked and you connect your dev ice to the PC, the music li brary in you r device is automatica lly updated based on the pl aylists you select for synchron isation in Windo ws Media Pla yer. If no playlists have been selected, the whole PC music library is selec ted f or sync hr onisation. If there is not enough free memory in your devic e, Windows Media Player selects manual synchronisation automa tically . To stop automatic synchronisation, cl ick the Sync tab, and select Stop Sync to 'No kia Handset' . Nokia Music Store In the Nokia Music Store (network se rvice) you can search, browse, and purchase music to download to your device. To purchase musi c, you first need to register for the service. To check the Nokia Music Store avai lability in your country, visit music.nokia.com. To access the Nokia Music Store, you must have a valid internet access point in the device. 68 Music folder
To open Nokia Music Store, press , and select Music > Music stor e . To find more music in different categories of the music menu, select Options > Find in Music store . Nokia Music Store settings The availability and appearance of the music store settings may vary. The settings may also be predefined and no t editable. If th e settings are not predefined, y ou may be asked to sel ect the access point to use when connecti ng to the music store. To select the access poin t, select Default access point . In the music store, you may be able to edit the settings by selecting Options > Settings . FM transmitter About the FM transmitter The availabil ity of this feature may vary by country. Some countries may restrict the use of t he FM transmitter. Before usin g the feature in a foreign country, see www.nseries.c om/fmtransmitter to check if use is permitted. With the FM transmitte r, you can play songs in your device th rough any compatible FM receive r, such as a car radio or a home stereo system. The operatin g distance o f the FM transmi tter is up to a maximum of 3 metres (10 feet). The transmission may be subject to interference due to obstructions, such as walls , other electronic device s, or from public radio stations. The FM transmitte r may cause interf erence to nearby FM receivers operating on the same frequency. T o avoid interference, always se arch for a f ree FM frequ ency on the rece iver bef ore using the FM transmit ter. The FM transmitter cannot be used at the same time as the FM radio of your device. The operati ng freque ncy range of th e transmitter is from 88.1 to 10 7.9 MHz. When the transmitter is on and transmitting sound, is displayed in the standby mode. If the transmitter is o n, but not tran smitting anythin g, is displayed and a periodic tone sounds. If the transmitter is not transmittin g anything for several minutes, it switches off automatically. Play a son g usin g FM transmit ter To play a song stored in your device through a compatible FM receiver, do the following: 1. Press , and select Music > Music player . 2. Select a song or a playlist to be played. 3. In the Now pla ying view, select Options > FM transmitter . 69 Music folder
4. To activate th e FM transmitte r, set FM transmitter to On , and ente r a frequency that is free from other transmissions. For example, if the frequenc y 107.8 MHz is free in your area and you tune your FM receiver to it, you must also tune the FM transmitte r to 107.8 MHz. 5. Tune the rec eiving devi ce to the same frequency, and select Options > Exit . To adjust the volume, u se the volume function in the rece iving dev ice. Liste n to music a t a mode rate level. Continu ous exposure to high volume ma y damage your hearing . To deactivate the F M transmitter, se lect Options > FM transm itter , and set FM transm itter to Off . If music is not played for several minutes, the transmitter switc hes off automatic ally. FM transmit ter setti ngs Press , and select Music > FM transmitt er . To activate the FM tr ansmitter, select FM transmitter > On . To set a frequency manu ally, select F requency and enter the desired value. To list the prev iously used freque ncies, select Options > L ast fr equenc ies . Nokia Podcasting With the No kia Podcasti ng application (network service), you can search , discover, subscribe to, and download podcasts over the air, and play, manage, and share audio and video podcasts with your device. Podcas ting setting s Before using Nokia Podcas ting, set your connection and download settings. The recommended connection me thod is WLAN. Check with your servic e provider for terms an d data service fees before usin g other connections. For example, a flat rate data plan can a llow large data transfers for one mon thly fee. Connection settings To edit the connection settings, press , and select Music > Podcasti ng > Options > Settings > Connect ion . Define the following: â Default access point â Select the ac cess point to define your conn ection to the internet. â Search service URL â Define the pod cast search service to be u sed in searches. Download settings 70 Music folder
To edit the do wnload set tings, press , and select Music > Podcasting > Option s > Settings > Download . Define the following: â Save to â Define th e locatio n where yo u want to save your podcasts. â Update interval â Define how often podcasts are updated. â Next update date â Define th e date of the next automatic update. â Next update time â Define the time of next automatic update. Automatic updates only occur if a specific defaul t access point is selected and Nokia Podcasting is running. If Nokia Podcasting i s not running, the automatic updates are not activat ed. â Download limit (%) â Define the size of the memory that is used for podcast downloads. â If lim it exceed s â Define what to do if the downloads exceed the download limit. Setting the applica tion to retrieve podcasts automatically may involve the transmission of large amounts of data through your service providerâÂÂs network. Contact your service provider for information about da ta transmission ch arges. To restore the default settings, sele ct Option s > Restore d efault in th e settings view. Search podcasts Search helps you to fi nd podcasts by keyword or title. The search engine uses t he podcast search serv ice you set up in Podcasting > Op tio ns > Settings > Connecti on > Search service URL . To search for podcasts, press , select Music > Podcasting > Search , and enter the desired keywords. Tip: Search looks for podcast ti tles and keywords in descriptions, not specific episodes. Gene ral topics, suc h as football or hip-hop, usually give better results than a specific team or artist. To subscribe to marked c hannels and add th em to your podcasts , select Subs cribe . You can also add a podcast by selecting one. To start a new search, select Options > New search . To go the we bsite of the podcast, se lect Options > Open web page ( network service). To see the de tails of a podca st, select Op tion s > Descriptio n . To sen d sel ected pod cast s to anot her c ompat ible device, select Option s > Send . 71 Music folder
Dire cto ri es Directories help you t o find new podcast episodes to which to subsc ribe. To open directories, press , and select Music > Podcasting > Directories . Contents of t he direct ories change. Select the desired directory folder to update it (n etwork service). The colour of the f older chan ges, when the update is comp lete. Directorie s can include to p podcasts liste d by popularity or themed fold ers. To open the desir ed folder topic, select it an d Open . A list of podcasts is displayed. To subscribe to a podcast , select the title, and Update . After you have subscribed to episodes of a podcast, you can download, manage, and play them in the podcasts menu. To add a new directory or folder, select Options > New > Web directory or Folder . Select a title, URL of the .opml (outline proce ssor markup language) file, and Done . To edit the selected folder, web link, or web directory, select Options > Edit . To import an .opml file st or ed on y our devi ce, sele ct Options > Import OPML file . Select the location of the file, and import it. To send a directory f older as a multimedia message or using Blueto oth connectivity, select the folder and Option s > Send . When you rece ive a message with an .opml file using Bluetooth connectivity, open the file to save the file into the Received f o l d e r i n d i r e c t o r i e s . O p e n the folder to subscribe to any of the links to add to your podcasts. Downloads After you have subscribed to a podcast, from directories, search, or by entering a URL, yo u can manage, download, and play episodes in Podcasts . To see the podcasts you ha ve subscribed to, select Podcasting > Podcasts . To see individual episo de titles (an ep isode is a particular media file of a podcast), select the podcast title. To start a download , select the episode title. To download or to continue to download selected or marked episodes, select Download . You ca n download multiple episodes at the same time. To play a portio n of a po dcast during download or after partial downloading, select the podcast and Options > Play preview . 72 Music folder
Fully downloaded podcasts can be found in the Podcasts folder, but are not show n until the library is refreshed. Play and manage podcasts To display the available ep isodes from the selec ted podcast, in Podcasts , select Op en . Under each episode, you see the file format, th e size of the file, and time of the upload. When the podc ast is fully downloaded , to play t he full episode, select it and Play . T o u p d a t e t h e s e l e c t e d p o d c a s t o r m a r k e d p o d c a s t s , for a new episode, sele ct Options > Update . To stop the updatin g, select Op tions > Stop update . To add a new podcast by entering the URL of the podcast, select Opti ons > New podcast . If you do not have an access point de fined or if during packet data connection you are asked to enter a user na me and password, contact yo ur servic e provid er. To edit the UR L of the select ed podcast, select Option s > Edit . To delete a downloaded podc ast or marked podcasts from your device, select Option s > Delete . To send the sele cted podcast or marked podcast s to another compatible device as .opml files as a multimedia message or by Bluetoot h connectivit y, select Options > Send . To update, delete, and send a group of selec ted podcasts at once, select Options > Mark/ Unmark , mark the desired podcasts, and select Option s to choose the desired action. To open th e websit e of the p odcast (n etwork service), select Options > Open web pag e . Some podcasts pro vide the opportu nity to intera ct with the cr eators by commenting an d voting. T o connect to the inte rnet to do th is, select Options > View comments . Radio applications Press , select Music > Radio , and Visual Radio or Intern et radio . FM radio You can use the radio as a traditional FM radio and automatic ally tune into an d save stations. If you tune into st ations that o ffer th e Visual Radio service (network service), you will see information related to the radio programme on the display. The radio supports Radio Data System (RDS) functionality. Radio stat ions supporting RDS may display information, su ch as the name of the station. If activated in the settings, RDS also 73 Music folder
attempts to scan for an alte rnative frequen cy for the currently playing station, if the reception is weak. The radio supports radio broadcast data sy stem (RBDS) funct ional ity. Radi o stations supporting RDS may display information, such as the name of the station. If activated in the se ttings, RDS also attempts to scan for an alte rnative frequen cy for the currently playing station, if the reception is weak. When you open th e radio for the first time, a wizard helps you to save local radio sta tions (network service). If you cannot access the Vi sual Radio service, the operators and radio statio ns in your area may not support Visual Radio. Listen to the radio The FM radio depends on an antenna other than the wireless device antenna. A compatible h eadset or enhanc ement needs to be attached to the device for the FM radio to function properly . Press , and select Musi c > Rad io > Visual Radio . The quality of the radio broadcast depends on the coverage of the radio station in that particular area. You can make a call or answer an incoming call while listening to th e radio. The radio is muted when there is an activ e call. To start a statio n search, select or . To change the freque ncy manually, select Options > Ma nual tuni ng . If you have saved radio stations in your device , to go to the ne xt or previo us saved station, select or . To adjust the volume, u se the volume key. Warning: Listen to music at a moderate level. Continuous exposu re to high volume may damage your hearing. Do not hold the device near your ear when the loud speaker is in use, because the vo lume may be ext remel y loud. To listen to the radio us ing the loudspeaker, select Options > Ac tivate loudspeaker . To view available stations based on location, select Options > Sta tion directory (network service). To save the station to which you are currently tuned to your station list, select Opt ions > Save station . To open the list of your saved stations, select Options > Sta tions . To return to the st andby mode wh ile listening to th e FM radio in the back ground, select Opti ons > Play in bac kgro und . 74 Music folder
View visual content To check availability and costs and to subscribe to the service , contact y o ur service provider. To view available visual content w hen listening to a saved station that has a visual service ID, select Option s > Start visual service . Saved stations To open th e list of yo ur saved stations, select Option s > Stations . To listen to a save d station, select Options > Station > Listen . To view available visual content for a station with Visual Radio service, select Option s > Station > Start visual servic e . To change station details, select Options > Station > Edit . FM radio settings Press , and select Music > Radio > Visual Radio > Options > Settings â Alternative frequenc ies â To automatic ally search for alternative freq uenci es if t h e reception is weak, sel ect Auto scan on . â Auto-start service â To start Visual Radio automatically w hen you select a saved station that offers Visual Radio service, select Yes . â Access point â S elect the acc ess point used for the data connection when u sing Visual radio service. You do not need an access point to use the application as an FM radio. â Current region â Select the region where you currently are. This setting is displayed only if there is no network c overage when you start th e applica tion. Your device can display the identit y name of the FM station to which you are tuned if the name is being transmitted by the station. Nokia Internet Radio With the Nokia Internet Radio application (network service), you can listen to available radio stations on the internet. To list en to radio stations, you must have a WLAN or packet data access point defined in your devi ce. Listen ing to th e statio ns may involv e the transmission of large amounts of data throug h your service provider's network. The recommended connection method is WLAN. Check with your service provider for terms and data service fees before using other connect ions. For example, a flat rate data plan can all ow large data tra nsfers for a set monthly fee. Listen to intern et radio stations Press , and select Musi c > Radio > Internet radio . 75 Music folder
Warning: Listen to music at a moderate level. Continu ous exposure to high volume ma y damage your hearing. D o not hold the device near your ear when the lo udspeaker is in use, because the volume may be extremely loud. To listen to a radio station on the in ternet, do the following: 1. Select a station from your favouri tes or the station directory, or se arch stations by their name from the Nokia Internet Radio service. To add a station manual ly, select Opt ions > Add station manually . You can also browse for station links wi th the Web applica tion. Compatible links are automatically opened in the Internet Radio application . 2. Select Listen . The Now playing view opens displaying information about the cu rrently playing station and song. To stop the playback, press the scroll key; to resume, press the scroll key again. To adjust the volume, u se the volume key. To view station information, select Op tion s > Station information (not available if you hav e saved the station manually). If you are listening to a station saved in your favourites, scroll left or right to listen to the previous or next saved station. Favourite stations To view and listen to your favourite stations, press , and select Music > Radio > Internet radio > Favourites . To add a station manually to favourites, select Options > Ad d statio n manual ly . Ente r the web addres s of the st ation a nd a na me that y ou wa nt to appear in the favourites list. To add the currently playin g station to favourites, select Options > Add to Favourit es . To view station informatio n, to move a station up or down in the list, or to delet e a station from the favourites, select Options > Station and the desired option. To view only stations beginning with particular letters or nu mbers, start en tering the characte rs. Matching sta tions are displayed. Search for stations To search for radio stations in the Nokia Internet Radio servic e by their na me, do the f ollowing: 1. In the application main view, select Search . 2. Enter a station name or th e first lett ers of it in the search field , and select Search . 76 Music folder
Matching stations are displayed . To listen to a station, select it, and Listen . To save a station to your favourites, select it, and Option s > Add to Favourites . To make anot her se arc h, se lect Options > Search again . Station directory Press , and select Radio > Internet radio > Station directory . The station directory is maintained by Nok ia. If you want to list en to int ernet radio stations outside t he directory, add station information manually or browse for station links on the interne t with the Web application. Select how you want the available stations to be sorted: â Brows e by genr e â View the available radio station genres. â Brows e by langua ge â View the l anguages in which there are stations broadc asting. â Brows e by country â View the countries in which there are stations broadc asting. â Top stations â View the most popular stations in the dire ctory. Internet radio settings Press , and select Musi c > Radio > Internet radio > Optio ns > Settings . To select the d efault access point to connec t to the network, select Default access point and from the available options. Select Always ask if you want the device to ask for t he access point ev ery time you open the application. To change th e connection speeds for differen t connecti on type s, select from the following: â GPRS connection bitrate â for GPRS packet data connections â 3G connec tion bitra te â for 3G packet data connections â Wi-Fi connec tion bitrate â for WLAN connections The quality of the radio broadcast depends on the selected c onnection speed. The higher t he speed, the better the quality. To avoid buffering, use the highest qualit y only with high spee d connections. 77 Music folder
Camera About the camera Your Nokia N79 has two cameras. The main, high- resolution camera, is on th e back of the dev ice. The secondary, lower resolution camera is on the front. You can use both cameras to capture images and record videos. Your device supports an image capture resolution of 2592x19 44 pixels. T he image reso lution in this guide may appear different. The images and video clips are saved in Photos. See "Photos" , p. 89 . The produced images are in the JPEG format. Video cl ips are recorded in the MPEG-4 file format with the .mp4 file exte nsion, or in the 3GPP file format with the .3gp file extension (shari ng quali ty). See "Video settings" , p. 87 . To free memory for new images and v ideo clips, transfer files to a compat ible PC using a compatible USB data cable, for exampl e, and remove th e files from your device. The device inform s you when the memory is full. You can th en free up memory in the current storage or chan ge the memory in use. You can send images and vi deo clips in a multimedia message, as an e-mail atta ch ment, or by using othe r connection methods, such as Bluetooth connectivity or a wireless L AN connection. You can also upload them to a co mpatible online album. See " Share images and videos online " , p. 96 . Activate the camera To activate the main came ra, open the lens cover. To activ ate the ma in camera when the lens cove r is already open an d the camer a is act ive in the background, press and hol d the capture key. To close the main camera, close the lens cover. Keep a safe distance when using the f lash. Do not use the flash on people or animals at close range. Do not cover the flash whi le taking a picture. Image capture Still image camera indicators The still image camera viewfind er displays the following: 78 Camera
1 â Capture mode indicator 2 â Active toolbar (not displayed during image capture) . See "Active toolbar" , p. 79 . 3 â Battery cha rge level indi cator 4 â Image resolution indicat or 5 â Image counter (t he estimated number of images you c an capt ure usin g the c urrent imag e quality setting and memory) 6 â The device memory ( ) and memory card ( ) indicators, which show where images are saved 7 â GPS signal indicator. See "Location information" , p. 81 . Active toolbar The activ e toolbar provid es you with shortcuts to different items and sett ings before and after capturing an image or recording a video. Scroll to items, and select them by pressing the scroll key. You can also define when the act ive toolbar is visible on the displ ay. The settings in th e active toolbar retu rn to the default settings afte r you close the camera. To view the active too lbar before and after capturing an image or recording a video, select Option s > Show tool bar . To view th e active toolbar only when you need it, select Op tions > Hide toolbar . To activate th e active t oolbar when it is hidden, press the scrol l key. The toolbar is visible for 5 seconds. In the active t oolbar, select from t he following: to switch between the video mode and the image mode to select the scene to switch the video light on or off (video mode only) to select the flash mode (images only) to activate the self-time r (images only). See "You in the pictu reâÂÂself-t imer" , p. 83 . to activate t he sequenc e mode (images on ly). See "Capture images in a sequence" , p. 82 . to select a colour effect to show or hide the viewfinder grid (images only) to adjust white balance 79 Camera
to adjust the expo sure compensatio n (images only) to adjust sharpness (images only) to adjust contrast (images only) to adjust light sensitivity (images only) The icons ch ange to ref lect the cu rrent setting. Saving the captured image may take longer if you change the zoom, lighting, or colour settings. See "Aft er taking a picture" , p. 81 . See "After recording a video" , p. 85 . The active toolbar in Photos has different o ptions. See "Ac tive toolbar" , p. 91 . Capture images When capturing an image, note the following: â Use both hands to keep the camera still. â The quality of a digitally zoomed image is lower than that of a nonzoomed image. â The camera goes int o the battery sav ing mode if there are no keypresses for a moment. To continue captu ring images, press th e capture key. To capture an image, do the f ollowing: 1. If the camera is in th e video mode, select the image mode from the active toolbar. 2. To lock the focus on an object, press the capture key halfway down (main camera only, not available in landscape or sport scene. See "Act ive toolbar" , p. 79 . ). A gre en lock ed focus indicator appears on the display. If the focus was not locked, a red focus indi cator appears. Release the capture key, and press it halfway down again. Yo u can a lso capture an ima ge withou t locking the focus. 3. To cap ture an im age, press the capt ure key. Do not move the device before the image is saved and the final image appears on the screen. To zoom in or out when capturing an image, use the zoom key in your devic e. To activate the fron t camera, sele ct Options > Us e secondary camera . To capture an image, press the scroll key. To zoom in or out, scr oll up or down. To leave the camera open in the back ground and use other applications, press . To return to the camera, press and hold the ca pture key. 80 Camera
Location information You can automatically add capture location information to the file details of the captured material. For example, in the Photos application you can then view the location where an image was captured. To add location inform ation to all captured material, in Camera, select Options > Settings > Record location > Yes . Location inform ation indica tors at the bottom of the display: â â Location informati on unavailable. GPS stays on in the backgro und for several minutes. If a satellite connection is foun d and the indicator changes to within that time, all the images and video captured during that time are tagged based on the receiv ed GPS posit ioning informat ion. â â Location information is available. Location information is added to the file details. See "Still image camera settings" , p. 86 . Files with location information are indicated by in the Photos appl ication. After taking a picture After you take a pi cture, select from the follo wing options in the active tool bar (available only if Show captu red i mage is enabled in the still image camera setting s): â If you do not wan t to keep t he image, select Delete ( ). â To send the image usin g a multimedia message, e-mail, or other conn ec tion methods, such as Bluetooth conne ctivity, press the call key, or select Send ( ). See "Write and se nd messages" , p. 118 . If you are in a call, select Send to cal ler ( ). â To add the image to an album, select Add to album â To view informat ion about the image, select Details â To send the image to a compatible online album, select (available only if you have set up an account for an album). See " Share images and videos online " , p. 96 . To zoom in an image after taking it, select Option s > Go to Photos to open the image, and use the zoom ke y on the side of your device. To use the im age as wa llpaper in th e active sta ndby mode, select Options > Set as wallpaper . To set the image as a call image for a contact, select Option s > Assign to contact . 81 Camera
To return to the vi ewfinder to capture a new image, press the capture key. Flash The flash is available only in th e main camera. Keep a safe distance when using the f lash. Do not use the flash on people or animals at close range. Do not cover t he flash while taking a picture. The camera of your device has a dual LED f lash for low ligh t c ondit ions. Select the desired flash mode from the active toolbar: Au tomati c ( ), Red-eye ( ), On ( ), and Off ( ). Scenes Scenes are only available in the main camera. A scene helps you to find the right colour and lighting setting s for the current environment. The settings of each sc ene have be en set according to a certain style or environment. The default scen e in the image mode is Auto , a nd in the v ideo mo de Automatic (both indicated with ). To change the sc ene, in the act ive toolbar, selec t Scene modes and a scene. To make your o wn scene suitable for a certain environment, scroll to User defined , and select Options > Ch ange . In the u ser defined scene you can adjust different lig hting and colour settings. To c o p y t h e s e t t i n g s o f ano ther scene, sele ct Based on scene mode and the desired scene. To save the changes and return to the scenes list, press Back . To activate your own scene, sc roll to Us er defined , press the scroll key, and select Select . Capture images in a sequence The sequence mode is available only in the main camera. To set the c amera to capture image s in sequence (if enough memory is available), in th e active toolbar, select Sequence mode . To start capturing images in a quick sequence, select Burst , and press and hold the capture key. The device captures images until you release t he key or until the memory runs ou t. If you press the capture key briefly, the device captures six image in a sequence. To capture two or more images in defined interva ls, select the desire d time interval. To capture the images, press the capture k ey. To stop c apturing images, sele ct Cancel . The number of imag es taken depends on the available memory. 82 Camera
The captured images are shown in a grid on the display. To view an image, press the scroll key. If you used a time interval, only the last cap tured image is shown on the display. You can view the other images in the Photos application. You can also use the sequence mode with the self- timer. To return to th e sequence mode viewfinder, press the capture key. To switch off the sequen ce mode, in the active toolbar, select Sequence mode > Single shot . You in th e pictur eâÂÂself-timer The self-timer is available only in the main camera. Use the self-timer t o delay the capture so t hat you can incl ude yo urself in the pic ture. To set the self-timer d elay, in the ac tive toolbar, select Self timer > 2 seconds , 10 seconds , or 20 seconds . To activate the self-t imer, select Acti vate . The device beeps when the ti mer is running and the quadrangle blinks just before the im age capture. The camera takes th e picture aft er the sele cted delay elapses. To switch off the self-timer, in the active toolbar, select Self timer > Off . Tip: In th e active toolbar, select Self timer > 2 seconds to keep your hand st eady when taking a picture . Tips on taking good photographs Picture quality Use the app ropriate p icture qualit y. The camer a has several picture q uality modes. Use the highest setting to make sure that the camera produces the best picture quality availa ble. Note however, that better picture quality requ ires more storage space. For multimedia message (MMS) and e-mail attachments it may be necessary to use the smallest picture quality mode op timised for MMS sendin g. You can define the qua lity in the camera settings. See "Still image camera settings" , p. 86 . Background Use a simple backgrou nd. For portraits and other pictures with pe ople, avoid ha ving your subject in front of a cl uttere d, comple x backgroun d that may distract at tention from th e subject. Move the camera, or th e subjec t, when these conditions cannot be me t. Move the camera close r to the objec t to take clearer portra its. Depth When shooting landscapes and sceneries, add depth to your p ictures by placing objects in the 83 Camera
foreground. If the foreground object is too close to the camera, it may be blurred. Lighting conditions Changing the source, amoun t , and direction of light can change photographs dramatically. Here are some typical ligh ting condit ions: â Light source behi nd the subjec t. Avoid placing your subject in front of a strong light source. If the light source is behind the sub ject or visib le in the display, the resultin g picture may have weak contrast, may be too dark, and may contain unwant ed light effec ts. â Sidelit subject. Strong side light gives a dra matic effect but may be too harsh, resulting in too much contrast. â Light source in front of the subject. Harsh sunlight may cause th e subjects to squint their eyes. The contrast may also be too high. â Optimal lighting is found in situations where there is plenty of diffused, soft light available, for example, on a bright, partially cloudy day or on a sunny day in the shadow of trees. Video recording Video ca pture i ndicat ors The vi deo view finder disp lays the fo llowing : 1 â Capture mode indicator 2 â Video stabilisation on indicator See "Video settings" , p. 87 . 3 â Audio mute on indicator 4 â Active toolbar (not di splayed during recording). See "Active toolbar" , p. 79 . 5 â Battery ch arge level ind icator 6 â Video quality indicator. To change this setting, select Options > Settings > Video quality . 7 â Video clip file type 8 â Available recording time. When you are recording, the current video length indicator also shows the elapsed and remaining time. 9 â The location to which the vi deo clip is saved. 10 â GPS signal indicator. See "Location informat ion" , p. 81 . To display all viewfinder indicators, select Options > Sh ow icons . Select Hide icons to 84 Camera
display o nly the vi deo stat us indicators, and during the recording, the time remaining, zoom bar when zooming, and the selection keys. Record videos 1. If the camera is in th e image mode, select the video mode from the active toolbar. 2. To start recording, pre ss the capture key. Th e red reco rd ic on ( ) is displayed and a tone sounds. 3. To pause recording at any time, press Pause . Select Continue to re sume. If you pause record ing a nd do no t pre ss any k ey withi n one minute, the recording stops. To zoom in or o ut of the subject , use the zoom key in your d evice . 4. To stop recording, press the capture key. The video clip is automatically saved in Photos. Th e maximum length of a video clip is app roximately 30 seconds with sharin g quality and 90 minutes with other quality settings. To activate the front c amera, select Options > Use secondary camera . To sta rt recording a video, press the scroll key. To zoom in or out, scroll up or down. After recording a video After you record a video clip, select from the following options in th e active toolbar (available only if Show captured video is set t o On in the video settings): â To immediately play th e video clip you just recorded, select Play ( ). â If you do not want to keep the video, select Delete ( ). â To send the video clip using a multimedia message, e-mail, or ot her connection methods, such as Blue tooth co nnectivit y, press the cal l key, or select Send ( ). See "Write and send messages" , p. 118 . See "Send data usin g Bluetoot h connectivity" , p. 44 . This option is not available during a call. You may not be able to send video clips saved in the MPEG-4 file format in a multimedia messa ge. You can also send t he video clip to a person you are talking to . Select Send to ca ller ( ) (only available during a call). â To add the video clip to an album, select Add to album â To view information about the video clip, select Details â To upload the video c lip to a compatible online albu m, s elec t (only available if you have set up 85 Camera
an account for a compat ible online al bum). See " Share images and videos online " , p. 96 . â To return to the viewfinder to record a new video clip, press the captu re key. Camera settings There are two kinds o f settings for the camera: setup settings and main se ttings. The setup settings return to the defaul t settings afte r you close th e camera, but the main se ttings remain the same until you change them agai n. To adjust the setu p settings, use the opt ions in the activ e toolbar. See "Colour and lighting settings" , p. 87 . To change the main settings, in the image or video mode, select Options > Settings . Still image camera settings To change the main settings, in the image mode, select Options > Setti ngs and from the following: â Image quality â Set the resolution (main camera only). The better the image quality , the more memory the image consumes. â Add to album â Save the image to an album in Photos. â Record location â To add GPS location coordinates to each image file, select Yes . Receiving a GPS signal may take time or the signal may not be available. See "Locati on information" , p. 81 . â Show captured image â Select whether to view the capt ured image after it is taken or to continue ima ge capturing i mmediately. â Default image name â Define the default name for the captured images. â Extended digital zoom â The sett ing is only available in the main camera. On (con tinu ous) allows the zoom increments to be smooth and continuous between digital and extended digital zoom, On (p aus ed) allows the zoom increments to pause at the digital and extended digital step point, and Off allows a limited amount of zoom while retaining the i mage resolution. Use the extended zoom only whe n getting close r to the subject is more important than the final image quality. The overall quality of a digitally zoomed image is always lower than that of an unzoomed image. â Capture tone â S e t t h e t o n e th a t s o u n ds w h e n you capture an image. â Memory in u se â Select w here to store your images. â Rotate image â Select whether you want images that are captu red when the device is h eld upright to be rotate d when you ope n them in Gallery. â Restore camera settings â Restore the camera settings t o defa ult value s. 86 Camera
Colour and lighti ng setting s In the active toolbar, se lect from the following: â Flash mode ( ) (image only) â S elect the desired flash mode. â Colour tone ( ) â Select a colour effect. â Switch video light on or Switch video light off â Switch the video ligh t on or off (video mode only). â White balance ( ) â Select the current lighting condition. This allows the camera to reproduce colours more accurately. â Exposure co mpensation ( ) (image only) â If you are shooting a dark subject against a very light background, such as snow, adjust the exposure to 1 or 2 to compensate for the background brightness. For light subjects against a dark background, use -1 or -2. â Sharpn ess ( ) (image only) â Adjust the sharpness of the imag e. â Contra st ( ) (image only) â Adjust the difference bet ween the lightest and darkest parts of the image. â Ligh t sensit ivity ( ) (image only) â Inc rease the light sensitivity in low light conditions to avoid too dark images. The screen display chang es to match the settings you make. The avai lable se ttings vary depending on the selected camera. The setup settings are shooting-mode specific. Switching between the modes does not reset t he defin ed setti ngs. The setup set tings return to the default settings when you cl ose the ca mera. If you select a new scene , the colour and lighting settings are replaced by the selected scen e. You can change the setup settings afte r selecting a sc ene if needed. Video settings To change the main settings, in th e video mode, select Options > Settings and from the following: â Video quality â Set the qualit y of the video clip . Select Sharing , if you want to send the v ideo clip using a multimedia message. The clip i s recorded with QCIF resolution, i n 3GPP format, and the size is li mited to 3 00 kB ( app roxima tely 30 seco nds). You may not be able to send video clips saved in the MPEG-4 format in a mult imedia message. â Record location â To add GPS location coordinates to eac h file, select Yes . Receiving the GPS signal may take time or the signal may not be available. See "Location information", p. 81 . â Video stabilisation â Reduce the effe cts of the camera shaking when recording a video. 87 Camera
â Audio recording â Select wh ether to record sound. â Add to album â Add the record ed video clip to an album in Photos. â Show captured video â Se lect to view the first frame of the recorded video clip af ter the recording stops. To view the entire vide o clip, select Play from the active toolbar (main camera) or Option s > Play (secondary camera). â Default video name â Enter the def ault name for captu red vide o clips. â Memory in u se â Select where you want to store your video clip s. â Restore camera s ettings â Restore th e camera settings to default val ues. 88 Camera
Photos About Photos Press , select Photos and from the following: â Captu red â to show all the photos and videos you have take n â Months â to show photos and videos categorised by the mon th they where take n â Albums â to show the default albums and those you have created â Tags â to sho w tags yo u have create d for ea ch item â Downloads â to show items and videos downloaded from the web or rec eived via MMS or email â All â to vi ew all items â Share online â to post photos or v ideos to the web Files stored on your compatible memory c ard (if inserted) are indicated wit h . To open a file, press the scroll key. Video clips open and play in Video centre. See "Nokia Video Centre" , p. 106 . To copy or move files to another m emory location, select a file , Option s > Move and copy , and from the availabl e options. View im ages an d video s Press , select Photos and one of the following: â All â View all images and videos. â Captu red â View images captured an d video clips recorded with the came ra of your device. â Downloads â Vi ew downlo aded vide o clips and video clips saved in Video centre. Images and video clips can also be sent to you in a multimedia message, as an e-mail attachment, or through Bluet ooth connectivity. To be abl e to view a received image or video clip in Photos, you must first save it. 89 Photos
The images and video clip files are in a loop and ordered by date and t ime . The number of files is displayed. To browse the files one by one, scroll left or right. To browse files in groups, scroll up or down. Or, if the Navi whee l setting is activated, to browse the files, slide your finger on the rim of the scroll key. To open a file, press the sc roll key. When an image opens, to zoom in the image, press the zoom key on the side of your device. The zoom ing ratio is not stored permanent ly. To edit a video clip or an image, select Op tions > Edit . See "Edit images" , p. 94 . To see whe re an image marked with was captured, select Options > Show on map . To print your images on a compatible printer, or to store them on a compatible memory card (if inserted) for printing, select Option s > Print . See "Image pr int" , p. 95 . To m ove i mages to an albu m for later printing, select Opt ions > Ad d to albumPrint later . View and edit file details To view and edit image or video prope rties, select Options > Details and from the following: â Tags â Contains currently used tags. Se lect Add to add more tags to th e current file. See "Tags" , p. 91 . â Descriptio n â To add a free-form description of the file, select the field. â Location â This field displays the G PS location information, if available. â Title â This field contains a t humbnail image of the file and the curren t file name. To edit the name, select the fie ld. â Albums â Displays in which albums the current file is located. â Resolution â Displays the size of the image in pixels. â Duration â Displays the length of the video. â Usage rights â Sele ct View to view the DRM rights of this file. See "Licen ces" , p. 145 . Organise images and videos You can organise files in Photos as follows: â To view items in th e Tags view, add t ags to them. See "Tag s" , p. 91 . â To view items by mon ths, select Months . 90 Photos
â To create an alb um to stor e items, select Albums > Optio ns > New album . To add an image or a video clip to an album in Photos, select the it em and Add to album from the active toolbar. See "Alb ums" , p. 91 . To delete an image or vi deo clip, select the image and Delete from the ac tive toolbar. Active toolbar The active toolbar is available only whe n you have selected an image or a video clip in a view. In the activ e toolbar, scro ll up or down to different items, and select them by pressing the scroll key. The available options vary depending on the view you are in and whether you have selected an image or a video clip. To hide the toolbar, select Options > Hide icons . To activate the active toolbar when it is hidden, press the scroll key. Select from the following: to play the selected video clip to send the sele cted image or vide o clip to upload the selected image or video clip to a compatible online album (o nly availabl e if you have set up an account for a co mpatible online album). See " Share images and videos online " , p. 96 . to add the selec ted item to a n album to manage tags and other pr operties of the selected it em to delete the selec ted image or vi deo clip Albums With albums, you can convenient ly manage your images and video clips. To view the albums list in Photos, select Al bums in the main view. To create a new album in the albu ms view, select Option s > New album . To add a picture or a video clip to an alb um in Photos, scroll to a p icture or video c lip, and select Option s > Add to album . A list of albums opens. Select the album to which you want to add t he picture or video clip. The item you added to the album is still visible in Photos . To remove a file from an album, open the album, scroll to the fi le, and select Options > Remove from alb um . Tags Use tags to c ategori ze medi a items in Photos. You can create and delete tags in Tag manager. Ta g 91 Photos
manager shows the tags currently in use and the number of items associated with each tag. T o o p e n T a g m a n a g e r , s e l e c t a n i m a g e o r v i d e o c l i p and se lect Options > Details > Tag manager . To create a tag, sele ct Options > New tag . To view the list in most frequ ently used order, selec t Options > Mo st used . To view the list in al phabetical order, select Options > Al phabetica l . To see the tags you have created, select Tags in the Photos main view. The size of the tag n ame corresponds to the nu mber of items th e tag is assigned to. Select a tag to view all the images associated with the tag. To assign a tag to an image, select an image and select Options > Add tags . To remove an image from a tag, open a tag and select Options > Remov e from tag . Slide show To view your images as a slide show, select an image and Options > Slide show > Start > Play forwards or Play backwards to start the slide show. The slide show starts from th e selected file. To view o nly the sele cted images as a sl ide show, select Options > Mark/Unmark > Mark to mark images, and Options > Slide show > Start > Play forwa rds or Play backwards to start the sl ide show. Select from the following: â Continue â to resume the slide show, if paused â End â to clo se the slide show To browse the images, scroll left or right. Before starting the slide show, adjust the slide show settings. Select Opt ions > Sl ide s how > Settings , and from t he following: â Music â to add sound to the slide show. â Song â to select a music file from the list â Delay between slides â to adjust the tempo of the slide show â Transiti on â to make the slide show move smoothly from one slide to ano ther, and zoom in and out in the images randomly To adjust the volume during the slide show, use the volume key in your device. TV-out mode To view th e captured image s and video clips on a compatible TV, use a Nokia Video Connectivity Cable. 92 Photos
Before viewing the images and video clips on TV, you may need to configure th e TV-out settings for the applicable TV system and TV aspect ratio. See "Enhanc ement se tting s" , p. 162 . You cannot use the TV as th e camera viewfinder in TV-out mo de. To watch images and vi deo clips on TV, do the following: 1. Connect a Nokia Video Conn ectiv ity Cable to the video input of a compatible T V. 2. Connect the ot her end of the Nokia Video Connectivity Cable to the Nokia AV Connector of your device . 3. You may need t o select th e cable mo de. 4. Press , select Gal lery and browse for the file you want to view. The images are shown in the image viewer, and the video clips are played in Video centre. All audio, including the active calls, stereo video clip sound, key tone, and ringing tone is routed to the TV when the Nokia Video Connectivity Cable is connected to the device. You can use the device microphone normally. For all applications ot her than the fo lders in Photos , the TV screen displays what is displayed on the screen of your device. The opened image is display ed in full-screen on the TV. When you open an image in the thumbnail view while it is vi ewed on th e TV, zooming in is not available. When you open a highlighted video clip, Vi deo centre starts playing the vi deo clip o n the device displa y and t he T V scree n. See "RealPla yer " , p. 144. You can view images as a slide show on TV. All ite ms in an album or marked images are displayed on the TV in full-screen while the selected music plays. See "Slide show" , p. 92 . The qua lity of t he TV ima ge may va ry due to different resolu tion of th e devices. Wireless radio signals, such as incoming calls, may cause interference in the TV image. 93 Photos
Edit images Image editor To edit the pict ures after t aking them or the one s already saved in Photos, select Options > Edit . The image editor opens. To open a grid where y ou can select diffe rent edit options indicated by small icons, select Options > Apply effect . Yo u can crop and rotate the image; adjust the brightness, colour, contrast, and resolution; and add effects, text, clip art, or a frame to the pic ture. Crop image To crop an image, select Options > Ap ply effect > Crop , and a predefined aspect ratio from the list. To crop the image size manually, selec t Manual . If you select Manual , a cross appears in the upper left corner of the image. Use the scroll key t o select the area to crop, and select Set . Another cross appears in the l ower right corner. Again select the area to be cropp ed. To adjust the first selected area, select Back . The selec ted areas form a rectangle that forms the cropped image. If you select a predefin ed aspect ratio, select the upper left corner of the area to be cropped. To resize the highl ighted area, use the scrol l key. To fre eze the selected area, press the scroll key . To move the area with in the pict ure, use the scro ll key. T o select the area to be cropped, press the scroll key. Reduce red-eye To reduce red-eye in an image, select Options > Apply effect > Red eye reducti on . Move the cross onto the eye, and press the scro ll key. A loop appears on the displa y. T o r e s i z e t h e l o o p t o fit the size of t he eye, use the sc roll key. To reduce the redness, press the sc roll key. When you have finished edit ing the image, press Done . To save the changes and return to the previous view, press Ba ck . Useful shortcuts You can use the following shortcut s when editing images: â To view a full-screen image, press * . To return to the normal view, press * again. â To rotate an image clockwise or counterclockwise, press 3 or 1 . â To zoom in or out, pre ss 5 or 0 . â To move on a zoomed image, sc roll up, down, left, or right. 94 Photos
Edit videos The video editor supports .3gp and .mp4 v ideo file formats, and .aac, .amr, .mp3, and .wav audio file formats. It does not ne ce ssarily support al l features of a file format or all the variations of file formats. To edit video clips in Phot os, scroll to a vi deo clip, select Options > Edit , and from the following: â Merg e â to a dd an im age or a vi deo cl ip t o the beginning o r the end o f the sele cted video clip â Chang e sound â to add a new sound clip, and to replace the original so und in the video clip . â Add text â to add text to the begin ning or the end of the video clip â Cut â to trim the vide o and m ark the sections you want to keep in th e video clip To take a snapshot of a vi deo clip, in the cu t video view, sel ect Opt ions > Take sn apshot . In the thumbnail prev iew view, press th e scroll key, and select Take snapshot . Print images Image print To print images with Image print, select the image you want to pr int, and t he print option in Photos, camera, image editor, or image viewer. Use Image print to print your images using a compatible USB data cable, or Bluetooth connectivity. You can also print images using wireless LAN. If a compatible memory c ard is inserted, you can store the images to the memory card, and print them using a compatible printer. You can only print images that are in .jpeg format. The picture s taken wi th the cam era are automatically saved in .jpeg format. Printer selection To print images with Image print , select the image and the print op tion in Phot os, camera, image editor, or image viewer. When you use Image print fo r the first time, a list of available compatible printers is displayed . Select a printer. The printe r is set as the default printer. To use a printer compat ible with PictBridge, connect t he co mpatible data cable before you select the print option, and ch eck that the data c able mode is set to Image print or Ask on connection . See "USB" , p. 46 . The printer is automatically displayed when you select the print option. If the default p rinter is not available , a list of available printers is displayed. To change th e default printer , select Options > Setti ngs > Default printer . 95 Photos
Print preview After you select the print er, the selected image s are displayed using pr edefin ed layouts. To change the layout, scroll left or right to browse through th e avai lable lay outs f or the selecte d printer. If the images do no t fit o n a single page, scroll up or down to display the additi onal pages. Print settings The available options va ry depending on the capabilities of the printing de vice you selecte d. To set a defa ult printer, select Options > Default printer . To select the pa per size, select Paper size , th e siz e of paper from the list, and OK . Select Cancel to return to the pr evious view . Print on line With Print online , you can order prints of images o n l i n e d i r e c t l y t o y o u r h o m e o r t o a s t o r e w h e r e y o u can pick them up. You can also orde r different products with the selected image, such as mugs or mouse pads. The available products depend on the service provider. For more information on the application, see the guides available at the No kia pro duct support pages or your local N okia webs ite. Share images and videos online You can share images and video clips in compatible online albums, weblogs, or in other compatible online sharing services on the web. You can upload content, save unfinished posts as drafts and continue later, and view the conte nt of the albums. The supported co ntent types may vary depe nding on the service provider. To share images and videos online, you must have an acc oun t wit h an onli ne image sharing service. You can usu ally subscribe to such a service on the web page of your service provide r. Contact your service provider fo r more information. Using this service may involve the transmission of large amounts of data throug h your service provider's network. Contact your service pr ovider for information about data transmission charges. The recommended connection me thod is WLAN. To upload a file from Photos to the online service, press , and sele ct Phot os . Select an album, scroll to the desired fi le, and select Option s > Send > Post t o we b , or select the file and from the active toolbar. 96 Photos
For more information on the application and compatible servic e providers, see the No kia product support pa ges or your local N okia website. 97 Photos
Gallery To access your images, video clips, and songs, or store and organise sound clips and streaming links, press , and select Ap plica tions > Media > Gallery . Main view Press , and select Applic ations > Media > Gallery , and fr om the following: â Photos â to view images and videos in Photos. See "About Photos" , p. 89 . â Video clips â to vi e w v id eo s in Vi de o cen t re â Songs â to op en Musi c player . See "Music player" , p. 64 . â Sound clips â to listen to sound clips â Streaming links â to view and open streaming links â Presentations â to view pre sentations You can browse and open folders and copy and move items to folders. You can also create albums and copy and add items to albums. See "Albums " , p. 91 . Files stored on your compatible memory card (if inserted) are indicated with . To open a file, press the sc roll key. Video clips, RAM files, and streaming links open and play in Video centre, and music and sound clips in Music pla yer. To copy or move files to the memory card (if inserted) or to device memory, select a file and Options > Mo ve and cop y > Copy and from the available option s. Sounds This folder con tains all the soun ds you have created with the Recorder application or downloaded from the web. To listen to sound files, press , select Applications > Me dia > Gallery > Sound clips and a sound file. To pause th e playback, press the scroll key. To fast-forward or rewind, scroll right or left. To download sound s, select the dow nload link . 98 Gallery
Streaming links To open streaming links, press , and select Applicati ons > Media > Gallery > Streaming links . Select a link , and press the scroll key. To add a new streaming link, select Op tions > New link . Pres entations With presentat ions, you can view SVG (scalable vector graphics) files, such as cartoons and maps. SVG images maintain their appearance when printed or viewed w ith different screen sizes and resolutions. To view SVG files, press , and select Applicati ons > Media > Gallery > Presentations . Scroll to an image, and sel ect Option s > Play . To pause playing, select Option s > Pause . To zoom in, press 5 . To zoom out, press 0 . To rotate the image 90 degrees clockwise or counterclockwise, press 1 or 3 , respectively. To rotate the image 45 degrees, p ress 7 or 9 . To switch between full an d normal screen, press * . 99 Gallery
Home network About home network Your device is compatible with Universal Plug and Play (UPnP) and certified by Digital Living Network Alliance (DLNA). You can use a wireless LAN (WLAN) access point device or a WLAN router to create a home network. Then you ca n connect compatible UPnP devices that support WLAN to the network. Compatible devic es may be your mobile d evice, a compatible PC, sound syst em, or television, or a compatible wireless multim edia receiver connected to a sound system or a television. To us e th e WLAN fun ctio n of y our de vice i n a h ome network, you must have a working WLAN home connection setup and have other UPnP enable d home devices to connec t to the same home network. See "Wireless LAN" , p. 40 . After setting up your h ome network you can share photos, m usic, and v ideo wit h your frie nds and family at home. You are also able to store your media to a media server or retrieve media files from a compatible home server. You can play music stored in your Nokia N 79 using a DLNA certified home stereo system, con trolling the playlists and volume levels directly from your Nokia N79. You can also view images captured wit h the camera of your Nokia N79 on a compatible TV screen, all controlled with the N okia N79 over W LAN. The home network uses t he security settings of the WLAN connection. Use the home network feature in a WLAN infrastructu re network with a WLAN acc ess point devi ce and encrypt ion enable d. You can share an d synchronise media file s in your mobile device with other compatible UPnP devices using the home network. To enable the h ome network func tionality and manage the settings, press , and select Tools > Connectivity > Home media . You can also use the home ne twork to view, play, and copy compatible media files t o and from your mobile device. See "View and share media files" , p. 102 . Your device is connect ed to the home network only if you accept a connecti on request from another compatible device, or select the option to v iew, play, or copy media files on your device or search for other devices. 100 Home network
Important security information When you configure your WLAN home network, enable an encryption meth od on your access point device, then on the other device s you intend to connect to your h ome network. Refer to the documentatio n of the device s. Keep any passcodes secret and in a safe place separate from th e devices. You can view or c hange the settings of t he WLAN internet access poin t in yo ur device . See "Acce ss points" , p. 170 . If you use the ad h oc operating mod e to creat e a home network with a co mpatible device, enable one of the encryption meth ods in WLAN securi ty mode when you configure the internet access point. See "Con nectio n set tings" , p. 169 . This st ep reduces the risk of an unwanted party join ing the ad hoc network. Your device notifies you if anothe r device a ttempts to connect t o it and the h ome network. Do n ot accept connection requests from an unknown device. If you use WLA N in a network that does not have encryption, switch off shar ing your files with other devices, or do not share any private media files. See "Settings for home network" , p. 101 . Settings for home network To share media files saved in Photos with other UPnP compatible and DL NA certified devices through WLAN, you must crea te and configure your WLAN home internet acce ss point, the n configure the sett ings fo r home ne twork i n the Ho me media application. See "WLA N interne t access points" , p. 41 . See "Con nectio n sett ings" , p. 169 . The options relate d to home network are not available in applications before the settings in the Home media application have been configured. When you access the Home media applica tion for the first tim e, the setup wiza rd opens and helps you define the home ne twork settings for your device. To use the setu p wizard late r, in the Home med ia main view, select Options > Run wizard , and follow the instructions on the display. To connect a compatibl e PC to the home network, on the PC, you must install the related software. You get the software from the CD-ROM or DVD-ROM supplied with your device, or you can download it from the device su pport pages on t he Nokia website. Configure settings To configure the settings for home network, select Tools > Connectivity > Home media > Option s > Settings and from the following: 101 Home network
â Home access point â Sele ct Always ask if you want the device to ask for the home access point every time yo u connec t to the home ne twork, Create new to define a new a ccess point that is used automatica lly when you use the h ome network, or None . If your home network does not have WLAN security se tting s enab led, you get a security warning. You can continue and switch the WLAN security on later; or canc el defining the access point and first switch on the WLAN security. See "Access points" , p. 17 0 . â Device name â Enter a name for your device that is shown to the other compatible devices in the home netw ork. â Copy to â Select the memory where y ou want to save copied media files. Set sharing on and define content Select Tools > Connectivity > Home media > Share content and from the following: â Conten t sharing â A l l o w o r d e n y s h a r i n g m e d i a files with compa tible devices. Do not set content sharing on b efore you hav e configu red all the other settings. If you set content sharin g on, the other UPnP compatible devices in th e home network can view and copy your files you have selected for sharing in Images & video , and use playlists you have selected i n Music . If you do not want the other devices to access your files, set content sharing off. â Images & video â Select media files for sharing with other devices, or view the sharing status of images and v ideos. To up date the conten t of the folder, select Options > Refresh conten t . â Music â Select playlists for sharing with other devices, or view the sharing status and content of playl ists. To up date the content of th e folde r, select Options > Refresh content . View and share media files To share your media files with other UPnP compatible devices in the home network, set content sharing on. See "Set sharing on and define content" , p. 10 2 . If conte nt shar ing is off in y our device, you can still view and copy the media files stored in another home network device if it is allowed by the other device. Show media files stored in your device To show your images, videos, and sound clips in another home network device , such as a comp atible TV, do the following: 1. In Photos, select an image or a video clip; or in Gallery, select a sound clip, and Options > Show via home netwo rk . 102 Home network
2. Select a compati ble device in which the media fi l e i s s h o w n . T h e i m a g e s ar e s h o w n b o t h i n t he other home network device an d your device, and the video clips and sound clips are played only in the other device. 3. To stop sharing, select Options > Stop showing . Show media files stored in the other device To show media files that are stored on another home network device in your device (or in a compatible TV, for ex ample), do the following: 1. Press , and select Tools > Connectivity > Home media > Browse ho me . Your device starts the search of ot her compati ble device s. Device names start to appear on the display. 2. Select a device from the list. 3. Select the type o f media you want to view from the other devic e. The available file types depend on the fe atures of the other de vice. To search files with di fferent crit eria, sele ct Option s > Find . To sort the found files, select Option s > Sort by . 4. Select the media file or folder you wan t to view. 5. Press the scroll key, an d select Play or Show , and On dev ice or Via home network . 6. S e l e ct t h e d e v i c e i n w h i c h y o u w a n t t o s h o w t h e file. To ad just t he volu me when play ing a v ideo or soun d clip, scroll left or right. To stop sharing the media file, select Bac k or Stop (available when playing videos and music). Tip: You can print imag es saved in Photos through a home network wit h a UPnP compatible printer. See "Image print" , p. 95 . Content sh aring does no t have t o be switc hed on. Copy media files To copy or transfer media files from your device to another compatible de vice, such as a UPnP compatible PC, select a file in Photos and Options > Move and copy > Copy to ho me network or Move to home net. . Content sharing does not have to be switched on. To copy or transfer files from t he other device to your dev ice, sele ct a file in the ot her device and the desired copying option from the options list. Content sha ring does no t have to be swit ched on. Home synchronisation Synchronise media files You can synchronise the media fil es in your mobile device with those in your home device s. Make sure 103 Home network
that your mobile devic e is within range of your home WLAN and the home network has been set up. To set up home synchronisati on, select > Tools > Connectivity > Home media > Home sync , and complete the wizard. To run the wizard later, in Home synchronisation main view, select Options > Run wizard . To manually synchronise content in your mobile device wi th conten t in yo ur home devices, select Sync now . Synchronisation settings To change the synchronisation settings, select Options > Syn chronisat ion settin gs , and from the followin g: â Synchronisation â Set automatic or manual synchronisation. â Source devices â Select the so urce device s for synchronisation. â Memory in u se â View and select the memory used. â Memory manager â T o be i n f o r m e d wh en t h e device is running ou t of me mory, select Ask when full . Define incoming files To define and manage list s for incoming media files, press , and select Tools > Connectivity > Home media > Home sync > From home > Options > Op en . To define the ki nds of files you w ant to transfe r to your device, select them f rom the list. To edit the transfer settings, select Option s > Edit and from the following: â List name â Enter a new name for the list. â Shrink images â Shrink images to save memory. â Amount â De fine the maximum number or total size of th e files. â Starting with â Define the download order. â From â Define the date of the oldest file you want to download. Only available for imag es and video clips. â Until â Define the date of the latest file you want to download. Only available for imag es and video clips. For music files you can also specify the genre, art ist, album, and track you want to d ownload, and the source dev ice used for downlo ading. To browse files in a specific ca tegory in your dev ice, select a file type and Options > Show files . 104 Home network
To create a predef ined or cu stomised list for incoming files, select Options > New list . To change the priority order of the lists, select Option s > Change prio rity . Select the list you want to move and Grab , move the list to the new location, and select Drop to place it there. Define outgoing files To specify which types of file s in your de vice to synchr onise with your hom e media devices and how to synchronise them , press , and select Tools > Connectivity > Home media > Home sync > To home > Options > Open . Select the media type, Options , corresponding settings, and from the following: â Target devices â Select target devices to synchronise with or disa ble synchron isation. â Keep on pho ne â Select Yes to keep the media content in your de vice after synchroni sation. With images, you can also select wh ether to k eep the original or a scaled version of it in your device. Selecting the origi nal size consumes more memory. 105 Home network
Nokia Video Centre With Nokia Video Centre (n etwork service), you can download and stream video clips over the air from compatible internet vide o servic es usin g packet data or WLAN. You can also transfer video cl ips from a compa tible PC to your de vice an d view the m in Video Centre. Using packet data access po ints to do wnload vi deos may involve the transmission of larg e amounts of data through your service provi der's network. Contact your service provider for information about data transmission charges. Your devic e may ha ve predefin ed services. Service prov iders may prov ide free c ontent or charge a fee. Check the pricing in the service or from the service prov ider. View and down load vi deo clips Connect to video services 1. Press , a nd s elect Vide o cent re . 2. To connect to a service , select Video directory and the desired video service from th e service catalogue. Tip: You can ac cess the video services on the TV & video tile in the multimedia menu. View a video clip To browse th e content o f installed video services, sel ect Video feeds . To select a video clip, use the scr oll key. The co ntent of some vid eo servic es is divided into c ategories ; to browse video clips, select a category. To search for a video clip in the servi ce, select Video sear ch . Search may not be available in all services. To view information about the selected video clip, select Options > Video det ails . Some video clips can be st reamed over the air, but others must be first down loaded to your device. To download a video clip, select Options > 106 Nokia Video Centre
Download . Downl oads continue i n the background if you exit the applicatio n. The downloaded video clips are saved in My videos . To stream a video clip or view a downloaded one, select Options > Play . When th e video clip is pl aying, to cont rol the video player, us e the scroll key and the select ion keys. To adjust the volume, press the volume key. Schedule downloads Setting the a pplication to download video cl ips automatically may involve the transmission of large amounts of data through you r service provider's network. Contact your service provider for information a bout data tr a nsmission charges. To schedule an automatic do wnload for video clips in a service, select a category and Options > Schedule downloads . Video c entre automatically downloads new video clips daily at the time you define. To cancel scheduled downloads for a category, select Manual download as the download method. Video feeds The cont ent of th e installe d video service s is distributed usin g RSS fee ds. You can vi ew and manage your feeds in Video fe eds . To check your current f eed subscriptions, select Option s > Feed su bscripti ons . To refresh the content of all feeds, select Opti ons > Refres h feeds . To subscribe to new feeds, select Options > Add feed . Select Via Video directory to select a feed from the services i n the video direc tory, or Add manually to add a video feed add ress. To view the videos av ailable in a feed, scroll to it, and press the scroll key. To view information about a video, select Option s > Feed details . To update the c ontents of t he current feed, select Option s > Refresh list . To manage your account options for a given feed, if available, select Options > Manage account . To remove a feed from yo ur subscriptions, select Option s > Remove feed . You may not be able to remove some prein stalled feed s. My videos My videos is a storage place for all videos in the Video centre application. Yo u can list downloaded videos and video clips re corded w ith the dev ice camera in separate views. To open My videos, press , and select Video ce ntre > My videos . To open folders an d view video clips, u se the scro ll key. To contr ol the video p layer when th e video c lip 107 Nokia Video Centre
is play ing, use the scr oll key a nd the se lectio n keys. To adjust the volume, press the volume key. To turn sound on or off, select Options > Mu te or Unmute . To view file details, select Options > Video details . To play a downloaded video clip in the home network, s elect Op tions > Show via home network . Home network must be configured first. See "About h ome netw ork" , p. 100 . To move video clips to other folders in your device, select Options > Move to folder . To create a new folder, select New folder . To move video clips to a co mpatible mem ory card, select Options > Move to me mory card . Transfer videos from your PC Transfer your own video clips to V ideo centre f rom compatible devices using a compatible USB data cable. Video centre will di splay only the video clips which are in a format supported by your device. 1. To view your device on a PC as a mass memory device where y ou can transfer an y data files, make the connec tion with a U SB data cable. 2. Selec t Mass storage as the connection mode. A compatible memory card needs to be inserted in the device. 3. Select the vi deo clips you wa nt to copy from your PC. 4. Transfer the video c lips to E:\ My Videos in t he memory card. The transferr ed video clips appear in the My videos folder in Video centre. Video files in other folders of your device are not displayed. Video centre settings In the Video cent re main view, se lect Options > Settings and from the following: â Video service selection â Select the video servic es you want to ap pear in Vi deo centr e. You can also view the de ta ils of a video service. â Defaul t access po ints â Select Always ask or User-d efine d to choose the access points used for the data connection. Using packet data access points to downloa d files may involve the transmission of large am ounts of data through your servi ce provi der's netw ork. Cont act your servic e provide r for information about data transmission charges. 108 Nokia Video Centre
â Parental control â Activate the parental loc k for video services, if the service provider has set age limi ts for videos . â Thumbnails â Select whether to download and view thumbnail images in video feeds. 109 Nokia Video Centre
N-Gage About N-Gage N-Gage is a mobile gaming platform available for a range of compatible Nokia mobile devices. You can access N-Gage games, players, a nd content through the N-Gage appli cation on your device. You can also download games and access s o m e f e a t u r e s o n y o u r computer at www.n-ga ge.com. With N-Gage , you can do wnload and buy games, and play them by yourself or with f riends. You can download game trials to try ou t new games, and buy the ones you like. N-Gage also prov ides a way to keep in touch with other play ers, and to trac k and share your scores and other ga ming achievements. To use N-Gage, you need a GPRS or 3G conne ction. You can also use WLAN if available. You also need the connection to access on line features such as downloading games, ga me licenses, multip layer gaming, or chat. You also ne ed the connection to participate in online or multiplayer games, or to send messages to other players. All N-Gage services, where connection to N-Gage servers is required, such as game file downloading, game purch ase, onli ne ga mes, multiplayer gaming, creating a player name, chat, and messaging, involve transmission of large amounts of data. Your service provider w ill charge for data transfer. For more information abou t data transf er plans, contact your mobile service provide r. N-Gage views The N-Gage application consists of five different parts. Home opens when you start the N-G age applica tion. You can start playin g or resume the game yo u played last, che ck your current N-G age points, find more games, read your messages, or connect with an N-Gag e friend who is available to play. In My games, you can play and manage games you have downloaded to your device. You can instal l and delete games, rate and review gam es you ha ve played, and recomm end them to yo ur N-Gage friends. In My profile, you can manage your profile information and details, an d keep a record of your N-Gage gaming history. 110 N-Gage
In My friends, you can invite other N-Gage players to your friends list, and se e if th ey are onli ne and avail able to play . You c a n also send messages to your N-Gage friends. In Showroom, you can find information about N-Gage games, in cluding screenshots a nd player reviews. Yo u can also tr y out ne w games by downloading game trials, or enh ance your ga ming experience with game extras for g ames already on your devi ce. Get started Create a player name You can download, purchase, and play games without a play er name, but c reating one is recommended. A player name enables you to participate in the N-Gage commu nity, conn ect with other players, and share your gaming achievements , recommendat ions, and reviews. You also need a player name to transfer your profile details and N-Gage poin ts to another dev ice. When you start the N-Gage application and connect to the N-Gage service f or the first time, you are prompted to cre ate an N-Gag e player name. Yo u can connect to t he network, for examp le, by sett ing your availability by selecting Options > Set Availa bili ty > Avai lable to Pla y . If you alrea dy have an N-Ga ge p la y er n am e, se l ec t I have an account, and enter your user name and password to log in. To create a new player name: 1. Select Register New Account. 2. Enter your date of birth, desired player name, and password. If t he player name is already in use, N-Gage suggests a list of available similar names. 3. T o r e g i s t e r y o u r p l a y e r n a m e , e n t e r y o u r d e t a i l s , read and accept the terms and conditions, and select Register . You can also create your playe r name on the N-Gage website at www.n-gage.com. When you have c reated a play er name, e dit your settings and personal information in the private tab in My profile. Data transfer charges may apply f or player name creation on your dev ice. Start a game To start playing the ga me you last pla yed, go to Home, and select St art G ame . To resume a paused game, selec t Options > Resume Game . 111 N-Gage
Track your prog ress To view your current N-Ga ge poin ts, go to Home, and se lect Track My Progress . Play wi th fri ends To connect with N-Gage players on your friends list and to invi te them to a game, sele ct Play With Friends . N-Gage suggests a friend to play with based on your previous gaming history and the availability of you r N-Gage friends. To find a different friend to play with, select Options > View My Friends . This item is not displayed if your fri ends list is empty. See "Con nect with othe r players" , p. 113 . Play and manage games To play and manage the games downloaded and installed on your device, select My Games . The games are sorted by the la st-pl ayed da te wi th the most recent first. There are five possible types of games in My games: â Full games â These are games you have purchased with a full licence. There may be several licence types available, depending on the game and your region. â Trial games â These are full game files to which you have access only for a limited time or which have l imited co ntent. W hen the trial expires, y ou must purchase a licence to unlock the full game and continue. These games are marked with a trail banner. â Demo games â These are smaller sections of the game with only a very limited set of features and levels. These games are marked with a de mo banner. â Full expired â These are games that y ou have purchased with a limited lic ence, which is now expired. These games are marked with a clock and an arrow. â Not available â These are full games which you have removed, or whic h you have downloaded but the installation was not comple ted. These games are shown as unavailable in the games list. Also, games installed on the memory card are shown as unavail able when th e memory card has been removed. If a game extra has been downloaded but not fully installed, the respective game grap hic is also unavailable and the game cannot be played until the game extra has been installed. 112 N-Gage
Edit profile details To edit your public profile de tails, select Options > Edit Profile , open the public ta b, and select from the following: â Icon â Add an image to represe nt you. When you change the icon, N-Ga ge shows a list of all the images in your device Gallery that can be used as the icon. Se lect the i mage yo u want from the list, or use the search to find it. â Motto â Add a short personal message. To ed it the text, sele ct Change . â Favorite Game(s) â Enter the names of your favourite games. â Device Model â The model number of your device. This is defined automatically and cannot be edited. â Show Location â Select whether to display your city and country in your public profile. You can change your location in the private tab. After you update your profil e, log in to the serv ice with your play er name to ensure that the changes you made to your profile are synchronised wi th the N-Gage server. Connect with other players To connect with other N-Gage players and to manage your Friends list, go to My friends. You can search for a particular N-Gage player, invite them to your Friends list, and then see which of your friends are online and available to play. You can also send and receive privat e messages and game recommendations. Find and add friends T o i n v i t e a n N - G a g e p l a y e r t o y o u r f r i e n d s l i s t , e n t e r the player's player name to the Add a Frie nd field in the friends list. Add a message to the invitation, if needed. To send the invitation, select Send . If the player ac cepts the invitation, t he play er appears on your friends list. If you do not have any N- Gage friends and want to meet other players, go to N-Gage Arena at www.n- gage.com, and v isit the chatrooms and forums. View friend inform ation To view information about a friend, such as the friend's current N-Gage po ints o r the most rec ently played games, scroll to the player on your friends list. You must be online and connected to the N- Gage service to see the current on line status of your friends. The indica tor next to the player name shows the friendâÂÂs availability. You can send private messages to your N-Gage friends even if you are unavai lable or offline. 113 N-Gage
Sort the friends list To sort your friends by availability, player name, or N-Gage points, select Opt ions > Sort Friends By . Rate a player To r at e a p la ye r , s cr o l l t o t he p la y er on yo ur f ri e nd s list, and select Options > Rate Player . You can give a player a rating from one to five stars. The rat ing you give affects the playerâÂÂs rep utation in the community. Send messages In My Friends, you can exchange private messages with players in your Friends List . If your Friend is currently logged in to the N-Gage service, the Friend can respond to your message and you can chat one- on-one, similar to instant messaging. To view new messages received from an N-G age Friend, scroll to the frien d on your F riends list, an d select Options > View Message . Read messages are deleted automatically when y ou exit N-Gage . To view Game recommendations, select Options > View Reco mmendati on . Game recommendations are deleted auto matically a we ek after you rec eive them. To send a message to a N-Gage Friend, scroll to the Friend on your Friends List, and select Option s > Send Message . The maximum size of a Private Messa ge is 1 15 c haract ers . To send the message, select Submit . You need a GPRS, 3G, or wireless LAN connection to be able to use th e messaging feature. Data transfer charges may apply. For mo re information, contact your mobile service provider. N-Gage settings To change your N- Gage set tings, select Options > Edit Pro file and scroll to the Private tab. To edit the settings throughout the N- Gage application, select Options > N-Gage S ettings . Select from the following: â Player Name â You can e dit the Pl ayer Name only unti l you log in to the networ k for the first time. After that, y ou cannot edit it. â Personal Settings â You can define personal details, whi ch are not s hown in y our publi c profile, an d subscribe to the N- Gage newsletter. You can also define whether you want to receive notifications from your N-Gage F riends while you are playing games. â Connection Settings â You can allow N-Gage to connect to the network au tomatically w hen needed, and de fine your preferred access point and the data t ransfer limit that triggers an alert. 114 N-Gage
â Account De tails â Your purcha se preferences. When you purc hase a game, you are asked if you want to save your billin g details, including your credit card number, for faster purchasing in the future. 115 N-Gage
Messaging Only d evi ces th at hav e com pati ble f eatu res c an receive and display multimedia messages. The appearance of a message may vary dependin g on the receiving device. Messaging main view Press , and select Messaging (network service). To create a new message, select New message . Messaging contains the followin g folders: â Inbox â Received message s, except e-mail and cell broadcast messages, are stored here. â My folders â Organise your messages into folders. Tip: To avoid rewriting messages that you send often, use te xts in the Templates folder in My folders . You can al so create and save your own templ ates. â New mailbox â Connec t to you r remote mailbox to retrieve yo ur new e-mail messages, or view you r previously retrie ved e-mail messages offline. â Drafts â Draft messages that have not been sent are stored here. â Sent â The last messages that have been sent, excluding messages sent using Bluetooth connectivit y, are stored here. You can change the number of messages to save in this folder. â Outbox â Messages waiting to be sent are temporarily stored in the outbox, for example, when your devic e is outsid e network coverage. â Reports â You can request th e network to send you a delivery repo rt of the text message s and multimedia messages you have sent (network service). To enter and send servic e requests (also known as USSD commands), such as activation commands for network servic es, to your service provider, select Options > Service commands in the Messaging main view. Cell broadcast (network service) allows you to receive messages on various topi cs, such as weather or t raffic co nditions , from your service provider. For available topics and relevant topic numbers, contact your service provider. In the Messaging main view, select Option s > Cell broadcast . 116 Messaging
Cell broadcast messages cannot be received in UMTS networks. A packe t data connection may preven t cell broadcast reception. Write text Your device supports tradit ional text input an d predictive tex t input. With predicti ve text, you c an enter any letter with a single keypre ss. Predictive text input is based on a bu ilt-in dictionary to which you can add new words. When you w rite text , is displayed when you write text using traditional text input and when us ing p redic tive te xt inp ut. Traditional text input Press a number key ( 1 âÂÂ9 ) rep eatedly until the desired character appears. There are more characters available for a number key than are printed on th e key. If the next letter is loca ted on the same key as the present on e, wait un til the cursor appe ars (or scroll right to end the t ime-out period), and enter the letter. To insert a space, press 0 . To move the cursor to the next line, press 0 three times. Predictive text input With predicti ve input, you c an enter any letter w ith a single keypress. Predicti ve text input is b ased on a built-in dictionary to which you c an add n ew words. 1. To turn pred ictive text i nput on or o ff in the general settings, press , and select Tools > Settings > General > Personalisation > Langu age > Predictive text . 2. To write the desired word, press the keys 2 âÂÂ9 . Press each key only onc e for one lett er. For example, to write "Nokia" wh en the English dictionary is selected, press 6 for N, 6 for o, 5 for k, 4 for i, and 2 for a. The word suggest ion changes afte r each keypress. 3. When you finish writin g the word correctly, scroll right to confirm it, or press 0 to add a space. If the word is not correct, press * repeatedly to view the matching w ords the dictionary h as found one by one. If the ? character is shown after the word, the word is not in the di ctionar y. To add a word to the dictio nary, select Spell , enter the word using traditional text in put, and sele ct OK . The word is added to the dictionary. When the dictionary is full, a new word replaces the oldest added word. 117 Messaging
4. Start writing the next word. Tips on text input To insert a number in the lett er mode, pr ess and hold the desired number key. To switch betw een the different charac ter modes, press # . To delete a ch aracter, press C . T o de lete more tha n one character, press and hold C . The most common punctuat ion marks are available under 1 . To scroll th em through one by one, if you use traditional text input, press 1 repeatedly. If you use predictiv e text input, press 1 , and th en * repeatedly. To open a list of specia l characters, press and hold * . Tip: To select several special characters from the special characters list, press 5 after each highlighted cha racter. Change the writing language When you are writing text, you can change the writing languag e. For example, if you are writing text using a non-La tin alph abet and want to write Latin characters, such as e-mail or web addresses, you may need to change the writing language. To change the writing lang uage, select Op tion s > Writing language and a writing language tha t uses Latin characters. After changing the writin g language, for example, if you press 6 repeatedly to reach a specific charac ter, c hanging the wri ting l anguage gives you access to char acte rs in a diff erent or der. Edit text and lists To copy and past e text, wh ile pressin g and holding # , scroll lef t or right to highlight te xt. To copy th e text to the clipboard, while still holding # , select Copy . To insert the text in to a document, press and hold # , and sel ect Paste . To mark an item in a list , scroll to it, and press # . To mark multiple items in a list, press and hold # while you scroll up or do wn. To end the selection , stop scrolling, and release # . Write and send messa ges Press , and select Mess aging . Before yo u can create a multimedia message or write an e- mail, y ou must have th e correct connection settin gs in plac e. See "Define the e- mail settings" , p. 121 . 118 Messaging
The wireless network may limit the size of MMS messages. If the inserted picture exc eeds this limit the devi ce ma y make it smaller so that it can be sent by MMS. Check the size limit of e- mail messages with your service provider. If you attempt to send an e-mail message that exceeds the size limit of the e-mail server, the message is left in the Outbox folder, an d the devi ce attempts to resend it periodically. Send ing an e-mail requires a data connection, and continuous attempts to resend the e-mail may increase you r phone bill. In the Outbox folder, you can delete such a message, or move it to the Drafts folder. 1. Select New message > Message to send a text or multimedia message (MMS), Audio messa ge to send a multimedia message that includes one soun d clip, or E-mail to send an e- mail message. 2. In the To field, press the scro ll key to sele ct recipients or groups from co ntacts, or en ter the recipientâÂÂs pho ne number or e-ma il address. To add a semicolon ( ; ) that separates the recipients, press * . You can also cop y and paste the number or address from the clipboard. 3. In the Subje ct field, en ter the subje ct of the e- mail. To change the fields th at are visible, select Options > Message header fields . 4. In the message field, wri te the message. To insert a template or note, select Options > Insert > Insert text > Template , or Not e . 5. To add a media object to a multimedia message, select Options > Inser t content , the object type or source, and the desired object. To insert a business card, slide, note, or some other file to the message, select Options > Inse rt content > Insert other . 6. To capture an image or record a video clip or sound for a multimedia message, select Options > Insert > Inser t image > New , Insert video clip > New , or Insert sound clip > New . 7. To add an attachment to an e-mail, select Options and the attachment type. E-mail attachments are indicated by . 8. To send the me ssage, select Options > Send , or press the call key. Note: The message sent icon or text on your d e v i c e s c r e e n d o e s n o t i n d i c a t e t h a t t h e m e s s a g e i s received at the intend ed destination. 119 Messaging
Your device supports text messages beyond the limit for a single messag e. Longer message s are sent as two or more messa ges. Your service provider may charge accordingly. Ch aracters with accents or other marks, and characte rs fr om so me l angu age options, take up more space, and limit the num ber of characters that can be sent in a single message. You may not be able to send video cl ips that are saved in the MP4 file format o r that exceed the size limit of the wireless network in a multime dia message. Tip: You can c ombine images, video, soun d, and text to a p resentation and se nd it in a multimedia message. S tart to create a multimedia message, and select Op tions > Insert > Insert presentation . The option is shown only if MMS creati on mode is set to Guided or Free . See "Multimedia message settings" , p. 124 . Messaging inbox Receive messages Press , and select Messaging > Inbox . In the Inbox folder, indicates an unread text message, an unread multimedia message, an unread audio message, and data received through Bluetoot h connectivity. When you re ceive a message, an d 1 new message are shown in the standby mode. To open the message, select Sho w . To open a message in Inbox, scroll to it, and pre ss the scroll key. To reply to a received message, select Options > Reply . Multimedia m essages Important: Exercise caut ion when opening messages. Messages may conta in malicious software or otherwise be harmful to your device or PC. You may receive a notification that a multimedia message is waiting in the multimedia message centre. To start a packet data connec tion to retrieve the message to your device, select Options > Retrieve . When you o pen a mu ltimedia message ( ), you may see an image and a message. is shown if sound is included, or if video is inclu ded. To pl ay the sound or the v ideo, select t he indicator. To see the media ob jects that have been inclu ded in the multimedia message, select Opti ons > Objects . If the message in cludes a multimedia presentation, is displayed. To play the pr esentation, select the indicator . 120 Messaging
Data, settings, and web se rvice messag es Your device can recei ve many kinds of messages that contain data, such as business cards, ringing tones, operator logos, ca lendar entries, and e-mail notifications. You may al so receive setti ngs from your service provider or company information management department in a co nfiguration message. To save the data from the message, select Option s and the corresp onding option. Web service messages are notifications (for example, news headl ines) and may contain a text message or a link. For avail ability and subscription, contact you r se rvice provider. Message reader With Message reader yo u can l isten to text, multimedia, and audio messages and e-mail. To change the message reading settings in the Speech application, select Option s > Speech . See "Speech " , p. 159 . To listen to new messages or e-mail, in the standby mode, press and hold the left select ion key un til Message reader starts. To listen to messages from your Inbox or e-mail from your Mailbox, select a message and Opt ions > Listen . To stop the reading, press the end key. To pause and continue the reading, press the scrol l key. To skip to the next message , scroll right. To replay the current message or e-mail, scroll left. To skip to the previous messa ge, scroll left in the beginning of the message. To adjust the volume, scroll up or down. To view the cu rrent message or e-mail in text format witho ut the sound, select Options > View . Mailbox Define the e-mail settings Tip: To define your mailbox settings, press , and select Messa ging > Mailboxes . To use e-mail, you must hav e a valid internet acc ess point (IAP) in the device and define your e-mail settings correctly . See "Access points" , p. 17 0 . See "E-mail settings" , p. 125 . You must have a separate e-mail account. Follow the instructions given by your remote mailbox and internet service provider (ISP). If you select New mailbox in the Messaging main view an d have not s et up your e -mail accou nt, you 121 Messaging
are pro mpted to do so. T o start creati ng the e-mai l settings with the mailbox gu ide, select Start . When you creat e a new mailbox, the name you giv e to the mail box replaces New mailbox in the Messaging main view. You can have up to six mailboxes. Open the mailbox Press , and select Messaging and a mailbox. When you open t he mailbox, the d evice asks if you want to co nnect to th e mailbox ( Connect t o mailbox? ). To connect to your mailbo x and retrieve new e-mail headings or messages, select Yes . When you view messages online, you are continuousl y connected to a remote mailbox using a data connection. To view previous ly retrieved e-mail messages offline, select No . To create a new e-mail message, select New message > E-mail in the Messa ging main view or Options > Create mess age > E-mail in your mailbox. See "Write and send messages" , p. 118 . Retrieve e-mail messages Press , and select Messaging and a mailbox. If you are offline, select Op tions > Connect to start a connection to th e remote mailbox. Important: Exercise caut ion when opening messages. Messages may conta in malicious software or otherwise be harmful to your device or PC. 1. When you have an op en connection to a remote mailbox, select Option s > Retrieve e-mail > New to retrieve all new messages, Selected to retrieve only selected messages, or All to retrieve all messages from the mailbox. To stop retrieving messages, select Cancel . 2. To close the c onnection and view the e-mail messages offline, select Options > Disconnect . 3. To open an e-mail message, press the scroll key. If the e-mail message has not been retrieved and you are offline, you a re asked if you want to retrieve thi s message from the ma ilbox. To view e-mail attachmen ts, open the message, and select the attachmen t field indicated by . If the indicator is unava ilable, the messa ge has not been retrieved to the device ; select Op tions > Retrieve . To retrieve e-mail messa ges automatically, select Options > E-m ail settings > Automatic retrieval . See "Automatic retrieval settings" , p. 127 . 122 Messaging
Setting the device to retr ieve e-mail automatically may involve the tra nsmissi on of large amounts of data through your service provider's network. Contact your service provid er for information about data transmission charges. Delete e-mail messages Press , and select Messa ging and a mailbox. To delete the contents of an e-mail message from the device while stil l re taining it in the remote mailbox, select Opti ons > Delete . In Delete e- mail from: , selec t Phone only . The device mirrors the e-mail heading s in the remote mailbox. Although you delete the message content, th e e-mail headin g stays in your dev ice. If you want to remove the heading as well , you must first delete t he e-mail message fro m your remote mailbox, then make a connection from your device to the remote mailbox again to update the st atus. To delete an e-mail from th e device and the remote mailbox, select Opti ons > Delete > Phone and server . To cancel deleting an e -mail from the device and server, scroll to an e-mail that has been marked to be deleted during the next connection , and select Options > Restore . Disconnect from the mailbox When you are online, to end th e data connection to the rem ote mai lbox, sele ct Options > Disconnect . View messag es on a SIM c ard Press , and select Messa ging . Before you c an view S IM messages, you must copy them to a fo lder in yo ur device. 1. In the Messaging ma in view, selec t Options > SIM messages . 2. Select Options > Mark/Un mark > Mark or Mark all to mark messages. 3. Select Options > Cop y . A list of folders opens. 4. To start copying, select a folder and OK . T o view the messages, op en the f older. Messaging settings The settings may be precon figured in you r device, or you may receiv e them in a message. To enter settings manually, fill in all fields marked with Must be defined or an asterisk. Some or all message cent res or access points may be preset for yo ur device by you r servic e provide r, 123 Messaging
and you may not be able to change, create, edit, or remove them. Text message setti ngs Press , and select Messaging > Options > Settings > Text message . Select from the following: â Message cen tres â V iew a list of all text message cent res that hav e been d efined. â Message cen tre in use â Select which message centre to use to de liver text messages. â Character encoding â To use character conversion to another encoding syst em when available, select Reduced support . â Receive report â Select whether the netw ork sends delivery reports on your messages (network service). â Message validity â Select how long the message centre re sends your message if the first attempt fails (network service). If the message cannot be sent withi n the validity period, the message is deleted from the message centre. â Message sent as â Contact your service provider to learn if your message centre is able to convert t ext messages into these other formats. â Preferred connection â S elect the conn ection to use. â Reply via same centre â Select whether you want the reply message to be sent using the same text message ce ntre numbe r (network service). Multimedia m essage settings Press , and select Mess aging > Option s > Settings > Multimedia messa ge . Select from the following: â Image size â Define the size of the image in a multimedia message. â MMS creation mo de â If you select Gu ided , the device info rms you if yo u try to send a message that may not be supp orted by the reci pient. If you select Restricted , the de vice prevents y ou from sending messages that ma y not be supported. To include conten t in your messages with out notifications, select Free . â Access poin t in use â Select which access point is used as the pre ferred connec tion. â Multimedia retrieval â Se lect how you want to receive messages. To receive messages automatically in your home cellula r network, select Auto in home netw. . Outside your home cellular network, you receive a notification tha t there is a message to re trieve in the multimedia message centre. 124 Messaging
Outside your home cellular network, sending and receiving multimedia messa ges may cost you more. If you select Multimedia retr ieval > Always automatic , your devi ce autom atica lly makes an active pack et data co nnection to retrieve th e message both in and outside your home cellular network. â Allow anonym ous msgs. â Select whether you want to reject me ssages from an anony mous sender. â Receive adverts â Define whether you w ant to receive multimedia message advertisements. â Receive reports â S elect whe ther you want the status of the sent message t o b e s h o w n i n t h e l o g (network servic e). â Deny repo rt send ing â Select whether you want to prevent your de vice from sending delivery reports of received messages. â Message vali dity â Select for how long the message centre resends yo ur message if the fi rst attempt fails ( network service). If the message cannot be sent within this time period, the message is deleted from the message centre. E-mail setti ngs Manage mailboxes Press , and select Messa ging > Options > Settings > E-ma il . To select which mailbox you want to use to send e- mail, select Mailbox in use and a mai lbo x. To remove a mailbox and its messages from your device, select Mailboxes , scroll to the desired mailbox, and press C . To create a new mailbox, in Mailboxes , sele ct Option s > New mailbox . The name you give to the new mailbox replaces New mailbox in the Messaging main view. You can have up t o six mailboxes. Select Mailboxes and a mailbox to change the connection settin gs, user settings, re trieval settings, and aut omatic retrieval sett ings. Connection settings Press , and select Messa ging > Options > Setti ngs > E-mail > Mailboxes , a mailbox, and Connection se ttings . To edit the se ttings fo r the e -mail yo u receive, se lect Incoming e-mail , and from the following: â User name â Enter your user name given to you by your service provider. â Passwo rd â Enter your password. If you leave this field blank, you are prompted for the password when you try to connect to your remote mailbox. 125 Messaging
â Incoming mail server â Enter the IP address or host name of the mail server that receives your e-mail. â Access point in use â Select an internet access point (IA P). See "Access po ints" , p. 170 . â Mailbox name â Enter a name for the mailbox. â Mailbox typ e â Defines the e-mail protoc ol that your remote mailbox service provider recommends. The options are POP3 and IMAP4 . This setting cannot be changed. â Security â Select the security op tion used to secure the connection to the remot e mailbox. â Port â Define a port for the connection. â APOP secure login (for POP3 only) â Use with the POP3 proto col to encrypt th e sending of passwords to the remote e-mail server while connecting to the mailbox. To edit the settings for the e-mail you send, se lect Outgoing e-mail and from the following: â My e-mail address â E nter the e-ma il address given to you by your se rvice provid er. â Outgoing mail server â Enter the IP address or host name of the mail server that sends your e- mail. You may only be able to use t he outgoing server of your service provider. Contact your service provider for more information. The settings for User name , Password, Access point in us e , Security , and Port are si milar to the ones in Incoming e-mail . User settings Press , and select Mess aging > Option s > Settings > E-mail > Mailboxes , a mailbox, and User settings . Select from the following: â My name â Enter your own name. Your name replaces your e-mail address in t he recipientâÂÂs device when the recipientâÂÂs dev ice supports t his function. â Send message â Define how e-ma il is sent from your device. Sele ct Immediately for the d evice to connec t to the ma ilbox when you select Send message . If you se lect During next conn. , e - mail is sent when the connect ion to the remote mailbox is available. â Send copy to self â Sel ect whether you want t o s e n d a c o p y o f t h e e - m a i l t o y o u r o w n m a i l b o x . â Include sign ature â Select wh ether you want to attach a signature to your e-mail messages. â New e-mail alerts â Select whe ther you want to receive t he new e-mail indication s (a tone, a note, and a mail indicator) when new mail is received. Retrieval settings Press , and select Mess aging > Option s > Settings > E-mail > Mailboxes , a mailbox, and Retrieval settings . Select from the following: 126 Messaging
â E-mail retrieval â Define which parts of the e- mail are retrieved: Headers only , Size limit (POP3) , or Msgs. & attachs. (POP3). â Retrieval amount â Define how many new e- mail messages are retrieved to the mailbox. â IMAP4 folder path (f or IMAP4 only) â De fine the folder path for folder s to be subscribed. â Folder sub scriptions (for I MAP4 only) â Subscribe to other folders in the remote mailbox, and retrieve co ntent from those fo lders. Automatic retrieval settin gs Press , and select Messa ging > Options > Settings > E-ma il > Mailbox es , a mailbox, and Automati c retri eval . Select from the following: â E-mail notifications â To automatically retrie ve the h eadings t o your de vice whe n you receive new e-mail in your remote mailbox, select Auto-u pdate or Only in home netw. . â E-mail retrieval â To automatic ally retrieve the headings of new e-mail messages from your remote mailbox at de fined times, select Enabled or Only in home netw . . Define when and how often the messages are retrieved. E-mail notifications and E-mail retrieval cannot be active at the same time. Setting the device to retr ieve e-mail automatically may involve the tra nsmissi on of large amounts of data through you r service provider's network. Contact your service provid er for information about data transmission charges. Web service m essage setting s Press , and select Messa ging > Options > Setti ngs > Service message . Select whet her you want to receive service messages. If you want to set the device to automatically activate the browser and start a network co nnecti on to retrie ve conte nt when you receive a service message, select Downl oad messages > Automatically . Cell broadcast se ttings Check the available topics and related topic numbers with your service provider. Press , and select Messa ging > Options > Setti ngs > Cell broadcast . Select from the following: â Reception â Select whethe r you want to receive cell broadcast messages. â Language â Select the languages in which you want to receive messages: All , Selected , or Other . â Topic detection â Select whether the device automatically search es for new topic numbers, 127 Messaging
and saves the n ew numbers without a name to the topic list. Other settings Press , and select Messaging > Options > Settings > Other . Select from the following: â Save sent messages â Select whether you want to save a copy of the text messages, multimedia messages, or e-mail that you sen d to the Sent folder. â Number of saved msgs. â Define how many sent messages are saved to the sent folder at a time. When the limit is reached, the oldest message is deleted. â Memory in us e â Select the memory where you want to save your messag es. 128 Messaging
Make calls Voice calls 1. In the standby mode, e nter the ph one number, including the area code. To remove a number, press C . For international calls, press * twice fo r the character (which replaces the international access code), and enter t he country code, area code (omit the leading zero if necessary), and phone number. The character as a replacement for the internation al access code may not work in all regions. In this ca se, enter the international access code directly. 2. To make the call, press the call key. 3. To end the call (or to cancel the call attempt), press the en d key. Pressing the end key always ends a call, even if another applica tion is active. To make a call from Contacts, press , and select Contacts . Scroll to the desired name, or enter the first letters of t he name to the search field . To call the contact, press th e call key. If you have saved several numbers for a contact, select the desired number from the list, and press the call key. Options during a call To adjust the v olume during a call, use the volume key on the side of you r device . You can al so use the scroll key. If you have set the volume to Mute , select Unmute fi rst. To send an image or a vi deo clip in a multimedia message to the other participant of the call, select Option s > Send MMS (in UMTS networks only). You can edit the messag e and change the re cipient before sending. Press the ca ll key to send the file to a compatible device (network service). To put an active voice call on h old while answering another inco ming cal l, select Op tion s > Hold . To switch bet ween the ac tive and t he held call, select Option s > Swap . To send DTMF tone strings (for example, a password), select Option s > Se nd DTM F . Enter the DTMF string or search for it in Contacts. To enter a wait character (w) or a pa use character (p), press * repeatedly . To send the to ne, select OK . You can add DTMF tones to the p hone number or D TMF fields in a contact card. 129 Make calls
Tip: When you h ave onl y one acti ve voice call, to put the call o n hold, press the call key. To activate the call, press t he call key again. During an active call , to route the sound from the handset to the loudspeaker, select Option s > Activ ate lo udspeak er . If you have atta ched a compatible headset with B luetoot h connectivi ty, to route the sound to the headset, select Options > Activ ate han dsfree . To switch back to th e handset, select Options > Activate handset . To end an active call and repl ace it by answering the waiting call, select Opt ions > Replace . If you have several calls active, to end them all, select Options > End all calls . Many of the options that you can use during a voice call are network services. Voice and video mailboxes To call your voice or v ideo mailbox (ne twork services, video mailbox av ailable only in the UMTS network), press and hold 1 in the st andby mode, and se lect Voic e mail box or Video mail box . To change the phone num ber of your voice or v ideo mailbox, press , and select Tools > Util ities > Call mail box , a mailbox, and Optio ns > Change number . Enter the number (obtained from your network service pr ovider), and select OK . Answer or decline a call To answer the call, press the call key. T o m u t e t h e r i n g i n g t o n e o f a n i n c o m i n g c a l l , s e l e c t Silence . If you do not want to answer a call, press the end key. If you activate the Ca ll divert > Voice calls > If busy function in phone settin gs to forward calls, declining an incoming cal l also forwards the call. When you s elect Silence to mute the ring ing tone of an incoming call, you can send a text message without rejecting the call, informing the cal ler that you canno t answer t he call. Sele ct Options > Send message . To set up this opti on and write a standard text message, select Tools > Settings > Phone > Call > Reject call with message . Make a conference call 1. Make a call to the first part icipant. 2. To make a call to anot her participant, select Options > New call . The first call is pu t on hold. 130 Make calls
3. When the new call is answered, to join the first participant in the conferen ce call, select Option s > Conference . To add a new person to the call, repeat step 2, and select Option s > Conferen ce > Ad d to confere nce . Yo ur dev ice suppor ts confere nce calls between a maximum of six participants, including yourself. To have a private conver sation with one of the participants, select Options > Conference > Private . Select a par tic ipant, and sel ect Private . The conferen ce call is put on hold on your device. The other part icipants can still continue t he confer ence call. After you f inish the private conv ersation, select Options > Conferen ce to re turn to the co nference call. To drop a participant, select Options > Conferen ce > Drop participant , scroll to the participant, and select Drop . 4. To end th e active conferenc e call, press th e end key. 1-touch dial a phone number To activate the feature, press , and se lect Tools > Settings > Phone > Ca ll > Speed dialling . To assign a phone num ber to on e of the num ber keys (2-9), press , and select Tools > Utilitie s > Speed di al . Scroll to the key to which you want to assign the phone number, and select Options > Assign . 1 i s reserved for the voice or video mailbox, and for starting the web browser. To call in the sta ndby mode, press the assigned key and the call key. Call waiting You can answe r a call whil e you have an other call in p r o g r e s s . T o a c t i v a t e c a l l w a i t i n g , s e l e c t Settings > Phone > Call > Call waiting (network service). To answer the waiting call , press the call key. Th e first call is put on hold. To switch b etween t h e two calls, select Swap . To connect an incoming call or a call on hold w ith an active call and to disconne ct yourself from the calls, select Options > Transfer . To end th e activ e call, press the end key. To end both calls, select Option s > End all calls . Voice dialling Your device supports e nhanced voice commands. Enhanced voice commands are not depende nt on the speakerâÂÂs voice, so do not need to record voice 131 Make calls
tags in advance. The device creates a voice tag for the entries in c ontacts, and compares the spoken voice tag to it. The voice recognition in the device adapts to t he main userâÂÂs voice to recognise the voice commands better. The voice tag for a contact is the name or nickname that is saved on t he contact card. To listen to the synthesised voice tag, op en a contact card, and select Options > Voice tag details > Play voice tag . Make a call with a voice tag Note: Using voice tags may be difficu lt in a noisy environment or during an eme rgency, so you should n ot rely solely u pon voi ce dial ling i n all circumstances. When you use voice dia lling, the loudspeak er is in u s e. Ho l d t h e d e v i ce a t a short distance awa y when you say the voice tag. 1. To start voice diall ing, in the stan dby mode, press and hold the righ t selection key. If a compatible headset wit h the head set key is attached, press and hold the h eadset key to start voice dialling. 2. A short tone sounds, and Spea k now is displayed. Say clearly the name or nickname that is saved on the contact card. 3. The device plays a synthe sised voice tag for the recognise d contact in t he selected d evice language, and displays the name and number. If you do not w ant to ca ll that contac t, select Next within 2.5 seconds to view a list of other matches or Quit to cancel voice dialling. If several numbers are saved under the name, the device selects the default number if it has been set. If not, the devi ce sele ct s the first available number in a contact card. Make a video call When you make a v ideo call (network service), you can see a real-time, tw o-way vi deo between you and the recip ient of th e call. The live vid eo image, or video image ca ptured by th e camera in you r device is shown to the video call recipient. To be able to make a video call, you must have a USIM card and be in the coverage of a UMTS network. For availability of and subscription to video call services, contact your ne twork service provider. A video call ca n only be made between two parties. The v ideo c all ca n be ma de to a compatible mobile device or an ISDN client. Video calls cannot be made while another voice, v ideo, or data call is active. Icons 132 Make calls
You a re not rece iving video (t he recipient is not sending video or th e network is not transmittin g it). You have denied video se nding from your device. To send a still image instead, select Tools > Settings > Phone > Call > Image in video call . Even if you denied vi deo sending durin g a video call, the call is still charged as a video call. Check the pricing with your service provider. 1. To start a video c all, enter the p hone number in the standby mode, or select Contacts and a contact. 2. Select Options > Call > Vid eo ca ll . The second ary camera on th e front is used by default for video calls. St arting a video call may take a while. Waiting for video image is shown. If the call is not successful (for example, video calls are not supported by th e network, or the receiving device is not compatible), you are asked if you want to try a normal call or send a text or multimedia message instead. The video call is active when you see two video images, and hear the sound through th e loudspeaker. The call rec ipient may deny video sending ( ), in whic h case you only hear th e sound and may see a still image or a grey backgro und graphic. 3. To end the video call, p ress the en d key. Options during a video call To change between showing video or hearing only sound, select Options > Enabl e , or Disable and the desired option. To use the main camera to send video, select Option s > Use main camera . To switch back to the secon dary ca mera, select Options > Use second ary came ra . To take a snapshot of the vide o you ar e sending, select Opt ions > Send snapshot . Video sending is paused and the snapshot is shown to the recipient. The snapshot is not saved. Press Cancel to resume sending video. To zoom your image in or out, select Options > Zoom . To route the aud io to a compatible hea dset with Bluetooth connectivity atta ched to your device, select Options > Activate hands free . To route th e audio back to the loudspeaker of your device, select Option s > Acti vate h and set . To chang e the v ide o quality, select Options > Video preference . Normal quality is framerate 10 fps. Use Clearer detail for small, static details. Use Smoothe r moti on for moving images. To adjust the volume duri ng a video call, use the volume key on the side of the device. 133 Make calls
Answer or declin e a video call When a video call arrives, is displayed. To answer the video call, press the call key. Allow video image to be s ent to call er? is displayed. To start sending live video image, select Yes . If you do no t activate the video call, yo u only hear the sound of the caller. A grey scre en replac es the video image. To replace the grey sc reen with a still image cap tured by the camera in your device, sele ct Tools > Settings > Phone > Ca ll > Image in video c all . To end the video call, p ress the en d key. Video sharing Use video sharing (network service) to send live video or a video clip from y our mobile devi ce to another compatible mobile device during a voice call. The loudspeaker is act ive when y ou activate V ideo sharing. If you do not want to use the loudspea ker for the voice call while you share video, y ou can also use a compatible headset. Video sharing requir ements Video sharing requires a UMTS connection . For more informat ion on t he se rvice, UMTS network availability, and fees associated with using this service, contact your service provider. To use video sharing you must do the following: â Ensure tha t your devi ce is set up for person-to- person connections. â Ensure you have an active UMTS connection and are within UMTS network c overage. If you move outside the UMTS network du ring a video sharing session, the sharing stop s while your voice call continues. â Ensure that both the sender and recipient are registered to the UMT S network. If you in vite someone to a sharing session and the recipientâÂÂs device is not within UMTS network coverage, does not have video sharing installed, or person- to-person conn ections set u p, the recipi ent does not receive invi tations. You receive an error message that indicate s that the re cipient canno t accept th e invitati on. Settings To set up v ideo sharing , you need person -to-perso n and UMTS connection settings. 134 Make calls
Person-to-person co nnection settings A person-to- person conn ection is also known as a Session Initiation Protocol (SIP) connection. The SIP profile settings must be configu red in your device before you can use video sharing . Ask your service provider for the SIP prof ile settings, and save them in your device. Your serv ice provider may send you the settings or give you a list of the needed parameters. To add a SIP address to a contact card: 1. Press , and select Contacts . 2. Open the contact card (or start a new card for that person). 3. Select Options > Add detail > Share video . 4. Enter the SIP address in the format username@domainname (you ca n use an IP address instead of a domain name). If you do not know the SIP address for the contact, you can use t he phon e number of the recipient, including the country code, to share video (if supported by the network service provider). UMTS connection settings To set up y our UMTS conne ction: â Contact your servic e provid er to establish an agreement for you to use t he UMTS network. â Ensure that your devi ce UMTS access point connection settings are confi gured properly. Share live video or video clips During an acti ve voic e call , select Options > Shar e video : 1. To share live video du ring the call, select Live vide o . To share a video clip, select Recorded clip and the clip you wa nt to share. You may need to convert th e video clip into a suitable format to be able to share it. If Clip must be converted for sharing. Continue? is shown, select OK . 2. Your device sen ds the invitation to th e SIP address. If the recipient has several SIP addresses or phone numbers including the country code saved in Contacts, select the desired address or number. If the SIP add ress or phone nu mber of th e recipien t is not available, enter the address or nu mber of th e recipien t including the country code, and select OK to send the in vitation. Sharin g begin s automa ticall y when the r ecipie nt accepts th e invit ation. Options during video sharing t o z o o m t h e v i d e o ( a v a i l a b l e f o r s e n d e r o n l y ) 135 Make calls
to adjust the brig htness (available for sender only) or to mute or unmute the microphone or to switch the lo udspeaker on and off to switch to full sc reen mode (available for receiver only) 3. To end the sharing session, select Stop . To end the voice call, p ress the end ke y. When you end the call, video sharing also ends. To save the live video you shared, select Save when prompted. The shared v ideo is saved in Photos. If you access other appl ications whil e you are sharing a video clip, the sha ring is paused. To return to the vide o sharing vi ew and to continue sharing, in the ac tive stan dby mode, select Options > Continue . Accept an invi tatio n You cannot receiv e invitations when yo u are outside UMTS network coverage. When someone sends you a video sharing invitation, your devic e ri ngs and the sender's name or SIP address are displayed. To accept the invitati on, select Accept . To reject the invitation, select Reject , or press the end key. Pressing the end key also e nds the vo ice call. The sender receiv es a message that you rejecte d the invita tion. When you receive a v ideo clip, to mu te the soun d of the clip, select Mute . To end video sharing, select Stop . Video sharing also ends if the active voice call ends. Log The log stores information about the communication history of the device. The device registers missed and received calls only if the network suppo rts these func tions, the device is switched on, and within the network service area. Recent calls Press , and select Tools > Log . To view missed, received , and dialled voice calls, select Recent calls . The device registers missed and received calls only if the network supports t hese functions, the device is sw itched on , and within the network service area. To clear all recent call lists, select Option s > Clea r recent calls . To clear one of the call registers, open the register you want to erase, and sele ct Options > Cl ear list . To clear an individual event, open a register, scroll to the event, and press C . 136 Make calls
Call duration Press , and select Tools > Log . To view the ap proximat e durati on of received and dialled calls, select Cal l duration . Note: The actual invoice fo r calls and services from your servic e provider may vary, depe nding on network features, rounding off for bill ing, taxes, and so forth. To clear call duration timers, select Options > Clear timers . For this you need the lock c ode. Packet data Press , and select Tools > Log . To check t he amount of data sent and rec eived during packet data connections, select Packet data . For example, you may b e charged for your packet data connections by the amount of data sent and received. Monitor all communication events Press , and select Tools > Lo g > Recent calls . Icons in the log are as follows: Incoming Outgoing Missed communicat ion events To open the general log where you can monitor all voice calls, text messages, or data and wireless LAN connections registered b y the device, scroll right . Subevents, such as a text message sent in more than one part and packet data conne ctions, are logged as one communi cation eve n t. Connections to your mailbox, multimedia me ssaging centre, or web pages are shown as pa cket data conne ctions. To add an unkn own phone number from the log to your contacts, select Opt ions > Save to Contacts . To filter the log, select Opt ions > Filter and a filter. To erase the contents of the log, recent calls register, and messagin g delivery reports permanently, sele ct Options > Clear log . Selec t Yes to confirm. To remove a single event from one of the recent calls logs, press C . To set the log duration, select Options > Setti ngs > Log duration . If you select No log , all the log co ntents, rece nt calls registe r, and messaging delivery re ports a re permanently dele ted. Tip: In th e details view, you can copy a phone number to the clipboard, and paste it into a text message, for example. Select Options > Use number > Copy . 137 Make calls
To view how much data is transferred and how long a certain pa cket da ta conne ction lasts, scroll to an incoming or outgoing event indicat ed by Pack. , and select Options > View details . 138 Make calls
Internet calls About internet calls With the internet c all serv ice (network service), you can make and receiv e calls over the int ernet. Internet calls can be established between computers, between mobi le phones, and between a VoIP device and a traditional telephone. To be a ble to use the serv ice, you must subscribe to the service, and have a user account. To make or receive an internet call, you must be in the service area of a wirele ss LAN, and connected to an internet call service. Activate internet calls To make or receive inte rnet calls, contact your service provider to re ceive the internet call connection set tings. When th e settings have been installed, a new tab for internet calls appears in Contacts . To connect to an internet call serv ice, your device must be in a network service area. 1. To acti vate your inte rnet call service, open Contacts . 2. Scroll to the intern et calls tab, and select Options > Activate se rvice . To search for available wireless LAN connections, select Options > Search for WLAN . Tip: When you have activa ted an internet call s e r v i c e , y o u c a n m a k e a n i n t e r n e t c a l l f r o m a l l applications where you can make a regular voice call. Make internet calls When you have activated th e int ernet call feature, you can make an internet call from all applications where you can make a regular v oice call, such as Co n t a c t s o r th e L o g . F o r e xa m p l e , i n C o n t a c t s, s c r o l l to the desired co ntact, and select Option s > Call > Internet call . To make an internet call in th e standby mod e, enter the phone number or intern et address, and press the call key. T o m a k e a n i n t e r n e t c a l l t o a n i n t e r n e t a d d r e s s t h a t does not start wi th a digit, press any number key when the device is in the stan dby mode, then p ress # for a few seconds to clear the display and to 139 Internet calls
switch the device from the numbe r mode to the letter mo de. Ente r the inte rnet address, and press the call key. Blocked cont acts Blocked contacts are pr evented from se eing your online status. To add contacts to your blocked contacts list, select the contact and Op tions > Block co ntact . To unblock a contact , scroll to it, and sele ct Options > Unbl ock . When yo u unblo ck a contact , you allow the contact to see your online status. To see your blocked con tacts, open Contacts . Scroll to the internet calls tab, and select Op tions > View blocked list . Manage internet call services To view or edit int ernet communication settings, select Connectivity > Net settings and from the following: â Add new service â to add a new internet call service â Advanced settings â t o v i e w o r e d i t a d va n c e d call settings Internet call settings To view or edit intern et call settings, select Options > Co ntacts . Scroll to the internet c alls tab, and se lect Op tions > Settings . Select from the following: â Service connectivity â Select the destination settings for inte rnet call connec tivity, and edit destination details. To change a destination, sc roll to the service, and select Change . â Availability requests â Select whether to automatically accept all incoming presence requests with out a con firmation query. â Service information â To vi ew techn ical information about th e selected servic e. â Advanced settings â Set adva nced settin gs for the service, such as security settings. 140 Internet calls
Contacts (phonebook) In Contacts, you can sa ve and update contact information, such as ph one numbers, home addresses, or e-mail addresses of your con tacts. You can add a personal ringing tone or a thumbnail image to a contact card. Yo u can also create contact groups, which allow you to send text messages or e-mail to many recipients at the same t ime. Save and edit name s and numbers 1. Press , and select Contacts > Options > New c ont act . 2. Fill i n the fi elds that yo u want, and select Done . To edit co ntact ca rds, scro ll to a contact, and select Option s > Edit . You can also sear ch for the desired contact by en tering the first letters of t he name to the search fie ld. To attach an image to a cont act card, open the contact card, and select Opti ons > Add image . The image is shown when the contact calls. Manage names and numbers To ad d a cont act to a g roup, sel ect Option s > Add to group (shown only i f you hav e created a group) . To check to which groups a cont act belon gs, sele ct the conta ct and Options > Belongs t o groups . To delete a c ontact card, se lect a card, and press C . To delete several contact cards at the same time, select Options > Ma rk/Unmar k to mark the desired contact cards, and press C to delete. To send co ntact inform ation, select a c ard, Option s > Send , and the desired option. To listen to the voice ta g assigned to the contact, select a co ntact card an d Options > Voice tag details > Play voice tag . Default numbers and addresses Press , and select Cont acts . You can assign default numbers or addresses to a contact ca rd. In this way if a contact has seve ral numbers or addresses, you can easily call or send a 141 Contacts (phonebook)
message to the co ntact to a ce rtain number or address. The d efault numbe r is also used in voice dialling. 1. In the contacts list , select a contact. 2. Select Option s > Defaults . 3. Select a defaul t to which y ou want to add a number or an address, and select Assign . 4. Select a number or an a ddress you want to set as a default. The default number or addre ss is underlined in the contact card. Add ringing tones for contacts Press , and select Contacts . To define a ringing tone for a contact or a contact group: 1. Press the scroll key to open a contact card or go to the groups list, and select a conta ct group. 2. Select Option s > Ringing tone . 3. Select the rin ging tone you want to use . When a contact or group member c alls you, the device plays the selected ringing tone (if th e callerâÂÂs p ho n e n u m b e r i s s en t w i t h t h e ca l l a n d y o u r de v i c e recognises it). To remove the rin ging tone, select Default tone from the list of ringing tones. Copy contacts When you o pen Cont acts for the first time, the device asks if you want to copy names and numbers from the SIM card to y our device. To start copying, select OK . If you do not want to copy the SIM contacts to you r device, select Cancel . The device ask s if you want to view the SIM cont acts in the con tacts directory. To view the contact s, select OK . Contacts opens, and you can see names stored on your S IM card marked with . SIM services For availability and information on using SIM card services, contact your SIM ca rd vendor. This ma y be the service provider or other v endor. SIM contacts To add the names and numbers stored on the SIM card to the co ntacts li st in Contacts, select Options > Settings > Conta cts to dis play > SIM memory . You can add and edit S IM contacts, or call them. 142 Contacts (phonebook)
The numbers you save in Contacts are not automa tically sa ved to your SI M card. To save numbers to the SIM card, in Contacts, select a contact and Options > Copy > SIM memory . Fixed dialling To restrict calls from your devi ce to s elec ted pho ne numbers, in Contacts, select Options > Fi xed dial contac ts . You need your PIN2 code to activate and deactivate fixed dialling or edit your fixed dialling contacts. When fixed dialling is activated, calls may be possible to the official eme rgency number programmed into your device. To view the list of fixed dialling numbers, select Option s > SIM numbers . This option is only shown if supported by your SIM card. To add new numbers to th e fixed dialling list, select Option s > New SIM contact . When you use fixed dialling, packet data connections are not possibl e, except wh en sending text messages over a pack et data connect ion. For this, the me ssage centre nu mber and the re cipientâÂÂs phone number must be i ncluded on the fixe d dialling list. Manage contac t groups Create con tact groups 1. In Contacts, scroll right to open the grou ps list. 2. Select Options > Ne w gr oup . 3. Write a name for the grou p or use the default name, and s elect OK . 4. Select the group and Option s > Add members . 5. Scroll to a con tact, and press the scroll key to mark each contact you want to add. 6. Select OK . To rename a group, select Options > Rename , enter the n ew name, and select OK . Remove members from a group 1. In the grou ps list, sele ct th e gro up you want to modify. 2. Scroll to the c ontact, and select Options > Remove from group . 3. To remove the contact from th e group, select Yes . 143 Contacts (phonebook)
Media folder RealPlayer With RealPlayer, you can pl ay video clips or stream media files over the air without saving them to the device first. RealPlayer supports files wi th extensions such as . 3gp, .mp4, or .rm. However, RealPlay er does not necessarily support all file formats or all the variations of file formats. Play v ide o cli ps Press , and select Applic ations > Media > RealPlayer . To play a saved media file, select Video cli ps , a clip, and Play . To list previously played files, in the application main view, select Recently pl ayed . To adjust the volume, u se the volume key. After you select a media file, select Options and from the follo wing: â Send â Send a file using a multimedia message, e-mail, or other conne ction methods, such as Bluetooth connectivit y. â Use video â Assign a video to a contact or set it as a ringing tone. â Mark/Unm ark â Mark items in the list to send or delete mul tiple it em s at the same time. â View details â View details of th e selected item, such as format, re solution, and duration. â Settings â Edit the settin gs for video playb ack and streaming. Stream content over the air Many service pr oviders require you to use an internet access point (IAP ) for your default acc ess point. Other service prov iders allow you to use a WAP access point. In RealPlayer, yo u can on ly open an rtsp:// URL address. However, RealPlayer plays a .ram file if you open an HTTP link to it in a browser. To stream content over th e air (network service), in RealPlayer or Photos, sele ct a streami ng link saved in the Streaming link s folder. You can also receive a streaming link in a text messa ge or multimedia message, or open a link on a web page. Before live content begins stre aming, your devi ce connects to 144 Media folder
the site an d starts l oading the content. The conten t is not saved in your device. Real Play er s ett ings Press , and select Appl icatio ns > Me dia > RealPlaye r . You may receive RealPlayer settings in a special message from the se rvice provid er. For more information, contact yo ur service provider. Select Options > Settin gs and from the following: â Video â Select whether v ideo clips are played i n f u l l s c r e e n o r i n t h e n o r m a l v i e w , a n d w h e t h e r the clips are automatic a lly repeated after they finish playing. â Streaming â Select whethe r to use a proxy server, change the default access point, and set the port range used when connecting. Contact your serv ice pr ovider for the correct settings. Advanc ed settings To edit th e advanced se ttin g s, in the settings view, select Streaming > Network > Options > Advanced settings . To select the ba ndwidth used for a network, select the network setting an d the desired value. To edit the bandwidt h yourself, sele ct User defined . Adobe Flash Player Press , and select Applica tions > Media > Flash Player . Use Adobe Flash Player to view, play, and interact with compatible flash files made for mobile devices. To open a flash file, select it, and Open . Licences To view digital rights licences, press , and select Applicati ons > Me dia > Licences . Digital rights management Content owners may use different types of digi tal rights management (DRM) te chnologi es to protect their intel lectual pro perty, including copyrights. This device uses various types of DRM software to access DRM-pr otected con tent. With this d evice you can access co ntent pro tected with W MDRM 10, OMA DRM 1.0, and O MA DRM 2.0. If c ertain DRM software fails to protect the con tent, content owners may ask that such DRM software's ability to access new DRM- protected content be revo ked. R evoca tion ma y also prevent rene wal of such DRM-p rotected con tent already in your device. Revocation of suc h DRM software does not affe ct the use of c ontent protected with other ty pes of DRM or the use of non- DRM-protecte d content . 145 Media folder
Digital rights manag ement (DRM) pro tected co ntent comes with an associat ed activation key that defines your rig hts to use the c ontent. If your device has OMA DR M-protected content, to back up both the activati on keys and the conte nt, use the backup featu re of Nokia Nserie s PC Suite.Ot her transfer me thods may not tran sfer the acti vation key s which nee d to b e rest ored with the content for you to be a ble to continue the use of OMA DRM-protecte d content aft er the device memory is formatted. Yo u may also need t o restore the activation keys in case th e files on your device get corrupted. If your device has WMDRM-prot ected content, bot h the activation keys and the c ontent will be lost if th e device memory is formatted. You may also lose the activation keys and the conten t if the files on your device get corrupted. Losing the act ivation ke ys or the conten t may limit your ability to use the same content on your device again. For more informat ion, con tact y our ser vice provider . Some activation keys may be connected to a specific SIM card, and th e protected content can be acce ssed only if the SIM card is inserted in th e device. In the main vie w, select from th e followi ng: â Valid licenc es â View licences that are connected to media files or w hose validity period has not begun. â Invalid licences â View licences that are not valid; the time period for using the media file is exceeded or there is a prote cted media file in the device but no connected activati on key. â Not in use â Vi ew li cence s th at hav e no m edia files connected to them in th e device. To buy more usage time fo r a media file, select an invalid licence an d Options > Get new licence (web service messages must be enabled). See "Web service message settings", p. 127 . To view details of an activation key, scroll to it, and press the scroll key. Recorder Press , and select Appl ications > Media > Recorder . With Recorder, you can record voice memos and telephone conversations. The recorder cannot be used when a data call or GPRS connection is active . To record a te lephone co nversation, open Recorde r during a voice call. B oth parties hear a tone every 5 seconds during recording. 146 Media folder
Time management Clock Alarm clock Press , and select Appl icatio ns > Cl ock . To view your acti ve and in active alarms, scroll right to the alarm tab. To set a new alarm, select Option s > New alarm . Define the repe tition, if needed. When an alarm is active, is shown. To turn off the sounding alarm, select Stop . To stop the alarm for a certain time period, select Snooze . If your device is switched off when an alarm is due, your devi ce switches i tse lf on and starts sounding the alarm tone. Tip: T o d e f i n e t h e t i m e p e riod after which the alarm sounds again when you set it to snooze, select Options > Settings > Alarm sn ooze time . To cancel an alarm, select Options > Remove alarm . To change the time , date, and clock t ype settings, select Options > Settings . To automatically update th e time, date, an d time zone information to your device (network service), in the settin gs, select Automatic time update > On . World clock Press , and select Applica tions > Clock . To view the time in diffe re nt locations, scroll rig ht to the world clock tab. To add locatio ns to the list, select Options > Ad d location . You can add a maximum of 15 locations to the list. To set your current location , scroll to a location, and select Options > Set as current location . The location is displayed in the clock main view, and the time in your device is changed according to the selected lo cation . Ensure that th e time is correct and matches your time zone. Calendar Create a calendar entry Press , and select Applica tions > Calendar . 147 Time manag emen t
1. To add a new calendar entry, scroll to the desired date, and select Options > New entry and one of the following: â Meeting â to remind you of an appointment that has a specific date and time â Meeting request â to create and send a new meeting requ est. You must hav e a mailbox set up for send ing requests. See "Manage mailboxes" , p . 125 . â Memo â to write a general en try for a day â Anniversary â to remind you of birthdays or special dates (e ntries are repeated annually) â To-do â to remind you of a task that must be done by a specific date 2. Fi l l i n t h e f i e l d s . T o s e t a n a l ar m, s e l e c t Alarm > On , and enter the alarm time and date. To add a description for an entry, select Options > Add description . 3. To save the entry, se lect Done . Tip: In the day, week, or mon th cale ndar view, press any key ( 1 -0 ). An appointment entry opens, and the c haracters you en ter are adde d to th e subj ect fie ld. In the to -do vie w, a to-do note entry open s. When the calend ar alarm sounds, select Silence to turn off the soun d. The reminder te xt stays on t he screen. To stop the calendar alarm, select Sto p . To set the alarm to snooze, select Snooze . Tip: To define the ti me period a fter which th e calendar alarm sounds again when you set it to snooze, press , and select Applications > Calen dar > Opti ons > Settings > Alarm sn ooze time . Calendar views To change the starting day of the week or the view that is shown when you open the calenda r, select Options > Settings . In the settings, you can also modify the calendar alar m tone, alarm snooze time, and the title for t he week view. To go to a certain da te, select Options > Go to date . To jump to today, press # . To switch be tween the mo nth view , week view , day view, and to-do v iew, press * . To send a calendar note to a compatible device, select Options > Send . If the other device is not compa tible with Coordinated Universal Time (UTC), the time 148 Time manag emen t
information of received ca lendar entries may not be displayed correctly. Manage calendar entries To delete several events at a time, go to the month view, an d select Options > Delete entry > Before date or All entries . To mark a task as completed, scroll to it in the to-d o view, a nd sele ct Options > Mark as done . You can synchronise your calenda r with a compatible PC using Nokia Nseries PC Suite. When creating a c alendar e ntry, set the desired synchronisatio n option. 149 Time manag emen t
Office folder Quickoffi ce With the Q uickoffice applicatio ns, you can view .doc, .xls, .ppt, .pps, and .txt do cuments and download software. Not all file formats or features are supported. Apple Macintosh is not supported. To view a fil e, press , and select Applications > Office > Quickof fice . Select the locat ion from which you want to view files, browse t o the desired folder, and se lect a fi le. The fil es open in the respective applications depending on the file format. To download software using Quickmanager, in the main view, select Quickmanager ; or, when browsing files, scroll to the Quick manager tab. If you experience problems with the Quickoffice applications, visit www.quickoffice.com , or send e- mail to support S60@quickoffic e.com. Quickword With Quick word, you can view Microsoft Word documents with your device. Quickword supports docu ments saved in .doc and .txt f ormats create d with Micro soft Word 97, 2000, XP, and 2003. No t all variations or featu res of the file formats are supported. To upgrade to a version of Quickword that supports editing, when you have a file open, select Options > Up dates and upgrades . The upgrade is ch argea ble. Quicksheet With Quicksheet, y ou can view Microsoft Excel files with your device. Quicksheet supports spread sheet files in .xls format created wit h Microsoft Exce l 97, 2000, XP, or 2003 . Not all variations or features of the file formats are supported. To upgrade to a version of Qu icksh eet that s upports editing, when you have a file open, select Options > Up dates and upgrades . The upgrade is ch argea ble. Quickpoint With Quickpoint, you can vie w Microsoft PowerPoint presen tations with your device. 150 Office folder
Quickp oint supports pres entations saved in .ppt and .pps formats create d with Microsoft PowerPoint 2000, XP, an d 2003. Not all variation s or featu res of the file formats are supported. To upgrade to a version of Quickpoint that supports editing, when you have a file open, select Option s > Updates and upgrades . The upgrade is chargeable. Quickmanager With Quickmanager, you can download software, including updates, u pgrades, and othe r useful applications. You can pay for the downloads b y phone bill or credit card. Notes Press , and select Appl icatio ns > Off ice > Notes . To write a note, start enterin g the text. The note editor opens automati cally. To open a note, scroll to it, and select Open . To send a note to other compatible de vices, select Option s > Send . To delete a no te, press C . Tip: To delete several notes, select Options > Mark/Unmar k to mark the notes, and press C . To synchronise or to define synchronisati on settings for a note, select Option s > Synchronisatio n > Start or Settings . Adobe reader Press , and select Applica tions > Offic e > Adobe PDF . With Adobe reader, you can rea d PDF documents wi th yo u r d ev i ce ; s e ar ch f o r t ex t i n t he do c um en t s; modify settings, such as zoom level and page views; and send PDF files using e-mail. Converter Press , and select Applica tions > Offic e > Converter . With Converter, you can convert mea sures from one unit to another. The converter has limit ed accuracy, and rounding errors may occur. 1. In the Type fiel d, select the mea sure you want to use. 2. In first Unit field, select the unit from which you want to convert. 151 Office folder
3. In the next Un it field, selec t the unit to which you want to convert. 4. In the first A mount field, ente r the value you want to convert. The other Amount field change s automat ically to sho w the conve rted value. Convert currency Select Type > Currency . Before you can make currency conversions, you must select a base currency and add exchange rates. The default base currency is Home . The rate of the base currency is alway s 1 . 1. Select Option s > Currency rates . 2. The default n ame for the curre ncy items is Foreign . To rename a currency, select Options > Rename currency . 3. Add the exchange rates for the currencies, and press Done . 4. In the sec ond Unit field, select the currenc y to which you want to conve rt. 5. In the first A mount field, ente r the value you want to convert. The other Amount field change s automat ically to sho w the conve rted value. To change the base currency, select Options > Currency rates , a currency and Options > Set as base currency . When you cha nge base curre ncy, you must enter new exchange rates because all previously set exchange rates are cleared. Zip manag er Press , and select Appl ications > Office > Zip . With Zi p manager, you can crea te new archive files to store compressed .zip file s; add single or multiple compressed files or director ies to an ar chiv e; set, clear, or change the archive password for protected archives; and change setting s, such as compression level and file na me encoding. 152 Office folder
Applications folder Calculator Press , and select Appl icatio ns > Cal culator . This calculator has limited accuracy and is designed for simple calculations. To make a calculation, ente r the first number of t he calculation. Select a funct i on such as add or subtract from the function map. Enter the second number of the ca lcul atio n, and sel ect = . The calculator performs operations in the order they are entered . The result of the calcu lation remains in the ed itor field and can be used as th e first number of a new calculation. To save the results of a calculation, select Opti ons > Memory > Sa ve . The saved result replaces the previously st ored result in the memory . To retrieve the results of a calcul ation from the memory and use them in a calculation, select Option s > Memory > Recal l . To view the last saved result, select Options > Last result . Exiting the Calculator application or switching off the de vice does not clear the memory . You can recall the last save d result the next ti me you open the Calculator application. Application manager With Application manager, you ca n see the software packages installed in yo ur device. You can view details of installed applications, remove applications, and define installation settings. Press , and select Applica tions > App. mgr. . You can install two type s of applications and software to your device: â J2ME applications based on Java technology with the extension . jad or .jar â Other applications and software suitable for the Symbian operating system with the extension .sis or .sisx Only install software spec ificall y desig ned f or you r device: Nokia N79. Softwa re provide rs will often refer to the official mode l number of this product: N79-1. 153 Applications folder
Install applicatio ns and software You can transfer installa tion files to you r device from a compatible co mputer, dow nload them during browsing, or receive them in a multimedia message, as an e-mail a ttachment, or using other connectivity methods, su ch as Bluetooth connectivity. You can use Nokia App lication Insta ller in Nokia PC Suite to install an a pplication to your device. Icons in Appli cation manager indicate the following: .sis or .sisx application Java application application not fully installed application installed in the memory card Important: Only install and use applications and other software from trusted sources, such as applica tions that are Symbian Sig ned or have passed the Java Verified testing. Before installation , note the following: â To view the applicatio n type, versi on number, and the supplier or manufacturer of the application, select Options > View det ails . To display the security ce rtificate deta ils of the application, in Detai ls: , scroll to Certif icates: , and select View details . See "Certificate management" , p. 164 . â If you install a file that contains an up date or repair to an existing application, you can only restore the original appl ication if you have the original installati on file or a full backup copy of the removed software pa ckage. To restore the original application , remo ve the application, and install the application again from the original installation file or the backup c opy. The .jar file is required for installing Java applications. If it is missing, the device may ask you to download it. If there is no access point defined for the application, you are asked to select one. When y ou are downloading the .jar file, you may ne ed to enter a us er name and password to access the server. You obtain these from the supplier or manufacturer of the application. To install an applic ation or softwa re: 1. To locate an installation file, press , and select Applications > App. mgr. . Alternatively, search installation files usi ng File manager, or open a message in Messaging > Inbox that contains an installa tion file. 2. In Application manager, select Options > Install . In other applica tions, scroll to the installation file, and sel ect it to start the installation. 154 Applications folder
During installation, th e device shows information about t he progress of the installation. If you in stal l an application without a digital signature or certification, the device displays a warning. Continu e installation only if you are sure of the orig in and contents of th e application. To start an installed applic ation, locate it in the menu, and select it. If the application does not have a default folder defined, it is installed in the Applicati ons folder in the main menu. To see which software packages are installe d or removed and wh en, se lect Options > View log . Important: Yo ur devi ce can on ly support o ne antivirus application. Having more than one application with antivirus functionality could affect performance and ope ration or cause the device to stop functioning. After you install applications to a compatible memory card, installation files (.sis, .sisx) remain in the device memory. The files may use large amounts of memory and preve nt you from storing other files. To main tain suffici ent me mory, use Nokia Nserie s PC Suite to back up installa tion files to a compatible PC, then use the file manager to remove the installation files from the device memory. If the .sis file is a message attachment , delete th e message from the Messaging inbox. Remove applications and software Press , and select Applica tions > App. mgr. . Scroll to a software package, and select Optio ns > Remove . Select Yes to confirm. If you remove software, yo u can only reinstall it if you ha ve the original softw are packa ge or a full backup of the r emov ed sof twar e packag e. If you remove a software package , you may no longer be able to open documents crea ted with that softw are. If another software pa ckage depends on the software package that you removed, the other software package may stop working. Refer to the documen tation of th e install ed software p ackage for details. Settings Press , and select Applica tions > App. mgr. . Select Options > Setti ngs and from the following: â Software installation â S elect whethe r Symbian software that has n o verified digital signature can be inst alled. â Online certif icate ch eck â Select to check the online ce rtific ates bef ore ins tallin g an applica tion. â Default web addr ess â Set the defaul t address used when c hecking online certific ates. 155 Applications folder
Some Java application s may require that a message be sent or a network connection be made to a specific access point to download extra data or components. In the Ap plication manager main view, scroll to an a pplication , and select Options > Open to change settings re lated to that specific applica tion. 156 Applications folder
Tools folder File manager Press , and select Tools > File mgr. . About File manager With File manager, you can browse, manage, and open files on your device, memory c ard, or a compatible external drive. To map or delete drives, or to define settings for a co mp at i bl e r e mo t e d r iv e c o nn ec t ed to y ou r de vi c e, select Options > Remote drives . The available options d epend on t he memory y ou select. Find and organise files To find a file, selec t Options > Find . Enter a search text that matches t he file name. T o m o v e a n d c o p y f i l e s a n d f o l d e r s , o r t o c r e a t e n e w folders in the me mory, select Op tion s > Organis e , and the desired option. To sort fi le s, select Options > Sort by , and the desired category. Edit memory card These options are availabl e only if a compatible memory card is inserted in the device. To rename or format a memory c ard, select Option s > Memory card options . To password protect a me mory card, select Options > Memory card p assword . To remove the memory card safely without any loss of data, sel ect Option s > Remove memory card . Back up fil es on a memory card To back up files, select the file types you want to back up on a memory card, and Options > Back up now . Ensure that your me mory card has enough free memory for the files that yo u have ch osen to back up . Voice commands Press , and select Tools > Utilities > Voice comm. . You can use enhance d voic e commands to control your devi ce. See "Voice dialling" , p. 131 . 157 Tools folder
To activate enhanced voic e commands to start applicatio ns and profiles, pre ss and hold the right selection key in the stan dby mode. To use enhanced voice commands, press and hold the right selection key in the standby mode, and speak a voice command. The voice command is the name of the application or profile displayed in the list. To edit the voice com mands, in the Voice comman ds application , select an item , such as an application or a profile, and Edit . To listen to the synthesised voice tag, select Options > Playback . To remove a voice command that y ou added manually, sele ct Options > Remove voice command . Select Options > Settings and from the following: â Synthesiser â to switch on or off the synthesiser that plays re cognised voice tags and commands in the selec ted device language â Playback volume â to adjust the playback volume for the voice commands â Recognition sensitivity â t o a d j u s t h o w e a s i l y the synthesiser recognises speech. If the sensitivity is set too high, it may not accept commands because of backg round noise. â Command verification â to select whether th e s p o k e n c o m m a n d i s a c c e p t e d m a n u a l l y , b y v o i c e , or automatically â Remove voice adapts. â to reset voic e recognition learning, for examp le, when the main user of the device h as changed Sync Press , and select Tools > Sync . Sync enables you to synchronise your notes, calendar entries, text and multimedia messages, browser bookmarks, or contacts with various compatible application s on a compatible computer or on the internet. You may receive synchronisation settings in a special message from yo ur service provider. A synchronisation profile cont ains the necessary settings for synchronisation. When you o pen the applicat ion, the de fault or previously u sed sync profil e is displayed. To modify the profile, scroll to a sy nc item and select Mark to includ e it in t he prof ile or Unmark to leave it out. To manage sync profiles , select Options and the desired option. To synchronise data, select Options > Synchro nise . To cancel synchronisation before it finishes, select Cancel . 158 Tools folder
Device manager Press , and select Tools > Utilities > Device mgr. . Use Device man ager to connect t o a server an d receive configuration sett ings for your device, to create new se rver profiles, or to view and manage existing server prof iles. You may receive serv er profiles and different configuration setting s from your service providers and company inform ation management department. These configuration setting s may include connec tion and other settin gs used by different applications in your devic e. Scroll to a server profile, and select Options and from the following: â Start configuration â Co nnect to th e server and receive con figuration settings for your device. â New server pr ofile â Create a server profile. To delete a server profil e, scroll to it, and press C . Speech With Speech, yo u can set the language, v oice, and voice properti es for the message reader. Press , and select Tools > Utilities > Speech . To set the language for the message reader, select Language . To download additional languages to your devi ce, sel ect Options > Downl oad languages . Tip: When you dow nload a new l anguage, you mu st dow nlo ad at le ast one vo ice for that language. To set the speakin g voice, select Voice . The voice depends on the selected language. To set the speaking rate, select Speed . To set the speaking volume, select Volume . To view details of a voice, scroll right to th e voice tab, scroll to t he voice, and sele ct Option s > Voice details . To listen to a voice, scroll to the voice, an d select Options > Play voice . To delete languages or voic es, scroll to th e item and select Options > Delete . Message reader settings To change the message rea der settings, scroll to the Setti ngs tab, and define the following: â Language detection â turn automatic re ading language detection on or off. â Cont inuous r eading â turn continuous reading of all selected messages on or of f. â Speech prompts â select whether the message reader inserts prompts in messages. 159 Tools folder
â Audio source â select whether you want to listen to the message throu gh the loudsp eaker or the device. 160 Tools folder
Settings Some settings may be pres et for the device by your service provider, and you ma y not be able to change them. General settings In general settings, yo u can edit the general settings of your device or restore the device t o original default settings. You can adjust time and da te setting s also in the clock. See "Clo ck " , p. 147 . Personal isati on setti ngs Press , and select Tools > Settings > General > Personalisation . You can edit settin gs related to the display, standby mode, and gene ral functi ons of y our device. Themes allows you to change the look of the display. Voice commands opens the settings for the Voice commands application. See "Voi ce commands" , p. 157 . Tones allows you to change the tones of the calendar, clo ck, and curre ntly active pro file. Display â Light sensor â Scroll left or right to adjust the light sensor that observes the lighting conditions and adjusts the brightne ss of the display. Th e light sensor may cause the displa y to flicker in low light. â Font size â Adjust the siz e of the text and icons on the display. â Power saver time-out â Select the time-out period after which the power saver is activated. â Welco me note / logo â The welcome note or logo is displayed briefly each time you switch on the device. Selec t Default to use the default image, Text to wri te a welc ome note, or Image to select an image from Photos. â Light time-out â Select a time -out after whic h the backlight of the disp lay is switch ed off. Standby mode â Shortcuts â Assign shortcut s to the selection keys to be used in th e standby mode and select which applications are shown in the active toolbar. 161 Settings
If the active standby is set off, you can assign keypad shortcuts for the different presses of the scroll key. â Change Menu view â Selec t Horizontal icon bar to view a horiz ontal toolb ar and the conten t from different applications on the screen. Select Vertical icon bar to view a vertical toolbar on the screen. The content from differen t applications is hidden. To display the conten t, select a shortcut and press the scroll key left. Select Basic to switch off active toolbar. â Operator logo â This setting is only available if you have received and saved an operator logo. Select Off if you d o not want the logo t o be shown. Language Changing the sett ings for the ph one language or writing languag e affects every application in your device until you change these setting s again. â Phone language â Change the langua ge of the display text in your devic e. This also affects the format used for date an d time and the separators used, for example, in calculations. Automatic selects the language accordin g to the information on your SIM card. After you change the language, t he device rest arts. â Writin g langu age â Change the writing language. This affects the characters available when writing text an d the predic tive text dictionary use d. â Predictive text â Set p redicti ve text inpu t on or off for all editors in the de vice. The predic tive text dictionary is not available for al l languages. Enhanceme nt settings Press , and select Tools > Settings > Genera l > Enha ncement . Some enhancem ent connec tors indicate w hich type of enhanceme nt is connected to the device. See "Display indicators" , p. 26 . The available settings dep end on the type of enhancement. Select an enhancement and from th e following: â Default prof ile â S et the profile that you w ant activated each time you connec t a cert ain compatible enhancement t o your device. â Automatic answer â Select whether you want the device to answe r an incomin g call automatica lly after 5 se conds. If the ringing ty pe is set to Beep once or Silent, automatic answer is disabled. â Lights â Set whether lights remain on after the time-out. TV-out settings To change the settin gs for a TV-out connec tion, select TV-Out and from the following: 162 Settings
â Default pr ofile â Set t he pr o fi le t ha t y o u w an t activate d each time you conne ct a Nokia Video Connectivity Cable to your d evice. â TV screen size â Select the aspect ratio of the TV: Normal or Widescreen for widescreen TV s. â TV system â Select the analogue video signal system that is compatible with your TV. â Flicker filter â To improve image quality on the screen of your TV, select On . The flicker filter may not diminish image fl icker on all TV screens. Navi wheel settings Press , and select Tools > Settings > General > Navi wheel . Navi wheel When the Navi wheel setting is set on, you can browse through files and lists in certain applications by sliding your finger on the rim of the scroll key. When the Navi wheel setting is set off, to move up, down, left, or righ t, press the scroll key in the desired direction. Breathing The rim around the Nav i wheel illuminates slowly when the devi ce is in sle e p mode. To switch off t he illumination, press , and select Tools > Settings > Ge neral > Navi wheel > Breathing . Sensor settings In most applications , the display ro tates automatically between th e portrait and landscape modes based on the orientation of the device. To change t he sett ing fo r automatic displ ay rotation, select Settings > General > Sensor settings > Turnin g control and whether you want the display to rotate automatic ally. To ensure that the automatic display rotati on works, hold the device in an up right positi on. Automatic rotation does not work if you ch ange the display rotation setting ma nually in an application. When you exit the applicat ion, automatic rotation is activated again. Security settings Phone and SIM Press , and select Tools > Settings > General > Security > Phone and SIM card and from the following: â PIN code request â When active , the code is requested each time the device is switched on. Deactivating the PIN c ode request may n ot be allowed by some SIM cards. â PIN co de , PIN2 code , and Lock code â You can change the PIN code, PIN2 code, and lo ck code. 163 Settings
These codes can only incl ude the numbers from 0 to 9 . If you forget th e PIN o r the PIN2 co de, contact your service pro vider. If you forget the lo ck code, contact a Nokia Care point or your service provider. See "Access codes" , p. 21 . Avoid using access codes similar to the emergency n umbers to pr event ac cidental dialling of the emergency number. â Keypad autolock period â Select whether the keypad is lo cked wh en your dev ice has been idle for a certain period of time. Tip: To lock or unlock the keypad manually, press the left selection key, then * . â Phone autolock peri od â To avoid unauthorised use, you can se t a time-out after which the de vice aut omatical ly lock s. A locked device cannot be used until the correct lock code is entered. To turn off the auto lock period, select None . Tip: T o l o c k t h e d e v i c e m a n u a l l y , p r e s s t h e power key. A list of commands opens. Select Lock phone . In the offline or flight prof iles, you may need to unlock the device and change to the calling profile before making a call. â Lock if SIM card changed â You can set the device to ask for the loc k code when an unknown SIM card is inserted into your device. The device maintains a list of SIM cards that are recognised as the ownerâÂÂs cards. â Closed user group â You can specify a group of people to whom you can call and who c an call you (network service). When calls are limited to cl osed user groups, calls may be possible to the of ficial emergen cy number progra mmed i nto you r device. â Confirm SI M services â You can set the device to display confirmation messages when you are using a SIM card servic e (network service). Certificate management Press , and select Tools > Settings > Genera l > Security > Certific ate m anagem ent . Digital certificates do not guarant ee safety; they are used to verify the origin of soft ware. In the certificate management main view , you can see a list of authority cert ificates that are stored in your device. Scroll right to see a list of personal certificates, if available. Digital certificates should be used if you want to connect to an online bank or another sit e or remote server for actions that involve transferring confidential information. They should also be used if you want to re duce th e risk of viruses or other 164 Settings
malicious software and be sure of the authenticity of software when down loading and installing software. Important: Even if the use o f certifica tes makes the risks involved in remot e connections and software installation co nsiderably smaller, they must be used correctly in order to benefit from increased security. The ex istence of a certificate does not offer any prote ction by itself; the certificate manager mu st cont ain correct, authentic, or tr usted certific ates for in creased security to be available. Certificates have a restricted lifetime. If "Expired certificate" or "Certificate not valid ye t" is shown, even if th e certificate should be val id, check t hat the current date and time in your device are correct. View certificate detailsâÂÂcheck authenticity You can only be sure of the correc t identity of a server when the signat ure and th e validity period of a server certif icate have been checked. You are notified if the identity of t he server is not authentic or if you do not have the corre ct security certificate in your device. To check certificate details, scroll to a certificate, and select Options > Cer tificate details . The validity of the certific ate is checked, and one of t he following notes may be displayed: â Certi ficate no t truste d â You have no t set any applica tion to use the certificate. â Expired certificate â The certificate validity period has ended. â Certificate not valid yet â The certificate validity period has not yet begun. â Certificate co rrupted â The certificate cannot be used. Contact th e certificate issuer. Change the trust settings Before ch anging a ny cert ificate settin gs, yo u must make sure that y ou really tr ust the owner of th e certificate and that the ce rtificate really belongs to the listed owner. Scroll to an authority certificate, and select Option s > Trust settings . Depending on the certif icate, a list of the ap plications that can u se the selected c ertificate is shown . For examp le: â Symbian installation : Ye s â The certificate is able to certify the origin of a new Symbian operating system application. â Internet : Yes â The certificate is able to certify servers. â App. installatio n : Yes â The certificate is able to certify the origin of a new Java⢠application. Select Options > E dit tru st sett ing to change the value . 165 Settings
Security module Press , and select Tools > Settings > Genera l > Security > Security mo dule . T o v i e w o r e d i t a s e c u r i t y m o d u l e ( i f a v a i l a b l e ) , s c r o l l to it, and press the scroll key. To view detailed information about a security module, scroll to it, and se lect Options > Security details . Restore original s ettings Press , and select Tools > Settings > Genera l > Factory settings . You can reset some of the settings to their original values. To do this, you need the lock code. After resetting , the device may take a long er time to power on. Document s and files are unaffected. Positioni ng setting s Press , and select Tools > Settings > Genera l > Positioning . Positioning methods â Integrate d GPS â Use the integrated GPS receive r of y our devi ce. â Assisted GP S â Use Assisted GPS (A-GPS) to receive assistance data from a n assistance data server. See "Assisted GPS (A-GPS)" , p. 52 . â Bluetoot h GPS â Use a compatible external GPS receiver with Bluet ooth co nnectivit y. â Network based â Use information from the cellular network (network service). Positioning server To define an access point, and positionin g server for A-GPS, select Posit ioning se rver . The positioning server may be prese t by your service p rovider, and you may not be able to edit the set tings. Notation settings To select which me asurement system you wa nt to use for sp eeds and distances, select Measurem ent system > Metric or Imperial . To define in which format the coordinate information is shown in you r devi ce, se lect Coordinate fo rmat , and the desired format. Phone settings In phone setting s, you can edit settings related to phone calls and network. Call settings Press , and select Tools > Settings > Phone > Call . â Send my caller ID â You ca n set your phone number to be displayed to ( Yes ) or hidden from 166 Settings
( No ) the person to whom you are calling, or the value may be set by your service prov ider when you make a subscription ( Set by network ) (network servic e). â Send my internet call ID â You can set y our internet ca ller ID to be displayed to or hidden from the person to whom you are calling. â Call wa iting â To be alerted for incoming c alls (network service ) while you are in a call, select Activ ate . T o check wh ether the f unction is activ ated, se lect Check st atus . â Internet call waiting â T o b e n o t i f i e d o f a n e w incoming intern et call w hile y ou have a call in progress, select Activa ted . â Internet call alert â To be alerted for incoming internet calls, select On . If you select Off , y ou are not alerted, but you receiv e a notification if you missed a call. â Reject call with mess age â To send a text message to a caller informing why you could not answer the call, select Yes . â Message te xt â W r i t e a t e x t t o b e s e n t i n a t e x t message whe n you reject a call. â Image in vide o call â I f v i d e o i s n o t s e n t d u r i n g a video c all, you c an sele ct a s till i mage t o be displayed instead. â Automatic redial â Select On , and your device makes a maximum of 10 attempts to connect the call after an unsuccessful call attempt. To st op automatic redialling, press th e end ke y. â Show call duration â Activate this setting if you want the leng th of a call to be displ ayed during the call. â Summary after call â Activate this setting if you want the le ngth of a call to be displaye d after the call. â Speed dial â Select On , and the numbers assigned to the num ber keys (2 to 9) c an be dialled by pressing and holding the key. See "1- touch dial a phone numbe r" , p. 131 . â Anykey answer â Selec t On , and you can answer an incoming call by briefl y pressing any keypad key, excep t the power key. â Line in use â This setting (network servi ce) is shown only if the SIM card supports two subscriber numbers, that is, two phone lines. Select wh ich phon e line you want t o use for making calls and sending text messages. Call s on both lines can be answer e d irrespec tive o f the selected line. If you select Lin e 2 and have not subscribed to th is netw ork service, you are not able to make calls. When line 2 is selected, is shown in the standby mode. â Line change â To prevent line selection (network service), select Disable if supported by your SIM card. To change this set ting, you need the PIN2 code. 167 Settings
Call divert Press , and select Tools > Settings > Phone > Call divert . Call divert al lows you to divert incoming calls to your voice mailbox or anot her phone number. For details, contact y our service provider. To activate call divert, select Activ ate . T o che ck whether the op tion is active, selec t Check status . Several diverting options ca n be active at the same time. When all calls are diverted, is shown i n the standby mode. Call barring and call diverting cannot be active at the same time. Call barring Press , and select Tools > Settings > Phone > Call barring . Call barring (network servic e) a llows you to restrict the calls that you m ake or receive wit h the devic e. For example, you can restrict all outgoing international call s or incoming calls when you are abroad. To change the setting s, you need the barring password from your service pr ovider. Call barring and call diverting cannot be active at the same time. When calls are barred, calls may be possible to certain officia l emergency numbers. Voice call barring Select the desired barrin g option, and set it on ( Activate ) or off ( Deactiv ate ), or check wheth er the option is active ( Check stat us ). Call barring affects all calls, in cluding data calls. Internet call barring To select whether anon ymous calls are allowed from the int ernet, set Anonymous call barring on or off. Network s ettings Your device can automatically switch between the GSM and UMTS networks. The GSM network is indicated with in the standby mode. The UMTS network is indicated with . Press , and select Tools > Settings > Phone > Network and from the following: â Network mode â Select whic h network to use. If you select Dual mo de , the device u ses the GSM or UMTS network automatica lly, according to the network parameters and the roaming agreements betw een the wireless se rvice providers. For details an d roaming costs, contact your network service pr ovider. This option is shown only if supported by the wireless service provider. 168 Settings
A roaming agreement is an agreement between two or more service providers to enable the users of one service prov ider to use th e services of other service providers. â Operator selection â Select Automatic to set the device to searc h for and selec t one of the availa ble net works , or Manual to manually select the network from a list. If t he connection to the manually selected network i s lost, t he device sounds an error tone and asks you to reselect a network. Th e sele cted network must have a roaming agreement with your home cellular network. â Cell info display â Set the devic e to indicate when it is used in a cellular network based on microcellular network (MCN) technology and to activa te cell inf o receptio n. Connection settings In connection settings, you can edit access points and other connectivity settings. You can also edit settings for Bl uetooth connectivity in the Bluetooth connectivity application. See "Settings" , p. 43 . You can also edit se ttings for data cable connec tions in the USB application. See "USB" , p. 46 . Data connections and access points Your device supp orts packet data connections (network service), such as GPRS in the GSM n etwork. When you use your device in GSM and UMTS networks, multiple data connection s can be active at the same time, and acce ss points can share a data connecti on. In th e UMTS netw ork, da ta conn ections remain active during voice calls. You can a lso use a WLAN da ta connect ion. Only one connecti on in one wi reless LAN can b e active at a time, but several applications can use the same internet access point. To establish a data conne ction, an access point is required. Yo u can defi ne different kinds of access points, such as the following: â MMS access point to send and receive multimedia messages â Internet acce ss point ( IAP ) to send and receive e- mail an d connect to the interne t Check the ty pe of access poin t you need w ith your service provider for the se rvice you want to access. For availability and subs cription to pac ket data connecti on services, c ontact your servi ce provider. 169 Settings
Access points Create a new access point Press , and select Tools > Settings > Connection > Destinations . You may receive access point settings in a message from a service provider. Some or all access points may be preset fo r your device by your service provide r, and you m ay not be able to change, crea te, edit, or remove th em. When you open one of the ac cess point gr oups ( , , , ), you can see the access point types: indicates a protected access point indicates a packet data access point indicates a WLAN access point Tip: You can create internet a ccess points in a wireless LAN with the WLAN wizard. To create a new ac cess point, select New access point . The device asks to chec k for available connections. After the se arch, connections that are already available are shown and can be shared by a new access point. If you ski p this step, you are asked to select a connect ion method and to define the settings needed. To edit the settings of an access poin t, open one of the access point groups, select an access poin t and Edit . Follow the instructio ns from your serv ice provider. â Connection name â Enter a name for the connection. â Data be arer â Select the data connection type . Depending on th e data connecti on you select, only certain setting fields are av ailable. Fi ll in all fields marked with Must be define d o r w i t h a r e d * . O t h e r fields can be left e mpty, unless your service provider has instructed otherwise. To use a data connection , your service provider must support this feature, and if necessary, activate it for your SIM card. Create access point groups Press , and select Tools > Settings > Connection > Destinations . Some applica tions allow you to use access point groups for network connection . To avoid selecting a single access point every time the device makes a net work co nnection , you c an create a group that cont ains various access points to connect to t hat network and define the order in which the access points are used. For example, you can add wireless LAN (WLAN) and packet data access points to an in ternet access point group and use th e group fo r browsing the web. If you give WLAN the highe st priority, the device 170 Settings
connects to the interne t through WLAN if available and through packet data if not. To create a new acce ss point group, select Option s > Manage > New destination . To ad d acce ss poin ts to an access point group, select the grou p and Options > New a ccess poin t . To copy an existing access point fr om another gr oup, select the group, an existing access point, and Option s > Organise > Copy to other dest. . To change th e priority order of access poin ts within a group, select an access point and Opti ons > Organis e > Ch ange priorit y . Packet data access points Press , and select Tools > Settings > Connection > Destinations > New access point , and follow the instructions on the screen. Or, open one of the access po int groups, select an access point marked wi th , and select Edit . Follow the instructions fr om your service pro vider. Select from the following: â Access point name â You obtain the access point name from your service provi der. â User name â The user name may be needed t o make a data connection, and is usually provided by the service provider. â Prompt password â If you must enter the password every time you log in to a server, or if you do not want to save your password in th e device , sele ct Yes . â Passwo rd â A password may b e needed to make a da ta connection and is usually provided by the service provider. â Authentication â S e l e c t Secure to always send your password encrypted or Normal to send your password encrypted when possible. â Home page â Depend ing on t he acc ess point you are sett ing up, enter the w eb address or the address of the multimedia message cen tre. Select Options > Advanced settings and from the following: â Network type â Select t he internet prot ocol type to transfer data to and from your device. Th e other settings depen d on the selected netw ork type. â Phone IP address (for IPv4 only) â Enter the IP address of your device. â DNS addresses â Enter the IP addresses of the primary and secondary DNS servers, if required by your service provider. To obtain these addresses, contact yo ur internet service provider. â Prox y server address â Enter the address of the proxy server. â Proxy port number â Enter the port numbe r of the proxy server. 171 Settings
WLAN internet access points Press , and select Tools > Settings > Connection > Destinations > New access point , and follow the instruct ions on the screen. Or, open one of the access p oint groups, select an access poin t marked with , and selec t Edit . Follow the instructions from your WLAN service provider. â WLAN network name â Select Enter manually or Search fo r networ ks . If you select an existing net work, WLAN network mode and WLAN security mode are determined by the settings of its access point device. â Network status â Define whet her the netw ork name is displayed. â WLAN network mode â Select Ad-hoc to create an ad hoc networ k and to allow de vices to send an d rece ive da ta directly; a WLAN access point device is not needed. In an ad hoc ne twork, all devices must use the same WLAN network name . â WLAN security mode â Select the encrypt ion used: WEP , 802.1x (not for ad hoc networks), or WPA/WPA2 . If you sele ct Open network , no encryption is used. The W EP, 802.1x, and WPA functions can be used only if the network supports them. To enter the settin gs for the selected sec urity mode, select WLAN securit y settings . Security settings for WEP â WEP key in use â Select the wired equivalent privacy (WEP) k ey number . You can c reate up to four WEP keys. The sa me settings must be entered on the WLAN access point device. â Authentication type â Select Open or Shared for the authentication typ e between your device and the WLA N access point device. â WEP key settings â Enter WEP encryption (length o f the ke y), WEP k ey format ( ASCI I or Hexadeci mal ), and WEP key (the WEP key data in the selec ted format). Security settings for 80 2.1x and WPA/WPA2 â WPA/WPA2 â Select the mea ns of authen ticatio n: EAP to use an extensible authentic ation prot ocol (EAP) pl ug-in, or Pre- shared key to use a password. Com plete the appropriate settings: â EAP plug-in settings â Enter the settings as your service provider instructs. â Pre-sh ared key â Enter a password. The same password must be entered on the WLAN access point device. â WPA2 only mode â Only WPA2 enabled devices are allowed to establis h a connection in this mode. 172 Settings
Advanced WLAN settings Select Options > Advanced settings and from the following: â IPv4 settings â Ente r the IP address of your device, the subnet IP address, the default gateway, and the IP addresses of the primary and secondary DNS servers. Contact your internet service provider for t hese addresses. â IPv6 settings â D e f i n e t h e t y p e o f D N S a d d r e s s . â Ad-hoc channel (only for Ad-hoc ) â To enter a channel number (1-11) manually, se lect User defined . â Proxy server address â Enter the address for the proxy serv er. â Proxy port number â Enter the proxy port number. Packet data settings Press , and select Tools > Settings > Connection > Pack et data . The packet data settings affect all access points using a packet data connection. â Packet data connection â If you select When available an d you a re in a n etwor k that suppor ts packet data, the dev ice registers to the packet data network. Starting an active packet data connection (for example, to send and receive e- mail) is qu icker. If there is no packet data coverage, the device periodically tries to establish a packet data connection. If you select When needed , th e device use s a packet data connection only if you start an application or action t hat nee ds it . â Access point â The access point name is needed to use your device as a packet data modem to a compatible computer. â High speed packet a ccess â Enable or disable the use of HSDPA (network servic e) in UMTS networks. Wireless L AN settings Press , and select Tools > Settings > Connecti on > Wireless LAN . â Show WLAN availa bility â Select whether is displayed in the stan dby mode whe n a wire less LAN is av ailable. â Scan for net works â If you set Show WLAN availability to Yes , select how of ten the devic e searches for available wireless LANs and updates the indicator. To view advanced settings, selec t Options > Advanced s ettings . Ch anging wire less LAN advanc ed settin gs is not rec ommended . 173 Settings
SIP settings Press , and select Tools > Settings > Connection > SIP settings . Session Initiation Protocol (SIP) settings are needed for certain network servic es using SIP. You may receive the settings in a special text message from your servic e provid er. You can v iew, dele te, or create these setting profiles in SIP settings. Configurations Press , and select Tools > Settings > Connection > Configur ations . You may recei ve trusted serv er settings fro m your service provider in a co nfiguration message. You can save view or delete these settings in configurations. Access point name co ntrol Press , and select Tools > Settings > Connection > APN control . With the access p oint name control se rvice, you can restrict packet data co nnections and allow your device t o use o nly certain pa cket data ac cess points. This setting is only available if your SIM card supports the access po int control service. To set the control service on or off or to change the allowed access points, select Options and the correspon ding opti on. To cha nge the op tions, you need your PIN2 code. Contact your service provider for the code. Application settings To edit the settings of so me of the applications in your device, press , and select Tools > Settings > Applications . To edit the settings, you can also select Option s > Settings in each application. 174 Settings
Troubleshooting Q: What is my pass word for the lock, PIN, or PUK codes? A: The defau lt lock cod e is 12345 . If you forget the lock cod e, cont act your dev ice dea ler. If you fo rget a PIN or PUK code, or if you have not received such a code, co ntact you r network service provid er. For information about passwor ds, contact your access point provider, for example, a commerc ial internet service provider (ISP) or network service provi der. Q: How do I c lose an applicatio n that is not responding? A: Press and hold . To close an application, scrol l to it, and press C . Pressing C does not close Music player. To close Mu sic player, se lect it fro m the list, and Options > Exit . Q: Why do images look sm udgy? A: Ensure that the camera lens protect ion windows are clean. Q: Why do missing, discoloured, o r bright dots appear on the sc reen every time I tur n on my de vice? A: This is a characteri stic of this type of disp lay. Some displays may contai n pixels or dots that remain on or off. This is normal, no t a fault. Q: Why can't my device establish a GPS connec tion? A: Find more information about GPS, GPS receiver, satellite signals, and loca tion information in th is user guide. See "Posi tioning (GPS)" , p. 52 . Q: Why canâÂÂt I find my friendâ s device while using Bluetooth c onnectivity? A: Check that both devices are compatible, have activated Bluetooth conn ectivity, and are not in hidden mode. Check also th at the distance between the two de vices is not ov er 10 metre s (33 feet) and that there are no walls or othe r obstructions between the de vices. Q: Why canâÂÂt I end a Blueto oth connection? A: If another de vice is connected to your device, you can end th e connec tion from the o ther devic e or deactivate Blu etooth connectivity in your device. 175 Troubleshootin g
Press , and select Tools > Blueto oth > Bluetooth > Off . Q: Why canâÂÂt the other device see the files stored on m y device in the home netw ork? A: Make sure that you h ave configured the home network sett ings, conten t sharing is turned on in your device, and the other device is UPnP compatible. Q: What can I do if my hom e network connection stop s working? A: Switch off the wirele ss LAN (WLAN) connection from your compatible PC and your device, and switch it on again. If this does n ot help, rest art your compatible PC and your device. If the connec tion still does not work, reconfigure the WLAN setti ngs in both your compatible PC and dev ice. See "Wireless LAN" , p. 40 . Se e "Conne ction settings" , p. 169 . Q: Why can't I see my compatible PC in my device in the ho me network? A: If you are using a firewall applica tion in your compatible PC, check that it allows home media server to use t he external conn ection (you can add Home media server to the firewall application's exceptions list). Check from the firewall settings that the firewall applicatio n allows traf fic to the followin g ports: 1900, 491 52, 49153, and 49154. Some WLAN access point devices have a built-in firewall. In such cases, check that th e firewall in the access point device does not block t raffic to th e followin g ports: 1900, 4915 2, 49153, and 49154. Check that the WLAN settings are the same in your device and compatible PC. Q: Why can't I see a wireless LAN (WLAN) access point even though I know I'm wi thin its range? A: The WLAN access point may use a hidden service set identifier (SSID). You can only access networks that use a hidden SS ID if you know the correc t SSID, and have create d a WLAN internet acc ess point for the network on you r Nokia device. Q: How do I switch wireless LAN (WLAN) of f on my Nokia device? A: The WLAN on your No kia dev ice switche s off when you a re not con nected or trying to conne ct to another access point, or no t scanning for available networks. To further reduce battery consumption, you can specify that your Nokia de vice does not scan, or scans less often, for available networks in the background. WLAN switches off in between background scans. To change the background scan settings: 1. Press , and selec t Tools > Settings > Connection > Wireless LAN . 176 Troubleshootin g
2. To increase the backgrou nd scan time interval, adjust the time in Scan for networks . To stop background scans, select Show WLAN availabi lit y > Never . 3. To save your changes, press Back . When Sho w WLAN avai labil ity is set to Neve r , the WLAN availability icon is not sho wn in the standby mode. Howe ver, you can st ill manually scan for availa ble WLAN networks, and connect to WLAN networks as usual. Q: How can I save my data before deleting it? A: To save data, use Nokia Nseries PC Suite to synchronise with or to make a back- up copy of all data to a compa tible compute r. You can also send data using Bluetooth conne ctivity to a compatible device. Yo u can also st ore data on a compatib le memory card. Q: What do I d o if the mem ory is full? A: Delete items from the device memo ry or mass memory. If your device displays t he note Not enough memory to perform operation. Delete some data first. or Memory low. De lete some data from phone memory . when you are deleting several items at the same time, delete items one by one, beginning w ith the smallest items. See "Free memory" , p. 23 . Q: Why canâÂÂt I select a contact for my message? A: The contact card does not ha ve a phone number, an address, or an e-mail address. Press , select Contacts , the relevant contact, and edit t he contact card. Q: How can I end the data connection when the device star ts a data connectio n again and again? A: The device may be trying to retrieve a multimedia message from the multim edia message centre. To stop the device from ma king a data connec tion, press , and select Messaging > Options > Setti ngs > Multimedia message > Multimedi a retrieval and Manual to have the multimedia messaging centre save me ssages to be retrieved later, or Off to ignore all incoming multimedia messages. If you select Manual , you receive a notification when you have a new message in the multimedia message ce ntre. If you sele ct Off , the device does not make any network conne ctions related to multimedia me ssaging. To set the device to use a packet data connection only if you start an application or action that needs it, press , and select Tools > Settings > Connection > Packet data > Packet data connection > When needed . If this does not help, swit ch the devic e off, and switch it on again. 177 Troubleshootin g
Q: Why do I have problems connectin g the devic e to my PC ? A: Ensure that you have th e latest version of Nokia Nseries PC Sui te and that it is installed and running on your compatible PC. For further information on how to use Nokia Nseries PC Su ite, see the Nok ia Nseries PC Suite help or visit the Nokia support pages. Q: Can I use my device as a fax modem with a compatible PC? A: You cannot use your device as a fax modem. Howeve r, with cal l divert ing (network service), you can divert incoming fax calls to a fax number. 178 Troubleshootin g
Enhancements Warning: Use only batteries, chargers, and enhancements approved by Nokia for use with this particular model. The use of any other types may invalidate any approval or warranty, and may be dangerous. For availability o f approved en hancements, please check with your dealer. Whe n you disconnect the power cord of an y enhanceme nt, grasp and p ull the plug, not th e cord. 179 Enhancements
Battery and charger information Battery and ch arger information Your device is powered by a rec hargeable battery. The battery intend ed for use with this device is BL-6F . Nokia may make additional battery models available for this device. Th is device is intended for use when suppl ied with power from the followi ng chargers: AC-5, AC-8 , DC-1 , DC-8, DC-9 . The exact charger model number may vary depending on the type of plug. Th e plug variant is iden tified by one o f the following: E, EB, X, AR, U, A, C, or UB. The battery can be charged and discharged hundreds of times, but it will eventu ally wear out. When the ta lk and stan dby times are noticeably shorter th an normal, replace th e battery. Use only Nokia approved batteries, and recharge your battery only with Nokia approved chargers designated for this devi ce. Use of an unapproved battery or charger may present a risk of fire, explosion, leakage, or other hazard. If a battery is being used for the first time or if the battery has not be en used for a pr olonged period, it may be necessary to connect the charger, then disconnect and reconnec t it to begin charging the battery. If the battery is completely disc harged, it may take several minutes before th e charging indicator appears on the di splay or befor e any ca lls can be made. Always switch the device off and disconnect the charger before remo ving the battery. Unplug the ch arger from the elec trical plug and the device wh en not in use . Do not leave a fully charged battery connected to a charger, since overcharging may shorten its lifetime. If left unused, a fully charged battery will lose its charge over time. Always try to k eep the batter y between 15ðC and 25ðC (59ðF and 77ðF) . Extreme t emperatures reduce the capacity and life time of the battery . A device with a hot or cold battery may not work temporarily. Battery pe rf ormance is particularly limited in temperatures well below freezing. Do not sho rt-circuit the bat tery. Accident al short- circuiting can occur whe n a metalli c object such as a coin, c lip, or pen causes direct connect ion of the positive ( ) and negative (-) terminals of the battery. (These look like metal s trips on the battery.) This might happen, for examp le, when you carry a spare battery in your pocket or purse. Short- 180 Battery and charger information
circuiting the term inals may damage the battery or the connectin g object. Do not dispose of batt eries in a fire as th ey may explode. Batteries may also explode if damaged. Dispose of batteries according to lo cal regulations. Please recycle when possible. Do not dispose as household waste. Do not dismantle, cut, open, cr ush, bend, d eform, puncture, or shred cells or batteries. In the event of a battery leak, do not allow the liquid to come in contact wi th the skin or eyes. In the event of such a leak, flush yo ur skin or eye s immediat ely with water, or seek medical help. Do not modi fy, remanufacture, at tempt to i nsert foreign objects into the battery, or immerse or expose it to water or other liquids. Improper battery use may result in a fire, explosion, or other hazard. If the device or battery is droppe d, especially on a hard surface, and you believ e the battery has been damaged, ta ke it to a service centre for inspection befo re contin uing to u se it. Use the battery only for its inten ded purpose . Never use any charger or battery that is damaged. Keep your battery out of the reach of small children. Nokia battery authentication guidelines Always use original N okia batteries for your safety. To check that you are getting an original Nokia batte ry, purc has e it from an au thori sed Nok ia dealer, and inspect the ho logram label using the following steps: Successful completion of the steps is not a total assurance of the au thenticity of t he battery. If you have any reason to bel ieve that your battery is not an authentic, original Nokia battery, you should refrain from using it, and take it to the n earest authorised Nokia service point or dealer for assistance. Your authoris ed Nokia service point or dealer will inspect the battery fo r authenticity. If authenticity c annot be verified, re turn the batt ery to the place of purc hase. Authenticate hologram 1. When you look at the hologram on the label, you should see the Nokia connecting hands symbol from one angle and the Nokia Original Enhancem ents logo when looking from another angle . 181 Battery and charger information
2. When you angle th e hologram left, right, dow n and up, you should see 1, 2, 3 and 4 dots on each side respectively. What if your batt ery is not authent ic? If you cannot confirm that yo ur Nokia batte ry with the hologram on the labe l is an authentic Nokia battery, please do not use the battery. Take it to th e nearest authorised Nokia se r vice po int or deal er for assistance. The use of a battery th at is not approved by the manufacturer may be dangerous and may result in poor performance and damage to your device and its enhancements. It may also invalidate any approval or warranty ap plying to the device . For additional information, refer to the warranty and reference leaflet included with your Nokia device. 182 Battery and charger information
Care and maintenance Your device is a product of superior design and craftsmanship and should be treated with care. The following suggestions will hel p you prote ct your warranty coverage. â Keep the device dry. Prec ipitation, humidity, and all types of liquids or moisture can contain minerals that will corrode electro nic circuits. If your de vice doe s get wet, rem ove th e batte ry, and allow the device to dry completely before replacing it. â Do not use or store the device in dusty, dirty areas. Its moving parts and electronic components can be damaged. â Do not store t he device in hot areas. Hi gh temperatures can shorten th e life of electronic devices, damage batteries, and warp or melt certain plastics. â Do not store th e device in c old areas. When t he device returns to it s normal temperature, moisture can form inside the device and damage electroni c circuit boards. â Do not attemp t to open the dev ice othe r than as instructed in this gu ide. â Do not drop, knock, o r shake the de vice. Rough handling can break in ternal circuit boards and fine mechanics. â Do not use h arsh chemicals, cleani ng solvents, or strong detergents to clean th e device. â Do not pain t the de vice. Pain t can clog the moving parts and prev ent proper operat ion. â Use a soft, clean, dry cloth to clean any lenses, such as camera, proximity sensor, and light sensor lenses. â Use only the su pplied or an appr oved replacem ent ante nna. Una uthorised a ntennas, modifications, or attachments c ould damage the device and may violate regulations governing radio devices. â Use chargers indoors. â A l w a y s c r e a t e a b a c k u p o f d a t a y o u w a n t t o k e e p , such as co ntacts and cal endar notes. â To reset the dev ice from time to time for optimum performance, power o ff the device and remove the batt ery. These suggestions apply equally to your device, battery, charger, or any enha ncement. If any devic e 183 Care a nd maintenance
is not working pr operly, take it to the n earest authorised service fa cility for service. Disposal The crossed-out w heeled-bin symb ol on your product, literature, or packaging reminds you that all electrical an d electronic products, batteries, and accumulators must be taken to separate collec tion at t he end of their working life. This requirement applies to the European Union and other locations where sepa rate collection systems are available . Do not dispo se of these products as unsorted municipal waste. By returning the p roducts to collection you help prevent uncontrolle d waste disposal and promote the reuse of material resources. More detailed informat ion is av ailable fr om the product retailer, local waste authorit ies, national produce r responsibility organization s, or your local Nokia representativ e. For the product Ec o-Declaratio n or instructions for returning your obsolete product, go to country-specific information at www.nokia.com . 184 Care a nd maintenance
Additional safety information Small children Your device and its en hancements may cont ain small parts. Keep them out of the reach of small children. Operating environment This device meet s RF exposure gu idelines wh en used either in th e normal use p osition against the ear or when positione d at least 1. 5 centimetre s (5/8 inch) away from the body. When a carry case, belt clip, or holder is used for body-worn operat ion, it should not cont ain metal and sh ould pos ition t he device the above- stated di stance from your body. To transmit data files or messages, this device requires a quality connection to the network. In some cases, transmission of data files or messages may be delayed until such a c onne ction i s av ail able . Ensure the above separati on distance instructions are follo wed until the transmission is co mpleted. Parts of the device are magnetic. Metallic materials may be attracte d to the dev ice. Do not place credit cards or other magne tic storage med ia near the device, because in formation stored on them may be erased. Medical devices Operation of a ny radio transmitting equipment, including wireless phones, may interfere with the functionality of inadequately prot ected medical devices. Consult a physician or t he manufacturer of the medical device to determine if they are adequately shielded from exte rnal RF energy or if you have any ques tions. Sw itch of f your devic e in health care facilities wh en any regulations po sted in these areas instruct you to do so. Hospitals or health care facilities may be using equip ment that could be sensitive to external R F energy. Implanted medical devices Manufacture rs of medical d evices re commend that a minimum separation of 15.3 centimetre s (6 inches) should be maintained between a wireless device and a n impla nted me dical device, such as a pacemaker or implanted ca rdioverter defibrillator, to avoid potential interf erence w ith the medical device. Persons who have such devices should: 185 Additional safety information
â Always keep the wireless devi ce mo re t han 15. 3 centimetres (6 inches) from the me dical device when the wirel ess device is t urned on. â Not carry the wireless devi ce in a breast pock et. â Hold the wireless devic e to the ear opposite the medical device to mini mise the poten tial for interference. â Turn the wireless device off immediatel y if there is any reason to suspec t that interference is taking place. â Read and follow the directions from the manufa cturer of their impl anted med ical dev ice. If you have any questions about using your wireless device with an implante d medical device, consult your health care provider. Hearin g aid s Some digital wireless devices may interfere with some hearing aids. If inte rfe rence oc curs, consu lt your serv ice pr ovider . Hearing ai ds Warning: For heari ng aid co mpatibil ity, you must turn off the Blue tooth connectivity. Your mobile device model complies with FCC rules governing hearing aid compatibility. These rules require an M3 microphone or higher value. The M- value, shown on the device box , refers to lower radio frequency (RF) emissions. A higher M-valu e generally indicates that a device model has a lower RF emissions level, which may improve the likelihood that th e device will operate with c ertain hearing aids. S ome hearing aids are more immune than others to interfere nce. Please consult your hearin g heal th prof essi onal t o det ermine the M- rating of your hearing aid and whether your hearing aid will w ork with th is device. More information on accessibility can be found at www.noki aaccessibi lity.com. Vehicles RF signals may affect improperly installed or inadequately shielded electronic syst ems in motor vehicles such as electron ic fuel injection systems, electronic an tiskid (ant ilock) braking systems, electronic speed c ontrol systems, and air b ag systems. For more inform ation, check with the manufacturer, or its represe ntative, of your vehicle or any equipment th at has been added. Only qualified personnel should service the device or install the device in a vehicle. Faulty install ation or service may be dangerous and may invalidate any warranty that may apply to the de vice. Check regularly that all wireless device equipment in your 186 Additional safety information
vehicle is mounted and operating properly. Do not store or carry flammable liqu ids, gases, or explosive materials in the same co mpartment as the device, its parts, or enhanc ements. For veh icles equipped with an air bag, remember that air bags inflate with great force. Do not place ob jects, including installed or portable wireless equipmen t in the area over the air bag or in the air bag deployment area. If in- vehicle wirele ss equipment is improperly inst alled and the air bag inflates, serious injur y could result. Using your device while flying in ai rcraft is prohibited. Switch off your d evice before boarding an aircraft. The use of wireless teledevices in an aircraft may be dangerous to the operation of the aircraft, disrupt the wi reless telephone network, and may be illegal. Potentially explosive environments Switch of f your de vice wh en in any area with a potentially explosiv e atmosphere, and obey all signs and instructions. Potentially explosive atmospheres include areas where you would normally be advised to turn off y our vehicle engine . Sparks in such areas could cause an explosion or fire resulting in bodily injury or even death. Switc h off the device at refuelling points such as near gas pumps at service stations . Observe restrictions on the use of radio equipm ent in fuel de pots, storage , and distribution areas; ch emical plants; or where blasting operations are in progress. Area s with a potentially explo sive atmosph ere are often, but not always, clearly marked. They include below deck on boats, chemical transfer or storage facil ities and areas where the air contains chemicals or particles such as grain, dust, or metal powders. You should check with th e manufacturers of vehicl es using liquefied petroleum gas (such as propane or butane) to determine if this device can be safel y used in their vic inity. Emergency calls Important: This device operates using radio signals, wireless networks, landline networks, and user-programmed function s. If your device supports voic e calls over th e internet (internet calls), activate b oth the interne t calls and th e cellular phone. The device wi ll attempt to make emergency calls over both the cellular networks an d through your interne t call provider if both are activated. Connections in all conditions cannot be guar anteed . You shou ld ne ver rely solely on any wireless device for esse ntial communications lik e medical emergencies. To make an emergency call: 187 Additional safety information
1. If the device is not on, switch it on. Check f or adequate signa l strength. Dependin g on your device , you ma y also ne ed to com plete the following: â Insert a SIM card if your device uses one. â Remove certain c all restrictions you have activa ted i n your dev ice. â Change your profile from offline or flight profile mode to an active profile. 2. Press the end ke y as many times as ne eded to clear the display and ready th e device for c alls. 3. Enter th e official emerge ncy numb er for your present location. E mergency numbers vary by location. 4. Press the call key. When making an emergen cy call, giv e all the necessary information as accurately as possible. Your wireless device ma y be the only means of communication at the scene of an accident. Do not end the call until given p ermission to do so. CERTIFICATION INFORMATION (SAR) This mobi le device meets g uidel ines f or exposure to radio waves. Your mobile device is a radio transmitter and receiver. It is designed not t o exceed the limits for exposure to radio waves recommended by international guid elines. These guidelines were developed by the in dependent scientific organisation ICNIRP and include safety margins designed to assure the pr otection of all persons, regardless of age and heal th. The exposure guidelines for mobile de vices employ a unit of measu rement known as the Specific Absorption Rate or SAR. The SAR limit stated in the ICNIRP guidelines is 2.0 watts/k ilogram (W/kg) averaged over 10 grams of tissue. Tests for SAR are conducted using standard ope rating positions wit h the device transmitting at its highest certified power level in all tested frequency bands. The a ctual SAR level of an operating device can be below the maximum value because the devic e is designed to use only the powe r required to reac h the network. That amount changes depending on a number of factors such as how close you are to a network base station. The highest SAR value und er the ICNIRP guidelines for use of the device at the ear is 1.17 W/ kg. Use of device accesso ries and enh ancements may result in di fferent SAR va lues. SAR v alues ma y vary depending on n ational repo rting and testing requirements and the netw ork band . Additional SAR 188 Additional safety information
information may be provided under product information at www.nokia .com. Your mobile device is al so designed to meet the requirements for exposure to radio waves established by the Fe deral Communications Commission (USA) and Industry Canada. These requirements set a SAR limit of 1.6 W/kg averaged over one gram of tissue . The highest SAR value reported under this standard during product certification for u se at the ear is 1.42 W/kg and when properly worn on the body is 1 .10 W/kg. 189 Additional safety information
Index Symbols/Numerics 1-touch di aling 131 A access codes 21 access points 41, 170 groups 170 accessories See enhancem ents active standby mode 51, 161 active toolbar 81 in camera 79 in Photos 91 address book See contacts alarm clock 147 alarm, calendar note 148 albums, media 91 anniversary notes 147 answering calls 130 antennas 17 application manager 153 applications 153 updating 20 assisted GPS (A -GPS) 52 attachments 120, 122 audio messages 118 audio themes 49 auto-update for time/ date 147 B back cover changing 48 backing up device memory 157 backlight time-out 161 battery power saver setting 161 saving power 22 birthday notes 147 blogs 35 Bluetooth conne ctivity blocking devices 46 device address 44 device visibility 43 low memory 45 pairing devices 4 5 receiving data 4 5 security 44 sending data 44 settings 43 switching on/off 4 3 bookmarks 36 bright ness, dis play 161 browser bookmarks 36 browsing pages 33, 35 cache memory 37 downloads 36 security 38 settings 38 widgets 35 C cable connection 46 cache memory 37 calculator 153 calendar 147 call log 137 call waiting 131 calls 129 answering 130 conference 130 duration of 137 internet calls 139 options during 129 recording 146 rejecting 130 190 Index
settings 166 camer a colour 87 flash 82 image quality 86 imaging mode 80 indicators 78 lighting 87 location information 81 options 81 scenes 82 self-timer 83 sequence mode 82 settings 86 video mode 85 video quality 87 cell broa dcast messages 116 certificates 164 character encoding 118 chart s spreadsheet 150 clipboard, copying to 118 clock 5 1, 147 comput er conn ection s 47 See also data connections conference calls 130 configu rati on See settings connection manager 42 contacts copying 142 default information 141 deleting 141 editing 141 groups 143 images in 141 names an d numbers 141 ringing tones 142 saving 141 sending 141 synchronising 158 voice tags 141 converter 151 copying text to clipboard 118 copyright prot ection 14 5 currency convert er 151 D data connections cable 46 device manager 159 PC connectivity 4 7 synchronisation 158 date and time 147 declining calls 130 device manager 159 dialled numbers 136 dismissing calls 130 display setti ngs 161 DLNA 100 documen t applica tions 150 downloads 36 DRM (digital r ights management) 145 duration of calls 137 E e-mail messages 121 end all calls option 131 enhancement setti ngs 162 Excel, Microsoft 150 F factory settings, restoring 166 feeds, news 35 file manager 157 Flash Player 145 FM radio 73 FM transmitter 69 playing songs 6 9 settings 70 font settings 161 G gallery sounds 98 191 Index
streaming links 99 games 110 general information 19 GPS position requests 54 GPS (Global Posit ioning System) 52 grid view of menus 51 H headset 30 help appli cation 19 home network 6 6, 100 copying files 103 sharing content 102 home synchroni sation incoming files 104 setting up 103 settings 104 HSDPA ( high-sp eed down link packet ac cess) 32 I IAPs (internet access points) 41 images editing 94 printing 95, 96 sharing online 96 inbox, message 120 indicators and icons 26 installation of applications 154 internet call se rvices managing 140 internet calls 139 activating 139 blocking contacts 140 making 139 settings 140 internet connection 33 See also browser interne t radio favourites 76 listening 75 settings 77 station directory 77 J J2ME Java application support 153 Java scripts/ applications 153 K keyguard 28, 164 keypad 28, 164 L landmarks 54 language settings 162 licences 145 light settings 161 list view of menus 51 location informatio n 52 lock code 21 locking keypad 164 locking keypad 28 loudspeak er 31 M mailbox e-mail 121 video 130 voice 130 main menu 5 1 Maps 57 media Flash Player 145 music player 64 radio 73 RealPlayer 144 streaming 144 voice recorder 146 meeting note s 147 meetin gs, setting up 147 memo notes 147, 151 memory clearing 23 192 Index
web cache 37 message reader 121 selecting voice 159 messages e-mail 121 folders for 116 icon for incoming 120 multimedia 120 settings 123 voice 130 Mini Map 35 MMS (multimedia message service) 11 8, 120 multimedia menu 2 9 multimedia messages 118, 120 music player 64 playlists 65 transferring music 67 muting soun d 130 my numbers 141 N N-Gage 110 settings 114 N-Gage views 110 Navi wheel 28 navigation tools 5 2 network settings 1 68 news feeds 35 notes 151 O offline mode 31 one-touch dial ing 131 operator logo 162 options menu for calls 129 outbox, me ssage 116 P packet data connection access point settings 171 counters 137 settings 173 page overview 35 PDF reader 15 1 personal cer tificates 164 personalisati on 48, 16 1 phonebook See contacts photog raphs See camera Photos active toolbar 85 organising files 90 photos editing 94 file details 90 red-eye 94 tags 91 viewing 89 PictBridge 95 PIN code 21 PIN2 c ode 21 playing messages 121 podcasting directories 72 downloads 72 playing 73 searching 71 settings 70 positioning info rmation 52 positioning set tings 166 power saver 161 PowerPoint , Microsoft 150 predictive text entry mode 117 presentations multimedia 150 presentations, multimedia 99 , 120 printing images 95 profiles offline restrictions 31 proxy settings 171 PUK codes 21 punctuation, text entry 118 193 Index
Q Quickmanager 151 Quickpoint 150 Quickshe et 150 Quickword 150 R Radio settings 75 radio 73 RBDS (Radio Broadcast Data System) 73 RDS (Radio Data System) 73 RealPlayer 144 recordin g calls 146 sounds 146 recording video clips 8 5 red-eye remo val 94 redial feature 167 rejectin g calls 130 remote mailbox 121 remote SIM mode 46 ringing tones 49, 50 roaming 168 S scenes, image and video 82 screen settin gs 161 scroll key 28 security certificat es 164 web browser 38 WEP 172 WPA 172 security code 21 security modu le 166 self-ti mer, camera 83 sensor settings 163 sent mess ages f older 116 service commands 116 service messages 121 setting wizard 24 settings access point name control 174 access points 170 applications 174 Bluetooth conn ectivity 43 call barring 168 call divert 168 calls 1 66 camera 86 certificat es 164 configuration 174 display 161 FM radio 75 FM transmitter 70 home network 101 internet calls 140 internet radio 77 language 162 Navi wheel 163 network 168 packet dat a 173 packet da ta access points 171 personalisation 161 podcasting 70 positioning 166 RealPlayer 145 SIP 174 standby 161 tv-out 162 Video centre 108 video sharing 134 web browser 38 WLAN 173 WLAN internet access points 172 shared video 134 shooting modes, camera 82 signature, digital 165 SIM card messages 123 SIM card security 163 SIP 174 slide sho w 92 194 Index
SMS (short message service) 11 8 software ap pl ications 153 software update 20 songs 6 4 sounds 49 speaker phone 31 special characters, text entry 118 Speech 159 standby mode 5 1, 161 streaming li nks 9 9 streaming media 144 Symbian applications 153 synchronisation settings 104 synchronisation of data 158 T text ent ry 11 7 text messages receiving and reading 120 replying to 120 sending 118 settings 124 SIM messages 123 themes 4 8 time and date 147 time zone sett ings 147 time-ou t for bac klight 161 tones 49 ring settings 50 settings 161 toolbar 79, 9 1 transferring data 24 transferr ing music 67 troubles hooting 175 trust settings 165 TV configuration 162 tv-out mode 92 U unlocking keypad 28, 164 UPIN code 21 UPnP (Univers al Plug and P lay architecture) 100 UPUK code 21 USB cable connection 46 useful information 19 V video call s 132, 134 options during 133 Video Centre 106 Video centre downloading 106 viewing 106 video clips shared 134 video settings 87 Visual Radio 73 voice applications 157 voice calls See calls voice commands 13 1, 157 voice recorder 14 6 volume controls 31 W wallpaper 48 web conne ction 33 web logs 35 week settings, calendar 148 welcome 24 welcome note 1 61 WEP 172 widgets 35 wireless LAN (WLAN) 40 wireless LAN settings 173 Word, Micros oft 1 50 world clock 147 WPA 172 wrist strap 17 Z zip manager 152 zooming 80, 85 195 Index